Historical Tripos, Part II, 2004: Books recommended

The following is a list of papers available for the Historical Tripos 2004. The full list of requirementsmay be found in the University’s ‘Guide to Courses’ for 2003–2004 but, in summary, candidates takethe Special Subject (two papers, one on sources and the other an essay paper), Historical Argument andPractice (paper 30), and two other papers (one of which may be substituted by a dissertation on anysubject that is approved by the Faculty). Guidelines on dissertations may be obtained from the FacultyGeneral Enquiry Office. Candidates should note that their choice of papers in Part I may affect theirfreedom of choice in Part II, and this matter must be discussed with their Directors of Studies.

The following is a list of papers and relevant books for the Special Subjects (papers 1 and 2), set papers(3–5), and those papers specified from time to time.

Papers 1 and 2 – Special Subjects (listed from page 72 onwards)

A Power and dependence: modes of control in the Roman household and society, c 50BC to c AD300

B The Norman Conquest of BritainC Atlantic encounters in the age of ColumbusD No subject specifiedE Oliver Cromwell and his critics, 1599–1698F No subject specified G Woodrow Wilson and the First World War 1914–1920H Culture wars in mid-Victorian England, 1848–1859I No subject specifiedJ No subject specified K Richard Wagner and German historyL Churchill, Roosevelt, Stalin and the ‘Grand Alliance’, 1940–1945M TE Lawrence and Gertrude Bell: Britain and the Arabs 1914–1922N Uhuru na Kenyatta: Mau Mau and independence in Kenya, 1942–1966O The political economy of Thatcherism, 1974–90P Economic and Social History of the Third ReichQ No subject specified

Set Papers

3 History of Political Thought to c.17004 History of Political Thought from c.1700 to c.18905 Political Philosophy and the History of Political Thought since c.1890

Specified subjects:

6 Japan and the West: development contrasts7 The rise of the secret world: Governments and Intelligence communities since c.19008 Sieyes, Robespierre and political thought in the age of the French Revolution9 The Near East in the age of Justinian and Muhammad, AD 527–70010 No subject specified11 No subject specified12 Transformation of the Roman World 13 Death in the Middle Ages, c.1050-c.155014 The Vikings in Europe, c.800–1100 15 No subject specified16 Islamic Spain and North Africa, 711–161017 Governance and community in England, 1550–180018 The cultural history of early modern cities: 1450–178919 The politics of gender: Britain and Ireland 1790–199020 European Fascism, 1919 to the Present

£5.00

21 The nationalization of culture in Britain since 180022 No subject specified23 No subject specified24 Culture and identity in Britain’s long eighteenth century25 The history of Africa from 1800 to the present day26 The history of the Indian sub-continent from the late eighteenth century to the present day27 The rise and fall of segregation in the American South28 This history of Latin America in the colonial period c.1500–183029 The British Empire and the Commonwealth from 1780 to the present day

Set Paper

30 Historical Argument and PracticeInformation and suggested readings will be provided by Faculty lecturers and by Directors ofStudies.

The Faculty Board of History publishes the following list of books as recommended reading for thepapers in Part II of the Tripos. The only prescribed works are those listed as ‘For Study’.

PAPER 3. HISTORY OF POLITICAL THOUGHT TO c.1700

‘A’ TopicsA1 PlatoA2 AristotleA3 CiceroA4 AugustineA5 AquinasA6 DanteA7 Marsilius of PaduaA8 MachiavelliA9 MoreA10 BodinA11 HookerA12 GrotiusA13 HobbesA14 SpinozaA15 Locke

‘B’ TopicsB16 Greek Democracy and its CriticsB17 SlaveryB18 Early Christian ThoughtB19 Political Thought and Philosophy in the 12th CenturyB20 Roman Law and Political ThoughtB21 Papalism and the Origins of ConciliarismB22 Renaissance Humanism and Political ThoughtB23 Political Obedience and Resistance in the ReformationB24 The Second ScholasticB25 Reason of StateB26 Rights and Natural JurisprudenceB27 Libertines and JansenistsB28 Early Modern Theories of KingshipB29 Political and Religious Thought in the English Civil WarB30 English Republicanism

Further details of recommended editions to be used and of secondary literature to be consulted can beobtained from the Faculty Enquiry Office.

2

PAPER 4. HISTORY OF POLITICAL THOUGHT FROM c. 1700 TO c. 1890

‘A’ TopicsA1 VicoA2 MontesquieuA3 HumeA4 RousseauA5 SmithA6 BurkeA7 WollstonecraftA8 KantA9 BenthamA10 ConstantA11 HegelA12 TocquevilleA13 John Stuart MillA14 Marx

‘B’ TopicsB15 Enlightenment and its CriticsB16 Commercial Society and the Ambiguities of CivilisationB17 Reform and Politics in the Ancien RegimeB18 Political Thought of the American RevolutionB19 Political Thought of the French RevolutionB20 Dissent and the Politics of Rights in Late 18th-century BritainB21 German Political Thought 1780–1810B22 19th-century British Social CriticismB23 Classical Political Economy and its CriticsB24 Socialism before 1848B25 Left-Hegelianism and the Development of Marxian ThoughtB26 Social Science and Political ThoughtB27 Individualism, Democracy, Representative GovernmentB28 British Historians on Liberty and the StateB29 Gender and Political Thought in the 18th and 19th CenturiesB30 Peace, Empire and the Principle of Nationality

Further details of recommended editions to be used and of secondary literature to be consulted can beobtained from the Faculty Enquiry Office.

PAPER 5. POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY AND THE HISTORY OF POLITICAL THOUGHT SINCE c. 1890

‘A’ TopicsA1 NietzscheA2 SidgwickA3 EngelsA4 BernsteinA5 SorelA6 WeberA7 LeninA8 LuxemburgA9 LukacsA10 SchmittA11 The Frankfurt SchoolA12 SchumpeterA13 HayekA14 Rawls

3

‘B’ TopicsB15 The Nature of PoliticsB16 The State and SovereigntyB17 International Relations and WarB18 Authority and Political ObligationB19 Democracy and RepresentationB20 RightsB21 UtilitarianismB22 FreedomB23 EqualityB24 GenderB25 Race, Ethnicity, UniversalismB26 Toleration and NeutralityB27 PunishmentB28 PropertyB29 Needs and WelfareB30 Markets

Further details of recommended editions to be used and of secondary literature to be consulted can beobtained from the Faculty Enquiry Office.

PAPER 6. JAPAN AND THE WEST: DEVELOPMENT CONTRASTS

Social, cultural and economic aspects of Japanese development will be studied. The time-setting isthe period between the onset of modernisation in 1868 and the achievement of economic hegemony inrecent decades. The aim is to test the ‘‘exceptionalism’’ of the Japanese performance: to what extenthas this Asian state created a unique form of capitalist society? How similar is it to other forms? Howdifferent is the Japanese approach to work, to education, to the state, to the individual? The compara-tor, ‘‘the West’’, is primarily an amalgam of British, American and European experience.

Teaching materials will include videotape evidence and some microfilm of original sources [inEnglish].

*Introductory readingFor reference

G. C. Allen, Japanese Industry, its Recent Development (1939)H. Bix, Emperor Hirohito (2000)

*R. Buckley, Japan Today (1990)Cambridge History of Japan, Vols 5 & 6, The Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (eds. M. B.

Jansen & P. Duus, 1988)A. M. Craig (ed.), Japan; A Comparative View (1978)P. Duus, The Rise of Modern Japan (1976)

*W. Emmott, The Sun Also Sets (1989)F. Gibney, Japan, the Fragile Superpower (1985)W. W. Lockwood (ed.), The State and Economic Enterprise in Japan (1965)T. Ogura, Agricultural Development in Modern Japan (1963)

*E. O. Reischauer, The Japanese Today (1988)E. O. Reischauer & A. M. Craig, Japan: Tradition and Transformation (1978)H. Rosovsky, Capital Formation in Japan, 1868–1941 (1961)E. B. Schumpeter, The Industrialization of Japan and Manchukuo (1940)

*R. Storry, A History of Modern Japan (1979)*K. van Wolferen, The Enigma of Japanese Power (1989)

E. Wilkinson, Japan and the West (1990)

The Economic Background 1868–1945R. P. Dore & R. Sinha, Japan and the World Depression, Then and Now (1987)R. Goldsmith, The Financial Development of Japan, 1868–1977 (1983)

*A. C. Kelley & J. G. Williamson, Lessons from Japanese Economic Development (1974)L. Klein & Ohkawa (eds.), Economic Growth: Japanese Experience since the Meiji Era (1968)

4

T. Nakamura, Economic Growth in Pre-war Japan (1971)K. Ohkawa et al., The Growth Rate of the Japanese Economy since 1868 (1957)K. Ohkawa & H. Rosovsky, Japanese Economic Growth: Trend Acceleration in the Twentieth

Century (1973)K. Ohkawa & M. Shinohara, Patterns of Japanese Economic Development (1979)T. C. Smith, The Agrarian Origins of Modern Japan (1979)T. C. Smith, Political Change and Industrial Development in Japan (1955)I. Taeuber, The Population of Japan (from the Beginning to 1955) (1957)S. Tobata, The Modernization of Japan, I (1966)W. D. Wray, Managing Industrial Enterprise; Cases from Japan’s Pre-war Experience (1989)K. Yoshihara, Japanese Economic Development (1979)

Social and Cultural AspectsR. Clark, The Japanese Company (1979)G. L. Curtis, The Japanese Way of Politics, 1946–86 (1988)T. Doi, The Anatomy of Dependence (1971)

*R. P. Dore, Aspects of Social Change in Japan (1967)R. P. Dore, City Life in Japan (1974)R. P. Dore, Shinohata: A Portrait of a Japanese Village (1978)I. Daichi, The Culture of the Meiji Period (1985)G. Fodella, Social Structure and Economic Dynamics in Japan (1975)W. M. Fruin, Kikkoman, Company, Clan and Community (1983)T. Fukutake, Japanese Society Today (1982)T. Fukutake, The Japanese Social Structure, Its Evolution in the Modern Century (1982)H. Hardacre, Shinto and the State, 1868–1988 (1989)E. James & G. Benjamin, Public Policy and Private Education in Japan (1988)M. B. Jansen, Changing Japanese Attitudes towards Modernization (1965)S. Kamata, Japan in the Passing Lane (1984)

*M. Morishima, Why has Japan Succeeded? (1982)C. Nakane, Japanese Society (1970)H. Passin, Society and Education in Japan (1965)H. Patrick, Japanese Industrialization and its Social Consequences (1976)I. Reader, Religion in Contemporary Japan (1991)T. Rohlen, Japan’s High Schools (1983)B. Smith, Japan: A History in Art (1964)S. Tsurumi, A Cultural History of Post-War Japan: 1945–80 (1987)E. F. Vogel, Japan’s New Middle Class: The Salary Man and His Family (1971)M. White, The Japanese Educational Challenge, A Commitment to Children (1987)C. Yanaga, Big Business in Japanese Politics (1968)

Western Contacts, Contrasts and ParallelsG. C. Allen & A. G. Donnithorne, Western Enterprise and Far Eastern Development (1954)M. Anchordoguy, Computers Inc: Japan’s Challenge to IBM (1989)C. Black et al., The Modernisation of Japan and Russia: A Comparative Study (1975)M. Conte-Helm, The Japanese and Europe (1996)H. Cortazzi, Victorians in Japan (1985)R. P. Dore, British Factory, Japanese Factory (1973)G. Fodella, Japan’s Economy in Comparative Perspective (1983)K. Hayashi, The US–Japanese Economic Relationship (1989)H. R. & E. G. Heller, Japanese Investment in the USA (1974)S. K. Johnson, The Japanese through American Eyes (1993)K. Kojima, Japan and the New World Economic Order (1977)J. R. Lincoln & A. L. Kalleberg, Culture, Control and Commitment: Japan and the USA

(1990)T. K. McCraw (ed.), America versus Japan: A Comparative Study (1986)A. Maddison, Economic Growth in the West (1964)A. Maddison, Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (1969)T. Pepper & M. E. Janow, The Competition: Dealing with Japan (1985)

*E. O. Reischauer, The US and Japan (1970)

5

J. Shoven, Government Policy towards Industry in the US and Japan (1988)T. Yuzawa & N. Udagawa (eds.), Foreign Business in Japan (1990)D. H. Whittaker, Managing Innovation, A Study of British and Japanese Factories (1990)

Postwar DevelopmentsG. C. Allen, Japan as a Market and Source of Supply, 1945–65 (1967)S. Broadbridge, Industrial Dualism in Japan (1966)M. A. Cusumano, The Japanese Automobile Industry: Technology and management at Nissan

and Toyota (1985)J. B. Cohen, Japan’s Postwar Economy (1960)R. P. Dore, Land Reform in Japan (1959)J. Dower, Embracing Defeat: Japan in the Aftermath of WWII (1999)S. Garon, The State and Labour in Modern Japan (1987)C. Johnson, MITI and the Japanese Miracle: the Growth of Industrial Policy 1925–75 (1982)

*T. Nakamura, The Postwar Japanese Economy; Development and Structure (1981)H. Patrick & H. Rosovsky, Asia’s New Giant: How the Japanese Economy Works (1976)K. Sato & Y. Hoshino, The Anatomy of Japanese Business (1984)P. Tasker, Inside Japan; Wealth, Work and Power in the New Japanese Empire (1987)K. Yoshihara, Sogo Shosha: The Vanguard of the Japanese Economy (1982)M. Y. Yoshino, Japan’s Multinational Enterprises (1976)H. Wakefield, New Paths for Japan (1948)

PAPER 7. THE RISE OF THE SECRET WORLD: GOVERNMENTS AND INTELLIGENCECOMMUNITIES SINCE C1900

Recent research (much of it published only within recent years) has helped to rescue secret intelli-gence from the fantasy world of James Bond and to document for the first time its major role in modernpolitical history and international relations. This specified subject examines the growth of modem intel-ligence communities; the intelligence they have provided; their use and abuse by governments; and theirinfluence on policy and events.

There is an inevitable overlap between the categories listed below; for example, the section onULTRA and MAGIC contains a number of books on British intelligence in the Second WorldWar

GeneralH. Keith Melton, Ultimate Spy (London, 2002)Intelligence and National Security (quarterly journal first published in 1986)Jeffrey Richelson, A Century of Spies (Oxford, 1995)Michael Herman, Intelligence Power in Peace and War (Cambridge, 1996)Michael Herman, Intelligence Services in the Information Age: Theory and Practice (London,

2001)Jeffrey Richelson, Foreign Intelligence Organisations (New York. 1988)Bruce D. Berkowitz and Allan E. Goodman, Best Truth: Intelligence in the Information Age

(London, 2000)Harold Shukman (ed), Agents of Change (London, 2000)Greg Treverton, Reshaping National Intelligence for an Age of Information (Cambridge, 2001)Michael Handel (ed.), Leaders and Intelligence (London, 1989)Walter Laqueur, A World of Secrets: The Uses and Limits of Intelligence (New York, 1987)Glenn Hastedt, Controlling Intelligence (London, 1991)Christopher Andrew and Jeremy Noakes (eds.), Intelligence and International Relations,

1900–1945 (Exeter, 1987)Christopher Andrew and David Dilks (eds.), The Missing Dimension: Governments and

Intelligence Communities in the Twentieth Century (London, 1984)James E. Dillard and Walter T. Hitchcock (eds.), The Intelligence Revolution and Modern Warfare

(Chicago, 1995)Peter Gill, Policing Politics: Security Intelligence and the Liberal Democratic State (London, 1994)Ernest May (ed.), Knowing One’s Enemies: Intelligence Assessment before the Two World Wars

(Princeton, 1986)Martin Alexander (ed), Intelligence Inside Alliances and Coalitions from 1914 to the Cold War

(London, 1998)

6

The Oxford Companion to the Second World War (Oxford, 1995Wesley K. Wark (ed), Spy Fiction, Spy Films and Real Intelligence (London, 1991)Nigel West (ed.), The Faber Book of Espionage (London. 1993)

British IntelligenceChristopher Andrew, Secret Service: The Making of the British intelligence Community (Sceptre

edition) (London, 1993)The Security Service, 1908–1945, with introduction by Christopher Andrew (Kew, 1999)Roy Berkeley, A Spy’ s London: A Walk Book of 136 Sites in Central London Relating to Spies,

Spycatchers and Subversives (New York., 1997)Bernard Porter, Plots and Paranoia: A History of Political Espionage in Britain 1790–1988

(London, 1989)Richard Thurlow, The Secret State: British Internal Security in the Twentieth Century (Oxford.

1994)Alan Judd, The Quest for “C”: Mansfield Cumming and the Making of the British Secret Service

(London, 1999)Andrew Cook, On His Majesty’s Secret Service: Sidney Riley (London, 2002)Gordon Brook-Shepherd, Iron Maze: The Western Secret Services and the Bolsheviks (London,

1998)Antony Best, British Intelligence and the Japanese Challenge in Asia 1914–1941 (London, 2002)Wesley K. Wark, The Ultimate Enemy: British Intelligence and Nazi Germany; 1933–1939

(London, 1985)David Stafford, Churchill and Secret Service (London, 1997)M.R.D. Foot, SOE (London, 1984)M. R. D. Foot, SOE in the Low Countries (London, 2001)William Mackenzie, The Secret History of SOE (London, 2000)J. C. Masterman, The Double-Cross System (New York, 1982)R.V. Jones, Most Secret War (London, 1979)F. H. Hinsley et. al., British Intelligence and the Second World War (4 vols.)(London, 1979–90;

also available in condensed one-volume edition)Sir Michael Howard, British Intelligence in the Second World War, vol. 5: Strategic Deception.

(London, 1990)Michael Smith, New Cloak, Old Dagger: How Britain’s Spies Came in from the Cold (London,

1996)Richard Aldrich (ed.), Espionage, Security and Intelligence in Britain: Documents in

Contemporary History, 1945–1970 (Manchester, 1998)Richard J. Aldrich, The Hidden Hand: Britain, America and Cold War Secret Intelligence

(London, 2001)Peter Hennessy, The Secret State: Whitehall and the Cold War (London, 2002)Tom Bower, The Perfect English Spy: Sir Dick White and the Secret War 1935–1990 (London,

1995)L. Freedman and V. Gambia-Stonehouse, Signals of War: The Falklands Conflict of 1982

(London, 1990)Mark Urban, UK Eyes Alpha: The Inside Story of British Intelligence (London, 1996)Laurence Lustgarten and Ian Leigh, In from the Cold: National Security and ParliamentaryDemocracy (London, 1994)Sir Percy Cradock, Know Your Enemy: How the Joint Intelligence Committee Saw the World

(London: 2002)Intelligence and Security Committee, Annual Reports 1995–(HMSO)Stephen Dorril, MI6: Fifty Years of Special Operations (London, 2000)Richard Tomlinson, The Big Breach (Edinburgh, 2001)

Russian and Soviet IntelligenceChristopher Andrew and Vasili Mitrokhin, The Mitrokhin Archive: The KGB in Europe and the

West (London, 1999)Christopher Andrew and Oleg Gordievsky, KGB: The Inside Story of its Foreign Operations from

Lenin to Gorbachev (Spectre edition) (London, 1991)Amy Knight, The KGB: Police and Politics in the Soviet Union (London. 1990)George Leggett The Cheka: Lenin’s Political Police (Oxford. 1981)Robert Conquest, The Great Terror (revised edition) (London, 1990)

7

J Arch Getty and Oleg V Naumov, The Road to Terror: Stalin and the Self-Destruction of theBolsheviks, 1932–1939 (London, 1999)

Marc Jansen and Nikita Petrov, Stalin’s Loyal Executioner: People’s Commisar Nikolai Ezhov(Stanford, 2002)

Robert Whymant, Stalin’s Spy: Richard Sorge and the Tokyo Espionage Ring (London, 1996)Gabriel Gorodetsky, Grand Delusion: Stalin and the German Invasion of Russia (London, 1999)Amy Knight, Beria (London, 1993)Oleg Kalugin, Spymaster: My 32 years in Intelligence and Espionage against the West (London,

1994)Vitaly Shentalinsky, The KGB’s Literary Archive (London, 1995)Michael Scammell (ed), The Solzhenitsyn Files (London, 1995)Boris Morozov (ed), Documents on Soviet Jewish Emigration (London, 1999)Oleg Gordievsky, Next Stop Execution (London, 1995)Christopher Andrew and Oleg Gordievsky (eds.), Instructions from the Centre: Top Secret Files

on KGB Foreign Operations, 1975–1925 (London, 1991)Christopher Andrew and Oleg Gordievsky (eds.), More “Instructions from the Centre”: Top

Secret Files on KGB Global Operations, 1975–1985 (London, 1992)Vasiliy Mitrokhin, KGB Lexicon: The Soviet Intelligence Officer’s Handbook (London, 2002)Ben Fischer, A Cold War Conundrum: The 1983 Soviet War Scare (CIA, 1997)Yevgenia Albats, The KGB and Its Hold On Russia-Past, Present and Future (New York, 1994)Amy Knight, Spies without Cloaks: The KGB’s Successors (London, 1996)

Soviet Espionage in Britain: The Cambridge “Magnificent Five”Kim Philby, My Silent War (London, 1969)Genrikh Borovik, The Philby Files (London, 1994)Yuri Modin, My Five Cambridge Friends (London, 1994)Nigel West and Oleg Tsarev, The Crown Jewels: The British Secrets at the Heart of the KGB

Archives (1998)John Costello and Oleg Tsarev, Deadly Illusions (London, 1993)Rufina Philby et al, The Private Life of Kim Philby The Moscow Years (London, 1999)Miranda Carter, Anthony Blunt (London, 2001)

Soviet Espionage in the USAAllen Weinstein and Alexander Vassiliev, the Haunted Wood: Soviet Espionage in America –

The Stalin Era (New York, 1999)Joseph Albright and Marcia Kunstel, Bombshell: the Secret Story of America’s Unknown Atomic

Spy Conspiracy (New York, 1997)Harvey Klehr, John Earl Haynes and Fridrick Igorevich Firsov, The Secret World of American

Communism (London, 1995)Harvey Klehr, John Earl Haynes and Fridrick Igorevich Firsov. The Soviet World of American

Communism (London, 1998)Allen Weinstein, Perjury: The Hiss-Chambers Case revised edition (New York, 1997)Pete Earley, Confessions of a Spy: The Real Story of Aldrich .4mes (London, 1997)David Vise, Espionage and the Roots of the Cold War (London, 2002)David McKnight, Espionage and the Roots of the Cold War (London, 2002)

US IntelligenceChristopher Andrew, For the President’s Eyes Only: Secret Intelligence and the American

Presidency from Washington to Bush (London, 1995)Roberta Wohlstetter, Pearl Harbor: Warning and Decision (Stanford, CA, 1962)Joseph Persico, Roosevelt’s Secret War (New York, 2001)George C. Chalou (ed.), The Secrets War: The Office of Strategic Services in World War Two

(Washington, 1992)H. Bradford Westerfield (ed.), Inside CIA’s Private World Declassified Articles From the

Agency’s Internal Journal (New Haven, 1998)Robin Winks. Cloak and Gown: Scholars in the Secret War (New York, 1 987)Rhodri Jeffreys-Jones, The CIA and American Democracy (New Haven, 1989)John Ranelagh, The Agency: The Rise and Decline of the CIA (London, 1988)Christopher Andrew and Rhodri Jeffreys-Jones (eds.), Eternal Vigilance? Fifty Years of the CIA

(London, 1997)

8

Jeffrey Richelson, The US Intelligence Community (London, 1988)Evan Thomas, The Very Best Men. Four Who Dared: The Early Years of the CIA (London, 1995)Peter Grose, Gentleman Spy: The Life of Allen Dulles (London, 1995)Gregory Treverton, Covert Action (London, 1989)Fabian Escalante (ed), CIA Targets Fidel: Secret CIA Inspector’s Report on Plots to Assassinate

Fidel Castro (New York. 1999)Peter Kornbluh (ed), Bay of Pigs Declassified: The Secret CIA Report on the Invasion of Cuba

(New York. 1998)Athan Theoharis (ed.), From the Secret Files of J Edgar Hoover (Chicago, 1991)Ronnie B. Ford, Tet 1968: Understanding the Surprise (London, 1995)Tom Mangold, Cold Warrior: James Jesus Angleton, the CIA ‘s Master Spy Hunter (London,

1991)J.J. Wirtz, The Tet Offensive: Intelligence Failure in War (New York, 1991)Stansfield Turner, Terrorism and Democracy (Boston, MA, 1991)Peter Kornbluh and Malcolm Byrne (eds.), The Iran-Contra Scandal: The Declassified History

(Washington, D.C., 1993)Robert M. Gates, In From The Shadows (New York, 1997)Ben Fischer (ed.), At Cold War’s End: US Intelligence on the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe,

1989–91 (CIA, 1999)Preparing for the 21st Century: An Appraisal of US Intelligence. Report of the [Aspin/Brown]

Commission on the Roles and Capabilities of the U.S. Intelligence Community (Washington,1996)

Loch Johnson, Secret Agencies: US Intelligence in a Hostile World (Yale, 1999)Bob Woodward, Bush at War (London, 2002)

Cuban Missile CrisisAlexander Fursenko and Timothy Naftali, One Hell of a Gamble: Khrushchev Kennedy, Castro

and the Cuban Missile Crisis, 1958–1964 (London, 1997)James G. Blight and David A. Welch (eds.), Intelligence and the Cuban Missile Crisis (London,

1998)CIA Documents on the Cuban Missile Crisis, 1962 (Washington. D C. 1993)Dino Brugioni, Eyeball to Eyeball: The Inside Story of the Cuban Missile Crisis (New York,

1991)Jerrold L. Schecter and Peter S. Deriabin, The Spy Who Saved The World (Oxford, 1992)

Imagery Intelligence (IMINT)Michael Beschloss, Mayday: Eisenhower, Khrushchev and the U–2 Affair (London, 1986)Paul Lashmar, Spy Flights of the Cold War (London, 1996)Jeffrey Richelson, America’s Space Sentinels: DSP Satellites and National Security (Kansas,

1999)Kevin D. Ruffner (ed.), CORONA: America’s First Satellite Program (Washington, D.C., 1995)Dwayne A. Day, John M. Logsdon and Brian Latell (eds.). Eye in the Sky: The Story of the Corona

Spy Satellites (Washington, D.C., 1998)William F. Burrows. Deep Black: Space Espionage and National Security (New York, 1992)

Signals Intelligence (SIGINT)David Kahn, The Code breakers (London, 1974)Patrick Beesley, Room 40 (London, 1982)George A. Brownell, The Origins and Development of the National Security Agency (Laguna

Hills, California, 1981)Christopher Andrew (ed.), Codebreaking and Signals Intelligence (London, 1986)Matthew M. Aid and Cees Wiebes (eds), Secrets of Signals Intelligence during the Cold War and

Beyond (London, 2001)Jeffrey Richelson and Desmond Ball, The Ties that Bind (London, 1990)Nicky Hagen, Secret Power (Nelson, New Zealand, 1996)

ULTRA and MAGICF. H. Hinsley and Alan Stripp (eds.), Codebreakers: The Inside Story of Bletchley Park (Oxford,

1993)Sebag-Montefiore, Hugh, Enigma: The Battle for the Code (London, 2000)

9

Michael Smith, Station X (London, 1998)David Kahn, Seizing the Enigma (London, 1992)Ralph Bennett, Intelligence Investigations: How Ultra Changes History (London, 1996)Bradley F. Smith, The Ultra-Magic Deals and the Most Secret Special Relationship, 1940–1948

(Novato, CA., 1993)David Alvarez (ed), Allied and Axis Signals Intelligence in World War II (London, 1999)Stephen Budiansky, The Battle of Wits: The Complete Story of Codebreaking in World War II

(New York, 2000)Michael Smith and Ralph Erskine (eds), Action This Day (London, 2001)John Prados, Combined Fleet Decoded: The Secret History of American Intelligence and the

Japanese Navy in World War II (New York, 1995)Edward J. Drea, MacArthur’s ULTRA: Codebreaking and the War Against Japan, 1942–1945

(Kansas, 1992)Donald 1. Sexton, Signals Intelligence in World War Two: A Research Guide (Westport, CT,

1996)

VENONARobert L. Benson and Michael Warner (eds.), VENONA: Soviet Espionage and the American

Response, 1939–1957 (Washington, 1996)John Earl Haynes and Harvey Klehr, VENONA: Decoding Soviet Espionage in America (New

Haven, 1999)Nigel West, Venona:The Greatest Secret of the Cold War (London. 1999)Daniel Patrick Moynihan. Secrecy (London, 1998)Desmond Ball and David Homer, Breaking the Codes (St Leonard’s, NSW, 1998)

FranceMartyn Cornick and Peter Morris, The French Secret Services (Oxford, 1995)Douglas Porch, The French Secret Services (London, 1995)Annie Kriegel and Stéphane Courtois, Eugen Fried: le grand secret du PCF (Paris, 1997)Peter Jackson, France and the German Menace: Intelligence and Policy-Making, 1933–39

(Oxford, 2000)Thierrv Wolton, La France sous influence: Paris-Moscow, 30 ans de relations secrètes (Paris,

1998)Admiral Pierre Lacoste, Un amiral au secret (Paris, 1997)Roger Faligot and Pascal Krop, DST: Police Secrète (Paris, 1999)J-M. Pontaut and Jérôme Dupuis, Les oreilles du Président (Paris. 1996)Pierre Lethier, Argent Secret (Paris, 2001)

GermanyEric Johnson, The Nazi Terror: Gestapo, Jews and Ordinary Germans (London, 2000)George C. Browder, Foundations of the Nazi Police State (Kansas, 1991)Robert Gellately The Gestapo and German Society (Oxford, 1991)Richard Breitman, The Architect of Genocide: Himmler and the Final Solution (London, 1991)David Kahn, Hitler’s Spies (New York, 1985)R. L. Koehl, The Black Corps: The Structure and Power Struggles of the Nazi SS (Madison.

Wisconsin, 1983)Bernd Wegner, The Waffen SS Oxford, 1990)John and Jack Koehler, Stasi: The Untold Story of East German Secret Police (London, 1999)David Childs and Richard Popplewell, The Stasi: The East German Intelligence and Security

Service (London, 1996)Markus Wolf (with Anne McElvoy), Man without a Face: The Autobiography of Communism’s

Greatest Spymaster (London. 1997)Werner Stiller, Beyond the Wall: Memoirs of an East and West German Spy (London, 1992)Timothy Garton Ash, The File

Israel and the Middle EastYigal Sheffy, British Military Intelligence in the Palestine Campaign (London, 1998)Ian Black and Benny Morris, Israel’s Secret Wars: A History of Israel’s Intelligence Services

(London, 1992)

10

Samuel M Katz, Soldier Spies: Israeli Military Intelligence (Novato, CA)Haggai Eshed, Reuven Shiloah: The Man behind the Mossad (London, 1997)Shabtai Teveth, Ben Gurion’s Spy: The Story of the Political Scandal that Shaped Modern Israel

(New York, 1999)Andrew Rathmell, The Secret War in the Middle East: The Secret Struggle /or Syria (London,

1995)Ronald Payne, Mossad (London, 1990)Gordon Thomas, Gideon’s Spies: The Secret History of Mossad (New York, 1999)

Other TopicsEunan O’Halpin, Defending Ireland (Oxford, 1999)Admiral Fulvio Martini, Nome in Codice: Ulisse (Rome, 1999)J. L. Granatstein and David Stafford, Spy Wars: Espionage and Canada from Gouzenko to

Glasnost (Toronto, 1990)Denis Deletant, Ceausescu and the Securitate: Coercion and Dissent in Romania (London, 1996)George Hodos, Show Trials: Stalinist Purges in Eastern Europe 1948–1954 (Westport, 1988)Richard Popplewell, Intelligence and Imperial Defence: British Intelligence and the Defence of

the Indian Empire, 1904–1924 (London, 1924)Ben Kiernan, The Pol Pot Regime (London, 1996)Nicholas Eflimiades, Chinese Intelligence Operations (London, 1994)Hongda Harry Xu, Laogai – The Chinese Gulag (Boulder, Colorado, 1992)Mohammad Yousaf and Mark Adkin, The Bear Trap: Afghanistan’s Untold Story (London, 1992

TerrorismSee the Part II Secret World ‘Terrorism’ file in the Seeley Library which contains recent articlesand a reading list which includes titles published since this booklist went to print.

Useful Websites include:C IA: http://www.odci.gov/csi GCHQ: http://www.gchq.gov.ukJIC: http://www.open.gov.uk/co/cimrepl.htmMI5: http://www.mi5.gov.ukNRO: http://www.fas.org/pub/gen/fas/irp/nro/index.htmlNSA: http://www.nsa.gov.8080/

PAPER 8. SIEYÈS, ROBESPIERRE AND POLITICAL THOUGHT IN THE AGE OF THEFRENCH REVOLUTION

Before 1789, not many people thought that France would become a republic. For much of the eigh-teenth century, it was usual to think of alternatives to the system of absolute monarchy established inFrance in terms of royal democracy, mixed government, legal despotism or, in the light of the combi-nation of international and domestic pressures to which the French monarchy was exposed, a peculiarlymodern kind of despotism. By 1793, however, France had, unexpectedly, become a republic, one which,its Jacobin leaders claimed, would bring the age of nationalism (as they called it) to an end and, as aresult, secure the principles embodied in the new, republican Declaration of the Rights of Man of 1793.The aim of this paper is to examine the imaginative and conceptual origins of such claims and to placethem in the wider context of eighteenth-century debates about the origins, nature and future of themodern world. It will examine the various ways by which the generation headed by the abbé Sieyès(1748–1836) on the one hand and Maximilien Robespierre (1749–94) on the other came to think aboutthe nature and future of France and its place in the modern world and the various conceptions of a repub-lic to which, it claimed, that future belonged.

The paper will be made up of four main parts. In each of them, the prime concern will be to examinethe connections between the subject-matter of revolutionary debates and earlier or concurrent eigh-teenth-century debates about such questions as sovereignty, war, balance-of-power politics, public opin-ion, public credit, luxury, inequality, trade, empire, slavery, religion, morality and the progress of civil-isation. The first part of the course will focus upon the debate about the nature and future of the Frtenchmonarchy both as the ultimate source of authority and stability at home and as one of the major Europeanpowers in the wake of the Seven Years’ War and the War of American Independence. The second part

11

will centre upon the political thought of the architects of the revolution of 1789, paying particular atten-tion to the debate about the Declaration of the Rights of Man of 1789 and the political thought of theabbé Sieyès. The third part will examine the idea of a republic espoused by Maximilien Robespierre,salience of ancient Greek and Roman themes in France after 1789 and the claims about property, equal-ity and citizenship associated with the Jacobins and sans-culottes between 1793 and 1794. The fourthpart will examine assessments of the failure of the French Revolution, paying particular attention, firstly,to the political, religious and moral concerns of the Coppet Group and the interest of its members (notablyBenjamin Constant and Germaine de Stael) in developments in Germany, Switzerland and Italy in thelate eighteenth centuries and, secondly, to the concerns of critics of the revolutionary regimes, includ-ing Chateaubriand, Gentz, de Maistre and Saint-Simon, during the first two decades of the nineteenthcentury.

Contemporary Texts and Collections of Primary SourcesKeith M. Baker (ed.), The Old Regime and the French Revolution (Chicago, 1987)Joseph Barnave, Power, Property and History, ed. E. Chill (New York, 1971)Paul H. Beik (ed.), The French Revolution (New York, Harper & Row, 1970)Gregory Claeys (ed.) Political Writings of the 1790s, 5 vols. (London, 1995)Condorcet, Selected Writings, ed. K. M. Baker (Indianapolis, 1976)Condorcet, Foundations of Social Choice and Political Theory, ed. Iain McLean and Fiona Hewitt

(Edward Elgar, 1994)Dupont de Nemours, Pierre Samuel. Economic Writings, ed. J. J. McLain (University of Delaware

Press, 1977)Lynn Hunt (ed.), The French Revolution and Human Rights. A brief documentary history (Boston,

1996)Darline Gay Levy, Harriet Branson Applewhite and Mary Durham Johnson (eds.), Women in

Revolutionary Paris 1789–1795. Selected Documents (University of Illinois Press, 1979)Joseph de Maistre, Works, ed. Jack Lively (London, 1965)Pierre Louis Roederer, The Spirit of the Revolution of 1789 and other writings of the revolution-

ary epoch, ed. Murray Forsyth (Scolar Press, 1989)Maximilien Robespierre, Declaration of the Rights of Man and the citizen (1793) [English trans-

lation, c. 1850]– Extracts from a speech made by Maximilien Robertspierre, in the National Convention, the

10th May 1793, on the abuses of antient governments (New York, 1793)– A Report made in the National Convention in the name of the Committee of Public Safety

[English translation, Boston, 1794]– Report to the National Convention of Grance in the name of the Committee of Public Safety

on the political situation of France [English translation, 1794]– Report on the principles of political morality which are to form the basis of the adminis-

tration of the interior concerns of the Republic [Philadelphia, 1794]John Rothney (ed.), The Brittany Affair and the Crisis of the Old Regime (Oxford, 1969)George Rudé (ed.), Robespierre (New York, 1967)E. J. Sieyès, What is the Third Estate?, ed. S. E. FinerC. F. Volney, The RuinsMichael Walzer (ed.), Regicide and Revolution. Speeches at the Trial of Louis XVI (Columbia

U.P. 1992)

Seconary ReadingMiguel Abensour, ‘Saint-Just and the Problem of heroism in the French Revolution’ in Ferenc

Fehér (ed.), The French Revolution and the Birth of Modernity (Berkeley, University ofCalifornia Press, 1990), pp. 133–149

Frances Acomb, Anglophobia in France, 1763–1769 (Duke University Press, 1950)Frances Acomb, Mallet du Pan (1749–1800). A career in political journalism (Duke University

Press, 1973)Joyce Appleby, Liberalism and Republicanism in the Historical Imagination (Harvard, 1992)Harriet B. Applewhite and Darline G. Levy (eds.) , Women and Politics in the Age of the

Democratic Revolution (University of Michigan, 1990)Bronislaw Baczko, Utopian Lights. The Evolution of the Idea of Social Progress (New York,

1989)Bronislaw Baczko, ‘The Social Contract of the French: Sieyès and Rousseau’, Journal of Modern

History, 60 (1988), supplement, pp. 98–125.

12

Keith M. Baker, ‘The early history of the term “social science”’, Annals of Science, 20 (1964),pp. 211–26

K. M. Baker, Condorcet (Chicago, 1975)K. M. Baker, Inventing the French Revolution: Essays on French Political Culture in the

Eighteenth Century (Cambridge, 1990)Frederick C. Beiser, The Fate of Reason. German Philosophy from Kant to Fichte (Harvard, 1987)Frederick C. Beiser, Enlightenment, Revolution and Romanticism. The Genesis of Modern

German Political Thought 1790–1815 (Harvard, 1992)I. Berlin, ‘Montesquieu’ in Isiah Berlin, Against the Current: Essays in the History of Ideas

(Oxford, 1981), pp. 130–161Carol Blum, Rousseau and the Republic of Virtue: The Language of Politics in the French

Revolution (Ithaca, 1986)Noberto Bobbio, The Age of Rights (Polity Press, 1996)Roger Chartier, The Cultural Origins of the French Revolution (Durham and London, 1991)J. C. D. Clark, English Society 1660–1832, 2nd edn. (Cambridge, 2000)Maurice Cranston, Philosophers and Pamphleteers: Political Theorists of the Enlightenment

(Oxford, 1986)Maurice Crosland, The Society of Arcueil. A View of French Science at the time of Napoleon I

(Harvard U. P. 1967)Paul Dukes & John Dunkley (eds.) Culture and Revolution (London, Pinter Publishers, 1990)J. Dybikowski, ‘On burning ground: an examination of the ideas, projects and life of David

Williams’, Studies on Voltaire and the Eighteenth Century, 307 (1993)Harold A. Ellis, ‘Montesquieu’s Modern Politics: The Spirit of the Laws and the Problem of

Modern Monarchy in Old Regime France’, History of Political Thought 10 (1989), 665–700Durand Echeverria, Mirage in the West. A History of the French Image of American Society to

1815 (Princeton, 1957)David V. Erdman, Commerce des Lumières. John Oswald and the British in Paris, 1790–1793

(University of Missouri Press, 1986)Klaus Epstein, The Genesis of German Conservatism (Princeton, 1966)Gilbert Faccarello (ed.), Studies in the History of French Political Economy (Routledge, 1998)Ferenc Feher, The Frozen Revolution: An Essay on Jacobism (Cambridge, 1987)Ferenc Feher (ed.), The French Revolution and the Birth of Modernity (University of California

Press, (1990)Biancamaria Fontana, Benjamin Constant and the Post-Revolutionary Mind (Yale U. P. 1991)Biancamaria Fontana (ed.), The Invention of the Modern Republic (Cambridge, Cambridge

University Press, 1994)Evelyn L. Forget, The Social Economics of Jean-Baptiste Say (Routledge, 1999)Murray Forsyth, Reason and Revolution: The Political Thought of the Abbé Sieyès (Leicester,

1987)Christopher Fox, Roy Porter and Robert Wokler (eds.), Inventing Human Science. Eighteenth-

Century Domains (U. of California Press, 1995)Elizabeth Fox-Genovese, The Origins of Physiocracy: Economic Revolution and Social Order in

Eighteenth-Century France (Ithaca, 1976)Genevière Fraisse, Reason’s Muse. Sexual Difference and the Birth of Democracy (Chicago, 1994)François Furet, Interpreting the French Revolution (Cambridge, 1981)Clarke Garrett, Respectable Folly. Millenarians and the French Revolution in France and

England (John Hopkins, 1975)Azar Gat, The Origins of Military Thought. From the Enlightenment to Clausewitz (Oxford, 1989)Peter Gay, The Party of Humanity: Essays in the French Enlightenment (New York, 1971)Peter Gay, Voltaire’s Politics: The Poet as Realist, 2nd ed. (New Haven, 1988)Nina Rattner Gelbart, Feminine and Opposition Journalism in Old Regime France (University

of California Press, 1987)Charles Coulston Gillispie, Science and Polity in France at the end of the Old Regime (Princeton

1980)Jean Pierre Gross, Fair Shares for All. Jacobin Egalitarianism in Practice (Cambridge, 1997)J. A. W. Gunn, ‘Queen of the World: opinion in the public life of France from the Renaissance

to the Revolution’, Studies on Voltaire and the Eighteenth Century, 328 (1995)Thomas L. Hankins, Science and the Enlightenment (Cambridge, 1985)Brian W. Head, ‘Origins of “La Science Sociale” in France, 1770–1800’, Australian Journal of

French Studies, 19 (1982), pp. 115–32

13

Brian W. Head, Ideology and Social Science. Destutt de Tracy and French Liberalism (Dordrecht,M. Nijhoff, 1985)

Patrice Higonnet, Goodness beyond Virtue. Jacobins during the French Revolution (Harvard,1998)

Albert O. Hirschmann. The Passions and the Interests: Political Arguments for Capitalism beforeIts Triumph (Princeton, 1977)

Albert O. Hirschmann, ‘Rival Views of Market Society’ in Hirschmann, Rival Views of MarketSociety and Other Recent Essays (New York, 1986), pp. 105–41

Stephen Holmes, Benjamin Constant and the Making of Modern Liberalism (Yale U. P. 1984)Istvan Hont-Michael Ignatieff, ‘Needs and Justice in The “Wealth of Nations” in Hont Ignatieff,

Wealth and Virtue: The Shaping of Political Economy in the Scottish Enlightenment(Cambridge, 1983), pp. 1–44

Istvan Hont, ‘The Political Economy of the “Unnatural and Retrograde” Order: Adam Smith andNatural Liberty’, in Marion Barzen (ed.) Französische Revolution und Politische Ökonomie(Trier, 1989), pp. 122–49

Istvan Hont, ‘The Permanent Crisis of Divided Mankind’ in John Dunn (ed.), Crisis of the NationState? (Blackwell, 1995)

E. J. Hundert, The Enlightenment’s Fable. Bernard Mandeville and the Discovery of Society(Cambridge U. P., 1994)

Michael James, ‘Pierre-Louis Roederer, Jean-Baptiste Say and the concept of Industrie’, Historyof Political Economy, 9 (1977), pp. 455–75

Thomas E. Kaiser, ‘Politics and Political Economy in the Thought of the Ideologues’, History ofPolitical Economy, 12 (1980), pp. 141–60

Steven L. Kaplan, Bread, Politics and Political Economy in Reign of Louis XV (The Hague, 1976)Steven L. Kaplan, La Bagarre. Galiani’s ‘Lost’ Parody (The Hague, 1979)Gary Kates, The Cercle Social, the Girondins and the French Revolution (Princeton U. P. 1985)David S. Katz & Richard H. Popkin (eds.), Messianic Revolution. Radical Religious Politics to

the End of the Second Millennium (Penguin Press, 1999)Emmet Kennedy, ‘A Philosophe in the Age of Revolution: Destutt de Tracy and the Origins of

“Ideology”’, Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, 1978Emmet Kennedy, A Cultural History of the French Revolution (Yale U. P. 1989)Nannerl O. Keohane, Philosophy and the State in France: The Renaissance to the Enlightenment

(Princeton, 1980)Reinhart Koselleck, Criticism and Crisis (Brighton, 1987)Isaac Kramnick, Republicanism & Bourgeois Radicalism (Cornell U. P. 1990)Dominick LaCapra & Steven L. Kaplan (eds.), Modern European Intellectual History (Cornell

University Press, 1982)J. A. Leo Lemay (ed.), Deism, Masonry, and the Enlightenment. Essays honouring Alfred Owen

Aldridge (University of Delaware Press, 1987)Darlene Gay Levy, The Ideas and Careers of Simon-Nicolas Henry Linguet (Urbana, 1980)N. Loraux and P. Vidal-Naquet, ‘La formation de l’Athènes bourgeoise: essai d’historiographie

1750–1870’, in R. R. Bolgar (ed.), Classical Influences of Western Thought (Cambridge, 1979)J. Lough, The Philosophes and Post-Revolutionary France (Oxford, 1982)John Lucas (ed.), Writing and Radicalism (Longman, 1996)J. Q. C. Mackrell, The Attack on ‘Feudalism’ in Eighteenth-Century France (London, 1973)Bernard Manin, Principles of Representative Government (Cambridge, 1997)Frank E. Manuel, The Eighteenth Century confronts the Gods (Harvard, 1956)Margherita Marchione, The Adventurous Life of Philip Mazzei (University Press of America, 1995)Kenneth Margerison, ‘P-L. Roederer, the industrial capitalist as revolutionary’, Eighteenth-

Century Studies, 2 (1978), pp. 473–88Kenneth Margerison, P. L. Roederer. Political Thought and Practice during the French

Revolution (Philadelphia, American Philosophical Society, 1983)Kenneth margerison, ‘The Legacy of Social Science: Condorcet, Roederer and the Constitution

of the Year VIII’, Condorcet Studies, ed. David Williams, vol. 2 (1987), pp. 13–30H. T. Mason & W. Doyle (eds.), The Impact of the French Revolution on European Consciousness

(Gloucester, Alan Sutton, 1989Ronald L. Meek, Social Science and the Ignoble Savage (Cambridge, 1976)Arthur M. Melzer, The Natural Goodness of Man: On the System of Rousseau’s Thought

(Chicago, 1990)Simon Meyssonnier, La Balance et l’horloge. La Genèse de la Pensée libérale en France au xviiie

siècle (Paris, 1989)

14

Peter N. Miller, Defining the Common Good. Empire, Religion and Philosophy in Eighteenth-Century Britain (Cambridge, 1994)

Daniel Mornet, Les Origines intellectuelles de la révolution française, 5th edn. (Paris, 1954)Dorinda Outram, The Enlightenment (Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1995)Robert R. Palmer, Catholics and Unbelievers in Eighteenth-Century France (Princeton, 1939)Robert R. Palmer, From Jacobin to LIberal. Marc-Antoine Jullien, 1775–1848 (Princeton, 1993)Harry, C. Payne, The Philosophes and the People (New Haven, 1976)Jean-Claude Perrot, Une Histoire intellectuelle de l’économie politique (Paris, 1992)Jeremy D. Popkin, News and Politics in the Age of Revolution. Jean Luzac’s Gazette de Leyde

(Ithaca, 1989)John Renwick, ‘Marmontel on the Government of Virginia (1793)’, Journal of American Studies,

1 (1967), pp. 181–9John Renwick, ‘Bélisare in South Carolina, 1768’, Journal of American Studies, 4 (1970), pp.

19–38M. Richter, ‘Despotism’ in P. H. Wiener (ed.), Dictionary of the History of Ideas, vol. 2 (New

York, 1973), pp. 1–18James C. Riley, The Seven Years War and the Old Regime in France. The Economic and Financial

Toll (Princeton, 1986)R. B. Rose, Gracchus Babeuf. The First Revolutionary Communist (London, Arnold, 1978)Leonora Cohen Rosenfeld (ed.), Condorcet Studies, vol. 1 (Humanities Press, New Jersey, 1984)L. Rothkrug, Opposition to Louis XIV (Princeton, 1965)Anne Sa’adah, The Shaping of Liberal Politics in Revolutionary France. A Comparative

Perspective (Princeton, 1990)H. M. Scott, ‘The Problem of Enlightened Absolutism’ in H. M. Scott (ed.), Enlightenened

Absolutism: Reform and Reformers in Later Eighteenth-Century Europe (Basingstoke, 1990),pp. 1–36

R. Shackleton, Montesquieu: A Critical Biography (Oxford, 1961)R. Shackleton, ‘Montesquieu, Bolingbroke and the Separation of Powers’ in Shackleton, Essays

on Montesquieu and on the Enlightenment, ed. D. Gilson and M. Smith (Oxford, 1988), pp. 3–16

Robert Shackleton, ‘Allies and Enemies: Voltaire and Montesquieu’ in Shackleton, Essays onMontesquieu and on the Enlightenment, ed. D. Gilson and M. Smith (Oxford, 1988), pp. 153–170

Robert Shackleton, ‘When Did the French Philosophes Become a Party?’ in Shackleton, Essayson Montesquieu and on the Enlightenment, ed. D. Gilson and M. Smith (Oxford, 1988), pp. 447–60.

J. N. Shklar, Montesquieu (Oxford, 1987)Jean Starobinski, Blessings in Disssguise, or the Morality of Evil (Oxford, 1993)Martin S. Staum, Minerva’s Message. Stablizing the French Revolution (McGill Queen’s U. P.

1996)Anthony Strugnell, Diderot’s Politics: A Study of the Evolution of Diderot’s Political Thought

After the Encyclopédie (The Hague, 1973)J. M. Thompson, Robespierre (1935/1988)Silvana Tomaselli, ‘The Enlighten Debate on Women’, History Workshop, 20 (1985), 101–24Dale Van Kley, The Jansenists and the Expulsion of the Jesuits from France, 1757–65 (New

Haven, 1975)Dale Van Kley, ‘The Jansenist Constitutional Legacy in the French Pre-revolution’ in Keith Baker

(ed.), The Political Culture of the Old Regime (Oxford, 1987), pp. 169–201Dale Van Kley, ‘New wine in old wineskins: continuity and rupture in the pamphlet debate of the

French pre-revolution’, French Historical Studies, 17 (1991), pp. 447–65Dale Van Kley (ed.), The French Idea of Freedom (Stanford, 1995)Dale Van Kley, The Religious Origins of the French Revolution (Yale U. P. 1996)Franco Venturi, Utopia and Reform in the Enlightenment (Cambridge, 1971)Franco Venturi, The End of the Old Regime in Europe, 1768–1776 (Princeton, 1989)Franco Venturi, The End of the Old Regime in Europe, 1776–1789, 2 vols. (Princeton, 1991), vol.

1, ch. 4 & 5Franco Venturi, ‘The European Enlightenment’ in Venturi, Italy and the Enlightenment: Studies

in a Cosmopolitan Century, trans. S. Corsi (London, 1972), pp. 1–32Franco Venturi, ‘Towards an Historical Dictionary: “Was ist Aufklärung? Sapere aude!”’ in

Venturi, Italy and the Enlightenment: Studies in a Cosmopolitan Century, trans. S. Corsi(London, 1972), pp. 33–40

15

Pierre Vidal-Naquet, Politics Ancient & Modern (Polity, 1995)Ira O. Wade, The Intellectual Origins of the French Enlightenment (Princeton, 1971)Eugen Weber, Apocalypses. Prophecies, Cults and Millennial Beliefs through the Ages (Pimlico,

1999)Cheryl B. Welch, Liberty and Utility. The French Ideologues and the Transformation of

Liberalism (Columbia, U. P. 1984)E. C. Wilkie Jnr., ‘Mercier’s L’An 2400: its publishing history during the author’s lifetime’,

Harvard Library Bulletin, 32 (1984), pp. 5–31, 348–400Richard Whatmore. ‘Everybody’s business: Jean Baptiste Says’s “general fact” conception of

political economy’, History of Political Economy, 30 (1998), pp. 430–68D. Williams, ‘The influence of Rousseau on political opinion, 1760–1795’, English Historical

Review, 48 (1935), pp. 414–30David Williams (ed.), The Enlightenment (Cambridge, 1999)E. A. Williams, The Physical and the Moral: Anthropology, Physiollogy and Philosophical

Medicine in France, 1750–1850 (Cambridge, 1994)Robert Wokler (ed.), Rousseau and Liberty (Manchester, Manchester University Press, 1995)David Wootton (ed.), Republicanism, Liberty and Commercial Society 1649–1776 (Stanford,

Stanford University Press, 1995)Kent Wright, A Classical Republican in Eighteenth-Century France. The Political Thought of

Gabriel Bonnot de Mably (Stanford, 1995)

PAPER 9. THE NEAR EAST IN THE AGE OF JUSTINIAN AND MUHAMMAD A.D. 527–700

This paper aims to provide students with an introduction to the emergence of the two civilisations thatwere to dominate the eastern Mediterranean in the early medieval period, those of Byzantium and Islam.The paper will consist of two parts. The first part will focus on the history of the Byzantine empire (exclud-ing North Africa and Italy) from the accession of the emperor Justinian in 527 to Heraclius’ victory overthe Persians in 628. Topics covered will include artistic, literary, and historiographical culture (focusing inparticular on the figure of the historian Procopius), the social, religious, and ideological development of theByzantine world, Byzantine-Persian warfare, and the Byzantine position in the Balkans in the face of Slavand Avar challenges. The second part of the paper will concentrate on the emergence of Islam. Studentswill examine the Arabic historiographical tradition, the emergence of the figure of Muhammad, the Islamicconquests of the Byzantine and Persian near east, the consolidation and stabilisation of Islamic rule, and theByzantine empire’s response to the rise of Islam. The paper will thus invite students to take a comparativistapproach to the development of early medieval Christian Orthodoxy and the emergent Islamic faith.

If taken in conjunction either with the Specified Subject on the Transformation of the Roman worldor that on Islamic Spain and Africa, the paper will provide an excellent basis for students proposing toundertake research in late antique, Byzantine, or Islamic history. For those with an interest in themedieval west, the paper will serve as a useful point of comparison for literary, religious, and militaryhistory. For students not proposing to proceed to research, the paper will open up a potentially unfa-miliar, but highly challenging series of historical questions and problems, and provide a basis for under-standing a period of dramatic political and religious change the ramifications of which are still with us.

A core bibliography of sources available in English translation will be provided and added to as newtranslations appear, and archaeological evidence will also feature. Core texts (2003):

Procopius, History of the Wars, trans. H.B. Dewing (Loeb Classics, London, 1914–54), Bks. I,II; Bk. VII, 14, 38, 40; Bk. VIII, 1–17 and 25.

Procopius, The Buildings, trans. H.B. Dewing (Loeb Classics, London, 1954), Bks. I-V.Procopius The Secret History, trans. H.B. Dewing (Loeb Classics, London, 1935). Chronicon Paschale Olympiad 327-end, trans. M. and M. Whitby (Liverpool, 1989).The Ecclesiastical History of Evagrius Scholasticus tr. M. Whitby (Liverpool, 2001)The Chronicle of John Bishop of Nikiu, trans. R.H. Charles (London, 1916), chapters 90–123.The Ecclesiastical History of John of Ephesus, trans. R.P. Smith (Oxford, 1860) Bk. VI.The Armenian History Attributed to Sebeos, trans. R.W. Thomson, commentary by J.D. Howard-

Johnston ( Liverpool, 2000)Antiochus Strategus Account of the Sack of Jerusalem in A.D. 614 trans. F.C. Conybeare, English

Historical Review XXV (1910) pp.502–17.Leontius of Neapolis The Life of John the Almsgiver in E.Dawes and N.H. Baynes, Three

Byzantine Saints (Oxford, 1948) pp.195–270.

16

G. Greatrex and S, Lieu The Roman Eastern Frontier and the Persian Wars – NarrativeSourcebook – Part II AD 363–630 (London, 2002) pp.62–247.

The Farmers’ Law trans. W. Ashburner, Journal of Hellenic Studies XXXII (1912) pp.68–95.The Chronicle of Monemvasia trans. P.Charanis, Dumbarton Oaks Papers V (1950), p.148.The Life of Muhammad: a translation of Ishaq’s Sirat Rasul Allah trans. A. Guillaume (Oxford,

1955), part III.P.K. Hitti The Origins of the Islamic State, Vol.I (New York, 1916), parts II-IV and part V, chap-

ters 1–2 (i.e. pp.165–351).

The following are key titles on which secondary reading will be based. Further reading lists, includ-ing articles, will be handed out in the package to be given to all students taking this paper.

Eastern EmpireP.R.L. Brown The World of Late Antiquity (London, 1971)Averil Cameron The Mediterranean World in Late Antiquity (London, 1993)Averil Cameron, B. Ward-Perkins, and M.Whitby (eds.) The Cambridge Ancient History Volume

XIV – Late Antiquity: Empires and Successors, A.D. 425–600 (Cambridge, 2000)J.A.S. Evans The Age of Justinian – The Circumstances of Imperial Power (London, 1996)J.F. Haldon Byzantium in the Seventh Century (Cambridge, 1990)A.H.M. Jones The Later Roman Empire (Oxford, 1964)M. Maas John Lydus and the Roman Past (London, 1992)C. Mango (ed.) The Oxford History of Byzantium (Oxford, 2002)C. Mango Byzantium – The Empire of New Rome (London, 1983)M. Whittow The Making of Orthodox Byzantium (London, 1996)

Eastern Empire – ArtR. Cormack Byzantine Art (Oxford, 2002)M. Harrison A Temple for Byzantium (London, 1989)J. Lowden Early Christian and Byzantine Art (London, 1997)C. Mango The Art of the Byzantine Empire (Toronto, 1972)C. Mango Byzantine Architecture (London, 1979)

HistoriographyAveril Cameron Procopius and the Sixth Century (London, 1985)Averil Cameron and L. Conrad (eds.) The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near East, I – Problems

in the Literary Source Materials (Princeton, 1992)M. Cook Mohammad (Oxford, 1983)M. Cook and P. Crone Hagarism: The Making of the Islamic World (Cambridge, 1977)A.A. Duri The Rise of Historical Writing Among the Arabs (Princeton,1983)R.G. Hoyland Seeing Islam As Others Saw It (Princeton, 1997)R.S. Humphreys Islamic History: a Framework of Enquiry (London,1991)E.Jeffreys, B. Croke and R. Scott (eds.) Studies in John Malalas (Sydney, 1990)C.F. Robinson Islamic Historiography (Cambridge, 2003)M. Whitby The Emperor Maurice and His Historian (Oxford, 1988)

Balkan History and the SteppeF. Curta The Making of the Slavs – History and Archaeology of the Lower Danube Region c.

500–700 (Cambridge, 2001)D. Obolensky The Byzantine Commonwealth (London, 1971)D. Sinor (ed.) The Cambridge History of Early Inner Asia (Cambridge, 1990)

International RelationsR.C. Blockley East Roman Foreign Policy (Leeds, 1992)M. Boyce The Zoroastrians – Their Religious Beliefs and Practices (London,1979)A. Cameron (ed.) The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near East III – States, Resources and Armies

(Princeton, 1993)G. Fowden Empire to Commonwealth – Consequences of Monotheism in Late Antiquity (Princeton,

1993)G. Greatrex Rome and Persia at War (Leeds, 1998)G. Herrmann The Iranian Revival (Oxford,1977)

17

G.R.D. King and Averil Cameron (eds.) The Byzantine and Early Islamic Near East III – Land-Use and Settlement Patterns (Princeton, 1994)

A.D. Lee Information and Frontiers (Cambridge, 1993)

Early Islam (see also ‘Historiography’ above)P. Crone Meccan Trade and the Rise of Islam (Oxford,1987)P. Crone Slaves on Horseback: The Evolution of the Islamic Polity (Cambridge,1980)A.A. Dixon The Umayyad Caliphate (London, 1971)F.M. Donner The Early Islamic Conquests (Princeton, 1981)O. Grabar The Formation of Islamic Art (New Haven, 1973)G.R. Hawting The First Dynasty of Islam (London, 1986)R. Hillenbrand Islamic Art and Architecture (London, 1999)R. Holyland Arabia and the Arabs from the Bronze Age to the Coming of Islam (London, 2001)H. Kennedy The Prophet and the Age of the Caliphates (London, 1986)M.G. Morony Iraq After the Muslim Conquest (Princeton, 1984)

PAPER 12. TRANSFORMATION OF THE ROMAN WORLD, 284–476

This course explores the two centuries that followed the recovery of the Roman world underDiocletian and the Tetrarchy after half a century of crisis, and the conversion of Constantine toChristianity. It is an often uncomfortable journey through a world of distant ceremonial emperors,oppressive bureaucrats, fleeing peasants, ascetic holy men and women, great saints, charismatic heretics,and violent barbarians. This was a world in which long cherished “classical values” were upturned, andin which – or so it has been alleged – an empire declined and fell, and a new religion flourished andconquered. The course concentrates on these upheavals (social, religious, moral, economic, political),which determined the transformation of the classical Mediterranean into the radically different worldof late antiquity – a world more familiar to its medieval conquerors Mohammed and Charlemagne. Aselect bibliography is given below; a detailed topical booklist is available in the Faculty.

Key titlesG. W. Bowersock. P. Brown and O. Grabar, (ed.), Late Antiquity: A Guide to the Postclassical

World (Harvard UP, 1999)P. Brown, The Making of Late Antiquity (Harvard UP, 1978) (reptd 1993)P. Brown, The World of Late Antiquity: AD 150–750 (Thames & Hudson, London, 1971) (reptd.

1991)P. Brown, Power and Persuasion in Late Antiquity: Towards a Christian Empire (U. of Wisconsin

Press, 1993)Averil Cameron The Later Roman Empire: AD 284–430, Fontana History of the Ancient World,

(London, 1993)Averil Cameron & P. Garnsey, (ed.) Cambridge Ancient History vol. XIII: The Late Empire, A.D.

337–425 (Cambridge, 1998)J. Elsner Imperial Rome and Christian Triumph: The Art of the Roman Empire AD 100–450

(Oxford History of Art, Oxford, 1998P. Garnsey and C. Humfress, The Evolution of the Late Antique World (Orchard Academic 2001)S. G. Hall Doctrine and Practice in the Early Church (SPCK, London, 1991)P. J. Heather, Goths and Romans, 332–489 (Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1991)A.H.M. Jones, The Later Roman Empire 284–602: A Social, Economic, and Administrative

Surrey (3 vols. Basil Blackwell, Oxford, 1964)R. MacMullen, Christianity and Paganism in the Fourth to Eighth Centuries (Yalem UP,

1997)M. Maas Readings in Late Antiquity: A Sourcebook (Routledge, London, 2000)R. A. Markus The End of Ancient Christianity (Cambridge UP, 1990)J. Matthews, The Roman Empire of Ammianus (Duckworth, London, 1989)J. Rich (ed.), The City in Late Antiquity (Routledge, London, 1992)C. R. Whittaker Land, City and Trade in the Roman Empire (Variorum Press, no. 408, London, 1993)

18

13. DEATH IN THE MIDDLE AGES, C.1050–C.1550

Death in the Middle Ages has recently become an extremely fertile area of study and debate, movingthe subject away from the bland generalities of Ariès’ ‘tame death’. This course focuses on England,but draws material freely from elsewhere in Europe. Among the issues to be included are the ‘rise’ ofPurgatory and its consequences, sin and confession, death rituals and the memorialisation of the dead,and the good and bad death. The course ends with a look at the dismantling of medieval beliefs aboutthe place of the dead at the Reformation, and assesses how quickly, and how thoroughly, the changeswere accepted at a parochial level. The course will thus embrace the formation and destruction of a setof beliefs and their attendant rituals. Death, and particularly attitudes to the dead themselves, is an areawhere it is often possible to detect a marked discrepancy between the teachings of the Church and popu-lar belief, and one of the aims of this course is to explore that distinction and its implications.

The reading list is only a selection of the material to be used. Much of the recent work on the subjectis in the form of articles and this will be reflected more fully in the supplementary reading lists for indi-vidual essay topics. In addition, students will be supplied with transcripts (and, where appropriate, trans-lations) of selected primary sources, including visions, wills, funeral accounts and chronicles. Alongsidethe written sources (literary as well as historical), the paper will also draw extensively on visual evidence.

Reading listSources

Caesarius of Heisterbach, Dialogue on Miracles, transl. H.E.Scott & C.C. Swinton Bland (2 vols,London, 1929)

Jacobus de Voraigne, The Golden Legend, transl. W.G. Ryan (2 vols, Princeton, 1995)Medieval Ghost Stories, transl. A. Joynes (Woodbridge, 2001)Medieval Handbooks of Penance: a translation of the principal libri poenitentiales and selec-

tions from related documents, ed. and transl. J.T. McNeill & H.M. Gamer (New York, 1938)The Prymer or Lay Folks’ Prayer Book, ed. H. Littlehales, Early English Text Soc., original series

105 (1895), pp. 52–78The First and Second Prayer Books of King Edward VI, ed. D. Harrison (Everyman, 1910), pp.

259–77The Dance of Death, ed. F. Warren, Early English Text Soc., original series 181 (1931)C. Gross (ed.), Select Cases from the Coroners’ Rolls, AD 1265–1413, Selden Society 9 (1896)J. Shinners, ed. and transl., Medieval Popular Religion 1000–1500: a reader (Peterborough,

Ontario, 1997) chapter 10: Death and JudgementR. Swanson, ed. and transl., Catholic England: faith, religion and observance before the

Reformation (Manchester, 1993), pp. 125–47, 222–58

GeneralP. Ariès, The Hour of Our Death (1981)P. Ariès, Western Attitudes towards Death from the Middle Ages to the Present (Baltimore, 1974)M. Aston, ‘Death’ in R. Horrox (ed.), Fifteenth-century Attitudes (Cambridge, 1994)S. Bassett (ed), Death in Towns: urban responses to the dying and the dead, 100–1600 (Leicester,

1992)N. Beriou & D.L. D’Avray (eds), Modern Questions about Medieval Sermons: essays on

marriage, death, history and sanctity (Spoleto, 1994)P. Binski, Medieval Death: ritual and representation (1996)T.S.R. Boase, Death in the Middle Ages: mortality, remembrance and judgement (1972)C. Daniell, Death and Burial in Medieval England (1997)P. Geary, Living with the Dead in the Middle Ages (Cornell, 1994), pp.32–45D.M. Hadley, Death in Medieval England (Stroud, 2001)P. Jupp & C. Gittings (eds), Death in England, an illustrated history (Manchester, 1999), chaps

3–5.C. Walker Bynum and P. Freedman (eds), Last Things: death and the apocalypse in the Middle

Ages (Pennsylvania, 1999)

Sin & ConfessionM.F. Braswell, The Medieval Sinner: characterization and confession in the literature of the early

Middle Ages (1983)J.A. Brundage, Medieval Canon Law (1995)

19

M. Bull, Knightly Piety and the Lay Response to the First Crusade (1993)J. Delumeau, transl. E. Nicolson, Sin and Fear: the emergence of a Western guilt culture, 13th–18th

centuries (New York, 1991)S. Hamilton, The Practice of Penance 900–1050 (Woodbridge, 2001)M. Haren, Sin and Society in Fourteenth-century England: a study of the Memoriale Presbitorum

(Oxford, 2000)M. Mansfield, The Humiliation of Sinners: public penance in thirteenth-century France (Ithaca,

1995)A.J. Minnis & P. Biller (eds), Handling Sin: confession in the Middle Ages (York, 1998)A. Murray, ‘Confession before 1215’, TRHS 6th series 3 (1993)B. Poschmann, transl. F. Courtenay, Penance and Anointing of the Sick (1969)T.N. Tentler, Sin and Confession on the Eve of the Reformation (Princeton, 1977)E. Vodola, Excommunication in the Middle Ages (1986)

Heaven, Hell and Purgatory, and the Last ThingsP. Dinzelbacher, Vision und Visionsliteratur im Mittelalter (Stuttgart, 1981)G.R. Edwards, ‘Purgatory: birth or evolution?’ Journal of Ecclesiastical History, 36 (1985)R.K. Emmerson, Antichrist in the Middle Ages: a study of medieval apocalypticism, art and liter-

ature (Manchester, 1981)R.K. Emmerson & B. McGinn (eds), The Apocalypse in the Middle Ages (Ithaca, 1992)J. le Goff, transl. A. Goldhammer, The Birth of Purgatory (1984)S.F. Kruger, Dreaming in the Middle Ages (Cambridge, 1992)B. McDonnell & C.M. Lang, Heaven: a history (1988)D.D.R. Owen, The Vision of Hell: infernal journeys in French literature (Edinburgh 1970)C. Zaleski, Otherworld Journeys: accounts of near-death experience in medieval and modern

times (Oxford, 1987), parts I and II

Monastic Commemoration and IntercessionJ. Burton, Monastic and Religious Orders in Britain, 1000–1300 (Cambridge, 1994)G. Constable, Cluny from the tenth to the twelfth centuries: further studies (2000)H.E.J. Cowdrey, The Cluniacs and the Gregorian Reform (Oxford, 1970)E. Cownie, Religious Patronage in Anglo-Norman England, 1066–1135 (Woodbridge, 1998)C. Harper-Bill, ‘The Piety of the Anglo-Norman Knightly Class’, Proceedings of the Battle

Conference 2 (1979)C. Holdsworth, The Piper and the Tune: medieval patrons and monks (Reading, 1991)P. Geary, Phantoms of Remembrance: memory and oblivion at the end of the first millenium

(Princeton, 1994)M. McLaughlin, Consorting with Saints: prayer for the dead in early medieval France (Ithaca,

1994)B.H. Rosenwein, To be the Neighbour of St Peter: the social meaning of Cluny’s property,

909–1049 (1989)

Ghosts and the Life of the CorpseP. Barber, Vampires, Burial and Death: folklore and reality (New Haven, 1988)C. Walker Bynum, The Resurrection of the Body in Western Christianity, 200–1336 (New York,

1995)N.K. Chadwick, Norse Ghosts: a study in the draugr and the haugbui (1946)R.C. Finucane, Appearances of the Dead: a cultural history of ghosts (1982)C. Lecouteux, Fantômes et revenants au moyen âge (Paris, 1986)P. Marshall & B. Gordon (eds), The Place of the Dead (Cambridge, 2000), chaps 4–5.K. Park, ‘The life of the corpse: division and dissection in late medieval Europe’, Journal of the

History of Medicine 50 (1995), 111–32J.-C. Schmitt, transl. T.L. Fagan, Ghosts in the Middle Ages (1998)

Thinking about DeathN.L. Beaty, The Craft of Dying: a study of the literary tradition of the ars moriendi in England

(New Haven, 1970)M. Camille, Master of Death (New Haven, 1996)J.M. Clark, The Dance of Death in the Middle Ages and the Renaissance (Glagow, 1950)

20

K. Rogers Cohen, Metamorphosis of a Death Symbol: the transi tomb in the late middle ages andthe renaissance (Berkeley, 1973)

D. D’Avray, Death and the Prince: memorial preaching before 1350 (Oxford, 1994)A.M. Morganstern, Gothic Tombs of Kinship in France, the Low Countries and England

(Pennsylvania, 2000)A. Murray, Suicide in the Middle Ages (3 vols, Oxford 1999–)M.C. O’Connor, The Art of Dying Well: the development of the ars moriendi (New York, 1942)P. Tristram, Figures of Life and Death in Medieval English Literature (1976)

Death Rituals and BurialE.A.R. Brown, ‘Death and the human body in the later middle ages: the legislation of Boniface

VIII on the division of the corpse’, Viator 12 (1981), 221–70D. Crouch, ‘The culture of death in the Anglo-Norman World’, in Culture and the Twelfth-

Century Renaissance, ed. C. Warren Hollister (Woodbridge, 1997)R.C. Finucane, ‘Sacred Corpse, Profane Carrion: social ideals and death rituals in the later middle

ages’, in Mirrors of Mortality: studies in the social history of death, ed. J. Whaley (1981),40–60

S.C. Humphreys & H. King (eds), Mortality and Immortality: the archaeology and anthropol-ogy of death (1981)

P. Metcalfe & R. Huntingdon, Celebrations of Death: the anthropology of mortuary ritual(Cambridge, revised ed. 1991)

F. Paxton, Christianizing Death: the creation of a ritual process in early medieval Europe (Ithaca,1990)

G. Rowell, The Liturgy of Christian Burial (1977)

Commemoration and the late-medieval churchA. Brown, Popular Piety in late medieval England: the diocese of Salisbury 1250–1550(Oxford, 1995), chapter 4C. Burgess, ‘“A Fond Thing vainly invented”: an essay on purgatory and pious motive in late-

medieval England’ in S. Wright (ed.), Parish, Church and People: local studies in lay reli-gion, 1350–1750 (1988), pp. 56–84

S.K. Cohn, The Cult of Remembrance and the Black Death: six renaissance cities in central Italy(Baltimore, 1992)

G.H. Cook, Medieval Chantries and Chantry Chapels (1947)E. Duffy, The Stripping of the Altars: traditional religion in England 1400–1580 (New Haven,

1992)J. Rosenthal, The Purchase of Paradise: the social function of aristocratic benevolence,

1307–1485 (1972)

Dismantling medieval deathD. Cressy, Birth, Marriage and Death: ritual, religion, and the life-cycle in Tudor and Stuart

England (Oxford, 1997)C. Gittings, Death, Burial and the Individual in Early Modern England (1984)V. Harding, The Dead and the Living in Paris and London, 1500–1670 (Cambridge, 2002)R. Houlbrooke, Death, Religion and the Family in England, 1480–1750 (Oxford, 1998)P. Marshall, Beliefs and the Dead in Reformation England (Oxford, 2002)A. Kreider, English Chantries: the road to dissolution (Cambridge, Mass., 1979)N. Tyacke (ed.), England’s Long Reformation, 1500–1800 (1998)R. Whiting, The Blind Devotion of the People: popular religion and the English reformation

(Cambridge, 1989)

PAPER 14. THE VIKINGS IN EUROPE, C. 800–C. 1100

Since their raid on Lindisfarne in 793, the Vikings have often had a bad press. But the images ofHagar the Horrible and ‘long-haired tourists who occasionally roughed up the natives’ can easily beshown to be caricatures. This paper’s principal theme will be the interaction between the Vikings andthe peoples they encountered in the course of their raiding, trading and settlement within western andeastern Europe. Thus it will look at the Vikings in their homelands in Denmark, Norway and Sweden

21

and then chart their raids on the British Isles and Francia, the establishment of the Scandinavian king-doms of York and Dublin and the Danelaw in England. A particular focus of attention in the first partof the paper will be Viking involvement in the internal politics of Carolingian west Francia and the even-tual settlement of Normandy. Another topic of importance is their trading, and thus the Viking contri-bution to the economy of NorthWest Europe, notably the role of emporia at Birka and Hedeby.Expansion to Iceland, Greenland and the Slavic regions and Rus, and the Varangian guard in Byzantiumwill also be discussed. A further theme is Viking religion and their conversion to Christianity, with casestudies of Anskar’s mission to the Danes and the activities of the zealous archbishops of Hamburg-Bremen.

In the second half of the paper the principal themes will be the emergence of Normandy as the mostpowerful principality of France and its relations with the Danish and Anglo-Saxon kings in the 11thcentury. The Norman expansion across Europe is another theme: were the Normans neo-Vikings whoset out to conquer vulnerable parts of Europe like southern Italy and England, or were they simply oppor-tunistic Frankish mercenaries available for military combat anywhere? Then there is one of the mostintriguing aspects of Viking history, the complicated narrative inheritance. The gradual decline ofScandinavian expansion to the south coincided with the spread of the oral myths about the early Vikings.The transformation of the oral tradition into a written clerical tradition in the Latin West (chronicles,miracle stories) and the Scandinavian North (skaldic poetry and sagas) presents the historian with differ-ent layers of interpretation.

A constant evaluation of the material and narrative sources will be central focus of both parts of thepaper. The paper will introduce students to the marvellous wealth of primary evidence from this period.As well as the 16 lectures from Professor Rosamond McKitterick (10), and Dr Liesbeth van Houts (6),of 8 classes on sources there are two on ships and runes and on annals and epics (Professor McKitterick)two on skaldic poetry, sagas and Latin historiography (Mr Johnson and Dr Quinn), two on the Vikingand Norman coinage from northern and southern Europe (Dr Mark Blackburn), one on the Arabicsources on the ‘Rus’ (Dr James Montgomery) and one on archaeology by members of the Departmentof Archaeology. The coin classes will take advantage of the incomparable resources of the FitzwilliamMuseum. There will be an excursion to the early medieval gallery of the British Museum.

The principal secondary reading and the main sources for the course (the latter all available in Englishtranslation either in print or in typescript (=ts) provided by the lecturers), are as follows.

1. AnthologiesChronicles of the Vikings. Records, Memorials and Myths, ed. and trans. R. I. Page (London, 1995)The Normans in Europe, ed. and trans. E. van Houts (Manchester 2000) esp. chapters i and iiSourcebook for Vikings in Europe ed. R. McKitterick and E. van Houts (ts)

2. SourcesAdrevald of Fleury, Miracula sancti Benedicti ts (extracts)Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, ed. D. Whitelock, (London, 1961)Annales sanctae Columbae Senonensis 868 tsAnnals of Angoulême ts (extracts)Annals of Fulda, trans. T. Reuter, Ninth-century Histories, vol. II: The Annals of Fulda

(Manchester, 1992)Annals of St Bertin, trans. J. L. Nelson, Ninth-century Histories, vol. I: The Annals of St Bertin

(Manchester, 1991) out of print but available on Manchester UP’s websiteAnnals of St Vaast tsAnnals of Xanten tsBattle of Maldon, translated M. Ashdown reprinted in D. Whitelock (ed.) English Historical

Documents I: 500–1042 (London, 2nd edition, 1979)Capitulary of Pîtres 862 tsCartulary of Redon ts (extracts)Charles the Simple, charters, tsCharters relating to St Philibert of Noirmoutier 819, 830 tsChronicle of Nantes ts (extracts)Deeds of Conwoion, abbot of Redon ts (extracts)Edict of Pîtres 864 tsLudwigslied, trans. J. Knight Bostock, A Handbook on Old High German Literature, 2nd edn

(Oxford, 1976) pp. 239–41Photius, Homilies, Nos. 3 and 4, ed. C. Mango (Washington, 1958)R. Page (ed. and trans.) Chronicles of the Vikings ((extracts) (London, 1996)

22

Russian Primary Chronicle, trans. S. H. Cross and O. P. Sherbowitz-Wetzor (Cambridge, Mass.,1953, repr. 1973)

St Wandrille chronicle ts (extracts)William of Jumièges, Gesta normannorum ducum, ed. and trans. E. M. C. van Houts, 2 vols

(Oxford, 1992 and 1995)Ibn Khurradadhbih, Treatise on the Routes and the Kingdoms; Ibn Rustah, Treatise on precious

objects; Ibn Fadlan, ‘The Rusiyyah’ extracts trans. James Montgomery, ts

Secondary LiteratureAbrams, L., ‘Eleventh-century missions and the early stages of ecclesiastical organisation in

Scandinavia’, Anglo-Norman Studies xvii (1994) 21–40Abrams, L., ‘The Anglo-Saxons and the christianization of Scandinavia’, Anglo-Saxon England

xxiv (1995) 213–250Baldwin, J. R. and Whyte I. D., The Scandinavians in Cumbria (Edinburgh, 1985)Bates, D., Normandy before 1066 (London, 1982)Bekker-Nielsen, H., et al. (eds), Proceedings of the Eighth Viking Congress (Odense, 1981)Boyer, R., La poésie scaldique, Typologie des sources du moyen Age occidental, 62 (Turnholt,

1992)Byock, J. L., Medieval Iceland, Society, Sagas and Power (Enfield Lock, 1988)Crawford, B. E., Scandinavian Scotland (Leicester, 1987)Fenton, A. and Pálsson, H. (eds) The Northern and Western Isles in the Viking World (Edinburgh,

1984)Graham Campbell, J., The Viking Age (London, 1981)Graham-Campbell, J. and Kidd, D. The Vikings [Catalogue of Exhibition in the British Museum]

(London, 1980)Grierson, P., and Blackburn, M. (eds), Medieval European coinage …, vol. 1: The early Middle

Ages (5th–10th c.) (Cambridge, 1986)D.M. Hadley, The northern Danelaw (Leicester, 2000)D.M. Hadley (ed.) Cultures in contact: Scandinavian Settlement in England in the ninth and tenth

centuries (Turnhout, 2000)Hayward, J., The Penguin Historical Atlas of the Vikings (Harmondsworth, 1995)J. Hayward, Encyclopaedia of the Viking Age (London, 2000)Jesch, J., Women in the Viking Age (Woodbridge, 1992)Lawson, M. K., Cnut. The Danes in England in the early eleventh century (London, 1993)Lifshitz, F., The Norman Conquest of Pious Neustria (Toronto, 1995)Lund, N., ‘Allies of God or man? The Viking expansion in a European perspective’, Viator 20

(1989) 45–59McKitterick, R., The Frankish kingdoms under the Carolingians, 751–987 (London, 1983)McKitterick, R., (ed.), The New Cambridge Medieval History II: 700–900 (Cambridge, 1995)Nelson, J. L. and Coupland, S. C., ‘The vikings’, History Today xxxviii (1988) 12–19Nelson, J. L., Charles the Bald (London, 1991)O. Corráin, D., Ireland before the Normans (Dublin, 1972)O. Cróinín, D., Early Medieval Ireland (London, 1995)Pulsiano, P., (ed.) Medieval Scandinavia. An encyclopedia, (New York, London, 1993)Randsborg, K., The First Millenium AD in Europe and the Mediterranean: An Archaeological

Essay (Cambridge, 1990)Roesdahl, E., Viking Age Denmark (London, 1982)Rumble, A. (ed.), The Reign of Cnut: King of England, Denmark and Norway (London, 1994)Sawyer, B., The Viking-Age Rune Stones. Custom and Commemoration in early medieval

Scandinavia (Oxford, 2000)Sawyer, B. and Sawyer, P., Medieval Scandinavia (Madison)Sawyer, B., et al., The Christianization of Scandinavia (Alingsás, 1987)Sawyer, P. (ed.), Kings and Vikings: Scandinavia and Europe AD 700–1000 (London, 1982)Sawyer, P., The Oxford Illustrated History of the Vikings (Oxford, 1997)Scragg, D. C., (ed.) The Battle of Maldon AD 991 (Oxford, 1991)Searle, E., Predatory Kinship and the creation of Norman power 840–1066 (Los Angeles, 1988)Shepard, J. and Franklin, S., The emergence of Rus 750–1200 (London, 1996)Smyth, A., The Scandinavian Kingdoms of York and Dublin (Oxford)TIMEWATCH BBC video (Sept. 1995) Repton excavations etc.Turville-Petre, E. O. G., Scaldic Poetry (Oxford, 1976)

23

van Houts, E. M. C. ‘Scandinavian influence in Norman literature of the 11th century’, Anglo-Norman Studies, x (1983) 107–121

Vesteinsson, O., The Christianisation of Iceland. Priests, Power and Social Change 1000–1300(Oxford, 2000)

Wood, I. N. and Lund, N. (eds), People and Places in Northern Europe: Studies in honour of P.H. Sawyer (Woodbridge, 1991)

PAPER 16 ISLAMIC SPAIN AND NORTH AFRICA, 711–1610

This course traces the history of Islamic Spain and North Africa from the Arabo-Islamic conquest inthe late 7th/early 8th century AD up to 1492 when the fall of Granada marked the end of Muslim rulein Spain and initiated the takeover of the majority of North Africa by the Ottomans. These two areas –Spain and North Africa – formed the Islamic West and were intimately bound together by faith, cultureand commerce. The course begins with an overview of Christian Iberia before the Islamic conquest. Itthen investigates patterns of conquest, settlement and islamisation; the emergence of al-Andalus (Spain)and Ifriqiya (Tunisia) as cultural centres for the entire region; the rise of the Berber empires of theFatimids, Almoravids and Almohads which led to much greater cultural homogenisation across Spainand North Africa; and the fragmentation of the Almohad empire into a series of successor states – NasridGranada, Marinid Morocco, Zayyanid Tlemsen and Hafsid Tunis. In addition, the course studies thesocial and economic history of the region with particular emphasis on the complex interactions betweenJews, Christians and Muslims in Islamic Spain and North Africa. It also looks at the political andeconomic relations between the Islamic West and its neighbours – the Christian kingdoms of northernSpain and sub-Saharan Africa, the impact of the ‘reconquista’ upon its politics and culture; and west-ern Islamic thought. It ends with a brief look at the Spanish and North African political and culturalreadjustment to the fall of Granada which culminated in the final expulsion of the Moriscos (Muslimsforcibly converted to Christianity) from Spain in 1609 and their resettlement across the MuslimMediterranean.

It would be helpful if students had a reading knowledge of French. Knowledge of Spanish or Arabicis not a requirement for taking the paper.

SourcesArberry, A. J. Moorish Poetry: A translation of ‘The Pennants’: An Anthology compiled in 1243

by the Andalusian Ibn Sa’id, Cambridge, 1953.Bellamy, J. and Steiner, P. Ibn Sa’id al-Maghribi: The Banners of the Champions. An Anthology

of Medieval Arabic Poetry from al-Andalus and Beyond, Madison, 1989.Carmi, T. Penguin Book of Hebrew Verse, Harmondsworth, 1981.Constable, O.R. Medieval Iberia, Philadelphia, 1997.Goldstein, D. The Jewish Poets of Spain, Harmondsworth, 1971.Ibn ’Abdun Seville musulmane au debut du XII siècle, trans. E. Levi-Provençal, Paris, 1947.Ibn ’Arabi The Tarjuman al-Ashwaq: A collection of mystical odes by Muhyi’ddin Ibn al-Arabi,

ed and trans. R.A. Nicholson, London, 1911.Ibn Hazm Tawq al-Hamama (The Ring of the Dove), trans. A. J. Arberry, London, 1953.Ibn Jubayr The Travels of Ibn Jubayr, trans. R. Broadhurst, London, 1952.Ibn Khaldun The Muqaddimah: An Introduction to History, trans. F. Rosenthal, London, 1958.Ibn Khaldun Histoire des Benou’l-Ahmar, rois de Grenade. trans. M. Gaudefroy demombynes,

Journal Asiatique, Serie 9, 12, 1898: 309–340, 407–462.Ibn Khaldun Histoire des Berbères et des dynasties musulmanes de L’Afrique septentrionale,

trans. M. de Slane, Paris, 1956.Ibn Khaldun Le voyage d’Occident et d’Orient, trans. Abdesselam Chaddadi, Paris, 1980.Ibn Rushd Averroes’ Tahafut al-Tahafut, trans. S van den Bergh, Cambridge, 1978.Ibn Rushd On the Harmony of Religion and Philosophy, trans. G.F. Hourani, London, 1976.Ibn Shuhayd Risalat al-Tawabi’ wa’l-Zawabi’, Trans. by J. T. Monroe, Berkeley, 1971.Ibn Tufayl Hayy Ibn Yaqzan, trans. L.E. Goodman, New York, 1972.al-Idrisi, Description de l’Afrique et de l’Espagne, trans. R. Dozy and M. J. de Goeje, Leiden, 1866.Lagardère, V. Histoire et société en occident musulmane au moyen âge. Analyse du Mi’yar d’al-

Wansharisi, Madrid, 1995.Levi-Provençal, E. Trente-sept lettres officielles almohades, Rabat, 1941.Maimonides, M. Crisis and Leadership: The Epistles of Maimonides, edited and trans. A. Halkin

and D. Hartman, Philadelphia, 1985.

24

al-Maqqari, The Mohammedan Dynasties in Spain, two vols, trans. P. Gayanyos, London,1840–1843.

Melville, C., Smith, C. and Ubaydli, A. Christians and Moors, three vols, Warminster 1988–1993.Tibi, A. The Tibyan: Memoirs of Abd Allah b. Buluggin, Last Zirid Amir of Granada, Leiden, 1986.Wolf, K. Conquerors and chroniclers of early medieval Spain, Liverpool, 1990.

General WorksAbun-Nasr, J. A History of the Maghrib in the Islamic Period, Cambridge, Cambridge University

Press, 1987 ed.Brett, M. and Fentress, E. The Berbers, Oxford, 1996.Burns, R. Moors and Crusaders in Mediterranean Spain, London, 1978.Chejne, A. Muslim Spain: its History and Culture, Minneapolis, 1974.Daniel, N. The Arabs and Medieval Europe, London, 1975.Dozy, R. Spanish Islam: A History of the Moslems in Spain, London 1913.Fletcher, R. Moorish Spain, London, 1992.Glick, T. From Muslim Fortress to Christian Castle, Manchester, Manchester University Press,

1995.Glick, T. Islamic and Christian Spain in the Early Middle Ages, Princeton, 1979.Immamuddin, S. M. Muslim Spain 711–1492: A Sociological Study, Leiden, 1981. (Previously

published with the title, Some Aspects of the Socio-economic and Cultural History of MuslimSpain, Leiden, 1965).

Immamuddin, S. M. A Political History of Muslim Spain, Dacca, 1961.Kennedy, Hugh, Muslim Spain and Portugal: A Political History of al-Andalus, London and New

York, Longman, 1996.Levi-Provençal, E. Histoire de l’Espagne musulmane, three vols, Paris, 1950.Montagne, R. The Berbers: their Social and Political Organisation, trans. D. Seddon, London,

1973.Reilly, B. The Medieval Spains, Cambridge, 1993.Terrasse, H. Histoire du Maroc, two vols, Paris, 1949.Watt, W.M. & Cachia, P. A History of Islamic Spain, Edinburgh, 1965.

The Islamic Conquest of the West and the Caliphal EraBrett, M. The Arab Conquest and the Rise of Islam in North Africa. In J.D. Fage and R. Oliver

(eds.) Cambridge History of Africa, II, Cambridge, 1978: 490–544.Brunschvig, R. Ibn ’Abd al-H’akam et la conquête de l’Afrique du Nord par les Arabes. Annales

de l’Institut d’Etudes Orientales, Algiers, VI, 1942–7: 108–155.Chalmeta, P. Invasion e islamizacion: la sumision de Hispania y la formacion de al-Andalus,

Madrid, 1994.Collins, R. Early Medieval Spain: Unity in Diversity 400–1000, London, 1983.Donner, F. The Early Islamic Conquests, Princeton, 1981.al-Hajji, A. Andalucian Diplomatic Relations with Western Europe during the Umayyad Period,

Beirut, 1970.Handler, A. The Zirids of Granada, Florida, 1974.Hawting, G. The First Dynasty of Islam: the Umayyad Caliphate AD 661–750, London, 1986.Kennedy, H. The Prophet and the Age of the Caliphates, London, 1986.Kennedy, H. The Early ’Abbasid Caliphate: A Political History, London, 1981.Lewicki, T. The Ibadites in North Africa and the Sudan to the fourteenth century. Journal of World

History 13, 1971: 83–130.Manzano Moreno, E. La frontera de al-Andalus en epoca de los Omeyas, Madrid, 1991.Manzano Moreno, E. El asentamiento y la organizacion de los yund-s sirios en al-Andalus. Al-

Qantara XIV, 1993: 327–359.Meouak, M. Hierarchie des fonctions militaires et corps d’armée en al-Andalus umayyade. Al-

Qantara XIV, 1993: 361–392.Meouak, M. Notes sur le vizirat et les viziers en al-Andalus a l’époque umayyade. Studia Islamica

LXXVIII, 1993: 181–190.Savage, E. A Gateway to Hell, A Gateway to Paradise: The North African Response to the Arab

Conquest, Princeton, 1997.Taha, A.D. The Muslim Conquest and Settlement of North Africa and Spain, London, 1989.Wasserstein, D. The Caliphate in the West, Oxford, 1993.Wasserstein, D. The Rise and Fall of the Party Kings, Princeton, 1985.

25

The Berber EmpiresBrunschvig, R. Sur la doctrine du Mahdi Ibn Tumart. Arabica II, 1955: 137–149.Burns, R.I. The Crusader Kingdom of Valencia, two vols, Cambridge MA, 1967.Chalmeta, P. Concesiones territoriales en al-Andalus hasta la Ilegada de los almoravides.

Cuadernos de Historia. Anexos a la revista Hispania VI, 1975: 1–90.Fletcher, M. The anthropological context of Almohad history. Hesperis-Tamuda 26–7, 1988–89:

25–51.Huici Miranda, A. Historia Politica del Imperio Almohade, two vols, Tetuan, 1956–7.Huici Miranda, A. Las Grandes Batallas de la Reconquista durante las Invasiones Almoravides,

Almohades y Benimerines, Madrid, 1956.Huici Miranda, A. La Salida de los Almoravides del desierto y el reinado de Yusuf b. Tashfin.

Hesperis 3–4, 1959: 155–82.Lagardère, V. Les Almoravides, Paris, 1989.Le Tourneau, R. The Almohad Movement in North Africa in the 12th and 13th centuries, Princeton,

1969.Levi-Provençal, E. Le titre souverain des Almoravides et sa légitimation par le califat Abasside.

Arabica II, 1955: 265–280.Levtzion, N. Ancient Ghana and Mali, London, 1972.Luciani, J-D. Le Livre de Mohammed Ibn Toumert, Algiers, 1903.Lomax, D. Heresy and orthodoxy in the fall of Almohad Spain. In D. Lomax and D. Mackenzie

(eds.) God and Man in Medieval Spain, Warminster, 1989.Norris, H. New evidence on the life of ’Abdullah b. Yasin and the origins of the Almoravid move-

ment. Journal of African History 12, 1971: 255–268.Reilly, B. The Contest of Christian and Muslim Spain 1031–1157, London, 1992.Scales, P. C. The Fall of the Caliphate of Córdoba. Berbers and Andalusis in Conflict, Leiden,

1994.Stalls, C. Possessing the Land. Aragon’s Expansion on Islam’s Ebro Frontier under Alfonso the

Battler (1104–1134), Leiden, 1995.

The Almohad Successor States (1250–1500) and the ReconquistaAbulafia, D. The Nasrid kingdom of Granada. New Cambridge Medieval History, 5, 1999.Abulafia, D. The Western Mediterranean Kingdoms: The Struggle for Dominion 1200–1500,

London, 1997.Abulafia, D. A Mediterranean Emporium. The Catalan Kingdom of Majorca, Cambridge 1994.Arié, R. L’Espagne musulmane au temps des Nasrides (1232–1492), Paris, 1973.Beck, H. L’Image d’Idris II, ses descendants de Fes et la politique sharifienne des sultans

marinides (656–869/1258–1465), Leiden, 1989.Brett, M. Arabs, Berbers and Holy Men in Southern Ifriqiya 650–750 AH/1250–1350 AD. Cahiers

de Tunisie 29, 1981: 533–559.Brunschvig, R. La Berbérie orientale sous les Hafsides des origines à la fin du XV siècle, two

vols, Paris, 1940 and 1947.Burns, R. and Chevedden, P. The finest castle in the world. History Today, 49, 1999, part II:

10–17.Burns, R. Islam under the Crusaders: Colonial Survival in the 13th Century Kingdom of Valencia,

Princeton, 1973.Burns, R. Medieval Colonialism. Post-Crusade Exploitation of Islamic Valencia, Princeton,

1975.Cook , F. W. The Hundred Years War for Morocco, Boulder, 1994.Cornell, V. J. Socioeconomic dimensions of Reconquista and Jihad in Morocco: the Portuguese

Dukkala and the Sa’did Sus, 1450–1557. IJMES 22, 1990: 379–418.Fernandez-Armesto, F. Before Columbus: Exploration and Colonisation from the Mediterranean

to the Atlantic, 1229–1492, London, 1987.Garcia-Arenal, M. The revolution of Fas in 869/1465 and the death of the Sultan ’Abd al-Haqq

al-Marini. BSOAS XLI, 1, 1978.Guichard, P. Les musulmanes de Valence et la reconquête, two vols, Damascus, 1990–1.Harvey, L. P. Islamic Spain 1250–1500, Chicago and London, University of Chicago Press, 1984.Hess, A. The Forgotten Frontier: A History of the Sixteenth Century Ibero-African Frontier,

Chicago, 1978.Shatzmiller, M. The Berbers and the Islamic State, Princeton, 2000.

26

Economy and TradeAbitbol, M. Juifs maghrebins et commerce transsaharien du VIII au XV siècle. In Le sol, la parole

et l’écrit: 2000 ans d’histoire africaine, vol II, Paris, 1981: 561–577.Abu-Lughod, J. Before European Hegemony. The World System 1250–1350, Oxford, 1989.Brett, M. Ifriqiya as a market for Saharan trade from the 10th to 12th centuries. Journal of African

History, 10, 1969: 347–364.Brett, M. Islam and trade in the Bilad al-Sudan, 10th–12th centuries AD. Journal of African

History 24, 1983: 431–440.Bovill, E. W. The Golden Trade of the Moors, Oxford, 1953.Constable, O. Trade and Traders in Muslim Spain: the commercial realignment of the Iberian

Peninsula 900–1500, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1994.Goitein, S. A Mediterranean Society: The Jewish Communities of the Arab World as Portrayed

by the Documents of the Cairo Geniza, 5 vols, Los Angeles, 1967–88.Messier, R. The Almoravids, West African gold and the gold currency of the Mediterranean basic.

Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient, 18, 1974: 31–47.

Society, Faith and Culture (Muslims, Christian and Jews under Muslim and Christian rule)Ashtor, E. The Jews of Muslim Spain, Philadelphia, 1973– .Bel, A. Le religion musulman en Berberie, I, Paris, 1938.Berques, J. Ulémas, fondateurs, insurgés du Maghreb, Paris, 1982.Bikhazi, R. and Gervers, M. (eds.) Conversion and Continuity: Indigenous Christian

Communities in Islamic Lands, Toronto, 1990.Burns, R. Muslims, Christians and Jews in the Crusader Kingdom of Valencia, Cambridge, 1984.Bookin-Weiner, J. The ‘Sallee Rovers’: Morocco and the Corsairs in the seventeenth century. In

The Middle East and North Africa, New York, 1990.Boswell, J. The Royal Treasure. Muslim communities under the Crown of Aragon in the four-

teenth century, New Haven, 1977.Coope, J.A. The Martyrs of Cordoba, Nebraska, 1995.Dozy, R. Recherches sur l’histoire et la littérature de l’Espagne pendant le moyen age, Leiden,

1881.Echevarria, A. The Fortress of Faith. The Attitude towards Muslims in Fifteenth Century Spain,

Leiden, 1999.Frank, D. The Jews of Medieval Islam, Leiden, 1994.Gerber, J. Jewish Society in Fes 1450–1700, Leiden, 1980.Guichard, P. Structures sociales ‘orientales’ et ‘occidentales’ dans l’Espagne musulmane, Paris,

1977.Jayyusi, Salma Khadra (ed.), The Legacy of Muslim Spain, two vols, Leiden, Brill, 1994.Lacoste, Y. General characteristics and fundamental structures of medieval North African soci-

ety. Economies et Sociétés III, 1974.Le Tourneau, R. Fez in the Age of the Marinids, trans. B. Clement, Norman Oklahoma, 1961.Lewicki, T. Prophétes, devins et magiciens chez les Berbéres mediévaux. Folia Orientalia,

Cracow, VII, 1965 & 1966: 3–27.Lourie, E. Crusade and Colonisation. Muslims, Jews and Christians under the Crown of Aragon,

Aldershot, 1990.Meyerson, M. The Muslims of the Kingdom of Valencia under Fernando and Isabel, Berkeley, 1991.Millet-Gérard, D. Chrétiens mozarabes et culture islamique dans l’Espagne des VIII–IX siècles,

Paris, 1984.Nirenberg, D. Communities of Violence: Persecution of Minorities in the Middle Ages, Princeton,

1996.Norris, H. The Berbers in Arabic Literature, London, Longman, 1982.Powell, J.M. (ed.), Muslims under Latin Rule 1100–1300, Princeton, 1990.Reilly, B. (ed.) Santiago, Saint-Denis and St. Peter, New York, 1985.Roth, N. The Jews, Visigoths and Muslims in Medieval Spain, Leiden, 1994.Spivakovsky, E. The Jewish presence in Granada. Journal of Medieval History, 2, 1976.Tolan, J. V. (ed.) Medieval Christian Perceptions of Islam, New York, 1996.Torres-Balbas, L. Ciudades Hispano-Musulmanas, Madrid, 1985.Urvoy, D. Le Monde des Ulemas andalous du V/XI au VII/XIII siècles, Geneva, 1978.Watt, W.M. The Influence of Islam on Medieval Europe, Edinburgh, 1972.Wolf, K. Christian Martyrs in Muslim Spain, Cambridge, 1988.

27

Art and ArchitectureJunta de Andalucia, Arquitectura en al-Andalus, Madrid, 1995.Barrucand, M. and Bednorz, A. Moorish Architecture in Andalusia,Cologne, 1992.Bennison, A.K. Madînat al-Zahrâ’: Showpiece of the Umayyad Caliphate of Córdoba. In M.

Macdonald (ed.), Spain: A Historical and Cultural Guide, Melbourne, 1998.Blair, S. & Bloom, J. The Art and Architecture of Islam, 1250–1800, Pelican History of Art,

1994.Bloom, J. Minaret: Symbol of Islam, Oxford, 1989.Dickie, J. The Alhambra, London, 1998.Dickie, J. The Hispano-Arab Garden, its Philosophy and Function. BSOAS 31, 1968.Dodds, J. Architecture and Ideology in Muslim Spain, London, 1991.Golvin, L. La Madrasa médiévale, Aix-en-Provence, 1995.Golvin, L. & Hill, D. Islamic Architecture in North Africa, London, 1976.Grabar, O. The Alhambra, London, 1978.Grabar, O. & Ettinghausen, R. The Art and Architecture of Islam 650–1250, Pelican History of

Art, 1987.Hillenbrand. R. Islamic Architecture: Form, Function and Meaning, Edinburgh, 1994.Ruggles, D. The Mirador in Abbasid and Hispano-Umayyad garden typology. Muqarnas 7, 1990:

73–83.Stierlin, H. Islam: Early Architecture from Baghdad to Cordoba, Cologne, 1996.

There are several other useful surveys of Islamic art and architecture, and works on aspects of west-ern Islamic architecture, including the Alhambra, which students may wish to consult.

PAPER 17. GOVERNANCE AND COMMUNITY IN ENGLAND, 1550–1800

This paper draws together social history, political history and the history of political thought. It doesthis by investigating the practice of governance and ideas about governance in early modern England.The emphasis is upon ‘low’ rather than ‘high’ politics: upon the ways in which authority was exercisedin parishes, towns and counties, rather than at Westminster and Whitehall. The patterns and burdens oflocal government will be examined, from the work of the justice of the peace to that of the parish consta-ble, and from the role of the grand jury to the management of the poor law. The findings of historianswho have reconstructed small-scale communities will be juxtaposed with those who have exploredrhetorics of magistracy and ideals of civic participation. Humanist conceptions of corporate self-govern-ment and the idea of England as a ‘monarchical republic’ will be assessed.

The paper includes consideration of several models of political participation: collective protest andcommunal ceremonial (crowds, riots, petitions, parades, feasts); the law (common involvement in thecriminal process, in juries and the courts); electioneering (the franchise and party politics in theconstituencies); officeholding (mayors and aldermen, churchwardens and overseers, sheriffs and mili-tia lieutenants); and the idea of an emerging ‘public sphere’ (clubs, associations, coffee houses andprinted media). There will also be an opportunity to consider nineteenth and twentieth century histori-cal and theoretical approaches to communal self-government.

The reading list is organised under thirteen supervision topics arranged in three sections (togetherwith introductory reading and some printed primary material). It is strongly advised that those takingthe paper study the first topic from each of the three sections (i.e. topics 1, 5, and 10), plus at leastone further topic from each section. There will be 16 lectures and some classes. The classes willinclude discussion of primary sources. This reading list is indicative: a fuller and updated bibliographyis available on request.

Introductory readingJ.S. Cockburn and Thomas A. Green, eds., Twelve Good Men and True: The Criminal Trial Jury

in England, 1200–1600 (Princeton, NJ, 1988). Chs. by Lawson, Cockburn, Roberts, Beattie,King, Hay.

Patrick Collinson, De Republica Anglorum: or, History with the Politics Put Back (Pamphlet,Cambridge, 1990). Repr. in Elizabethan Essays (London, 1994).

David Eastwood, Government and Community in the English Provinces, 1700–1870 (London,1997).

Anthony Fletcher, Reform in the Provinces: The Government of Stuart England (New Haven,1986).

28

Paul Griffiths, Adam Fox and Steve Hindle, eds., The Experience of Authority in Early ModernEngland (London, 1996).

Cynthia B. Herrup, The Common Peace: Participation and the Criminal Law in Seventeenth-Century England (Cambridge, 1987).

Joan Kent, ‘The Centre and the Localities: State Formation and Parish Government in England,c.1640–1740’, Historical Journal, 38 (1995), pp. 363–404.

Paul Langford, Public Life and the Propertied Englishman, 1689–1798 (Oxford, 1991).Markku Peltonen, Classical Humanism and Republicanism in English Political Thought

(Cambridge, 1995).Quentin Skinner, Liberty before Liberalism (Cambridge, 1998).Paul Slack, From Reformation to Improvement: Public Welfare in Early Modern England

(Oxford, 1999).E.P. Thompson, ‘Custom, Law and Common Right’, in Customs in Common (London, 1991).Keith Wrightson, ‘Two Concepts of Order: Justices, Constables and Jurymen in Seventeenth-

Century England’, in John Brewer and John Styles, eds., An Ungovernable People: TheEnglish and their Law in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries (London, 1980).

Sidney and Beatrice Webb, The Parish and the County (vol.1 of English Local Government fromthe Revolution to the Municipal Corporations Act) (London, 1906; repr. 1963).

Section A: Communities and Governance1. Parishes

J.V. Beckett, A History of Laxton (Oxford, 1989), pp. 26–35, 95–6, 121–3, 153–61.J.S. Craig, ‘Co-operation and Initiatives: Elizabethan Churchwardens and the Parish Accounts of

Mildenhall’, Social History, 18 (1993), pp. 357–80.David Eastwood, Government and Community in the English Provinces, 1700–1870 (London,

1997).David Eastwood, Governing Rural England: Tradition and Transformation in Local Government,

1780–1840 (Oxford, 1994).Steve Hindle, The State and Social Charge in Early Modern England, 1550–1690 (London, 2000),

Ch. 8.Steve Hindle, ‘Hierarchy and Community in the Elizabethan Parish: the Swallowfield Articles of

1596’, Historical Journal, 42 (1999), pp. 835–51.Joan Kent, ‘The Centre and the Localities: State Formation and Parish Government in England,

c.1640–1740’, Historical Journal, 38 (1995), pp. 363–404.Joan Kent, ‘The Rural ‘Middling Sort’ in Early Modern England, c.1640–1740: Some Economic,

Political and Socio-cultural Characteristics’, Rural History, 10 (1999), pp. 19–54.Gwyneth Nair, Highley: The Development of a Community, 1550–1880 (Oxford, 1988), ch. 6.S.J. Wright, ed., Parish, Church and People: Local Studies in Lay Religion, 1350–1750 (London,

1988). Chs. by Palliser, Alldridge, Barry.Keith Wrightson, ‘The Politics of the Parish in Early Modern England’, in Paul Griffiths, Adam

Fox and Steve Hindle, eds., The Experience of Authority in Early Modern England (London,1996).

Keith Wrightson and David Levine, Poverty and Piety in an English Village: Terling, 1525–1700(Oxford, 1979, 1995).

2. TownsJonathan Barry, ed., The Tudor and Stuart Town: A Reader in Urban History, 1530–1688

(London, 1990). Chs. by Clark, Howell, Sacks, Palliser.Peter Borsay, The English Urban Renaissance: Culture and Society in the Provincial Town,

1660–1720 (Oxford, 1989).Peter Borsay, ‘“All the Towns’s a Stage”: Urban Ritual and Ceremony, 1660–1800’, in

Peter Clark, ed., The Transformation of English Provincial Towns, 1600–1800 (London, 1984).

John T. Evans, Seventeenth-century Norwich: Politics, Religion and Government, 1620–1690(Oxford, 1979).

Perry Gauci, Politics and Society in Great Yarmouth, 1660–1722 (Oxford, 1996).Jeremy Goring, ‘The Fellowship of the Twelve in Elizabethan Lewes’, Sussex Archaeological

Collections, 119 (1981), pp. 157–72.Paul Halliday, Dismembering the Body Politic: Partisan Politics in England’s Towns, 1650–1730

(Cambridge, 1998).

29

Wallace T. MacCaffrey, Exeter, 1540–1640 (Cambridge, Mass., 1958).D.M. Palliser, Tudor York (Oxford, 1979).David Harris Sacks, The Widening Gate: Bristol and the Atlantic Economy, 1450–1700 (Berkeley,

1991), chs. 3, 5.Rosemary Sweet, The Writing of Urban History in Eighteenth-Century England (Oxford, 1997).Robert Tittler, Architecture and Power: The Town Hall and the English Urban Community,

c.1500–1640 (Oxford, 1991).Robert Tittler, The Reformation and the Towns in England: Politics and Political Culture,

c.1540–1640 (Oxford, 1998).David Underdown, Fire from Heaven: Life in an English Town in the Seventeenth Century

(London, 1992).

3. CountiesPeter Clark, English Provincial Society from the Reformation to the Revolution: Relgion, Politics

and Society in Kent, 1500–1640 (Hassocks, 1977)Alan Everitt, The Local Community and the Great Rebellion, (Historical Association Pamphlet,

1969).Anthony Fletcher, Reform in the Provinces: The Government of Stuart England (New Haven,

1986).Anthony Fletcher, A County Community in Peace and War: Sussex 1600–1660 (London, 1975)G.C.F. Foster, ‘Government in Provincial England’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society,

33 (1983), pp. 29–48.Cynthia Herrup, ‘The Counties and the Country’, Social History, 8 (1983), pp. 169–81.Clive Holmes, ‘The County Community in Stuart Historiography’, Journal of British Studies, 19

(1980), pp. 54–73.Clive Holmes, Seventeenth-Century Lincolnshire (Lincoln, 1980).Ann Hughes, Politics and Society in Warwickshire 1620–1660 (Cambridge, 1987).Philip Jenkins, The Making of a Ruling Class: The Gentry of Glamorgan 1660–1780 (Cambridge,

1983).John Morrill, Cheshire, 1630–1660 (London, 1974).John Morrill, The Revolt of the Provinces (London, 1976).A. Hassell Smith, County and Court: Government and Politics in Norfolk, 1558–1603 (Oxford, 1974).

4. LondonIan W. Archer, The Pursuit of Stability: Social Relations in Elizabethan London (Cambridge,

1991).Jeremy Boulton, Neighbourhood and Society: A London Suburb in the Seventeenth Century

(Cambridge, 1987).Gary S. De Krey, A Fractured Society: The Politics of London in the First Age of Party,

1688–1715 (Oxford, 1985).Frank F. Foster, The Politics of Stability: A Portrait of the Rulers of Elizabethan London (London,

1997).Mark Goldie, ‘The Hilton Gang and the Purge of London in the 1680s’, in Howard Nenner, ed.,

Politics and the Political Imagination in Later Stuart Britain (Woodbridge, Suffolk, 1997).Paul Griffiths, ‘Secrecy and Authority in Late Sixteenth and Seventeenth-Century London’,

Historical Journal, 40 (1997), pp. 925–51.Tim Harris, London Crowds in the Reign of Charles II (Cambridge, 1987).Keith Lindley, Popular Politics and Religion in Civil War London (London, 1997).Valerie Pearl, London and the Outbreak of the Puritan Revolution (Oxford, 1961), ch. 2.Valerie Pearl, ‘Change and Stability in Seventeenth-Century London’, London Journal, 5 (1979),

pp. 3–34.Steve Rappaport, Worlds within Worlds: Structures of Life in Sixteenth-Century London

Cambridge, 1989).Nicholas Rogers, Whigs and Cities: Popular Politics in the Age of Walpole and Pitt (Oxford, 1989).F.H.W. Sheppard, Local Government in St Marylebone, 1688–1835 (London, 1958).

Section B: Models of participation5. Offices and officeholding

E. Carlson, ‘The Origins, Function and Status of the Office of Churchwarden’, in MargaretSpufford, ed., The World of Rural Dissenters, 1520–1725 (Cambridge, 1995).

30

Peter Clark, ‘The Civic Leaders of Gloucester, 1500–1800’, in Peter Clark, ed., The Transformationof English Provincial Towns, 1600–1800 (London, 1984).

J.S. Cockburn and Thomas A. Green, eds., Twelve Good Men and True: The Criminal Trial Juryin England, 1200–1600 (Princeton, NJ, 1988). Chs. by Lawson, Cockburn, Roberts, Beattie,King, Hay.

Richard Cust, ‘Honour and Officeholding in Early Stuart England: The Case of Beaumont v.Hastings’, Past and Present, 149 (1995), pp. 57–94.

Anthony Fletcher, ‘Honour, Reputation and Local Officeholding in Elizabethan and StuartEngland’, in Anthony Fletcher and John Stevenson, eds., Order and Disorder in Early ModernEngland (Cambridge, 1985).

G.C.F. Forster, The East Riding Justices of the Peace in the Seventeenth Century (East YorkshireLocal History Society Pamphlet, 1973).

Lionel K.J. Glassey, ‘Local Government’, in Clyve Jones, ed., Britain in the First Age of Party,1680–1750 (London, 1987).

J.H. Gleason, The Justices of the Peace in England, 1558–1640 (Oxford, 1969).Joan Kent, The English Village Constable, 1580–1642 (Oxford, 1986).Norma Landau, The Justice of the Peace, 1679–1760 (Berkeley, 1984).John Morill, The Cheshire Grand Jury, 1625–1659 (Leicester, 1976).S.K. Roberts, ‘Initiative and Control: the Devon Quarter Sessions Grand Jury, 1649–1670’,

Bulletin of the Institute of Historical Research, 57 (1984), pp. 165–77.Paul Seaward, ‘Gilbert Sheldon, the London Vestries, and the Defence of the Church’, in Tim

Harris, Paul Seaward and Mark Goldie, eds., The Politics of Religion in Restoration England(Oxford, 1990).

Keith Wrightson, ‘Two Concepts of Order: Justices, Constables and Jurymen in Seventeenth-Century England’, in John Brewer and John Styles, eds., An Ungovernable People: TheEnglish and their Law in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries (London, 1980).

6. Parliamentary electioneering and the franchiseJ.C.D. Clarke, English Society, 1688–1832 (Cambridge, 1985), ch.1.Geoffrey Holmes, The Electorate and the National Will in the First Age of Party (Pamphlet, Lancaster,

1976). Repr. in his Politics, Religion and Society in England, 1679–1742 (London, 1986).Derek Hirst, The Representative of the People?: Voters and Voting in England under the Early

Stuarts (Cambridge, 1975).Mark Kishlansky, Parliamentary Selection: Social and Political Choice in Early Modern England

(Cambridge, 1986).Norma Landau, ‘Independence, Deference and Voter Participation: The Electorate in Early

Eighteenth Century Kent’, Historical Journal, 22 (1979), pp. 561–83.C.B. Macpherson, The Political Theory of Possessive Individualism (Oxford, 1962), pt 3.F. O’Gorman, Voters, Patrons and Parties: The Unreformed Electoral System in Hanoverian

England, 1734–1832 (Oxford 1989).J.A. Phillips, Electoral Behaviour in Unreformed England: Plumpers, Splitters and Straights

(Princeton, 1982).J.H. Plumb, ‘The Growth of the Electorate in England from 1600 to 1715’, Past and Present, 45

(1969), pp. 90–116.Nicholas Rogers, Whigs and Cities: Popular Politics in the Age of Walpole and Pitt (Oxford, 1989).W.A. Speck, Tory and Whig: The Struggle in the Constituencies, 1701–1715 (London, 1970).Keith Thomas, ‘The Levellers and the Franchise’, in G.E. Aylmer, ed., The Interregnum: The

Quest for Settlement, 1646–1660 (London, 1972).David Wootten, ‘The Levellers’, in John Dunn, ed., Democracy: The Unfinished Journey (Oxford,

1992).

7. Collective protest: carnival, crowds and riotsIan Gilmour, Riot, Risings and Revolution: Governance and Violence in Eighteenth-Century

England (London, 1992).Steve Hindle, ‘Persuasian and Protest in the Caddington Common Enclosure’, Past and Present,

158 (1998), pp. 37–78.Geoffrey Holmes, ‘The Sacheverell Riots’, Past and Present, 72 (1976)Thomas W. Laqueur, ‘Crowds, Carnival and the State in English Executions, 1604–1868’, in A.L.

Beier, David Cannadine and James M. Rosenheim, eds., The First Modern Society: Essays inEnglish History in Honour of Lawrence Stone (Cambridge, 1989).

Keith Lindley, Fenland Riots and the English Revolution (London, 1981).

31

R.B. Outhwaite, Dearth, Public Policy and Social Disturbance in England, 1550–1800 (1991).Nicholas Rogers, Crowds, Culture and Politics in Georgian Britain (Oxford, 1998).Buchanan Sharp, In Contempt of all Authority: Riot in the West, 1586–1660 (Berkeley, 1980).John Stevenson, Popular Disturbances in England, 1700–1832 (London, 2nd edn., 1992).John Stevenson, ‘The “Moral Economy” of the English Crowd: Myth and Reality’, in Anthony

Fletcher and John Stevenson, eds., Order and Disorder in Early Modern England (Cambridge,1985).

E.P. Thompson, ‘The Moral Economy of the English Crowd in the Eighteenth Century’, Past andPresent, 50 (1971), pp. 76–136.

David Underdown, Revel, Riot and Rebellion: Popular Politics and Culture in England,1603–1660 (Oxford, 1985).

John Walter, ‘Grain Riots’ in John Brewer and John Styles, eds., An Ungovernable People: TheEnglish and their Law in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries (London, 1980).

John Walter, ‘A Rising of the People?: The Oxfordshire Rising of 1596’, Past and Present, 107(1985), pp. 90–143.

John Walter, Understanding Popular Violence in the English Revolution: The ColchesterPlunderers (Cambridge, 1999).

8. Common law, crime, custom and the courtsJ.M. Beattie, Crime and the Courts in England, 1660–1800 (Oxford, 1986), chs. 2, 7.Bob Bushaway, By Rite: Custom, Ceremony and Community in England, 1700–1880 (London,

1982).Paul Griffiths, Adam Fox and Steve Hindle, eds., The Experience of Authority in Early Modern

England (London, 1996). Chs. by Hindle and Wood.Douglas Hay et al., Albion’s Fatal Tree: Crime and Society in Eighteenth-Century England

(London, 1975).Cynthia B. Herrup, The Common Peace: Participation and the Criminal Law in Seventeenth-

Century England (Cambridge, 1987).Cynthia B. Herrup, ‘Law and Morality in Seventeenth-Century England’, Past and Present, 106

(1985), pp. 102–23.Joan Kent, ‘“Folk Justice” and Royal Justice in the Early Seventeenth Century: A Charivari in

the Midlands’, Midland History, 8 (1993), pp. 70–85.J.H. Langbain, ‘Albion’s Fatal Flaws’, Past and Present, 98 (1983), pp. 96–120.Craig Muldrew, ‘The Culture of Reconciliation: Community and the Settlement of Economic

Disputes in Early Modern England’, Historical Journal, 39 (1996), pp. 915–42.J.M. Neeson, Commoners: Common Right, Enclosure and Social Change in England, 1700–1820

(Cambridge, 1993).J.A. Sharpe, Crime in Early Modern England, 1550–1750 (London, 1984).J.A. Sharpe, ‘The People and the Law’, in Barry Reay, ed., Popular Culture in Seventeenth-

Century England (London, 1985).E.P. Thompson, ‘Custom, Law and Common Right’, in Customs in Common (London, 1991).Andy Wood, ‘The Place of Custom in Plebian Political Culture: England, 1550–1800’, Social

History, 22 (1997), pp. 46–60.Andy Wood, The Politics of Social Conflict: The Peak Country, 1520–1770 (Cambridge,

1999).

9. Political association and the public sphereJonathan Barry and Chris Brooks, eds., The Middling Sort of People: Culture, Society and Politics

in England, 1550–1800 (London, 1994). Chs. by Barry, Rogers and D’Cruze.Marvin B. Becker, The Emergence of Civil Society in the Eighteenth Century (Bloomington,

Indiana, 1994).John Brewer, Party Ideiology and Popular Politics at the Accession of George III (Cambridge,

1976), chs. 8–9.Peter Borsay, The English Urban Renaissance: Culture and Society in the Provincial Town,

1660–1770 (Oxford, 1989).Dario Castiglione and Lesley Sharpe, eds., Shifting the Boundaries: Transformation of the Languages

of Public and Private in the Eighteenth Century (Exeter, 1995). Chs. by Brewer and Barry.Peter Clark, British Clubs and Societies, 1580–1800 (Oxford, 2000).Richard Cust, ‘News and Politics in Early Seventeenth-Century England’, Past and Present, 112

(1986), pp. 60–90.

32

J.A.W. Gunn, ‘The Fourth Estate’ and ‘Public Spirit to Public Opinion’ in Beyond Liberty andProperty (Kingston, Ontario, 1983).

Eckhart Hellmuth, ed., The Transformation of Political Culture: England and Germany in theLate Eighteenth Century (Oxford, 1990). Chs. by Hellmuth (both), Rogers, Wilson, Phillips,Money.

Newton Key, ‘The Political Culture and Political Rhetoric of County Feasts and Fast Sermons,1654–1714’, Journal of British Studies, 33 (1994), pp. 223–56.

Lawrence E. Klein, Shaftesbury and the Culture of Politeness: Moral Disourse and CulturalPolitics in Early Eighteenth-Century England (Cambridge, 1994).

Paul Langford, Public Life and the Propertied Englishman, 1689–1798 (Oxford, 1991).F.J. Levy, ‘How Information Spread Among the Gentry, 1550–1640’, Journal of British Studies,

21 (1982), pp. 11–35.Steve Pincus, ‘“Coffee Politicians Does Create”: Coffeehouses and Restoration Political Culture’,

Journal of Modern History, 67 (1995), pp. 807–34.Susan Staves, ‘Investments, Votes and Bribes: Women as Shareholders in the Chartered National

Companies’, in Hilda L. Smith, ed., Women Writers and the Early Modern British PoliticalTradition (Cambridge, 1998).

Kathleen Wilson, The Sense of the People: Politics, Culture and Imperialism in England,1715–1785 (Cambridge, 1995)

David Zaret, ‘Religion, Science and Printing in the Public Sphere in Seventeenth-CenturyEngland’, in Craig Calhoun, ed., Habermas and the Public Sphere (Cambridge, Mass., 1992).

Section C: Concepts of Governance10. The monarchical republic and the rhetoric of magistracy

David Armitage, Armand Himy and Quentin Skinner, eds., Milton and Republicanism(Cambridge, 1995), pt 1.

Patrick Collinson, De Republica Anglorum: or, History with the Politics Put Back (Cambridge,1990). Repr. in Elizabethan Essays (London, 1994).

Patrick Collinson, ‘The Monarchical Republic of Queen Elizabeth I’, Bulletin of the John RylandsLibrary, 69 (1987), pp. 394–424. Repr. in Elizabethan Essays (London, 1994).

Patrick Collinson, ‘The Elizabethan Exclusion Crisis and the Elizabethan Polity’, Proceedings ofthe British Academy, 84 (1994), pp. 51–92.

Richard Cust and Peter G. Lake, ‘Sir Richard Grosvenor and the Rhetoric of Magistracy’, Bulletinof the Institute of Historical Research, 129 (1981), pp. 40–53.

John Guy, ‘The Rhetoric of Counsel in Early Modern England’, in Dale Hoak, ed., Tudor PoliticalCulture (Cambridge, 1995).

V.M. Larminie, ‘The Godly Magistrate: The Private Philosophy and Public Life of Sir JohnNewdigate, 1571–1610’, Dugdale Society Occasional Papers, 28 (1982).

J. Morrill, P. Slack and D. Woolf, eds., Public Duty and Private Conscience in Seventeenth-Century England (Oxford, 1993). Chs. by Cross and Slack.

David Norbrook, Writing the English Republic: Poetry, Rhetoric and Politics, 1627–1660(Cambridge, 1998).

Markku Peltonen, Classical Humanism and Republicanism in English Political Thought,1570–1640 (Cambridge, 1995).

Jonathan Scott, Albernon Sidney and the English Republic, 1623–1677 (Cambridge, 1988), pt 1.Quentin Skinner, Liberty before Liberalism (Cambridge, 1998).David Wootten, ed., Republicanism, Liberty and Commercial Society, 1649–1776 (Stanford,

1994). Intro. (Wootton) and pt 1 (Worden).

11. Regulating the poor and reforming mannersDudley Bahlman, The Moral Revolution of 1688 (New Haven, 1957).Shelley Burtt, Virtue Transformed: Political Argument in England, 1688–1740 (Cambridge, 1992).Tony Claydon, William III and the Godly Revolution (Cambridge, 1996).Martin Daunton, ed., Charity, Self-Interest and Welfare in the English Past (London, 1996). Chs.

by Daunton, Jones, Innes, Smith.Felicity Heal, Hospitality in Early Modern England (Oxford, 1990), ch.8.Steve Hindle, ‘Power, Poor Relief and Social Relations’, Historical Journal, 41 (1998), pp. 67–96.Joanna Innes, ‘Politics and Morals: The Reformation of Manners Movement in Later Eighteenth-

Century England’, in E. Hellmuth, ed., The Transformation of Political Culture: England andGermany in the Late Eighteenth Century (Oxford, 1990).

33

Robert B. Shoemaker, ‘Reforming the City: The Reformation of Manners Campaign in London,1690–1738’, in Lee Davison, Tim Hitchcock, Tim Keirn and Robert B. Shoemaker, eds.,Stilling the Grumbling Hive: The Response to Social and Economic Problems in England,1689–1750 (Stroud, 1992).

Martin Ingram, ‘Reformation of Manners in Early Modern England’, in P. Griffiths, A. Fox andS. Hindle, eds., The Experience of Authority in Early Modern England (1996).

Lynn Hollen Lees, The Solidarities of Strangers: The English Poor Laws and the People,1700–1948 (Cambridge, 1998), pt 1.

Paul Slack, Poverty and Policy in Tudor and Stuart England (Oxford, 1988).Paul Slack, The English Poor Law, 1531–1782 (Oxford, 1990).Paul Slack, From Reformation to Improvement: Public Welfare in Early Modern England

(Oxford, 1999).Margaret Spufford, ‘Puritanism and Social Control?’, in Anthony Fletcher and John Stevenson,

eds., Order and Disorder in Early Modern England (Cambridge, 1985).Margo Todd, Christian Humanism and the Puritan Social Order (Cambridge, 1987).

12. The Victorian debateEugenio Biagini, ‘Liberalism and Direct Democracy: John Stuart Mill and the Model of Ancient

Athens’, in E.F. Biagini, ed., Citizenship and Community, (Cambridge, 1996).J.W. Burrow, A Liberal Descent: Victorian Historians and the English Past (Cambridge, 1981),

pt 3.J.W. Burrow, ‘“The Village Community” and the Uses of History in Late Nineteenth-Century

England’, in Neal McKendrick, ed., Historical Perspectives (London, 1974).John Richard Green, Stray Studies from England and Italy (2nd series, 1903), pp. 94–103, 113–25.John Richard Green, Mrs., Town Life in the Fifteenth Century, 2 vols. (London, 1894), vol. 1,

chs. 1, 4–5; vol. 2, chs. 9–11.Henry Maine, Popular Government (London, 1885), chs. 1–3.F.W. Maitland, Township and Borough (London, 1896), pp. 1–98.J.S. Mill, Considerations on Representative Government (London, 1861).Joshua Toulmin Smith, Local Self-Government and Centralization (London, 1851), chs. 1–3,

14–15.Herbert Spencer, The Proper Sphere of Government (1843) and The Man Versus the State (1884),

in John Offer, ed., Spencer: Political Writings (Cambridge, 1994).Sidney and Beatrice Webb, The Parish and the County (vol. 1 of English Local Government from

the Revolution to the Municipal Corporations Act (London, 1906; repr. 1963).

13. Contemporary republican and democratic theoryBenjamin Barber, Strong Democracy: Participatory Politics for a New Age (Berkeley, 1984).Richard Dagger, Civic Virtues: Rights, Citizenship and Republican Liberalism (Oxford, 1997).James Fishkin, Democracy and Deliberation (Yale, 1971).Moses Finley, Democracy, Ancient and Modern (2nd edn., London, 1985).Bernard Manin, The Principles of Representative Government (Cambridge, 1997).Adrian Oldfield, Citizenship and Community: Civic Republicanism in the Modern World

(London, 1990).Carole Pateman, Participation and Democratic Theory (Cambridge, 1970), chs. 1–2.Alan Patten, ‘The Republican Critique of Liberalism’, British Journal of Political Science, 26

(1996), pp. 25–44.Philip Pettit, Republicanism: A Theory of Freedom and Government (Oxford, 1997).Philip Pettit, ‘Liberalism and Republicanism’, Australian Journal of Political Science, 28 (1993),

pp. 162–89.Michael Sandel, Democracy’s Discontent: America in Search of a Public Philosophy (Harvard,

1996).

Printed primary sourcesD.H. Allen, ed., Essex Quarter Sessions Order Book, 1652–1661 (Essex Record Office, 1974).Ambrose Barnes, Memoirs of the Life of Mr Ambrose Barnes (Surtees Society, vol. 50, 1867),

ch. 4.Martyn Bennett, ed., A Nottinghamshire Village in Peace and War: The Accounts of the

Constables of Upton, 1640–1666 (Nottingham, 1995).John Clare, The Parish (1820; Penguin, 1985).

34

H. Hampton Copnall, ed., Nottinghamshire County Records (Nottingham, 1915).F.M. Cowe, ed., Wimbledon Vestry Minutes, 1736, 1743–1788 (Surrey Record Society, vol.25, 1964).J.C. Cox, Three Centuries of Derbyshire Annals, 2 vols. (London, 1890), vol. 1, pp. 17–124.Elizabeth Crittall, ed., The Justiciary Notebook of William Hunt, 1744–1749 (Wiltshire Record

Society, 1982).R.M. Dunn, ed., Norfolk Lieutenancy Journal, 1660–1676 (Norfolk Record Society, 1977).F.G. Emmison, ed., Early Essex Town Meetings (London, 1970).R.S. France, ed., ‘A High Constable’s Register, 1681’, in Transactions of the Historic Society of

Lancashire and Cheshire, 107 (1956), pp. 55–87.E.M. Halcrow, ed., [Peter Leicester’s] Charges to the Grand Jury at Quarter Sessions, 1600–1677

(Chetham Society, 3rd ser., vol. 5, 1953).James Harrington, The Commonwealth of Oceana, ed. J.G.A. Pocock (Cambridge, 1992).D.E. Howell James, ed., Norfolk Quarter Sessions Order Book, 1650–1657 (Norfolk Record

Society, 1955).John C. Jeaffreson, ed., Middlesex County Records, 4 vols. (London, 1965).H.C. Johnson and N.J. Williams, eds., Warwick County Records, vol.9: ‘Quarter Sessions Records,

1690–1695’ (Warwick, 1964), esp. pp.xxxvii–xlv (William Bromley’s justice notebook).R.F. Hunnisett, ed., Sussex Coroners’ Inquests, 1558–1603 (London, 1996).Louis A. Knafla, ed., Kent at Law 1602 (London, 1994).William Lambarde, Ephemeris, in C. Read, ed., William Lambarde and Local Government

(Ithaca, 1962), pp. 15–52.Goerges Lamoine, ed., Charges to the Grand Jury, 1689–1803 (London: Camden Society, vol.

43, 1992).John Locke, ‘The Fundamental Constitutions of Carolina’ and ‘An Essay on the Poor Law’, in

John Locke, Political Essays, ed. Mark Goldie (Cambridge, 1997), pp. 160–98.B.W. Quintrell, ed., Proceedings of the Lancashire Justices of the Peace at the Sheriff’s Table during

the Assizes Week, 1578–1694 (Record Society of Lancashire and Cheshire, vol. 121, 1981).R.C. Richardson and T.B. James, eds., The Urban Experience, A Sourcebook: English, Scottish

and Welsh Towns, 1450–1700 (Manchester, 1983).Thomas Turner, The Diary of Thomas Turner, 1754–1765, ed. David Vaisey (Oxford, 1984).

PAPER 18. THE CULTURAL HISTORY OF EARLY MODERN CITIES: 1450–1789

This paper offers students the opportunity to experiment with the writing of cultural history. It takesas its focus the early modern city, a subject with a massive secondary literature, and a rich variety ofsource materials, both visual and verbal.

Throughout the early modern period, cities never accommodated more than 15% of the Europeanpopulation, and yet our historical imaginings have tended to be dominated by urban culture. This is notentirely anachronistic, for this period witnessed a growing awareness of the importance of the cities,and the beginnings of the modern tourist’s desire to collect impressions of the most famous urban centres.By concentrating on attitudes and values, perceptions and images, students will be compelled to thinkabout historical method. In a subject which is marked so deeply by grand narratives – from the birth ofcivic humanism to the rise of the court, from the printing press to the coffee-house, from Reformationto secularization – we will encourage students to formulate new narratives for interpreting life in earlymodern cities. The lectures will offer a variety of methodological frameworks, broadly derived fromthe new cultural history. We will focus, for example, on the ways in which concepts of purity definedthe boundaries of community, on the symbolic or imaginary exercise of power, on the importance ofritual and honour in regulating urban life. But while students will be exposed to inspiring historio-graphical models, their supervision work will require them to make imaginative use of the availablecase-studies in order to formulate their own cultural histories of particular cities. This element of special-ization will give students the chance to immerse themselves in the culture of three or four cities: theirchoices might include such colourful examples as Venice, Nuremberg, and Seville, or Paris, Rome, andMadrid, or Prague, Antwerp, and Amsterdam. In the exam, the ability to apply a range of methods inthe context of specialized case-studies will be sought.

The chronological limits of the course are 1450–1789. Geographically, we shall concentrate onEurope, including the British Isles, with occasional forays into those cities of the New World, whichwere created by European settlers. While the ability to read texts in a foreign language may be usefulin studying for this paper, it is not at all essential.

35

Primary SourcesTravel WritingsMichel de Montaigne, Travel JournalThomas Coryate, Crudities (1611); (London, 1978, facs edn.)Fynes Moryson, Itinerary Concerning his Ten Yeeres Travell (1617)Francis Bacon, ‘On Travel’, in The Essays, or Counsels Civil and Moral (1625)John Evelyn, The Diary of John Evelyn, 6 Volumes (Oxford, 1955 edn.); on Paris, Rome and VeniceGilbert Burnet, Some Letters (1682)Martin Lister, A Journey to Paris (1699)E. Bacco, Cesare D’Eugenio Caracciolo et al., Naples an early guide [Descrittione del Regno di

Napoli], ed. E. Gardiner (1991)Joseph Addison, Remarks on several parts of Italy, etc. in the years 1701, 1702, 1703Tobias Smollett, Travels through France and Italy (1766)Laurence Sterne, A Sentimental Journey through France and Italy (1768)P. Fabris, Raccolta di vari vestimenti ed arti del Regno di Napoli (1773)Johann Wolfgang Goethe, Italian Journey (1786)

Diaries, Letters and JournalismJ. Amelang (ed.), A Journal of a Plague Year: The Diary of the Barcelona Tanner Miquel Parets,

1651 (1991)Pierre de l’Estoile, Journal (ed. L.-R. Lefèvre, 4 Volumes, Paris, 1943–60)K. Höhlbaum (ed.), Das Buch Weinsberg (5 Volumes, 1886–1926); sixteenth-century merchant

from CologneS. Ozment (ed.), Magdalena and Balthasar: Letters of a Nuremberg Husband and Wife (New

Haven, 1989)S. Ozment (ed.), Three Behaim Boys: Growing Up in Early Modern Germany (New Haven, 1990)P. Seaver, Wallington’s World: A Puritan Artisan in Seventeenth-Century London (London, 1985)Samuel Pepys, The Diary of Samuel Pepys, 11 vols. (London, 1970–83); particular topics may

be pursued by using the excellent index.James Boswell, London Journal (1762–1763)Louis-Sébastien Mercier, Tableau de Paris (1781)Louis-Sébastien Mercier, ‘The Year 2440: A dream if ever there was one’ [1771], in R. Darnton,

The forbidden best-sellers of pre-revolutionary France (1996), pp. 300–336

Literary SourcesBen Jonson, Bartholomew FairJean de La Bruyère, The Characters; section on ‘the town’ Molière, Le bourgeois gentil’homme; George DandinA. Furetière, Le roman bourgeois (Paris, 1981); 1671 translation entitled Scarron’s City Romance

available on microfilm in the UL (Wing F2540) William Wycherley, The Country WifeCarlo Goldoni, Venetian TwinsG. Salgado (ed.), Coney Catchers and Bawdy Baskets (London, 1972)Charles-Louis Montesquieu, Persian Letters (1721)Jean-Jacques Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise (1761)N-E. Restif de la Bretonne, Le Paysan et la Paysanne Pervertis (1775); trans. as The Corrupted

Ones, ed. A. Hull Walton (1967)

OtherLeon Battista Alberti (1404–72), The Family in Renaissance Florence (1969 trans)Die Chroniken der deutschen Städte vom 14 bis 16 Jahrhundert, 36 vols (Leipzig, 1862–1931)D. Chambers and B. Pullan (eds.), Venice: A Documentary History (Oxford, 1992)Baldesar Castiglione The Book of the CourtierGiovanni Della Casa, GalateoD. Englander et al. (eds.), Culture and Belief in Europe, 1450–1600 (Oxford, 1990); section 2 on

Venice and AntwerpRaphael Holinshed, Chronicles of England, Scotland and Ireland (1587)T. Scott and B. Scribner, German Peasants’ War (New Jersey, 1991)A. Farge and M. Foucault, Le désordre des familles. Lettres de cachet des archives de la Bastille

(1982)

36

T. and E. Cohen (eds.), Words and Deeds in Renaissance Rome: Trials before the PapalMagistrates (1993)

P. Earle ‘A city full of people: men and women in London, 1650–1750’ (London, 1994)Vecellio’s Renaissance Costume Book (1977 edn.)

Secondary SourcesWhat is Cultural History?

J. Burckhardt, Civilization of the Renaissance in Italy (First published 1860)P. Burke, Varieties of Cultural History (Cambridge, 1997)R. Chartier, Cultural History: between Practices and Representations (Cambridge, 1988)J. Huizinga, Autumn of the Middle Ages (Chicago, 1996)L. Hunt (ed.), The New Cultural History (Berkeley, 1989)C. Schorske, Fin-de-Siècle Vienna: Politics and Culture (New York, 1979)K. Thomas, ‘Ways of Doing Cultural History’, in R. Sanders (ed.) Balans en Perspectief,

(Amsterdam-Atlanta), pp. 65–81

What is the City?A.Cowan, Urban Europe, 1500–1700 (London, 1998)P. Findlen, The Italian Renaissance (Oxford, 2002); Part 4 on citiesP. Findlen, Beyond Florence: The contours of medieval and early modern Italy (Stanford, 2002)C. Friedrichs, The Early Modern City, 1450–1750 (London, 1995)J. De Vries, European Urbanization 1500–1800 (London, 1984)M. Girouard, Cities and People: A Social and Architectural History (New Haven-London, 1985)R. Griffeth and C. Thomas (eds.), The City-State in Five Cultures (Santa Barbara, 1981)P. Griffifths and M. Jenner (eds), Londonopolis: essays in the cultural and social history of early

modern London (Manchester, 2002)S. Kolsky, ‘Culture and Politics in Renaissance Rome’, Renaissance Quarterly 40 (1987)R. T. LeGates and F. Stout (eds.) The City Reader (2nd edn. London, 2000)R. Mackenney, The City-State, 1500–1700 (London, 1980)M. Miles et al. (eds.), The City Cultures Reader (London, 2000)O. Ranum, Paris in the Age of Absolutism (Bloomington, 1979)C. Schorske, ‘The idea of the city in European thought: Voltaire to Spengler’, in O. Handlin and

J. Burchard (eds), The Historian and the City (1966); reprinted in Schorske, Thinking withHistory (Princeton, 1998)

Community and IdentityL.J. Abray, The People’s Reformation: Magistrates, Clergy, and Commons in Strasbourg,

1500–1598 (1985)J. Amelang, ‘People of the Ribera: Popular Politics and Neighbourhood Identity in Early Modern

Barcelona’, in B. Diefendorf and C. Hesse (eds.) Culture and Identity in Early Modern Europe1500–1800 (Ann Arbor, 1993)

J. Amelang (ed.), A Journal of a Plague Year: The Diary of the Barcelona Tanner Miquel Parets,1651 (1991)

B. Anderson, Imagined Communities: Reflections of the Origin and Spread of Nationalism(London-New York, 1983; Revised ed. 1991) Intro.

I. Archer, The Pursuit of Stability: Social Relations in Elizabethan London (Cambridge, 1991)J. Bilinkoff, The Avila of St Teresa: Religious Reform in a Sixteenth-Century City (Ithaca, 1989)G. Calvi, Histories of a Plague Year: The Social and Imaginary in Baroque Florence (1993)N. Davis, ‘The Sacred and the Body Social in Sixteenth-Century Lyon’, Past and Present 90

(1981)R.C. Davis, The War of the Fists: Popular Culture and Public Violence in Late Renaissance

Venice (New York, 1994)B. Diefendorf, Beneath the Cross: Catholics and Huguenots in Sixteenth-Century Paris (New

York, 1991)D. Garrioch, Neighbourhood and Community in Paris, 1740–1790 (1986)R. Hsia, Society and Religion in Munster (New Haven, 1984)D.V. and F.W. Kent, Neighbours and Neighbourhood in Renaissance Florence (New York, 1982)S. Rappaport, Worlds within Worlds: Structures of Life in Sixteenth-Century London (1989)P. Roberts, ‘Agencies Human and Divine: Fire in French Cities, 1520–1720’, in W. Naphy, P.

Roberts (eds.), Fear in Early Modern Society (1997)

37

B. Roeck, Eine Stadt in Krieg und Frieden: Studien zur Geschichte der Reichsstadt Augsburgzwischen Kalenderstreit und Paritat, 2 Volumes (1989); wonderful detail on how Catholicsand Protestants lived together in the decades around the Thirty Years’ War and on the socialstructure of a city dominated by weavers.

D. Sabean ‘Power in the Blood: Popular Culture and village discourse in early modern Germany’(Cambridge 1984)

R. Sennett, Flesh and Stone: The Body and the City in Western Civilisation 1994); esp. Ch. 7R. Scribner, ‘Communities and the Nature of Power’, in R. Scribner (ed.), Germany: A New Social

and Economic History, 1450–1630 (London, 1996)A. Shepard and P. Withington (eds.), Communities in Early Modern England (Manchester, 2000)G. Strauss, Nuremberg in the Sixteenth Century (1966)

RitualM. Aston, ‘Iconoclasm in England: Rites of Destruction by Fire’, in B. Scribner (ed.) Bilder und

Bildersturm im Spätmittelalter und in der frühen Neuzeit (Wiesbaden, 1990)C. Bell, Ritual Theory, Ritual Practice (Oxford, 1992)P. Burke, Popular Culture in Early Modern Europe (London, 1978); Ch. 7P. Burke, Historical Anthropology of Early-Modern Italy (Cambridge, 1987); Chs. 12–16N. Davis, Society and Culture in Early Modern France (Stanford, 1975); Chs. 4, 6S. Desan, ‘Crowds, community, and ritual in the work of E.P. Thompson and Natalie Davis’, in

L. Hunt (eds.), The New Cultural History (Berkeley, 1989)B. Diefendorf, Beneath the Cross: Catholics and Huguenots in Sixteenth-Century Paris (New

York, 1991); Ch. 2)E. Muir, Civic Ritual in Renaissance Venice (Princeton, 1981)E. Muir, Ritual in early modern Europe (Cambridge, 1997)M. Rubin, Corpus Christi: the Eucharist in late Medieval Culture (Cambridge, 1991)R. Trexler, Public Life in Renaissance Florence (New York, 1980)R. Trexler, ‘Ritual behaviour in Renaissance Florence: the Setting’, Medievalia et Humanistica:

Studies in Medieval and Renaissance Culture, new series 4 (1973); pp. 125–44R. Weissman, Ritual Brotherhood in Renaissance Florence (New York, 1982)K. Zapalac, ‘In his Image and Likeness’, Political Iconography and Religious Change in

Regensburg 1500–1600 (Ithaca, 1990)

SpaceH. Ballon, The Paris of Henri IV: Architecture and Urbanism (1991)P. Burke, ‘The Virgin of the Carmine and the Revolt of Masaniello’, in Burke, The Historical

Anthropology of Early Modern Italy (1987) or Past and Present 99 (1983), 3–21A. Corbin, The Foul and the Fragrant: Odour and the social imagination (1994); pt II, ‘Purifying

Public Space’, pp. 86–135R. Davis, ‘The Geography of Gender in the Renaissance’, in J. Brown and R. Davis (eds.), Gender

and Society in Renaissance Italy (London, 1998)R. Etlin, The architecture of death: the transformation of the cemetery in eighteenth-century Paris

(1987)C. L. Frommel, ‘Papal Policy: The planning of Rome during the Renaissance’, in R. I. Rotberg

and T. K. Raab (eds.) Art and History: Images and their Meaning (1986)R. Ingersoll, ‘The Possesso, the Via Papale, and the Stigma of Pope Joan’, in H. De Mare and A.

Vos (eds.), Urban Rituals in Italy and the Netherlands: Historical Contexts in the Use ofPublic Space, Architecture, and the urban Environment (1993)

G. Johnson and S. F. Mathews Grieco (eds.), Picturing women in Renaissance and Baroque Italy(1997), Chs. 1 and 9

G.A. Johnson ‘Idol or Ideal: the power and potency of female public sculpture’ in G.A. Johnsonand S.F. Mathews Grieco (eds) picturing women in Renaissance and Baroque Italy(Cambridge, 1997) 222–45

J. L. McClain, J. M. Merriman, and U. Kaoru (eds.), Edo and Paris: Urban life and the state inthe early modern era (1997), Ch. 6

C.R. Mack, Pienza: the creation of a Renaissance city (1987)E. Muir, ‘The Virgin on the Street Corner: The Place of the Sacred in Italian Cities’, in S. Ozment

(ed.), Religion and Culture in the Renaissance and the Reformation (Kirksville, Missouri,1989); pp. 25–40

E. Muir and R. Weissman, ‘Social and Symbolic Places in Renaissance Venice and Florence’, in

38

J. Agnew and J. Duncan (eds.), The Power of Place: Bringing Together Geographical andSociological Imaginations (Boston, 1989)

D. Roche, The people of Paris: An essay in popular culture in the eighteenth century (1987), Chs.1 and 4.

S. Schama, The Embarrassment of Riches: An Interpretation of Dutch Culture in the Golden Age(1987); Ch. 8, ‘Inside, Outside’, pp. 565–612

R. Schneider, The ceremonial city: Toulouse observed, 1738–1780 (1995)R. Tittler, Architecture and Power: The Town Hall and the English Urban Community

c.1500–1649 (1991), Ch. 4 (89–97), Ch. 5 (122–8), Ch. 6, and Epilogue; c.f. Tittler’s articlein D. Hoak (ed.), Tudor Political Culture (Cambridge, 1995)

S. von Moos, ‘The Palace as a Fortress: Rome and Bologna under Pope Julius II’, in H. A. Millonand L. Nochlin (eds.), Art and Architecture in the Service of Politics (1978), 46–79

P. Withington, ‘Views from the Bridge: Revolution and Restoration in Seventeenth-CenturyYork’, Past and Present 170 (2001)

TravelP. Burke, ‘The discreet charm of Milan: English travellers in the seventeenth century’, in Burke,

Varieties of cultural history (Cambridge, 1997), 94–110P. Burke, ‘The sources: outsiders and insiders’, in Burke, The historical anthropology of early

modern Italy (Cambridge, 1987), 15–24M.T. Calaresu, ‘Looking for Virgil’s Tomb: The End of the Grand Tour and the Cosmopolitan

Ideal in Europe’, in J. Elsner and J.P. Rubiés (eds), Voyages and Visions (London, 1999),138–161

E. Chaney, ‘Robert Dallington’s Survey of Tuscany (1605): A British view of Medicean Florence’,in Chaney, The evolution of the Grand Tour (London, 1998), 143–160

J.P. Rubiés, ‘Instructions for travellers: Teaching the eye to see’, History and anthropology 9(1996), 139–90

J.P. Rubiés, ‘Travel writing as a genre: Facts, fictions and the invention of a scientific discoursein early modern Europe’, Journeys 1 (2000), 5–35

J. Stoye, English travellers abroad 1604–1667 (Rev. Ed., New Haven/London, 1989)W. Williams, ‘“Rubbing up against others”: Montaigne on pilgrimage’, in J. Elsner and J.P.

Rubiés (eds.), Voyages and Visions (London, 1999), 101–23

Politics and the Public SphereT. Brennan, Public drinking and popular culture in eighteenth-century Paris (1988), Ch. 5.R. Chartier, The Cultural Origins of the French Revolution (1991); Ch. 2T.E. Crow, Painters and Public Life in Eighteenth-century Paris (1985)R. Darnton, The Forbidden Best-sellers of Pre-Revolutionary France (1996); pt IIIR. Darnton, ‘An Early Information Society: News and the Media in Eighteenth-Century Paris’,

American Historical Review 105 (200); pp. 1–35B. Dooley, ‘News and doubt in early modern culture: or, are we having a public sphere yet?’ in

B. Dooley and S. Baron (eds.), The Politics of Information in Early Modern Europe (NewYork, 2001)

A. Farge, Subversive Words: Public Opinion in Eighteenth-Century France (1994)P. Findlen, Possessing Nature: museums, collecting and scientific culture in early modern Italy

(Berkeley, 1994)D. Goodman, The Republic of Letters: A Cultural History of the French Enlightenment (1994)J. Habermas, The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere (1962; trans. 1992).Summarised in his article ‘The Public Sphere: An Encyclopedia Article’, New German Critique

(1974), pp. 49–55; as well as in the editor’s introduction to Habermas and the Public Sphere,ed Craig Calhoun (1992); pp. 1–48

S. Maza, Private lives and public affairs: The causes-célèbres of pre-revolutionary France(1993), Ch. 3 and conclusion

E. Muir, ‘The Sources of Civil Society in Italy’, Journal of Interdisciplinary History 29 (1999);pp. 379–406

D. Outram, The Enlightenment (Cambridge, 1995); ch. 2 on ‘coffee-houses and consumers’ M.S. Sanchez, ‘Expanding the Spanish Court: Private Homes and Public Spaces’, in The Empress,

the Queen, and the Nun: Women and Power at the Court of Philip III of Spain (1998), pp.11–35R. L. Spang, The invention of the restaurant: Paris and modern gastronomic culture (2000),

Ch. 3

39

P. Thompson, Rum-punch and revolution: tavern-going and public life in eighteenth-centuryPhiladelphia (Philadelphia, 1999)

J. Van Horn Melton, The Rise of the public in enlightenment Europe (Cambridge, 2001)

Production and PatronageJ. Brewer and R. Porter, (eds.), Consumption and the World of GoodsJ. Brewer, ‘Attitudes towards Culture as a Commodity’, in A. Bermingham and J. Brewer (eds.)

The Consumption of Culture 1600–1800 (London, 1995), pp. 341–61J. Brewer, The Pleasures of the Imagination (London, 1997)P. Burke, The Italian Renaissance (Revised ed., Cambridge, 1999)P. Burke, Antwerp, A Metropolis in Europe (Brussels, 1993)T. Crow, Painters and Public Life in Eighteenth-Century Paris (New Haven and London, 1985)R. Darnton, The Literary Underground of the Old Regime (Cambridge MA, 1982)A. Grafton, Leon Battista Alberti: master builder of the Italian Renaissance (London, 2001)F. Haskell, Patrons and Painters (rev ed., New Haven, 1991)M. Montias, Artists and Artisans in Delft (Princeton, 1982)P. O’Brien et al (eds.), Urban Achievement in Early Modern Europe: Golden Ages in Antwerp,

Amsterdam and London (Cambridge, 2001)P. Rogers, Grub Street (London, 1972)

Literacy and Print CultureP. Burke, chapter 9 in Popular culture in early modern Europe, London, 1978P. Burke, ‘The Uses of Literacy in Early Modern Italy’, in Historical Anthropology (1987)R. Chartier, in The cultural uses of print in Early Modern France (Princeton, 1987), Introduction;

Chs. 5 and 6Roger Chartier, ‘Culture as Appropriation: Popular Cultural Uses in Early Modern France’, in

Understanding Popular Culture: Europe from the Middle Ages to the Nineteenth-Century, ed.S. L. Kaplan (Berlin, 1984), pp. 229–54

M. V. Chrisman, ‘Lay culture, learned culture: books and social change in Strasbourg,1480–1599’ (Yale, 1982)

E. Cohen, ‘Between oral and written culture: the social meaning of an illustrated love letter’, inB. Diefendorf and C. Hesse, Culture and identity in early modern Europe 1500–1800, AnnArbor 1993 Robert Darnton, ‘The History of Reading’, in P. Burke (ed.) New Perspectives onHistorical Writing (1991)

Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books’, in his The Kiss of Lamourette (1990)N. Davis, ‘Printing and the People’, in her Society and Culture in Early Modern France, 1975Elisabeth Eisenstein, The Printing Press as an Agent of Change (1979)Jack Goody, The Logic of Writing and the Organization of Society (Cambridge, 1986)Paul F. Grendler, Schooling in Renaissance Italy (Baltimore and London: Johns Hopkins

University Press, 1989)Christian Jouhaud on ‘placards’ (posters), in R. Chartier, ed., The Culture of Print: Power and

the Uses of Print in Early Modern France (1989)L. Nussdorfer, ‘Writing and the Power of Speech: Notaries and Artisans in Baroque Rome’, in

Culture and Identity in Early Modern Europe 1500–1800 ed. B. Diefendorf and C. Hesse (AnnHarbor, 1993)

R. Houston, Literacy in early modern Europe: culture and education 1500–1800 (1988)R. Scribner, ‘Oral culture and the diffusion of Reformation ideas’ in his Popular culture and

popular movements in Reformation Germany, London, 1987, chapter 3R.W. Scribner, For the sake of simple folk: popular propaganda for the German Reformation,

Cambridge, 1981, chapter 3

Cities as Centres of Information and CommunicationP. Burke, ‘Early Modern Venice as a Centre of Information and Communication’, in J. Martin

and D. Romano (eds.), Venice Reconsidered: the History and Civilization of an Italian City-State, 1297–1997 (Baltimore, 2000)

P. Burke, A Social History of Knowledge: from Gutenberg to Diderot (Cambridge, 2000)F. Dahl, ‘Amsterdam: Earliest Newspaper Centre in Western Europe’, Het Boek 25 (1939)R. Darnton, ‘An Early Information Society: News and the Media in Eighteenth-Century Paris:

American Historical Review, 105 (2000)B. Dooley, The Social History of Skepticism: Experience and Doubt in Early Modern Culture

(Baltimore, 1999)

40

B. Dooley (ed.), The Politics of Information in Early Modern Europe (New York, 2001)M. Fogel, Les cérémonies de l’informations dans la France du 16e au 18e siècle (1989)G. Gibbs, ‘The Role of the Dutch Republic as the Intellectual Entrepôt of Europe in the

Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries’, Bijdrage Mededelingen Gescheidnis Nederlanden 86(1971), pp. 323–49

G. Matthews (ed.), News and Rumours in Renaissance Europe (New York, 1959)J. Raymond, The Invention of the Newspaper: English Newsbooks, 1641–9 (Oxford, 1996)J. Raymond, Making the News: An Anthology of the Newsbooks of Revolutionary England,

1641–1649 (1993)P. Sardella, Nouvelles et spéculations à Venise au début du xvie siècle (1948)W.D. Smith, ‘Amsterdam as an Information Exchange in the Seventeenth Century’, Journal

Economic History 44 (1984), pp. 985–1005H. Solomon, Public Welfare, Science and Propaganda in Seventeenth-Century France

(Princeton, 1972)C. Sommerville, The News Revolution in England (Oxford, 1996)R. B. Walker, ‘Advertising in London Newspapers, 1650–1750’, Business History 15 (1973)D. Webb, ‘Guide Books to London before 1800’, London Topographical Record 26 (1990)Charles Webster, The Great Instauration (1975), esp. pp. 67–77

Centre and MarginsJ. Amelang, Honored Citizens of Barcelona: Patrician Culture and Class Relations (Princeton,

1986)J. Amelang, ‘People of the Ribera: Popular Politics and Neighbourhood Identity in Early Modern

Barcelona’, in B. Diefendorf and C. Hesse (eds.) Culture and Identity in Early Modern Europe1500–1800 (Ann Arbor, 1993)

I. Archer, The Pursuit of Stability: Social Relations in Elizabethan London (Cambridge, 1991)N. Davis, ‘The Reasons of Misrule’, in Society and Culture in Early Modern France (Stanford,

1975)N. Davis, Women on the Margins (Cambridge Mass., 1995); ch. 1N. Eckstein, The district of the Green Dragon: Neighbourhood Life and Social Change in

Renaissance Florence (Florence, 1995)R.C. Davis, The War of the Fists: Popular Culture and Public Violence in Late Renaissance

Venice (New York, 1994)R. Jütte, Poverty and Deviance in Early Modern Europe (Cambridge, 1994)S. Milner (ed.), At the Margins: Minority Groups in Pre-Modern Italy, (Minnesota, 2002)S. Mullaney, The Place of the Stage: Licence, Play and Power in Renaissance England (Chicago,

1988)M. Perry, Crime and Society in Early Modern Seville (Hanover, New Hampshire, 1980)M. Perry, Gender and Disorder in Early Modern Seville (Princeton, 1990)B. Pullan, Rich and Poor in Renaissance Venice (Oxford, 1971)S. Shesgreen, Images of the Outcast: the urban poor in the Cries of London (Manchester, 2002)

GenderL. Alberti (1404–72), The Family in Renaissance Florence (1969 trans.)J. Brown and R. Davis (eds.), Gender and Society in Renaissance Italy (London, 1998)T. and E. Cohen (eds.), Words and Deeds in Renaissance Rome: Trials before the Papal

Magistrates (Toronto, 1993); Chs. 3, 5, 6R.C. Davis, The War of the Fists: Popular Culture and Public Violence in Late Renaissance

Venice (New York, 1994); on artisans’ urban masculinityA. Farge, Fragile Lives, Violence, Power and Solidarity in Eighteenth-Century Paris (1993)L. Gowing, Domestic Dangers: Women, Words and Sex in Early Modern London (Oxford, 1996);

Chs. 1, 3, 4, 6C. Klapisch-Zuber, Women, Family, and Ritual in Renaissance Florence (Chicago, 1985); chs.1,

2, 4, 6–8, 13M. Laven, Virgins of Venice: Enclosed Lives and Broken Vows in the Renaissance Convent

(London, 2002)M.E. Perry, Gender and Disorder in Early Modern Seville (Princeton, 1990)S. Ozment (ed.). Magdalena and Balthasar: Letters between Husband and Wife (1989);

Nuremberg tradersL. Roper, Oedipus and the Devil: Witchcraft, Sexuality and the Religion in Early Modern Europe

(London, 1994); Chs. 5, 7 on urban masculinity and the new codes of civility

41

D. Romano, Housecraft and Statecraft (Baltimore, 1996); ‘The Lives of Servants’U. Rublack, The Crimes of Women in Early Modern Germany (Oxford, 1999); Chs 1, 4, 7G. Ruggiero, Binding Passions: Tales of Magic, marriage, and Power at the End of the

Renaissance (Oxford, 1993)J. Scott, ‘Gender: A Useful Category of Historical Analysis’, in Gender and the Politics of History

(New York, 1988)J. Sperling, Convents and the Body Politic in Late Renaissance Venice (Chicago, 1999); Chs 1,2,

3U. Strasser, ‘Bones of Contention: Cloistered Nuns, Decorated Relics, and the Context over

Women’s Place in the Public Sphere of Counter-Reformation Munich’, Archiv fürReformationsgeschichte (1999)

J. Walker, ‘Gambling and Venetian Noblemen, c. 1500–1700’, Past and Present (1999), 28–69M. Wiesner, Working Women in Renaissance Germany (New Brunswick, N.J., 1986)

Power, Subversion, SuveillanceR. Davis, Shipbuilders of the Venetian Arsenal: Workers and Workplace in the Pre-industrial

City (Baltimore, 1991); on the role of privileged artisans in the policing of the cityA. Farge, Fragile Lives, Violence, Power and Solidarilty in Eighteenth-Century Paris (1993)A. Farge and M. Foucault, Le désordre des familles: lettres de cachet des archives de la Bastille

(1982)T. and E. Cohen (eds.), Words and Deeds in Renaissance Rome: Trials before the Papal

Magistrates (Toronto, 1993); chs. 1, 2R. Evans, Rituals of Retribution: Capital Punishment in Germany, 1600–1987 (1996); Chs. On

early modern period, communities and punishment in townsM. Foucault, Disciplineand Punish: The Birth of the Prison (London, 1977)L. Gowing, Domestic Dangers: Women, Words and Sex in Early Modern London (Oxford, 1996);

Chs. 1–3 on women’s self-regulation and church courtsP. Griffiths, Youth and Authority: Formative Experiences in England, 1560–1640 (Oxford, 1996);

on the control of urban youthP. Griffiths. ‘Overlapping circles: imagining criminal communities in London, 1545–1645’, in A.

Shepard and P. Withington (eds.), Communities in Early Modern England (Manchester, 2000)W. Naphy, ‘Plague-Spreading and a Magisterially Controlled Fear’, in W. Naphy and P. Roberts

(eds.), Fear in Early Modern Society (1997)E. Österberg and D. Lindstom, Crime and Social Control in Early Modern Swedish Towns (1988)M. O’Neil, ‘Magical Healing, Love-Magic and the inquisition in Late Sixteenth-Century

Modena’, in S. Haliczer (ed.), Inquisition and Society in Early Modern Europe (1987); on‘magical practices’ as part of urban life, prostitution, courts and the inquisition

M.E. Perry, Crime and Society in Early Modern Seville (1980)J. Revel and A. Farge, The Rules of Rebellion: Child Abduction in Paris in 1750 (1991)L. Roper, The Holy Household: Women and Morals in Reformation Augsburg (1989); Ch. 2 on

new disciplines of sinU. Rublack, The Crimes of Women in Early Modern Germany (Oxford, 1999) Chs. 1–2S. Schama, Embarrassment of Riches: An Interpretation of Dutch Culture in the Golden Age

(1991); Ch. 1 ‘A Moral Geography’G. Schwerhoff, Köln im Kreuzverhör: Kriminalität, Herrschaft und Gesellschaft in einer früh-

neuzeitlichen Stadt (1991)

Cleanliness and dirtG. Calvi, Histories of a plague year: the social and the imaginary in baroque Florence (Berkeley-

Oxford, 1989)A. Corbin, The Foul and the Fragrant: Odor and the French Social Imagination (London, 1994)N. Davidson, ‘Theology, Nature and the Law: Sexual Sin and Sexual Crime in Italy from the four-

teenth to the seventeenth century’, in Trevor Dean and K.J.P. Lowe (eds.), Crime, Society andthe Law in Renaissance Italy (Cambridge, 1994)

M. Douglas, Purity and Danger (first published, 1966), intro. and Ch. 2V. Harding, The Dead and the Living in Paris and London, 1500–1670 (Cambridge, 2002)M. Jenner, ‘The Great Dog Massacre’, in W. Naphy and P. Roberts (eds.), Fear in Early Modern

Society (Manchester, 1997)M. Jenner, ‘Civilization and Deodorization? Smell in Early Modern English Culture’, in P. Burke

et al (eds.), Civil Histories (Oxford, 2000)

42

W. Naphy and P. Roberts (eds.), Fear in Early Modern Europe (Manchester, 1997); Chs. 3, 11 L. Roper, Oedipus and the Devil (London, 1994); Chs. 7, 8G. Ruggiero, The Boundaries of Eros: Sex Crime and Sexuality in Renaissance Venice (Oxford,

1985)S. Schama, The Embarrassment of Riches: An Interpretation of Dutch Culture in the Golden Age

(London, 1987); Ch. 6R. Sennett, ‘Fear of Touching: the Jewish Ghetto in Renaissance Venice’, in Flesh and Stone:

the Body and the City in Western Civilization (London, 1994)K. Stuart, Defiled Trades and Social Outcasts: Honour and Ritual Pollution in Early Modern

Germany (Cambridge, 1999); Chs. 2, 3, 6

Dressing-up: Urban Self-fashioningP. Allerston, ‘Clothing and Early Modern Venetian Society’, Continuity and Change 2000P. Allerston, ‘Reconstructing the Second-hand Clothes Trade in Sixteenth- and Seventeenth-

Century Venice’, Costume 33 (1999)P. Braunstein (ed.), Un banquier mis à nu: autobiographie de Matthäus Schwarz, bourgeois

d’Augsburg (1987)P. Burke, ‘Representations of the Self from Petrarch to Descartes’, in R. Porter (ed.), Rewriting

the Self (London, 1997)N. Davis, ‘Boundaries and the Sense of Self in Sixteenth-Century France’, in T. C. Heller et al.

(eds.), Reconstructing Individualism tanfor, 1986)V. Goebner, ‘Insides Out: Dissimulation and the Arts of Accounting in the Autobiography of

Mattäus Schwarz (1498–1574)’, Representations (1999)S. Greenblatt, Renaissance Self-Fashioning (Chicago, 1980)N. B. Harte (ed.), Fabrics and Fashions: Studies in the Economic and Social History of Dress

(1991), pp. 277–346D. Owen Hughes, ‘Sumptuary Law and Social Relations in Renaissance Italy’, in J. Bossy (ed.),

Disputes and Settlements (Cambridge, 1983)C. Kovesi Killerby, Sumptuary Law in Italy, 1200–1500 (Oxford, 2002)K. Newman, ‘Dressing Up: Sartorial Extravagance in Early Modern London’, in her Fashioning

Femininity and English Renaissance Drama (1991)D. Roche, The Culture of Clothing: Dress and Fashion in the Ancien Regime (1994)R. Sarti, Europe at Home: Family and Material Culture, 1500–1800 (New Haven, 2002); ch. 6P. Stallybrass, ‘Worn Worlds: Clothes and Identity on the Renaissance stage’, in M. de Grazia et

al. (eds.), Subject and Object in Renaissance Culture (1996)Vecellio’s Renaissance Costume Book (1977)E. Welch, ‘New, old, and second-hand culture: the case of the Renaissance sleeve’, in G. Neher

and R. Shepherd (eds.), Value in Renaissance Art (2000)Primary sources are essential for this topic: the meaning of dress are revealed by diaries, ballads,

theatre plays, and art of the period.

Cities and CivilityA. Bryson, From Courtesy to Civility: Changing Codes of Conduct in Early Modern England

(Oxford, 1998)P. Burke, ‘Civilization, Sex and Violence in Early Modern Italy: reflections on the theories of

Norbert Elias’, Journal of the Institute of Romance Studies 5 (1997), pp. 71–80R. Chartier, ‘Civility’, in his Cultural Uses of Print in Early Modern France (Princeton, 1987)N. Elias, The Civilising Process, Volume I (Oxford, 1981)D. Gordon, Citizens without Sovereignty: Equality and Sociability in French Thought, 1670–1789

(Princeton, 1994)L.E. Klein, Shaftesbury and the Culture of Politeness (Cambridge, 1994)S. Whyman, Sociability and Power in Late-Stuart England (Oxford, 1995); Ch. 4

Imagining the CityAnon and F. de Quevedo, Two Spanish picaresque novels: Lazarillo de Tormes and The Swindler

(1975)A. Blunt, ‘Naples as seen by French travellers, 1630–1780’, in F. Haskell et al, The artist and the

writer in France, 1–14P. F. Brown, Venetian Narrative Painting in the Age of Carpaccio (1988)D. Buisseret (ed.), Envisioning the city (1998): articles by Kagan and Buisseret

43

M. T. Calaresu, ‘Looking for Virgil’s Tomb’, in J. Elsner and J. P. Rubiés (eds.), Voyages andVisions: Towards a cultural history of travel (1999)

R. Darnton, ‘A Bourgeois puts his world in order: The city as a Text’, in Darnton, The Great CatMassacre and other episodes in French Cultural History (1984)

E. Garin, ‘La cité idéale de la Renaissance’, in W. Lameere (ed.), Les utopies à la Renaissance(1963)

P. Griffiths and M. Jenner (eds.), Londinopolis (Manchester, 2001)R. Grimsley, ‘Rousseau’s Paris’, in P. Fritz and D. Williams (eds.), City and Society in the

Eighteenth Century (Toronto, 1973)A. Jensen Adams, ‘Competing Communities in the “Great Bog of Europe”: Identity and

Seventeenth-Century Dutch Landscape Painting’, in W.J.T. Mitchell (ed.), Landscape andPower (1997), pp. 35–76

R. L. Kagan (ed.), Spanish Cities of the Golden Age: the Views of Anton van der Wyngaerde(1989)

R. L. Kagan, ‘Philip II and the art of the cityscape’, in R. I. Rotberg and T. K. Rabb, Art andHistory: Images and their meanings (1988)

R. Krautheimer, The Rome of Alexander VII (1985)L.-S. Mercier, ‘The Year 2440: A dream if ever there was one’ [1771], in R. Darnton, The forbid-

den best-sellers of pre-revolutionary France (1996), pp. 300–336J. Merritt (ed.), Imagining Early Modern London (2001)E. Haitsma Mulier, The Myth of Venice and Dutch Republican Thought in the Seventeenth Century

(1980)K. Newman, ‘Towards a topographic imaginary: early modern Paris’, in C. Mazzio and D. Trevor

(eds), Historicism, Psychoanalysis and early modern culture (New York, 2000)C. E. Schorske, ‘The idea of the city in European thought’, in O. Handlin and J. Burchard (eds.),

The historian and the city (1966); reprinted in Schorske, Thinking with History (Princeton,1998)

A. K. Wheelock et al. (eds.), The public and the private in the age of Vermeer (London, 2000);section on ‘city-views and townscapes’

Conclusions and ComparisonsM. Berman, All that is solid melts into air: the experience of modernity (New York, 1982)C. Graña, Bohemian versus bourgeois: French society and the French man of letters in the nine-

teenth century (New York, 1964)J. McClain, J.M. Merriman and U. Kaoru (eds.), Edo and Paris: Urban Life and the State in the

Early Modern Era (Ithaca, 1994)J. Needell, A Tropical Belle Epoque: elite culture and society in turn-of-the-century Rio de Janiero

(Cambridge, 1987)C. Schorske, Fin-de-SiècleVienna: Politics and Culture (New York, 1979)E. Seidensticker, High City, Low City: Tokyo from Edo to the Earthquake, 1867–1923 (London,

1983)

PAPER 19. THE POLITICS OF GENDER: GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND 1790–1990

This course discusses the theory and practice of women’s and men’s participation in political andgovernmental processes at both the local and the national level. It includes an exploration of major changesin marriage and family law during the period. Great importance is attached to covering the whole of theBritish Isles and including in the discussion Ireland after 1922. This offers an important opportunity forsustained comparative study. The topics covered include: Evangelical responses to the revolutionarydiscourse of rights 1790–1819; religion and the anti-slavery campaign; Unitarians, Utilitarians and earlyfeminist thought and practice; J.S. Mill and Liberal feminism 1848–1873; the genesis and implementa-tion of the divorce laws; the Contagious Diseases Acts and the campaign for their repeal; Home Rule andthe question of democracy 1881–1912; political activism and the rise and fall of local government; womenin the workplace and the opening up of the professions; the politics of infant custody and adoption; theConservative party and the politics of gender 1881–1928; women and ordination in the Established andin Dissenting churches; women and nationalism in De Valera’s republic; Liberal, Labour andConservative women; the politics of family values in late 20th century Britain; Margaret Thatcher andMary Robinson and the politics of gender respectively in Britain and in Ireland in the 1980s.

The reading that follows is an introductory selection from a larger list which is updated annually.

44

The Politics of Gender: Great Britain and Ireland 1790–1990Selected primary sources

Elam, Norah, ‘Fascism, Women and Democracy’ in The Fascist Quarterly vol. 1, no. 3, July1935, pp. 290–98

Equal Opportunities Act 1975Hansard 29 October 1993 cols. 1083–1152, debate on Priests (Ordination of Women) measuresMarshall, T.H., Citizenship and Social Class (1948)Mill, J.S., The Subjection of Women (1869), Autobiography (1873)Mill, J.S., Mill, H.T. and Taylor, Helen, Writings on Sexual Equality ed. A.P. Robson and J.M.

Robson (1994)Mosley, Nicholas, Rules of the Game. Beyond the Pale. Memoirs of Sir Oswald Mosley and Family

(1994)Rathbone, Eleanor et al., Our Freedom and Its Results by Five Women (1936)Strachey, Ray, The Cause (1928)Thatcher, Margaret, The Path to Power (1995)Wollstonecraft, Mary, A Vindication of the Rights of Woman (1792)Woolf, Virginia, A Room of One’s Own (1929) and Three Guineas (1938)

Selected secondary works:I. Suffrage (central and local)

Harrison, B.H., Separate Spheres (1978)Harrison, B.H., Prudent Revolutionaries: Portrait of British Feminists between the Wars (1987)John, Angela and Eustance, Claire eds., The Men’s Share? Masculinities, Male Support and

Women’s Suffrage in Britain 1890–1920 (1997)Kingsley Kent, S. Sex and Suffrage in Britain (1987)Leneman, L., A Guid Cause: the women’s suffrage movement in Scotland (1991)Murphy, C., The Women’s Suffrage Movement and Irish Society in the early C20 (1989)Stanley Holton, S., Feminism and Democracy 1900–1918 (1988)

II. Involvement in the political process (central and local)Furlong, Monica ed., Act of Synod – Act of Folly (1998)Galligan, Y., Women and Politics in Contemporary Ireland. From the Margins to the Mainstream

(1998)Gottlieb, Julie, Feminine Fascism. Women in Britain’s Fascist Movement 1923–1945 (1999)Hetherington, Sheila, Katharine Atholl, 1874–1960 (1989)Hollis, P., Ladies Elect. Women in Local Government 1865–1914 (1987)Hollis, P., Jennie Lee. A Life (1997)Musolf, K.S., Plymouth to Parliament. A Rhetorical History of Nancy Astor’s 1919 Campaign (1999)Pugh, M., The Tories and the People 1880–1935 (1985)Taylor, Barbara, Eve and the New Jerusalem. Socialism and Feminism in the C19 (1983)

III. The political and social theory of gender rolesCaine, B., Victorian Feminists (1993)Fletcher, Sheila, Maude Royden: A Life (1989)Francis, Martin, Ideas and Policies under Labour 1945–51 (1997)Midgeley, C., Women against Slavery. The British Campaigns 1780–1870 (1992)Mosse, G.L. The Image of Man: the creation of modern masculinity (1996)Pedersen, S., Family, dependence and the origins of the welfare state, Britain and France

1914–1945 (1993)Noakes, L., War and the British: gender and national identity 1939–91 (1998)Poovey, Mary, Uneven Developments. The Ideological Work of Gender in Mid-Victorian England

(1988)Watts, Ruth, Gender, Power and the Unitarians in England 1760–1860 (1998)Williams, Jane and Dowell, Sue, Bread, Wine and Women: the Ordination of Women Debate

within the Church of England (1994)

IV. Family law and its re-shapingBehlmer, G.K., Friends of the Family. The English Home and Its Guardians 1850–1940

(1998)Doggett, M., Marriage, Wife-beating and the Law in Victorian England (1992)

45

Menefee, S.P., Wives for Sale: an ethnographic study of British popular divorce (1981)Phillips, R., Putting Asunder. A history of divorce in Western society (1988)Shanley, M.L., Feminism, Marriage and the Law in Victorian England 1850–1895 (1989)Smart, C., and Sevenhuijsen, S., eds., Child custody and the politics of gender (1989)

V. Men and women in the workplaceDyhouse, Carol, No Distinction of Sex? Women in British Universities 1870–1939 (1995)Gordon, Eleanor, Women and the Labour Movement in Scotland 1850–1914 (1991)Lewenhak, S., Women and Trade Unions (1977)John, Angela ed., Unequal Opportunities (1986)McWilliams Tullberg, R., Women at Cambridge (1998)Thom, D., Nice Girls, Bad Girls (1999)

PAPER 20: EUROPEAN FASCISM, 1919 TO THE PRESENT

This paper traces the history of fascism in Europe from its ideological and social origins prior to theFirst World War to its resurgence in the last decade of the twentieth century. Initial attention will be focussedon the interpretation of the emergence of fascism as a response to war and to the economic, political andsocial disruption which was experienced in a number of European states in the post-war period.

The two major movements, Italian Fascism and German National Socialism, will be examined, witha particular emphasis on their respective followings and ideologies and the processes whereby they cameto power. While Italian Fascism and German National Socialism were the most successful fascist move-ments, there were other important ones in Hungary, Rumania and Spain, as well as lesser movementsin the Benelux countries, Britain, France and Scandinavia. The reasons why these other fascist andnational socialist movements failed to come to power will also be examined, using the BUF, amongothers, as a case study. Griffin’s concepts of “para”, “proto” and “state-sponsored” fascism will bediscussed with particular reference to the Metaxas regime in Greece, and those of Salazaar in Portugaland Franco in Spain. The boundaries of fascism will be further explored through a study of “Austro-fascism” and the Vichy regime in France, the fascist status of both of which has been the subject oflively debate. There will also be discussion of fascist aesthetics, economics and religious and socialpolicy.

The transformation in the Second World War of the major regimes will be compared and the Alliedpolicies of de-Nazification and epurazione of the Italian Fascists will be considered in the light of thesubsequent fate of fascist movements in the post-war period, especially the contrasting experiences ofGermany and Italy. Following an analysis of the “Weimar scenario” as an explanation of the resurgenceof neo-fascist and neo-Nazi movements in Eastern and Central Europe in the 1990s, the phenomenonof “international national socialism” will then be explored in the context of cultural globalisation. Thepaper will conclude with a discussion of the historiographical and inter-disciplinary debates around defi-nitions and interpretations of fascism.

Introductory readingG. Allardyce, “What fascism is not: thoughts on the deflation of a concept”, The American

Historical Review, vol. 84, 1979, no. 2 R. Bessel, (ed.), Fascist Italy and Nazi Germany: Comparisons and Contrasts, CUP, 1996M. Blinkhorn(ed.), Fascists and Conservatives: the radical right and the establishment in twen-

tieth century Europe, Unwin Hyman, 1990 R. Bosworth, Mussolini, Edward Arnold, 2002A. Brown, The Extreme Right, Atlantic, 1999K.D. Bracher, The Nazi Dictatorship, Penguin, 1980I. Ceplair, Under the Shadow of War, Columbia UP, 1987 L. Cheles, R. Ferguson & M. Vaughan(eds.) Neo-fascism in Europe, Longman, 1991M. Cronin(ed.), The Failure of British Fascism, Macmillan, 1997 C. Delzell(ed.), Mediterranean Fascism, 1919–1945, Walker, 1971 R. Griffin, Fascism, OUP, 1995R. Griffin, The Nature of Fascism, Routledge, 1993P. Hockenos, Free to Hate: The Rise of the Right in Post-Communist Europe, Routledge, 1993I. Kershaw, Hitler, Penguin, 1998D. Muehlberger(ed.), The Social Basis of European Fascist Movements, Croom Helm, 1987J. Noakes & G. Pridham(eds), Documents on Nazism, 1919–1945, Jonathan Cape, 1971

46

J.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in Italy, Routledge, 1998W. Reich, TheMass Psychology of Fascism, Penguin, 1970Z. Sternhell, “Fascist Ideology”, in W. Laqueur(ed.), Fascism- a reader’s guide,P. Sugar(ed.), Native fascism in the successor states, ABC, 1971K. Theweleit, Male Fantasies I. Women, floods, bodies and history, Polity Press, 1987 and II.

Male Bodies. Psycho-analysing the White Terror, Polity Press 1989

Topic Reading ListThe Ideological Origins of Fascism

A. Kallis, “Expansionism in Italy and Germany before the First World War: On the ideologicaland political origins of Fascist expansionism”, Central European History, October, 1998

A.J. Gregor, Young Mussolini and the intellectual origins of Fascism, University of CaliforniaPress, 1979

H. Kohn, The Mind of Germany, Macmillan, 1962A Lyttelton(ed.), Italian Fascisms: From Pareto to Gentile, Cape, 1973G. Mosse, “The political culture of Italian futurism”, European History Quarterly, June, 1990C. Pinto, Fascist Ideology re-visited”, European History Quarterly, October, 1986D. Roberts, The Syndicalist Tradition and Italian Fascism, Manchester UP, 1979K. Sontheim, “Anti-democratic thought in the Weimar Republic”, in T. Eschenburg et al, The

Road to Dictatorship, Wolff, 1970

The First World War and FascismG. Carocci, Italian Fascism, Penguin, 1972I. Ceplair, Under the shadow of war, Columbia UP, 1972E. Junger, In Storm of Steel, Chatto & Windus, 1929(novel)A. Hamilton, The Appeal of Fascism, Blond, 1971G. Procacci, “Italy from Interventionism to Fascism: 1917–1919”, Journal of Contemporary

History, 3(1968) K. Theweleit, Male Fantasies etc.

Fascism as movement: Italy and GermanyT. Abse, “ A Survey of local studies of the rise of Fascism”, Journal of the Association of Teachers

of Italian,, 40, 1983R. Bessel et al, Why did German Democracy fail?, Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 1990G. Fischer, The rise of the Nazis, Manchester UP, 1995P. Fritsche, Rehearsals for Fascism, Oxford UP, 1990J. Hiden, Republican and Fascist Germany, Longman, 1996G. Larsen(ed.), Who were the Fascists? Social Roots of European Fascism, Bergen, Oslo &

Tromso Universitaetsvorlaget, 1980 J.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in Italy, Routledge, 1998 M. Revelli, “Italy”, in D. Muehlberger(ed.), The social bases of European Fascism, Croom Helm, F. Snowden, “On the social origins of agrarian fascism Italy”, Archives europeene de Sociologie,

xiii(1972)

Fascism and Counterrevolution: T. Abse, “The rise of Fascism in an Industrial City: the Case of Livorno”, in D. Forgacs(ed.), Re-

thinking Italian Fascism: Capitalism, Populism and Culture, Lawrence & Wishart, 1986R. Bessel, Political Violence and the Rise of NazismJ. Caplan, “The rise of National Socialism”, in G. Martel(ed.), Modern Germany, Routledge, 1992 P. Farneti, “The crisis of democracy and the rise of Fascism”, in J. Linz & A. Stepan(eds), The

breakdown of democratic regimes, John Hopkins UP, 1978A Lyttelton, The Seizure of Power: Fascism in Italy, 1919–1929, Weidenfeld & Noicolson, 1973 A.J.Nichols, Weimar and the rise of Hitler, Macmillan, 1987J.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in ItalyP. Stachura, The Nazi Machtergreifung, Allen & Unwin, 1983

Italian Fascism as regimeA. de Grand, “Cracks in the façade: the failure of Italian totalitarianism”, European History

Quarterly, 1991R. Bosworth, Mussolini

47

V. De Grazia, The Culture of Consent,: Mass Organisation of Leisure in Fascist Italy, CUP, 1982C. Delzell(ed.), Mediterranean FascismC. Duggan, Fascism and the Mafia, Yale, UP, 1989A. Lyttelton, Seizure of PowerD. Mack Smith, Italy and its Monarchy, Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1989P. Melograni, “The cult of the Duce in Mussolini’s Italy”, JCH, 1970 J.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in ItalyE. Tannenbaum, Fascism in Italy: Society and Culture, 1922–45, Allen Lane, 1973

Italian anti-fascismP. Cannistraro, Historical Dictionary of Fascist Italy, Greenwood Press, 1982C. Delzell, Mussolini’s Enemies: the Italian anti-fascist Resistance, Princeton UP, 1961J. Dunnage(ed.), After the War. Violence, Justice, Continuity and Renewal in Italian Society,

Troubadour Publishing, 1999D. Ellwood, Italy, 1943–45, Leicester UP, 1995T. Kirk & A. McGelligtt(eds), Opposing Fascism, CUP, J.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in ItalyL. Quartermaine, Mussolini’s Last Republic. Propaganda and Politics in the Italian Social

Republic, 1943–5, Elm Bank, 2000J.Whittam, Fascist Italy, Manchester UP

Ideology and Religion in fascism: D. Bergen, “Catholics, Protestants and anti-Semitism in Nazi Germany”, Central European

History, no.2, 1994A.J. Gregor, The Ideology of Italian FascismJ. Gaillard, “The attraction of Fascism for the Church of Rome”, in J. Milfull(ed.), The Attraction

of Fascism: Social Psychology and the Aesthetics of the Triumph of the Right, Berg, 1990E. Gentile, The Sacralisation of Politics in Fascist Italy, Harvard UP, J.F. Pollard, “Fascism”, in J. O’Dwyer(ed), The New Dictionary of Catholic Social Thought, The

Liturgical Press, 1994——————— “A marriage of convenience: the Vatican and Fascist Regime in Italy”, in

J. Obelkovich et al(eds.), Disciplines of Faith, Routledge, 1987J. Sanchez, Pius XII and the Holocaust: understanding the controversy, CUA Press, 2002Z. Sternhell, “Fascist Ideology”, in W. Laquer(ed.), Fascism a Reader’s GuideR.J. Wolff & J. Hoensch(eds), Catholics, the state and the radical Right

Fascist economic and social policiesV. De Grazia, How Fascism Ruled Women: Italy, 1922–1945, U of California Press, 1992 C. Delzell(ed.), Mediterranean FascismH. Finer, Mussolini’s Italy, Cass, 1964M. Quine, Population Politics in Twentieth Century Europe, Routledge, 1996J.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in ItalyR. Tannenbaum, Fascism in Italy, chaps. 4, 5 & 6P. Willson, The Clockwork Factory: Women and Work in Fascist Italy, Clarendon Press, 1996

Fascism and aestheticsP. Adam, Arts of the Third Reich, Thames & Hudson, 1992J. Adamson, “Fascism and culture”, Journal of Contemporary History, July, 1989R. Etlin, Modernisation in Italian architecture, MIT, 1990I.Golomstock, Totalitarian Art, Collins Harvill, 1990R. Griffin, “The Sacred Synthesis: ideological cohesion and Fascist cultural policy”, Modern Italy,

vol.3, no. 1, 1998Journal of Contemporary History, April 1990, whole issue on Fascism and aestheticsP. Spark, Italian Design, Thames & Hudson, 1998D. Welch, Propaganda and the German Cinema, Oxford UP, 1983

Fascism and the Spanish Civil WarJ. Coverdale, Italian Intervention in the Spanish Civil War, Princeton UP, 1975H. Thomas, The Spanish Civil War, Penguin, 1961P. Preston, The Coming of the Spanish Civil War, Macmillan, 1978

48

Other Inter-war FascismsG. Bischof et al(eds), The Dollfuss-Schusnigg Era: A Reassessment, Eurospan, 2003M. Blinkhorn(ed.), Fascists and ConservativesM. Cronin, The Failure of British Fascism, Macmillan, 1996S.M. Ellwood, Spanish Fascism in the Franco Era: Falange Espanola de las JONS, Macmillan,

1987R. Griffin, The Nature of FascismE. Hansen, “Fascism and Nazism in the Netherlands, 1929–1939”, European Studies Review, vol.

II, 1981 O. Hoidal, Quisling: A Study in Treason, OUP, 1989A.C. Janos, The Politics of Backwardness in Hungary, 1825–1945, Princeton UP, 1982M. Kitchen, The Coming of Austrian Fascism, Croom Helm, 1980W. Laquer(ed.), Fascism a Reader’s Guide: Analyses, Interpretations and Bibliographies,

Penguin, 1979S.U. Larsen(ed.) Who were the Fascists?P. Morgan, Fascism in Europe, 1919–1945P. Muelberger(ed.), The Social Bases of European FascismN. Nugent & R. King(eds), The British Right, Saxon House, 1997D. Orlow, “A difficult relationship of unequal elatives: the Dutch NSB and Nazi Germany”,

European History Quarterly, July 1999B.F. Pauley, Hitler and the Forgotten Nazis. A History of Austrian National Socialism, Macmillan,

1981R.O. Paxton, Vichy France. Old Guard and New Order, 1940–1944, Columbia UP, 1982H. Rogger & E. Weber(eds), The European Right, University of California Press, 1965R. Soucy, French Fascism: the First Wave, 1924–1933, Yale UP, 1986————— French Fascism: the Second Wave, 1933–39, Yale UP, 1995P. Sugar(ed.), Native Fascism in the Successor StatesE.J. Weber, “Men of the Archangel”, Journal of Contemporary History, 1966,1/1

Race, war and genocidesS. Alexander, Church and State in Yugoslavia, CUP, 1979, chap. 1(on Ustasha atrocities during

Second World War)L. Dawidowisc(ed.), War against the Jews, 1933–1945, Penguin, 1975M. Gilad, Germany and its Gypsies, Euroscan, 2002H. Heer(ed.), War of Extermination, Berghan, 2001H. Heger, The Men with the Pink Triangle, Gay Men’s press, 1972J. Steinberg, All or Nothing: Hitler, Mussolini and the Holocaust, Routledge, 1980H. Walser Smith(ed.), The Holocaust and other Genocides: History, Representation and Ethics,

Vanderbilt UP, 2002www.ushmm.com(US Holocaust memorial Museum site)

Germany, Italy and the Second World WarJ. Noakes(ed.), The Civilian at War, Exeter UP, 1989J. Bessel(ed.), Fascist Italy and Nazi GermanyJ. Erickson, The Road to Berlin, Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1983M. Kitchen, Nazi Germany at War, Longman, 1995M. Knox, Hitler’s Italian Allies: Royal Armed Forces, Fascist Regime and the War of 1940–1943,

CUP, 2000R. Overy, Why the Allies Won, Pimlico, 1996

De-Nazification and EpurazioneR.P. Domenico, Fascists on Trial, 1943–1948, University of North Carolina PressJ. Herf, Divided Memory, Harvard UP, 1997B. Hahn, Education and Society in Germany, Oxford UP, 1998J.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in Italy, chap. 9J. Tusa, The Nuremberg Trials, BBC Books, 1995

Post-war Neo-fascism and Neo-NazismH.S. Betz, Radical right-wing populism in Western Europe, Macmillan, 1994K.V. Beyme, Right-wing extremism in Western Europe, Cass, 1988

49

M. Caciagali, “The MSI and neo-fascism in Italy”, in Western European Politics, 11, 2L. Cheles et al(ed.), Neo-fascism in Europe, Longman, 1991D. Childs, “The Nationalist and neo-Nazi scene” in K. Larres & P. Panayi(eds), The Federal

Republic of Germany since 1949, Longman, 1996R. Ferraresi, “The radical right in post-war Italy”, Politics and Society, XVI, 1988C. Husbands, “Extreme Right-wing Politics in Britain”, Western European Politics, April 1988P. Ignazi, “The transformation of the MSI into the AN”, Western European Politics, October,

1966P. Lynch, “Le Pen the National Front and the extreme Right in France”, Parliamentary Affairs,

July, 1992( a whole issue devoted to the extreme right)R. Griffin(ed.), International FascismJ.F. Pollard, The Fascist Experience in ItalyT. Saalfeld, “The politics of national populism: the ideology and policies of the German

Republican Party, in German Politics, August, 1993

The resurgence of fascism in post-communist EuropeW. Chapin, “Explaining the electoral success of the New Right: the German case”, Western

European Politics, April, 1997R. Eatwell, “Towards a new model of the rise of right-wing extremism”, German Politics,

December, 1997N. Goodrick-Clark, Black Sun: Aryan Cults, Esoteric Nazism and the Politics of Identity, New

York UP, 2002P. Hainsworth(ed.), The Extreme Right in Europe and the USA, Pinter, 1994P. Halliday, “Living with the Bunker”, Channel 4 video, 1994J. Held, Democracy and Right-wing politics in Eastern Europe in the 1990s, Columbia UP, 1993P. Hockenos, Free to Hate“Journey to the Far Right”, BBC video, 1999D. Keithly, “Social unrest and extremism in the new states of reunified Germany”, Politics and

Society in Germany, Austria and Switzerland, Summer, 1993P. Merkl, The Revivial of Right-wing Extremism in the 1990s, Cass, 1992 Parliamentary Affairs, July, 2000: a whole issue devoted to “The Far Right in Europe”M. Walker, The National Front, Fontana, 1997

Interpretations of FascismG. Allardyce, “What fascism is not: thoughts on the deflation of a concept”E. Fromm, Flight from Freedom, Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1942R. De Felice, Interpretations of Fascism, CUP, 1977R. Griffin, The Nature of Fascism————— (ed.), International Fascism, Hodder, 1998J. Linz, “Some notes towards a comparative study of fascism” in W. Laquer(ed.), Fascism: A

Reader’s GuideW. Reich, The Mass Psychology of Fascism

PAPER 21. THE NATIONALIZATION OF CULTURE IN BRITAIN SINCE 1800

What – and who – are the arts for? This paper charts the engagement of the political nation with thearts in Britain since 1800. In doing so it adopts a fairly loose definition of ‘nationalization’ – taking innot only central government patronage but also local government, private patronage and the broadercontext of debates about the place of culture in national life – and a fairly tight definition of ‘culture’ –that is, the traditional one limited to the fine arts. Until recently, cultural institutions in Britain hadremained virtually untouched as historical subjects – art historians found them insufficiently ‘arty’, histo-rians found them insufficiently British, in comparison to their European equivalents. But as British histo-rians’ understanding of political culture broadens, it is becoming easier to see how even – or especially– late-blooming, under-funded, aesthetically conservative institutions can shed light upon the nature ofBritish liberalism, relations between State and people, and national character or identity. The papershould be of equal interest to those whose tastes lean towards the political and the cultural. Much visualmaterial will be introduced and site visits to cultural institutons scheduled.

The core of the paper will be devoted to tracing the development of State and municipal institutionsdevoted to the arts – principally painting, decorative art, architecture and music, but touching on a wide

50

range of related interests, including theatre, cinema, landscape and archaeology. This narrative will beembedded in a variety of contexts. Private patronage and voluntary associations will be surveyed in orderto consider whether a ‘British model’ existed which obviated the need for public provision. Debates overState provision for the arts will be linked to debates over provision in related areas – education, scienceand technology, ‘heritage’ and memory – and to wider debates over the public-private boundary, religion,morality, class, welfare and individual responsibility. Attention will be paid to changing definitions ofEnglishness and Britishness and to contrasts and parallels with other European experiences.

SurveysJohn Brewer, The Pleasures of the Imagination: English Culture in the Eighteenth Century (1997)Janet Minihan, The Nationalization of Culture (1977); and see also P. Mandler, A. Owen, S.

Koven and S. Pedersen, “Cultural Histories Old and New: Rereading the Work of JanetOppenheim”, Victorian Studies 41 (1997)

Gerald Reitlinger, The Economics of Taste, 2 vols. (1961–3) N.M. Pearson, The State and the Visual Arts: A Discussion of State Intervention in the Visual Arts

in Britain,1760–1981 (1982)Gordon Fyfe, Art, Power and Modernity: English Art Institutions 1750–1950 (2000)Raymond Williams, Culture and Society, 1780–1850 (1958)Simon Gunn, The Public Culture of the Victorian Middle Class. Ritual and Authority in the

English Industrial City, 1840–1914 (2000)John Steegman, Victorian Taste: A Study of the Arts and Architecture from 1830 to 1870 (1950)Martin Wiener, English Culture and the Decline of the Industrial Spirit, 1850–1980 (1981)Ross McKibbin, Classes and Cultures: England 1918–1951 (1998)Robert Hewison, Culture and Consensus: England, Art and Politics since 1940 (1995)Robert Hewison, In Anger: British Culture in the Cold War 1945–60 (1981)Cultural Trends, 1989-present

The Politics of CultureRobert Colls and Philip Dodd (eds.), Englishness: Politics and Culture 1880–1920 (1986)Peter Mandler, ‘Against “Englishness”: English Culture and the Limits to Rural Nostalgia,

1850–1940’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 6th ser., 7 (1997)Mark Girouard, The Return to Camelot: Chivalry and the English Gentleman (1981)Peter Mandler, ‘Art, Death and Taxes: The Taxation of Works of Art in Britain, 1796–1914’,

Historical Research 74 (2001)John Ruskin, The Political Economy of Art (1857)Jordanna Bailkin, ‘Picturing Feminism, Selling Liberalism: The Case of the Disappearing

Holbein’, Gender & History 11 (1999)D.L. LeMahieu, A Culture for Democracy: Mass Communication and the Cultivated Mind in

Britain Between the Wars (1988)M. Grant, Propaganda and the Role of the State in Inter-War Britain (1994)J.M. Keynes, ‘Art and the State’, in Clough Williams-Ellis (ed.), Britain and the Beast (1937)F.M. Leventhal, ‘ “The Best for the Most”: CEMA and State Sponsorship of the Arts in Wartime,

1939–1945’, Twentieth Century British History 1 (1990)J.B. Priestley, The Arts Under Socialism (1947)C.P. Snow, The Two Cultures (1959), ed. S. Collini (1993)Hugh Jenkins, The Culture Gap: An Experience of Government and the Arts (1979)Roy Shaw, The Arts and the People (1987).Richard Witts, Artist Unknown: An Alternative History of the Arts Council (1998)

ArtIain Pears, The Discovery of Painting: The Growth of Interest in the Arts in England 1680–1768

(1988)John Barrell, The Political Theory of Painting from Reynolds to Hazlitt (1986)Francis Haskell, The Ephemeral Museum: Old Master Paintings and the Rise of the Art Exhibition

(2000)Peter Funnell, ‘William Hazlitt, Prince Hoare, and the Institutionalisation of the British Art

World’, in Brian Allen (ed.), Towards a Modern Art World (1995)William Hazlitt, Fine Arts. Whether They are Promoted by Academies and Public Institutions (1814)Patricia Anderson, The Printed Image and the Transformation of Popular Culture 1790–1860

(1991)

51

Jonah Siegel, Desire and Excess: The Nineteenth-Century Culture of Art (2000)Kate Flint, The Victorians and the Visual Imagination (2000)Roy Strong, And When Did You Last See Your Father? The Victorian Painter and British History

(1978)Paula Gillett, The Victorian Painter’s World (1990)Dianne Sachko Macleod, Art and the Victorian Middle Class: Money and the Making of Cultural

Identity (1996)Janet Wolff and John Seed (eds.), The Culture of Capital: Art, Power and the 19th Century Middle

Class (1988)J.H.G. Archer (ed.), Art and Architecture in Victorian Manchester (1985)S.K. Tillyard, The Impact of Modernism: The Visual Arts in Edwardian England (1988)Lisa Tickner, Modern Life and Modern Subjects: British Art in the Early 20th Century (2000)Charles Harrison, English Art and Modernism 1900–1939 (1981)Nikolaus Pevsner, The Englishness of English Art (1956)Robert Hewison, Future Tense: A New Art for the Nineties (1990)Margaret Garlake, New Art New World: British Art in Postwar Society (1998)Rosie Millard, The Tastemakers (2002)

Museums and GalleriesGill Perry and Colin Cunningham (eds.), Academies, Museums and Canons of Art (1999)Anne Goldgar, ‘The British Museum and the Virtual Representation of Culture in the Eighteenth

Century’, Albion 32 (2000)E.G. Holt (ed.), The Triumph of Art for the Public, 1785–1848 (1979)Brandon Taylor, Art for the Nation. Exhibitions and the London Public 1747- 2001 (1999)Nick Prior, Museums & Modernity: Art Galleries and the Making of Modern Culture (2002)Rafael Cardoso Denis & Colin Trodd (eds.), Art and the Academy in the 19th Century (1999)Colin Trodd and Paul Barlow (eds.), Governing Cultures: Institutions of Art in Victorian London

(2000)Giles Waterfield, Palaces of Art: Art Galleries in Britain 1790–1990 (1991)Giles Waterfield, ‘The Town House as Gallery of Art’, London Journal 20 (1995)Colin Trodd, ‘Culture, Class, City: The National Gallery, London and the Spaces of Education,

1822–57’, in Marcia Pointon (ed.), Art Apart: Art Institutions and Ideology Across Englandand North America (1994)

Art Treasures of England: The Regional Collections (1998)M. Harrison, ‘Art and Philanthropy: T.C. Horsfall and the Manchester Art Museum’, in A.J. Kidd

and K.W. Roberts (eds.), City, Class and Culture: Studies of Cultural Production and SocialPolicy in Victorian Manchester (1985)

George Moore, ‘The Alderman in Art’, in Modern Painting (1893)S.P. Casteras and C. Denney (eds.), The Grosvenor Gallery: A Palace of Art in Victorian England

(1996)G. Waterfield, ‘Art for the People’, in Art for the People: Culture in the Slums of Late Victorian

Britain (1994)Annie E. Coombes, Reinventing Africa: Museums, Material Culture and Popular Imagination in

Late Victorian and Edwardian England (1994)Frank Rutter, Since I Was Twenty-Five (1927)Sir Henry Miers, A Report on the Public Museums of the British Isles (1928)John Rothenstein, Summer’s Lease: Autobiography, 1901–1938 (1965) and Brave Day, Hideous

Night: Autobiography, 1939–1965 (1966)Kenneth Clark, Another Part of the Wood (1974) and The Other Half (1977)Roy Strong, The Roy Strong Diaries 1967–1987 (1997)Giles Waterfield, The Hound in the Left-Hand Corner (2002)

MusicC. Bashford and L. Langley (eds.), Music in British Culture, 1785–1914 (2000)Cyril Ehrlich, The Music Profession in Britain Since the 18th Century (1985)Cyril Ehrlich, Harmonious Alliance: A History of the Performing Right Society (1989)Cyril Ehrlich and Dave Russell, ‘Victorian Music: A Perspective’, Journal of Victorian Culture

3 (1998)Simon Gunn, ‘The Sublime and the Vulgar: Music and the Construction of “High Culture” in

Manchester c.1840–1880’, Journal of Victorian Culture 2 (1997)

52

Meirion Hughes and Robert Stradling, The English Musical Renaissance 1840–1940, 2nd ed.(2001)

Michael Musgrave, The Musical Life of the Crystal Palace (1995)Georgina Boyes, The Imagined Village: Culture, Ideology and the English Folk Revival (1993)Jennifer Doctor, The BBC and Ultra-Modern Music, 1922–1936: Shaping a Nation’s Tastes

(1999)P. Scannell, ‘Music for the Multitude? The Dilemmas of the BBC’s Music Policy 1923–46’,

Media, Culture and Society 3 (1981)P. Symons, ‘Music and National Identity in Scotland: A Study of Jock Tamson’s Bairns’, Popular

Music 16 (1997)Alan Peacock, Paying the Piper: Culture, Music and Money (1993) Simon Frith, Sound Effects: Youth, Leisure and the Politics of Rock (1983)

Architecture and DesignM. Snodin and J. Styles (eds.), Design and the Decorative Arts: Britain 1500–1900 (2001)Jules Lubbock, The Tyranny of Taste: The Politics of Architecture and Design in Britain,

1550–1960 (1995)John Summerson, Georgian London (1945)John Summerson, The Life and Works of John Nash, Architect (1980)Geoffrey Tyack, Sir James Pennethorne and the Making of Victorian London (1992)M.H. Port, Imperial London: Civil Government Building in London 1851–1915 (1995)M. Baker and B. Richardson (eds.), A Grand Design: The Art of the Victoria and Albert Museum

(1997)Q. Bell, The Schools of Design (1963)Paul Greenhalgh, Ephemeral Vistas: The Expositions Universelles, Great Exhibitions and

World’s Fairs, 1851–1939 (1988)Nikolaus Pevsner, ‘High Victorian Design’, in Studies in Art, Architecture and Design: Victorian

and After (1968)Nikolaus Pevsner, Pioneers of Modern Design (1936)Peter Stansky, Redesigning the World: William Morris, the 1880s, and the Arts and Crafts (1985)Deborah Weiner, Architecture and Social Reform in Late-Victorian London (1994)Standish Meacham, Regaining Paradise: Englishness and the Early Garden City Movement

(1999)Michael T. Saler, The Avant-Garde in Interwar England: Medieval Modernism and the London

Underground (1999)Robert Byron, How We Celebrate The Coronation (1937)Lionel Esher, A Broken Wave: The Rebuilding of England 1940–1980 (1981)Andrew Saint, Towards a Social Architecture: The Role of School Building in Post-War England

(1987)Miles Glendinning and Stefan Muthesius, Tower Block: Modern Public Housing in England,

Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (1994)Becky E. Conekin, ‘The Autobiography of a Nation’: The 1951 Festival of Britain (2003)

HeritageRaphael Samuel, Theatres of Memory, Vol. I: Past and Present in Contemporary Culture (1994)

and Vol. II: Island Stories. Unravelling Britain (1998)Michael Hunter (ed.), Preserving the Past: The Rise of Heritage in Modern Britain (1996)Patrick Wright, On Living in an Old Country (1985)Peter Mandler, The Fall and Rise of the Stately Home (1997)Stephen Daniels, Fields of Vision: Landscape Imagery and National Identity in England and the

United States (1993)Charles Dellheim, The Face of the Past: The Preservation of the Medieval Inheritance in

Victorian England (1982)John Taylor, A Dream of England: Landscape, Photography and the Tourist’s Imagination (1994)G. Baldwin Brown, The Care of Ancient Monuments (1905)Clough Williams-Ellis (ed.), Britain and the Beast (1937)Alex Potts, ‘Constable Country Between the Wars’, in Raphael Samuel (ed.), Patriotism: The

Making and Unmaking of British National Identity, vol. III, National Fictions (1989)David Matless, Landscape and Englishness (1998)James Lees-Milne, Prophesying Peace (1977), Caves of Ice (1983), Midway on the Waves (1985)

53

Robert Hewison, The Heritage Industry: Britain in a Climate of Decline (1987)Patrick Wright, A Journey Through Ruins: The Last Days of London (1991)Nick Merriman, Beyond the Glass Case: The Past, the Heritage and the Public in Britain (1991)

Radio and TVAsa Briggs, The History of Broadcasting in the United Kingdom, 5 vols. (1961–95)Jennifer Doctor, The BBC and Ultra-Modern Music, 1922–1936: Shaping a Nation’s Tastes

(1999)P. Scannell and D. Cardiff, A Social History of British Broadcasting, Vol. I: 1922–1939 (1991)P. Scannell, ‘Music for the Multitude? The Dilemmas of the BBC’s Music Policy 1923–46’,

Media, Culture and Society 3 (1981)H. Jennings and W. Gill, Broadcasting in Everyday Life (1939)S. Nicholas, ‘ “Sly Demagogues” and Wartime Radio: J.B. Priestley and the B.B.C.’, Twentieth

Century British History 6 (1995)Humphrey Carpenter, The Envy of the World: 50 Years of the BBC Third Programme and Radio

3 (1996)K. Whitehead, The Third Programme: A Literary History (1994)John A. Walker, Arts TV: A History of Arts Television in Britain (1993)Asa Briggs, The Franchise Affair: Creating Fortunes and Failures in Independent Television

(1986)

Comparative PerspectivesJohn Pick, The Arts in a State: A Study of Government Arts Policies from Ancient Greece to the

Present (1988)M.C. Cummings and R.S. Katz (eds.), The Patron State: Government and the Arts in Europe,

North America and Japan (1987)J. Heilbrun and C.M. Gray, The Economics of Art and Culture, 2nd ed. (2001)Judith Huggins Balfe (ed.), Paying the Piper: Causes and Consequences of Arts Patronage (1993)Gwendolyn Wright (ed.), The Formation of National Collections of Art (1996)D.J. Olsen, The City as a Work of Art: London, Paris, Vienna (1986)Sharon Marcus, Apartment Stories: City and Home in 19th Century Paris and London (1999)Wendy Kaplan (ed.), Designing Modernity: The Arts of Reform and Persuasion, 1885–1945

(1995)Jay Winter, Sites of Memory, Sites of Mourning: The Great War in European Cultural History

(1995)Pierre Nora (ed.), Realms of Memory: The Construction of the French Past, 3 vols. (1996–8)Daniel J. Sherman, Worthy Monuments: Art Museums and the Politics of Culture in Nineteenth-

Century France (1989)Nicholas Green, The Spectacle of Nature: Landscape and Bourgeois Culture in Nineteenth

Century France (1990)Herman Lebovics, True France: The Wars Over Cultural Identity, 1900–1945 (1992)Herman Lebovics, Mona Lisa’s Escort: Andre Malraux and the Reinvention of French Culture

(1999) James J. Sheehan, Museums in the German Art World: From the End of the Old Regime to the

Rise of Modernism (2000)Detlef Hoffmann, ‘The German Art Museum and the History of the Nation’, in D.J. Sherman &

I. Rogoff, MuseumCulture: History, Discourses, Spectacles (1994)Celia Applegate, A Nation of Provincials: The German Idea of Heimat (1990)Alon Confino, The Nation as a Local Metaphor: Württemberg, Imperial Germany, and National

Memory, 1871–1918 (1997)Francois Forster-Hahn (ed.), Imagining Modern German Culture: 1889–1910 (1996)Karl Christian Fuhrer, ‘A Medium of Modernity? Broadcasting in Weimar Germany,

1923–1932’, Journal of Modern History 69 (1997)

PAPER 24. CULTURE AND IDENTITY IN BRITAIN’S LONG EIGHTEENTH CENTURY

Recent work on the eighteenth century has taken a dramatic turn toward cultural history. It has notabandoned the traditional subjects of commerce, politics and empire, but it has looked again at thesesubjects from a cultural angle. Cultural history has also contributed an array of new topics for investi-

54

gation, from the body, sexuality and gender through habits of work and leisure to the institutions thatproduced and reproduced human experience. Moreover, the cultural turn has begun to bring back withinthe purview of history cultural topics that for decades historians had ceded to ‘experts’ in literature, arthistory and music.

This paper offers students an opportunity to become familiar with recent work in cultural history,investigating traditional and not-so-traditional topics in the eighteenth century from a cultural perspec-tive. Students may engage with a wide range of subjects, from the plebeian to the polite, from the urbanto the rustic, from the metropole to the peripheries of empire, and from the straightforwardly politicaldomain of identity politics to the more subtly political technologies of the high arts.

Within this variety, the paper pursues certain themes. One is the centrality of commerce, a topic, wellestablished in economic, political and imperial historiography, towards which the paper takes a culturalapproach. A second theme is identity. A cultural approach is bound to try to characterize and assesshistorical agents’ own sense of their world, the tools they had and used to make it their own. The papermoves through a variety of axes, including gender, class, religion, politics, ethnicity and nationality,along which eighteenth-century Britons constructed their identities. Finally, identity can be a source ofsolidarity in a society but it is also a matter of contestation. Thus, cultural history directs attention at theways that both actions and representations express the desire for and clash over power. The materialsfor the investigation of this theme, cultural politics, are often artifacts of discourse (the kinds of primarywritten sources that generations of editors have helped to make accessible). However, the source mate-rials are also available in the remains of material and visual culture, which willing students will beencouraged to investigate.

The backbone of the paper is a series of sixteen lectures, organized to highlight three major themes:the implications of commerce; questions of identity; and the varieties of cultural form. The course oflectures begins with two lectures introducing the themes of the course and providing the early modernbackground to eighteenth-century developments. Subsequent lectures cover fourteen topics, which alsoserve as supervision topics.

Introductory and General BooksJohn Barrell, The Birth of Pandora and the Division of Knowledge (1992)Jeremy Black and Jeremy Gregory, eds., Culture, Society and Politics in Britain 1660–1800

(1991)John Brewer, The Pleasures of the Imagination: English Culture in the Eighteenth Century (1997)Boris Ford, ed., Eighteenth-Century Britain (The Cambridge Cultural History of Britain, Volume

5) (1991)Iain McCalman, An Oxford Companion to the Romantic Age: British Culture 1776–1832 (1999)

Some Primary Sources of General UseJames Boswell, The Yale Edition of the Private Papers of James Boswell (1950—)D. F.Bond, ed., The Spectator (1711–1712, 1714; 1965)D. F.Bond, ed., The Tatler (1709–1711; 1987)Frances Burney, The Journals and Letters of Frances Burney (Madame D’Arblay), ed. Joyce

Hemlow, 12 vols. (1972–1989)Daniel Defoe, A Tour through the Whole Island of Great Britain (1724–1726)Early English Newspapers (microfilm collection)Thomas Turner, The Diary of Thomas Turner 1754–1765, ed. David Vaisey (1984)Horace Walpole, The Yale Edition of the Horace Walpole’s Correspondence, ed. W. S. Lewis,

48 vols. (1937–1983)

Part I: Commerce and Conversation1. The Commercialization of Leisure and Culture

Ann Bermingham and John Brewer, eds., The Consumption of Culture 1600–1800 (1995)John Brewer and Roy Porter, eds., Consumption and the World of Goods (1993)Colin Campbell, The Romantic Ethic and the Spirit of Modern Consumerism (1987)Dario Castiglione and Jonathan Barry, eds., Shifting the Boundaries: Transformation of the

Languages of Public and Private in the Eighteenth Century (1995)Craig Muldrew, The Economy of Obligation: The Culture of Credit and Social Relations in the

Early Modern Period (1998)Neil McKendrick, John Brewer and J. H. Plumb, The Birth of a Consumer Society: The

Commercialization of Eighteenth-Century England (1982)Roy Porter and M.M. Roberts, eds., Pleasure in the Eighteenth Century (1996)

55

James Raven, Judging New Wealth (1992)J. Sekora, Luxury: The Concept in Western Thought (1977)Richard Sennett, The Fall of Public Man (1974)

2. Material Culture: Things, Design, Fashion, TasteMaxine Berg, ‘Women’s Consumption and the Industrial Classes of Eighteenth-Century

England’, Journal of Social History 30 (1996)Anne Buck, Dress in Eighteenth-Century England (1979)Victoria de Grazia and Ellen Furlough, ed., The Sex of Things: Gender and Consumption in

Histroical Perspective (1996), selected essays Margot Finn, ‘Men’s Things: Masculine Possession in the Consumer Revolution’, Social History

25 (2000)Elizabeth Kowaleski-Wallace, Consuming Subjects: Women, Shopping and Business in the

Eighteenth Century (1997)Beverly LeMire, Fashion’s Favourite: The Cotton Trade and the Consumer in Britain 1660–1800

(1992)Aileen Ribeiro, Dress in Eighteenth-Century Europe (1984)S. Richards, Eighteenth-Century Ceramics: Products for a Civilized Society (1999)Charles Saumarez Smith, Eighteenth-Century Decoration: Design and the Domestic Interior in

England (1993)Carole Shammas, The Pre-Industrial Consumer in England and America (1990)John Styles, ‘Product Innovation in Early Modern London’, Past and Present 168 (2000),

124–169

Primary sources: Collections of the Fitzwilliam Museum.

3. Urban Spaces and DevelopmentsJonathan Barry, ‘Provincial Town Culture, 1640–1780’, in A. Wear and J. Pittock, eds.,

Interpretation and Culture (1990)Peter Borsay, The English Urban Renaissance: Culture and Society in the Provincial Town,

1660–1770 (1989)Robert O. Bucholz, The Augustan Court: Queen Anne and the Decline of Court Culture (1993)Peter Clark, The Cambridge Urban History of Britain, Volume II (2000)Penelope Corfield, The Impact of English Towns, 1700–1800 (1982)Carl Estabrook, Urbane and Rustic England: Cultural Ties and Social Spheres in the Provinces,

1660–1780 (1998)J. Jefferson Looney, “Cultural Life in the Provinces: Leeds and York, 1720–1820’, in A. L. Beier,

David Cannadine and James M. Rosenheim, eds., The First Modern Society: Essays in EnglishHistory in Honour of Lawrence Stone (1989)

Angus McInnes, ‘The Emergence of a Leisure Town: Shrewsbury, 1660–1760’, Past and Present120 (1988); also a debate with Peter Borsay, Past and Present 126 (1990), 189–202

Elizabeth McKellar, The Birth of Modern London: The Development and Design of the City1660–1720 (1999)

John Money, Experience and Identity: Brimingham and the West Midlands, 1760–1800 (1977)Lawrence Stone, ‘The Residential Development of the West End of London in the Seventeenth

Century’, in Barbara C. Malament, ed., After the Reformation: Essays in Honor of J. H. Hexter(1980)

John Summerson, Georgian London (1945)Susan Whyman, Sociability and Power in Late-Stuart London: The Cultural Worlds of the

Verneys, 1660–1720 (1990)

Some primary sources:COLLAGE (an image database containing 20,000 works from the Guildhall Library and Guildhall

Art Gallery London): http://www.collage.nhil.com/William Hickey, Memoirs of a Georgian Rake (1995)Dudley Ryder, The Diary of Dudley Ryder, 1715–1716, ed. W. Matthews (1939)

4. Sociability and AssociationDonna Andrew, ‘Popular Culture and Public Debate: London 1780’, Historical Journal (1996)

56

Peter Clark, British Clubs and Societies, 1580–1800: The Origins of an Associational World (2000)Stephen Copley, ‘Polite Culture in Commercial Society’, in Andrew E. Benjamin et al., The

Figural and the Literal (1987)John Gascoigne, Joseph Banks and the English Enlightenment (1994)Jan Golinski, Science as Public Culture: Chemistry and Enlightenment in Britain, 1760–1820

(1992)Lawrence E. Klein, Shaftesbury and the Culture of Politeness: Moral Discourse and Culture

Politics in Early Eighteenth-Century England (1994)Paul Langford, ‘British Politeness and the Progress of Western Manners: An Eighteenth-Century

Enigma’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 6th series, 7 (1997) R.J. Morris, ‘Voluntary Societies and British Urban Elites, 1780–1850’, Historical Journal

(1983)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘Politics, Politeness and the Anglicisation of Early Eighteenth-Century

Scottish Culture’, in R. A. Mason, ed., Scotland and England 1286–1815 (1987)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘Politics and Politeness in the Reigns of Anne and the Early Hanoverians’,

in J. G. A. Pocock, The Varieties of British Political Thought, 1500–1800 (1993)Roy Porter, ‘Science, Provincial Culture and Public Opinion in Enlightenment England’, British

Journal for Eighteenth-Century Studies 3 (1980): 20–46Steven Shapin, ‘“A Scholar and a Gentleman”: The Problematic Identity of the Scientific

Practitioner in Early Modern England’, History of Science 29 (1991): 279–327Arnold Thackray, ‘Natural Knowledge in Cultural Context: The Manchester Model’, American

Historical Review 79 (1974): 672–709

Some primary sources:Anthony Ashley Cooper, third earl of Shaftesbury, Characteristics of Men, Manners, Opinions,

Times, ed. L.E. Klein (1711; 1999)Spalding Gentleman’s Society, The Minute-Books of the Spalding Gentlemen’s Society

1712–1755, ed. D.M. Owen (1981)Philip Dormer Stanhope, fourth earl of Chesterfield, The Letters, ed. B. Dobrée (1932)

Part II: Axes of Identity5. Religion

Margaret Cox, Grave Concerns: Death and Burial in England 1700–1850 (1998)Tony Claydon and Ian McBride, eds., Protestantism and National Identity: Britain and Ireland

c.1650-c.1850 (1998)J. Garnett and H. C. G. Mathew, eds., Revival and Religion since 1700 (1994)W. T. Gibson, The Achievement of the Anglican Church, 1689–1800 (1995)A. D. Gilbert, Religion and Society in Industrial England 1740–1914 (1976)Colin Haydon, Anti-Catholicism in England, c.1714–80 (1993)D. Hempton, Methodism and Politics in British Society 1750–1850 (1984)Boyd Hilton, The Age of Atonement: The Influence of Evangelicalism on Social and Economic

Thought 1785–1865 (1988)W. M. Jacob, Lay People and Religion in the Early Eighteenth Century (1996)A. Smith, The Established Church and Popular Religion, 1750–1850 (1971)Nicholas Tyacke, ed., England’s Long Reformation 1500–1800 (1998): articles by Jonathan

Barry, W. R. Ward, Jeremy GregoryJohn Walsh, Colin Haydon and Stephen Taylor, eds., The Church of England, c.1689–1833 (1994)

Some primary sources:William Gibson, ed., Religion and Society in England and Wales, 1689–1800 (1998)John Wesley, journals and diaries, various editionsJames Woodforde, The Diary of a Country Parson: The Reverend James Woodforde, 1758–1781,

ed. John Beresford, 5 vols. (1924)

6. GenderG. J. Barker-Benfield, The Culture of Sensibility: Sex and Society in Eighteenth-Century Britain

(1992)Philip Carter, Men and the Emergence of Polite Society (2000)Michéle Cohen, Fashioning Masculinity: National Identity and Language in the Eighteenth

Century (1996)

57

Bridget Hill, Women, Work and Sexual Politics in Eighteenth-Century England, 2nd edition(1994)

Tim Hitchcock and Michéle Cohen, eds., English Masculinities (1999)Lawrence E. Klein, ‘Gender, Conversation and the Public Sphere in Early Eighteenth-Century

England’, in Michael Worton and Judith Still, eds., Textuality and Sexuality: Reading Theoriesand Practices (1993)

Lawrence E. Klein, ‘Gender and the Public/Private Distinction in the Eighteenth Century’,Eighteenth-Century Studies (1995–96)

Thomas Laqueur, Making Sex: Body and Gender from the Greeks to Freud (1990)K. Shevelow, Women and Print Culture: The Construction of Femininity in the Early Periodical

(1989)Randolph Trumbach, ‘London’s Sodomites’, Journal of Social History (1997)Alice Waters, ‘Conversation Pieces: Science and Politeness in Eighteenth-Century England’,

History of Science (1997)

Some primary sources:A. Day, ed., Letters from Georgian Ireland: The Correspondence of Mary Delany, 1731–1768 (1991)R. Halsband, ed., The Complete Letters of Lady Mary Wortley Montagu (1965)Vivien Jones, ed., Women in the Eighteenth Century: Constructions of Femininity (1990)

7. Social StructureDonna Andrew, ‘The Code of Honour and Its Critics: The Opposition to Duelling in England,

1700–1850’, Social History 5 (1980)Jonathan Barry and Christopher Brooks, eds., The Middling Sort of People: Culture, Society and

Politics in England 1550–1800 (1994)John Cannon, Aristocratic Century: The Peerage of Eighteenth-Century England (1984)Leonore Davidoff and Catherine Hall, Family Fortunes: Men and Women of the English Middle

Class 1780–1850 (1987)Peter Earle, The Making of the English Middle Class: Business, Society and Family Life in London

1660–1730 (1989)H. R. French, ‘Social Status, Localism and the “Middle Sort of People” in England, 1620–1750’,

Past and Present 166 (2000), 66–99David Hancock, Citizens of the World: London Merchants and the Integration of the British

Atlantic community, 1735–85 (1995)Bridget Hill, Servants: English Domestics in the Eighteenth Century (1996)Margaret Hunt, The Middling Sort: Commerce, Gender and the Family in England 1680–1780

(1996)Philip Jenkins, The Making of a Ruling Class: The Glamorgan Gentry 1640–1790 (1983)Nicholas Rogers, ‘Money, Land and Lineage: The Big Bourgeoisie of Hanoverian London’,

Social History (1979)James Rosenheim, The Emergence of a Ruling Order: English Landed Society 1650–1750 (1998)John Smail, The Origins of Middle-Class Culture: Halifax, Yorkshire, 1660–1780 (1994)

Some primary sources:Daniel Defoe, The Family Instructor (1715, 1989)M. Elwin, ed., The Noels and the Milbankes: Their Letters for Twenty-Five Years, 1767–1792

(1967)William Stout, The Autobiography of William Stout of Lancaster, 1665–1752, ed. J. D. Marshall

(1967)

8. MannersGeorge C. Brauer, Jr., The Education of the Gentlemen: Theories of Gentlemanly Education in

England, 1660–1775 (1959)Stephen Copley, ‘Polite Culture in Commercial Society’, in Andrew E. Benjamin et al., The

Figural and the Literal (1987)Steven Copley, ‘Commerce, Conversation and Politeness in the Early Eighteenth-Century

Periodical’, British Journal for Eighteenth-Century Studies (1995)Penelope J. Corfield, ‘The Rivals: Landed and Other Gentlemen’, in N. B. Harte and R. Quinault,

eds., Land and Society in Britain 1700–1914 (1996)Lawrence E. Klein, ‘The Third Earl of Shaftesbury and the Progress of Politeness’, Eighteenth-

Century Studies (1984)

58

Lawrence E. Klein, Shaftesbury and the Culture of Politeness: Moral Discourse and CulturePolitics in Early Eighteenth-Century England (1994)

Paul Langford, ‘British Politeness and the Progress of Western Manners: An Eighteenth-CenturyEnigma’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 6th series, 7 (1997)

Leah Leneman, ‘Defamation in Scotland 1750–1800’, Continuity and Change 15 (2000)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘The Scottish Enlightenment’, in Roy Porter and Mikulas Teich, eds., The

Enlightenment in National Perspective (1981)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘Politics, Politeness and the Anglicisation of Early Eighteenth-Century

Scottish Culture’, in R. A. Mason, ed., Scotland and England 1286–1815 (1987)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘Politics and Politeness in the Reigns of Anne and the Early Hanoverians’,

in J. G. A. Pocock, The Varieties of British Political Thought, 1500–1800 (1993)Richard Sennett, The Fall of Public Man (1974)Robert Shoemaker, ‘The Decline of Public Insult in London, 1660–1800’, Past and Present 169

(2000)Lawrence Stone, ‘Interpersonal Violence in English Society 1300–1800’, Past and Present 101

(1983)

Some primary sources:Anthony Ashley Cooper, third earl of Shaftesbury, Characteristics of Men, Manners, Opinions,

Times, ed. Lawrence E. Klein (1711; 1999)Philip Dormer Stanhope, fourth earl of Chesterfield, The Letters, ed. B. Dobrée (1932)Jonathan Swift, Polite Conversation (1738)

9. Education and EnlightenmentR. D. Anderson, Education and the Scottish People 1750–1918 (1995)Jeremy Black, The British Abroad: The Grand Tour in the Eighteenth Century (1992)L. S. Sutherland and L. G. Mitchell, eds., The History of the University of Oxford. 5: The

Eighteenth Century (1986)George C. Brauer, Jr., The Education of the Gentlemen: Theories of Gentlemanly Education in

England, 1660–1775 (1959)John Gascoigne, Cambridge in the Age of Enlightenment (1989)John Gascoigne, Joseph Banks and the English Enlightenment (1994)D. R. Headrick, When Information Came of Age: Technologies of Knowledge in the Age of Reason

and Revolution 1700–1850 (2001)Margaret Jacob, Living the Enlightenment (1991), chs 1, 2Hugh Kearney, Scholars and Gentlemen (1970)Elisabeth Leedham-Green, A Concise History of the University of Cambridge (1996)Ian Ousby, The Englishman’s England: Taste, Travel and the Rise of Tourism (1990)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘Culture and Society in the Eighteenth-Century Province: The Case of

Edinburgh and the Scottish Enlightenment’, in L. Stone, ed., The University in Society (1974)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘The Scottish Enlightenment’, in Roy Porter and Mikulas Teich, eds., The

Enlightenment in National Perspective (1981)Roy Porter, and G. S. Rousseau, eds., The Ferment of Knowledge (1980)Roy Porter, ‘The Enlightenment in England’, in Roy Porter and Mikulas Teich, eds., The

Enlightenment in National Perspective (1981)Roy Porter, ‘Science, Provincial Culture and Public Opinion in Enlightenment England’, British

Journal for Eighteenth-Century Studies 3 (1980)Richard Sher, Church and University in the Scottish Enlightenment (1985)David Spadafora, The Idea of Progress in Eighteenth-Century Britain (1990)Arnold Thackray, ‘Natural Knowledge in Cultural Context: The Manchester Model’, American

Historical Review 79 (1974)Alice Waters, ‘Conversation Pieces: Science and Politeness in Eighteenth-Century England’,

History of Science 35 (1997)

10. Locality, Region, Nation, EmpireAnthony J. Barker, The African Link: British Attitudes to the Negro in the Era of the Atlantic

Slave Trade, 1550–1807 (1978) Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707–1837 (1992)David Dabydeen, Hogarth’s Blacks: Images of Blacks in Eighteenth-Century English Art (1985)Colin Kidd, British Identities before Nationalism: Ethnicity and Nationhood in the Atlantic World,

1600–1800 (1999)

59

Paul Langford, Englishness Identified: Manners and Character, 1650–1850 (2000)Rosalind Mitchison, ‘Patriotism and National Identity in Eighteenth-Century Scotland’, in T. W.

Moody, ed., Historical Studies 11: Nationality and the Pursuit of National Independence (1987)Norma Myers, Reconstructing the Black Past: Blacks in Britain, 1780–1830 (1996)Gerald Newman, The Rise of English Nationalism: A Cultural History 1740–1830, rev. ed. (1998)Nicholas Phillipson, ‘Politics, Politeness and the Anglicisation of Early Eighteenth-Century

Scotland’, in Roger A. Mason, ed., Scotland and England (1987)Murray Pittock, Inventing and Resisting Britain: Culturla Identities in Britain and Ireland,

1685–1789 (1997)Beth Fowkes Tobin, Picturing Imperial Power: Colonial Subjects in Eighteenth Century British

Painting (1999)Dror Wahrman, ‘National Society, Communal Culture’, Social History (1992)Kathleen Wilson, ‘Citizenship, Empire and Modernity in the English Provinces, c.1720–1790’,

Eighteenth-Century Studies 29 (1995)

Some primary sources:Trevor Herbert and Gareth Elwyn Jones, eds., The Remaking of Wales in the Eighteenth Century,

1988Peter Lord, ed., Words with Pictures: Welsh Images and Images of Wales in the Popular Press,

1640–1860 (1995)Joanna Martin, The Penrice Letters 1768–1795 (Publications of the South Wales Record Society,

9, 1993)

Part III: The Politics of Cultural Forms11. Print Culture

Nancy Armstrong, Desire and Domestic Fiction (1985)John Barrell, English Literature in History, 1730–80: An Equal, Wide Survey (1983)Jeremy Black, The English Press in the Eighteenth Century (1987)Terry Eagleton, The Function of Criticism from the Spectator to Post-Structuralism (1984)Christine Y. Ferdinand, Benjamin Collins and the Provincial Newspaper Trade in the Eighteenth

Century (1997)Brean Hammond, Professional Imaginative Writing in England, 1670–1740 (1997)J.Paul Hunter, Before Novels: The Cultural Contexts of Eighteenth Century English Fiction (1990)Paula McDowell, Women of Grub Street (1998)Carey McIntosh, The Evolution of English Prose 1700–1800: Style, Politeness and Print Culture

(1998)Michael McKeon, The Origins of the English Novel, 1600–1740 (1988)James Raven, Helen Small and Naomi Tadmor, eds., The Practice and Representation of Reading

in England (1996)W. A. Speck, Literature and Society in Eighteenth-Century England (1998)Ian Watt, The Rise of the Novel (1957)

Some primary sources:Frances Burney, Evelina; Or a Young Ladies Entrance into the World (1778)Francis Coventry, The History of Pompey the Little: or the Life and Adventures of a Lap-Dog (1751)Samuel Richardson, Sir Charles Grandison (1753–1754)Sarah Scott, Millenium Hall (1762)

12. Visual CultureD. G. C. Allen and Kenneth W. Luckhurst, The Virtuoso Tribe of Arts and Sciences: Studies in

the Eighteenth-Century Work and Membership of the London Society of Arts (1992)John Barrell, The Political Theory of Painting from Reynolds to Hazlitt (1986)Ann Bermingham, Learning to Draw: Studies in the Cultural History of a Polite and Useful Art

(2000)John Brewer, ‘Cultural Production, Consumption and the Place of the Artist in Eighteenth-

Century England’, in Brian Allen, ed., Towards a Modern Art World (1995)Mark Hallett, The Spectacle of Difference: Graphic Satire in the Age of Hogarth (1999)Louise Lippincott, Selling Art in Georgian London: The Rise of Arthur Pond (1983)Ronald Paulson, Popular and Polite Art in the Age of Hogarth and Fielding (1979)Iain Pears, The Discovery of Painting: The Growth of Interest in the Arts in England, 1680–1768

(1988)

60

Marcia Pointon, Hanging the Head: Portraiture and Social Formation in Eighteenth-CenturyEngland (1993)

Marcia Pointon, Strategies for Showing: Women, Possession and Representation in EnglishVisual Culture 1665–1800 (1997)

David Solkin, Painting for Money: The Visual Arts and the Public Sphere in Eighteenth-CenturyEngland (1992)

Richard Wendorf, Sir Joshua Reynolds: The Painter in Society (1996)

Some primary sources:William Hogarth, Hogarth’s Graphic Works, ed. Ronald Paulson (1989)M. D. George, Catalogue of Political and Personal Satires Preserved in the Department of Prints

and Drawings in the British Museum (1942)George Vertue and Horace Walpole, Anecdotes of Painting in England (1762)

13. Scientific CultureJohn Gascoigne, Joseph Banks and the English Enlightenment (1994)Jan Golinski, Science as Public Culture: Chemistry and Enlightenment in Britain, 1760–1820

(1992)Ian Inkster and J. Morrell, Metropolis and Province: Science in British Culture, 1780–1850 (1983) Alan Q. Morton and Jane A. Wess, Public and Private Science: The King George III Collection

(1993)Roy Porter, ‘Science, Provincial Culture and Public Opinion in Enlightenment England’, British

Journal for Eighteenth-Century Studies 3 (1980): 20–46Roy Porter, ‘Gentlemen and Geology: The Emergence of a Scientific Career, 1660–1902’, The

Historical Journal 21 (1978): 809–836Simon Shaffer, ‘The Consuming Flame: Electrical Showmen and Troy Mystics in the World of

Goods’, in John Brewer and Roy Porter, eds., Consumption and the World of Goods (1993)Steven Shapin, ‘“A Scholar and a Gentleman”: The Problematic Identity of the Scientific

Practitioner in Early Modern England’, History of Science 29 (1991): 279–327Larry Stewart, The Rise of Public Science: Rhetoric, Technology and Natural Philosophy in

Newtonian Britain 1660–1750 (1992)Larry Stewart, ‘Other Centres of Calculation, or, Where the Royal Society Didn’t Count:

Commerce, Coffeehouses and natural Philosophy in Early Modern London’, British Journalfor the History of Science 32 (1999)

Arnold Thackray, ‘Natural Knowledge in Cultural Context: The Manchester Model’, AmericanHistorical Review 79 (1974)

Waters, A., ‘Conversation Pieces: Science and Politeness in Eighteenth-Century England’,History of Science 35 (1997)

14. Popular Cultures in the age of Commerce and ConversationPeter Burke, Popular Culture in Early Modern Europe (1978)Bob Bushaway, By Rite: Custom, Ceremony and Community in England 1700–1880 (1982)Peter Clark, The English Alehouse: A Social History, 1200–1830 (1983)V. A. C. Gatrell, The Hanging Tree: Execution and the English People 1770–1868 (1994)Tim Harris. ed., Popular Culture in England, c.1500–1850 (1985)D. C. Itzkowitz, Peculiar privilege: A Social History of English Foxhunting, 1753–1885 (1977)Thomas W. Laqueur, ‘Crowds, Carnivals and the State in English Executions, 1604–1868’, in

A.L. Beier et al., eds., The First Modern Society (1989)Robert W. Malcolmson, Popular Recreations in English Society, 1700–1850 (1973)Robert W. Malcolmson, Life and Labour in England 1700–1780 (1982)Barry Reay, Popular Cultures in England, 1550–1750 (1998)D. A. Reid, ‘The Decline of Saint Monday 1766–1876’, Past and Present 71 (1976)John Stevenson, Popular Disturbances in England, 1700–1832 (1979,1992)E. P. Thompson, Customs in Common (1991)J. K. Walton, The English Seaside Resort: A Social History, 1750–1914 (1983)

Some primary sources:John Mullan and Christopher Reid, eds., Eighteenth-Century Popular Culture: A Selection

(2000)

61

PAPER 25. THE HISTORY OF AFRICA FROM c.1800 TO THE PRESENT DAY

This paper introduces the main themes of Africa’s social, economic and political history by studyingthose cases which have generated the most interesting debates. The activities of non-Africans are treatedonly insofar as they are part of the continent’s own history. The critical handling of different sourcesand the relationship between history and other disciplines are important issues.

The course divides into three chronological periods. The nineteenth century saw as much change inAfrica as in other parts of the world. For the precolonial years the major themes are: the arguably revo-lutionary reconstructions of political authority in face of economic, environmental or military challenge;the changing nature of the several varieties of African slavery; and clashes between political and reli-gious authority, especially in Muslim Africa and on its frontiers. These discussions are, where possible,grounded in issues of demography, gender, economic production and political culture.

The colonial period forms the second section of the course. The European occupation of Africa andthe subsequent three-quarters of a century of colonial rule are examined from below. There is now alarge literature on why, and to what longterm effect, Africans resisted European rule, collaborated in it,appropriated white intentions as their own, or accommodated themselves while blunting white purposes.The creation and operation of colonial economies, the emergence of rural African capitalism no lessthan the industrialisation of South Africa, the social and cultural impact of European education andmissionary work, and the environmental and demographic aspects of colonial rule are major issues.Study of the colonial period ends with analysis of nationalist movements and decolonisation.

The last third of the course treats independent Africa. The main concern is to understand what Africanshave in different ways tried to do with their independence and what problems they have faced. Centralissues include the uniquely rapid growth of population, the difficulty of establishing stable regimes, thesuccess and failure of various economic strategies, and changes in society and religion. Special atten-tion is paid to the most prominent African countries, notably Nigeria, Ghana, South Africa, Egypt,Algeria, Ethiopia, Kenya and Tanzania.

Introductory readingJ.F.A. Ajayi, Christian missions in Nigeria 1841–1891 (1965)J.F.A. Ajayi and M. Crowder (ed.), History of West Africa (vol. 1, 3rd edn, 1985; vol. 2, 2nd edn,

1987)D. Austin, Politics in Ghana (1964)J.-F. Bayart, The state in Africa (1993)B. Berman and J.M. Lonsdale, Unhappy Valley: conflict in Kenya and Africa (2 vols, 1992)D. Birmingham and P.M. Martin (ed.), History of Central Africa (3 vols, 1983–98)C. Clapham, Africa and the international system (1996)M. W. Daly (ed.), The Cambridge History of Egypt, vol. 2 (1998)T.R.H. Davenport, South Africa: a modern history (5th edn, 2000)D.K. Fieldhouse, Black Africa 1945–80 (1986)A. Hastings, The church in Africa 1450–1950 (1994)A.G. Hopkins, Economic history of West Africa (1973)J. Iliffe, Africans: the history of a continent (1995)T. Keegan, Colonial South Africa and the origins of the racial order (1996)N. Levtzion and R. L. Pouwels (ed.), The history of Islam in Africa (2000)P.E. Lovejoy, Transformations in slavery (1983)N. Mandela, Long walk to freedom (1994)P. Maylam, South Africa’s racial past (2001)J. C. McCann, Green land, brown land, black land: an environmental history of Africa,

1800–1990 (1999)R. Oliver et al. (ed.), History of East Africa (3 vols, 1963–76)R. Oliver and J.D. Fage (ed.), Cambridge history of Africa (8 vols, 1975–86)J. D. Y. Peel, Religious encounter and the making of the Yoruba (2000)C. R. Pennell, Morocco since 1830 (2000)J. Ruedy, Modern Algeria (1992)J. Vansina, Le Rwanda ancien (2001)I. Wilks, Asante in the nineteenth century (2nd edn, 1989)B. Zewde, A history of modern Ethiopia (1991)

62

PAPER 26. THE HISTORY OF THE INDIAN SUBCONTINENT FROM THE LATE EIGHTEENTHCENTURY TO THE PRESENT DAY

This paper introduces the main themes of the history of South Asia since the decline of the greatestof the pre-colonial Indo-Muslim empires, the Mughal Empire in the late eighteenth century. The eventsof the British colonial conquest and the rise of nationalism from the mid-nineteenth century provide anecessary frame of reference, but an equal emphasis is given to social and economic developmentswithin India (including, later, Pakistan and Bangladesh).

The paper studies the nature of the regional states which emerged after the decline of Mughal hege-mony and considers the role of indigenous and foreign merchants, military entrepreneurs and Indo-Islamic administrators in creating and undermining them. The rise of British power within the subcon-tinent is viewed in the light of economic developments within southern Asia and the resistance of Indianpolities and social groups to the colonial powe. Consideration is given to the emergence of modern intel-ligentsias in the coastal cities of Calcutta, Bombay and Madras and their definitions of what constitutedproper religious, public and domestic behaviour. The paper places these changes in the context of theconcurrent decline of Indian handicrafts and the impact of British revenue arrangements on rural society.

The central section of the paper is framed by the rise of Indian nationalism, the Gandhian–led mass move-ments of the 1920s, ’30s and ’40s and the events that led up to the Partition of 1947. Students may, however,opt to study, among other topics: the society and culture of particular Indian regions; the changing condi-tions of the peasant, tribal and industrial worker, the incidence of famine and the nature of colonial medicineand the economic impact of free trade, all subjects which have benefitted from recent research.

The paper goes on to examine political developments in south Asian countries since Independence.It considers relations between centre and the states, the Green Revolution and the rise of the Hindu Rightin India; the dominance of the Army in Pakistan and problems of poverty and dependence in Bangladesh.Throughout the course attention is given to historiography and to the claim that through study of women,the subaltern and resistance, Indian historiography has become truly post-colonial.

General:Gordon Johnson, A Cultural Atlas of India (New York, 1996)Sugata Bose and Ayesha Jalal, Modern South Asia. History, culture and political economy

(London, 1998)J.M. Brown, Modern India: The Origins of a Modern Asian Democracy (Oxford, 1993)C.A. Bayly, Indian Society and the Making of the British Empire (Cambridge, 1988)B.R. Tomlinson, The Economy of Modern India 1880–1970 (Cambridge, 1993)T.R. Metcalf, Ideologies of the Raj (Cambridge, 1998)Sumit Sarkar, Modern India 1885–1947 (London, 1989)Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India (London, 1998)Susan Bayly, Caste, Society and Politics in India from the eighteenth century to the modern age

(Cambridge, 1999)Paul Brass, The Politics of India since Independence (Cambridge, 1990)Barbara and Thanos Metcalf, A Concise History of India (2001)

Some Specific Studies:Nicholas B. Dirks, The Hollow Crown. The ethnohistory of an Indian kingdom (Cambridge, 1987)D.H.A. Kolff, Rajput, Naukar and Sepoy. The military labour market in Hindustan (Cambridge,

1990)P.J. Marshall, Bengal: The British Bridgehead. Eastern India 1740–1828 (Cambridge, 1990)Eric Stokes, The Peasant and the Raj (Cambridge, 1978)Bernard S. Cohn, An Anthropologist among the Historians (Delhi, 1987)Sumit Sarkar, Writing Social History (Delhi, 1997)Barbara Metcalf, Islamic Revival in British India (Princeton, 1982)J. Gallagher, G. Johnson and A. Seal (eds.), Locality, Province and Nation (Cambridge, 1973)F.C.R. Robinson, Separatism among Indian Muslims (Cambridge, 1974)Rajnarayan S. Chandavarkar, Imperial Power and Popular Politics (Cambridge, 1998)Rosalind O’ Hanlon, Caste Conflict and Ideology (Cambridge, 1985)Partha Chatterjee, Nationalist Thought and the Colonial World (London, 1993)Shahid Amin, Event, Metaphor and Memory, Chauri Chaura 1922–1982 (Delhi, 1996)William J. Pinch, Peasants and Monks in British India (Berkeley, 1996)Barbara Metcalf, Islamic Revival in British India (1982)

63

PAPER 27. THE RISE AND FALL OF SEGREGATION IN THE AMERICAN SOUTH

The course will examine the establishment of informal and formal segregation in the South in theaftermath of the emancipation of black slaves, the mechanics of white supremacy and the political andeconomic powerlessness of African-Americans through the first half of the twentieth century, and thedismantling of the system of segregation after World War II under pressure from direct action protestby blacks themselves and outside intervention from the federal government.

The first part of the course will examine how defeated southern whites regained control of the regionafter 1865 and relegated blacks to a position of a second-class citizenship. It will examine the efforts ofRepublicans to use black suffrage to sustain black civil rights, black challenges to white supremacy, andthe imposition of de jure segregation and black disfranchisement by white in the racial crisis of the1890s.

The second part of the course will examine how conservative white elites maintained racial controlin the poorest region of the country in the first half of the twentieth century. It will look at the institu-tions of white control – segregation, a one-party system, a restricted electorate, violence – and African-American resistance and survival strategies.

The final part of the course will examine the collapse of segregation. How did an economically andpowerless minority wrest change from a determined, entrenched majority? It will examine the economicmodernization of the South launched by the New Deal and World War II, black activism and directaction protest, white Massive Resistance, and the federal government’s judicial and legislative response.The course will conclude by examining the long-term consequences of the changes of the 1960s:dramatic increases in black political participation, rapid economic growth and African-Americanemployment gains, persistent black poverty, the success of a lily-white Republican party.

The course will examine three main themes:i) what circumstances and what strategies enabled African-Americans to resist segregation and

discriminationii) to what extent did the distinctive industrialization of the South in the late nineteenth century and

the region’s modernization after 1940 dictate racial changeiii) how did whites maintain white supremacy and adapt to its demise

1. GeneralEdward L. Ayers, The Promise of the New South: Life After Reconstruction (1992)Numan Bartley, The New South, 1945–1980: The Story of the South’s Modernization (1995)Robert Cook, Sweet land of liberty?: the African-American struggle for civil rights in the twen-

tieth century (1998)Jane Elizabeth Dailey et al., Jumpin’ Jim Crow: Southern Politics from Civil War to Civil Rights

(2000)Pete Daniel, Standing at the Crossroads: Southern Life in the Twentieth Century (1986)Adam Fairclough, Better Day Coming: Blacks and Equality, 1890–2000 (2002)Eric Foner, Reconstruction: America’s Unfinished Experiment, 1863–77 (1988V.O. Key Jr Southern Politics in State and Nation (1949)John Herbert Roper, ed., C. Vann Woodward: A Southern Historian and His Critics (1997)C. Vann Woodward, The Strange Career of Jim Crow (1966)C. Vann Woodward, Origins of the New South, 1877–1913 (1951)Gavin Wright, Old South, New South; Revolutions in the Southern Economy since the Civil War

(1986)

2. The Reconstruction SettlementIra Berlin et al., Free at Last: A Documentary History of Slavery, Freedom, and the Civil War

(1992)Dan T. Carter, When the War Was Over: the Failure of Self-Reconstruction in the South,

1865–1867 (1985)Carl Degler, The Other South (1974)Edmund L. Drago, Black Politicians and Reconstruction in Georgia (1982)William McKee Evans, Ballots and Fence Rails (1967)Michael W. Fitzgerald, The Union League Movement in the Deep South: Politics and Agricultural

Change During Reconstruction (1989)Eric Foner, Northing but Freedom (1985)William Gillette, Retreat from Reconstruction, 1869–79 (1979)William C. Harris, William W Holden: Firebrand of North Carolina Politics (1987)

64

Thomas Holt, Black Over White: Negro Political Leadership in South Carolina DuringReconstruction, (1977)

Laura F. Edwards, Gendered Strife & Confusion: The Political Culture of Reconstruction (1997)Gerald David Jaynes, Branches Without Roots: Genesis of the Black Working Class in the

American South, 1862–1882 1986Leon F. Litwack, Been in the Storm So Long: The Aftermath of Slavery (1979)Otto H. Olsen ed., Reconstruction and Redemption in the South, (1980)Michael Perman, Emancipation and Reconstruction, 1862–1879 (1987)Michael Perman, Reunion without Compromise (1973)Michael Perman, The Road to Redemption: Southern Politics 1869–1879, (1984)George C. Rable, But there was no Peace: The Role of Violence in the Politics of Reconstruction

(1984)Roger L. Ransom and Richard Sutch, One Kind of Freedom, (1977)Heather Cox Richardson, The Death of Reconstruction: Race, labor, and Politics in the Post-

Civil War North, 1865–1901(2001)James L. Roark, Masters Without Slaves (1977)Willie Lee Rose, Rehearsal for Reconstruction (1976)Julie Saville, The Wages of Reconstruction: From Slave to Wage Labor in South Carolina

(1992)Allen W. Trelease, White Terror: The Ku Klux Klan Conspiracy and Southern Reconstruction

(1971)Michael Wayne, The Reshaping of Plantation Society: The Natchez District, 1860–1880 (1983)Joel Williamson, After Slavery: The Negro in South Carolina (1965)

3. The Jim Crow SettlementJohn Cell, The Highest Stage of White Supremacy (1982)Jane Elizabeth Dailey, Before Jim Crow: The Politics of Race in Postemancipation Virginia (2000)Carl Degler, The Other South (1974) ch. 9, 10Gerald H. Gaither, Blacks and the Populist Revolt (1977)Steven Hahn, “Class and State in Postemancipation Societies: Southern Planters in Comparative

Perspective,” American Historical Review (1990).J. Morgan Kousser, The Shaping of Southern Politics (1974)Howard Rabinowitz, Race Relations in the Urban South, 1863–1890 (1979)George B. Tindall, South Carolina Negroes, 1877–1900 (1952)Joel Williamson, After Slavery: The negro in South Carolina during Reconstruction (1965)Joel Williamson, A Rage for Order: Black/white Relations in the American South Since

Emancipation (1986)C. Vann Woodward, The Strange Career of Jim Crow (1966)C. Vann Woodward, American Counterpoint: Slavery and Racism in the North-South Dialogue

(1973)

4. The New SouthEdward L. Ayers, The Promise of the New South: Life After Reconstruction (1992)Edward L. Ayers, “Narrating the New South,” Journal of Southern History 61 (August 1995): 555–66Dwight B. Billings, Planters and the Making of a ‘New South’, 1979David L. Carlton, Mill and Town in South Carolina, 1880–1920 1982James C. Cobb, Industrialization and Southern Society (1984)James C. Cobb, “Beyond Planters and Industrialists: A New Perspective on the New South,”

Journal of Southern History 54 (February 1988): 45–68Pete Daniel, “The Metamorphosis of Slavery 1865–1900”, Journal of American History, 66, June

1979Paul M. Gaston, The New South Creed: A Study in Southern Mythmaking, 1970Stephen Hahn, The Roots of Southern Populism, Yeoman Farmers and the Transformation of the

Georgia Upcountry, 1850–1890, (1983)Steven Hahn, “Class and State in Postemancipation Societies: Southern Planters in Comparative

Perspective,” American Historical Review 95 (February 1990): 75–98Rabinowitz, Howard N. “The Origins of a Poststructural New South: A Review of Edward L.

Ayers’s The Promise of the New South: Life After Reconstruction,” Journal of SouthernHistory 59 (August 1993): 505–15

Barton C. Shaw, The Wool Hat Boys: Georgia’s Populists (1984)

65

Jonathan Wiener, Social Origins of the New South, Alabama, 1865–1885, (1978)Harold D. Woodman, “Class, Race, Politics, and the Modernization of the Postbellum South,”

Journal of Southern History 63 (February 1997): 3–22Charles Reagan Wilson, Baptized in Blood: The Religion of the Lost Cause, 1865–1920 (1980)

5. Black Intellectual LifeTunde Adeleke, Unafrican Americans: Nineteenth-Century Black Nationalists and the Civilizing

Mission (1998)William M. Banks, Black Intellectuals: Race and Responsibility in American Life (1996)Mia Bay, The White Image in the Black Mind: African-American Ideas About White People,

1830–1925 (2000)George M. Fredrickson, The Black Image in the White Mind: The Debate on Afro-American

Character and Destiny, 1817–1914 (1971)Kevin K. Gaines, Uplifting the Race: Black Leadership, Politics, and Culture in the Twentieth

Century (1996)Paul Gilroy, The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness (1993)Louis Harlan, Booker T. Washington: The Making of a Black Leader, 1856–1901 (1979)—————-, Booker T. Washington: The Wizard of Tuskegee, 1901–1915 (1983)David Levering Lewis, ed., W. E. B. Du Bois: A Reader (1995)David Levering Lewis, When Harlem Was in Vogue (1989)Manning Marable, W. E. B. Du Bois: Black Radical Democrat (1986)Wilson Jeremiah Moses, The Golden Age of Black Nationalism, 1850–1925 (1978)Shamoon Zamir, Dark Voices: W.E.B. Du Bois and American Thought, 1888–1903 (1995)

6. White Supremacy and Conservative HegemonyW. Fitzhugh Brundage, Lynching in the New South (1993)W. Fitzhugh Brundage, ed., Under Sentence of Death: Lynching in the South (1997)Jane Dailey, Bryant Simon and Glenda Gilmore (eds.), Jumpin’ Jim CrowJohn Dollard, Caste and Class in a Southern Town (1949)Glenda Gilmore, Gender and Jim Crow (1996)Elna Green, Southern Strategies: Southern Women and the Woman Suffrage Question (1997)Grace Elizabeth Hale, Making whiteness: the culture of segregation in the South, 1890–1940 (1998)Jacquelyn Dowd Hall, Crusade against Chivalry: Jesse Daniel Ames and the women’s campaign

against lynching (1979)Robert Haws ed., The Age of Segregation (1975)Stephen Kantrowitz, Ben Tillman and the Reconstruction of White Supremacy (2000)Brian Kelly, Race, Class, and Power in the Alabama Coalfields, 1908–21 (2001)William A. Link, The Paradox of Southern Progressivism (1992)Morton Sosna, In Search of the Silent South (1980)J. Douglas Smith, Managing White Supremacy: Race, Politics, and Citizenship in Jim Crow

Virginia (2002)George Brown Tindall, The Emergence of the New South (1967)Marjorie Spruill Wheeler, New Women of the New South (1993)

7. African-American Survival under SegregationRalph J. Bunche, The Political Status of the Negro (1973)William H. Chafe et al., Remembering Jim Crow: African Americans Tell About Life in the

Segregated South (2001)John Dittmer, Black Georgia in the Progressive Era, 1900–1920 (1980)Adam Fairclough, Teaching Equality : Black Schools in the Age of Jim Crow (2001)Raymond Gavins, The Perils and Prospects of Southern Black Leadership (1977)Charles S. Johnson, Shadow of the Plantation (1939)James H. Jones, Bad Blood: The Tuskegee Syphilis Experiment (1981)Robin D. G. Kelley, Race Rebels: Culture, Politics, and the Black Working Class (1994)Lester C. Lamon Black Tennesseans, 1900–1930 (1977)Leon Litwack, Trouble in Mind: Black Southerners in the Age of Jim Crow (1998)Robin Kelley, Hammer and hoe: Alabama Communists during the Great Depression (1990)Robin Kelley, Race Rebels culture, politics and the Black working class (1994)Neil McMillen, Dark Journey: Black Mississippians in the Age of Jim Crow (1989)Gunnar Myrdal, An American Dilemma (1944)Ted Rosengarten, All God’s Dangers (1975)

66

8. African-American MusicJames Lincoln Collier, Louis Armstrong: An American Genius (1983)Mervyn Cooke and David Horn, eds., The Cambridge Companion to Jazz (2002)Francis David, The History of the Blues (1995)Miles Davis, Miles; the Autobiography (1989)Scott DeVeaux, The Birth of Bebop: A Social and Musical History (1997)Ted Gioia, The History of Jazz (1997)Robert Gottlieb, ed., Reading Jazz: A Gathering of Autobiography, Reportage and Criticism from

1919 to Now (1997)Stanley Hirshon, “Jazz, Segregation, and Desegregation,” in A Master’s Due: Essays in Honor

of David Herbert Donald, edited by William J. Cooper, Jr. et al. (1985), 223–39LeRoi Jones, Blues People (1963)William Howland Kenney, Chicago Jazz: A Cultural History, 1904–1930 (1993)Frank Kofsky, John Coltrane and the Jazz Revolution of the 1960s (1998)Alan Lomax, The Land Where the Blues Began (1993)Paul Oliver, et al., Yonder Come the Blues: The Evolution of a Genre (2001)Eric Porter, What is This Thing Called Jazz? African American Musicians as Artists, Critics, and

Activists (2002)Gunther Schuller, Early Jazz (1968)Gunther Schuller, The Swing Era: The Development of Jazz, 1940–1945 (1989)Nat Shapiro and Nat Hentoff, Hear Me Talkin’ to Ya (1955)Peter Townsend, Jazz in American Culture (2000)Mark Tucker, ed., The Duke Ellington Reader (1993)Brian Ward, Just My Soul Responding: Rhythm and Blues, Black Consciousness, and Race

Relations (1998)

9. Economic Change and Liberal OpportunityRoger Biles, The South and the New DealJames C. Cobb and Nichael Namaroto eds., The New Deal and the SouthPete Daniel, ‘Going Among Strangers: Southern Reactions in World War II’ Journal of American

History (1990) 886–911Pete Daniel, Lost Revolutions: The South in the 1950sJohn Egerton, Speak Now Against the Day: The Generation before the Civil Rights Movement (1995)Robin Kelley, ‘We Are Not What We Seem’: Rethinking Black Working-Class Opposition in the

Jim Crow South’ Journal of American History (1993)Robert Korstad and Nelson Lichtenstein, ‘Opportunities Found and Lost: Labor, Radicals and the

Early Civil Rights Movement’ Journal of American History 75 (1988) 786–811Neil McMillen ed., Remaking Dixie, The Impact of World War II on the American South (1997)Timothy J. Minchin, What Do We Need a Union For? The TWUA in the South, 1945–1955 (1997)Timothy J. Minchin, Hiring the Black Worker : The Racial Integration of the Southern Textile

Industry, 1960–1980 (1999)Bruce Nelson, ‘Organized Labor and the Struggle for Black Equality in Mobile during World Ear

II’ Journal of American History (1993)Bruce Shulman, From Cotton Belt to Sun Belt: Federal policy, economic development and the

Transformation of the South, 1938–1980 (1991)Patricia Sullivan, Days of Hope: Race and Democracy in the New Deal Era (1996)Mark Tushnet, The NAACP’s Legal Struggle Against Segregated Education (1987)Robert Zieger ed., Organized Labor in the Twentieth-Century South (1991)Robert Zieger ed., Southern Labor in Transition, 1940–1995 (1997)

10. White ResistanceNuman Bartley and Hugh D. Graham, Southern Politics and the Second Reconstruction (1975)Numan Bartley, The Rise of Massive Resistance (1969)Jack Bass and Marilyn Thompson, Ol’Strom: An Unauthorized Biography of Strom Thurmond (1998)Earl Black and Merle Black, Politics and Society in the South (1987)Dan T. Carter, The Politics of Race: George Wallace, the origins of the new conservatism and

American politics (1995)David Chappell, Inside Agitators: White Southerners and the Civil Rights MovementElizabeth Jacoway and David Colburn, Southern Businessmen and Desegregation (1982)Michael J. Klarman, ‘How Brown changed race relations: The Backlash thesis’ Journal of

American History 81 (1984) 81–118

67

Andrew Lassiter and Andrew Lewis, The Moderates’ Dilemma Massive Resistance to SchoolDesegregation in Virginia (1998)

Neil McMillen, The Citizens’s Council (1977)James T. Patterson, Brown v. Board of Education : A Civil Rights Milestone and Its Troubled

Legacy (2001)Julian Pleasants and Augustus Burns, Frank Porter Graham and the 1950 Senate Race in North

Carolina (1990)

11. Black ProtestTaylor Branch, Parting the Waters: America in the King Years, 1954–63 (1988)Taylor Branch, Pillar of Fire: America in the King Years, 1963–65 (1998)Clayborne, Carson, In Struggle: SNCC and the Black Awakening of the 1960s (1981)William H. Chafe, Civilities and Civil Rights: Greensboro, North Carolina, and the Black

Struggle for Freedom (1980)Vicki Crawford et al eds., Women in the Civil Rights Movement (1990)John Dittmer, Local People: The Struggle for Civil Rights in Mississippi (1993)Charles Eagles, ed., The Civil Rights Movement in America (1986)Glenn T. Eskew, But for Birmingham: the local and national movements in the civil rights struggle

(1997)Adam Fairclough, Martin Luther King Jr (1990)Adam Fairclough, To redeem the Soul of America: The Southern Christian Leadership COConference and Martin Luther King Jr (1987)Adam Fairclough, Race and Democracy: The Civil Rights Struggle in Louisiana, 1915–1972 (1995)David J. Garrow, Bearing the Cross: Martin Luther King, Jr., and the Southern Christian

Leadership Conference (1986)David Halberstam, The Children (1998)Richard H. King, Civil Rights and the Idea of Freedom (1992)Steven Lawson, Running for Freedom: Civil Rights and Black Politics in America since 1941 (1991)Steven Lawson and Charles Payne, Debating the Civil Rights Movement (1999)Doug McAdam, Freedom Summer (1988)Aldon D. Morris, The Origins of the Civil Rights Movement (1984)Robert J. Norrell, Reaping the Whirlewind: The Civil Rights Movement in Tuskegee (1985)Charles Payne, I’ve Got the Light of Freedom: The Organizing Tradition and the Mississippi

Freedom Struggle (1996)Belinda Robnett, How Long? How Long? African-American Women in the Struggle for Civil

Rights (1997)Kim Rogers, Righteous Lives: Narratives of the Civil Rights Movement in New Orleans (1993)Harvard Sitkoff, The Struggle for Equality (1981)Armstead Robinson and Patricia Sullivan ed., New Directions in Civil Rights Studies (1991)J. Mills Thornton, ‘Challenge and Response in the Montgomery Bus Boycott’ Alabama Review

(1980)J. Mills Thornton III, Dividing Lines: Municipal Politics and the Struggle for Civil Rights in

Montgomery, Birmingham, and Selma (2002)Timothy B. Tyson, Radio Free Dixie : Robert F. Williams and the Roots of Black Power (1999)Brian Ward and Tony Badger eds., The Making of Martin Luther King and the Civil Rights

Movement (1995)

12. The Federal GovernmentJack Bass, Unlikely Heroes: The Southern Judges Who Made the Civil Rights Revolution (1981)Earl Black and Merle Black, The Rise of Southern Republicans (2002)Michael Belknap, Federal Justice and Southern Order (1987)Irving Bernstein, Promises Kept: John F. Kennedy’s New Frontier ch. 2, 3 (1991)Carl Brauer, John F. Kennedy and the Second Reconstruction (1977)Robert Burk, The Eisenhower Administration and Black Civil Rights (1984)James C. Cobb, Redefining Southern Culture: Mind and Identity in the Modern South (1999)Hugh Davis Graham, The Civil Rights Era: Origins and Development of National Policy,

1960–1972 (1990)James M. Glaser, Race, Campaign Politics, and the Realignment of the South (1998)Tony Horwitz, Confederates in the Attic (1999)Mark Stern, Calculating Visions: Kennedy, Johnson and Civil Rights (1992)

68

13. The Post-Civil Rights SouthPeter Applebome, Dixie Rising: How the South is Shaping American Values, Politics and Culture

(1996)Joseph Aistrup, The Southern Strategy revisited: Republican Top–down Advancement in the

South (1996)Earl Black and Merle Black, The Vital South: How Presidents Are Elected (1992)Tyler Bridges, The Rise of David Duke (1994)Dan T. Carter, From George Wallace to Newt Gingrich: Race in the Conservative Counter–revo-

lution, 1963–1994 (1995)Chandler Davidson and Bernard Grofman, Quiet Revolution in the South: The Impact of the Voting

Rights Act, 1965–1990 (1995)Davison M. Douglas, Reading Writing and Race: The Desegregation of the Charlotte Schools (1995)Margaret Edds, Free at Last: What Really Happened When Civil Rights Came to Southern Politics

(1987)James M. Glaser, Race, Campaign Politics and the Realignment in the South (1996)Melissa Fay Greene, Praying for Sheetrock (1992)Alexander Lamis, The Two-Party South (1984)Alexander P. Lamis (ed.), Southern Politics in the 1990s (1999)Steven Lawson, In Pursuit of Power: Southern Blacks and Electoral Politics, 1965–1982 (1985)Timothy J. Minchin, Hiring the Black Worker (1999)Richard K. Sher, Politics in the New South: Republicanism, Race and Leadership in the Twentieth

Century (1997)

PAPER 28: THE HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA IN THE COLONIAL PERIOD C. 1500-1830

This paper considers the evolution of Latin American societies, with particular reference to Peru andMexico, from the period of the last indigenous rulers to the Latin American revolutions against Spanishrule in the aftermath of the Napoleonic Wars. The paper will give particular attention to the lives of theAmerindian peoples and how they were transformed by European conquest, Catholic Christianity, theimpact of disease and the new forms of agricultural and labour exploitation introduced by the Europeanconquerors. The resilience and cultural vitality of the people is considered alongside the death anddisruption which accompanied conquest. Consideration will also be given to the emergence of the creoleand mixed-race populations of the Latin new world and their particular forms of urbanism, architecture,religion and culture. The paper aims to give undergraduates a wide-ranging introduction to the vital andrapidly developing historiography of ‘the First America’.

A preliminary booklist will be circulated to Directors of Studies and students in due course.

PAPER 29: THE BRITISH EMPIRE AND THE COMMONWEALTH FROM 1780 TO THEPRESENT DAY

This is a broadly conceived paper about the British Empire that deals with imperial relationships inall their aspects – political, social and cultural. The paper begins with an exploration of the political andideological responses the American Revolution, and examines slavery, anti-slavery and idea of human-itarianism and trusteeship in the Liberal empire. The paper sets the study of problems of governance inthe nineteenth century – in India, the colonies of settlement and elsewhere – in the context of European‘first contact’ with indigenous peoples; labour migration and its control; war and anti-colonial resis-tance; race and segregation. In the twentieth century, the focus is on crises of empire, decolonisation,and the Commonwealth. The approach to many themes – such as the emergence of the global economy;the rise of ‘imperial science’; development, nature and the environment – is comparative. However,there is also an opportunity for candidates to undertake case studies of regions as diverse as Australasia,the West Indies, the Middle East and Southeast Asia. The paper highlights new approaches to the studyof empire and explores their interrelatedness: the cultural interactions between metropolitan and colo-nial societies; issues of health, hygiene and ‘the body’; the history of the English languages andCommonwealth literature; art and ‘Orientalism’; Afro-Asian nationalism and the origins of postcolo-nial thought.

69

For referenceP.J. Marshall, ed. Oxford History of the British Empire, II: the eighteenth centuryA. Porter, ed. Oxford History of the British Empire, III: the nineteenth centuryW.R. Louis & J. Brown, eds. Oxford History of the British Empire, IV: the twentieth centuryA. Winks, ed. Oxford History of the British Empire, V: historiographyR. Hyam, Britain’s imperial century (3rd edn. 2002)J. Darwin, Britain and decolonisationP.N.S. Mansergh, The Commonwealth experience

Selected titlesC.A. Bayly, Imperial meridian: British Empire & the world, 1780–1830C.A. Bayly, Indian society and the making of the British EmpireM. Fisher, Indirect rule in British IndiaHelen Taft Manning, British colonial government after the American RevolutionJohn Manning Ward, Colonial Self-government: the British experience, 1759–1865J. Eddy and D. Schreuder, eds. The rise of colonial nationalismS. Drescher, Capitalism and anti-slaveryD. Turley, The culture of English anti-slavery, 1780–1860U. Mehta, Liberalism and empire: a study in nineteenth-century British liberal thoughtA.P. Thornton, The imperial idea and its enemiesDavid Cannadine, Ornamentalism: How the British saw their empireP.J. Cain and A.G. Hopkins, British Imperialism (2nd edn.)P.J. Marshall and G. Williams, The Great Map of MankindBruce Morrison and C. Roderick Wilson, eds. Native Peoples: The Canadian ExperienceOlive P.Dickason,Canada’s First Nations: A History of the Founding Peoples from Earliest TimesL. Bell, Colonial Constructs: European Images of Maori, 1840–1914Anne Salmond, Two Worlds: First Meetings Between Maoris and Europeans, 1642–1722Geoffrey W. Rice, ed. The Oxford History of New Zealand (2nd ed. 1992James Belich, Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders (London, 1996)Tim Murray, Aboriginal AustraliaHugh Tinker, A new system of slavery: the export of Indian labour overseas, 1830–1920D. Northrup, Indentured labour in the age of imperialism, 1834–1922Kay Saunders, ed. Indentured labour in the British Empire, 1834–1920Peter van der Veer, ed. Nation and Migration: the Politics of Space in the South Asian DiasporaM. Adas, Prophets of rebellionD.M. Peters, Between Mars and Mammon: colonial armies and the garrison state in IndiaDavid Omissi, The sepoy and the Raj: the Indian Army 1860–1940M. Banton, Racial theoriesT.R. Metcalf, Ideologies of the RajPeter Robb, ed. The Concept of Race in South AsiaPaul B. Rich, Race and Empire in British politicsH. Kuklick, The Savage Within: The Social History of British Anthropology, 1885–1945F. Cooper and L.A. Stoler, eds. Tensions of empireD. Kennedy, Islands of white: settler society and culture in Kenya and Southern Rhodesia,

1890–1939C.A. Price, The great white walls are built: restrictive immigration to North America and

Australasia, 1836–88J.G. Butcher, The British in Malaya, 1880–1942K. Ballhatchet, Race, sex and class under the RajBernard Cohn, An Anthropologist among the historians and other essaysE.M. Collingham, Imperial bodies: the physical experience of the Raj, c.1800–1947D. Arnold, ed. Imperial medicine and indigenous societiesM. Vaughan, Curing their ills: colonial power and African illnessR. Hyam, Empire and sexualityM. Strobel, European women in the second British EmpireM. Strobel & N Chaudhuri, eds. Western women and imperialism: complicity and resistanceC. Midgely, ed. Gender and imperialismAnne McClintock, Imperial leather: race, gender and sexuality in the colonial contextMrinalini Sinha, Colonial masculinity: the ‘manly Englishman’ and the ‘effeminate Bengali’ in

the late nineteenth century

70

Michael Adas, Machines as the measure of men: science, technology & ideologies of westerndominance

Richard Drayton, Nature’s government: science, Imperial Britain, and the ‘improvement’ of theworld

D. Arnold, The problem of nature: environment, culture and European expansionR.A. Stafford, Scientist of the Empire: Sir Roderick Murchison, scientific exploration and

Victorian imperialismL.H. Brockway, Science and colonial expansion: the role of the British Royal Botanic GardensD. Headrick, Tools of EmpireD. Headrick, Tentacles of progressM. Bell & R.A. Butler, Geography and imperialism, 1830–1920Deepak Kumar, ed. Science and Empire: essays in Indian context, 1757–1947G. Prakash, Science and the Imagination of Modern IndiaA.W. Crosby, Ecological imperialism: the biological expansion of Europe, 900–1900J.M. MacKenzie, ed. Imperialism and the natural worldR.H. Grove, Green imperialism & the origins of environmentalism, 1600–1860David Arnold and R. Guha, eds. Nature, Culture, ImperialismH. Kjeksus, Ecology control and economic development in East African historyM. Havinden and D. Meredith, Colonialism and development: Britain and its tropical colonies,

1850–1960Edward Said, OrientalismEdward Said, Culture and imperialismJ.M. MacKenzie, Orientalism: History, Theory and the ArtsTimothy Mitchell, Colonising EgyptJ.E. Sweetman, The Oriental ObsessionC.A. Bayly, Empire and informationJ.M. Mackenzie, ed. Imperialism and popular cultureJ.A. Mangan, ed. Making imperial mentalitiesJ.A. Mangan, ed. The imperial curriculumN. Thomas, Colonialism’s cultureM.L.Pratt, Imperial eyes: travel writing and transculturationA. Sandison, The wheel of empire: a study of the imperial idea in some late 19th and early 20th

century fictionB. Ashcroft, et al The empire writes back: theory and practice in post-colonial literatureBruce King, ed. New national and post-colonial literaturesRobert C. Young, Postcolonialism: an Historical IntroductionCarol A. Breckenridge and P. van der Veer, eds., Orientalism and the post-colonial predicamentD.A. Low, Lion RampantC. Dewey, Anglo-Indian attitudes: the mind of the Indian Civil ServiceG.M. Martin, Britain and the origins of Canadian Confederation, 1837–67L. Trainor, British imperialism and Australian nationalism: manipulation, conflict and compro-

mise in the late nineteenth centuryN. Worden, Making of modern South AfricaR. Hyam, Failure of South African ExpansionT.D. Moodie, Rise of AfrikanerdomJohn Iliffe, A modern history of TanganyikaB. Berman and J.M. Lonsdale, Unhappy valleyJ. Gallagher, The decline, revival and fall of the British EmpireD.A. Low, ed. Congress and the RajB.R. Tomlinson, The political economy of the RajR.J. Moore, Escape from Empire: the Attlee Government and the Indian ProblemA. Jalal, The sole spokesmanM. Hasan, ed. India’s PartitionR. Hyam, ed. Labour Government and the end of Empire, 1945–51, 4 Vols R. Rathbone, ed. Ghana, 1941–1957, 2 VolsA.J. Stockwell, ed. Malaya, 1941–5, 3 VolsD. Goldsworthy, Conservative Government and the end of Empire, 1951–7, 2 VolsR. Hyam & W.R. Louis, eds. The Conservative governments, 1957–1964, 2 VolsJoanna Lewis, Empire state-building: war & welfare in Kenya 1925–52T.N. Harper, The End of Empire and the Making of Malaya

71

Nicholas Tarling, The fall of imperial Britain in South-East AsiaP. Gifford & W.R. Louis, eds. Transfer of power in Africa, 2 VolsJ. Hargreaves, Decolonization in AfricaR. Aldous & S. Lee, eds. Harold Macmillan & Britain’s world roleR. Shepherd, Iain MacleodI. Friedman, The Question of Palestine, 1914–18M.J. Cohen, Palestine: retreat from the Mandate, 1936–45W.R. Louis & R.W. Stookey, The end of Palestine mandate, ch 1W.R. Louis, British empire in the Middle East, 1945–51Naomi Shepherd, Ploughing sand: British rule in Palestine, 1917–1948J. Eayrs, Commonwealth and SuezD. Carlton, Britain and the Suez CrisisR.L. Watts, New federations: experiments in the CommonwealthJ.D.B. Miller, Survey of Commonwealth Affairs, 1953–69M. Chanock, Unconsummated Union: Britain, Rhodesia & S. Africa, 1900–45D. Lowenthal, ed. The West Indies Federation: perspectivesR.F. Holland, Britain and the Commonwealth alliance, 1918–39P.N.S. Mansergh, The unresolved question: the Anglo-Irish Settlement and its undoing 1912–72D. Harkness, The reluctant Dominion: Irish Free State, 1921–31D.M. McMahon, Republicans and Imperialists: Anglo-Irish relations in the 1930sP. Wigley, Canada and transition to Commonwealth, 1917–26R.J. Moore, Making the new CommonwealthW.D. McIntyre, The significance of the Commonwealth, 1965–90D. Judd & P. Slinn, The evolution of the modern Commonwealth, 1902–80A.G. Hopkins, ed. Globalization and World History

SPECIAL SUBJECTS

A. POWER AND DEPENDENCE: MODES OF CONTROL IN THE ROMAN HOUSEHOLD ANDSOCIETY c.50BC – AD300

This course is an exploration of Roman society, roughly from the closing years of the Republic to the end of the Principate. (Material will be drawn from earlier and later periods, and from pagan, Christianand Jewish sources, where this is appropriate and advantageous.) All societies are riven by divisions,biological, legal, social, economic, cultural, religious. The aim of this course is to arrive at an understand-ing of the special nature of Roman social hierarchies, the ways in which the various inequalities and divi-sions were represented and justified in the literary and other sources, and the nature and effects of socialinteraction between those with greater, and lesser, power and influence. The challenge is to discover howRoman society functioned, to identify forces for integration as well as for division, and to see how, and howfar, an equilibrium was achieved between constructive and dysfunctional elements. With this in view, it isproposed to investigate relations between slave-owners and slaves, rich and poor, men and women, adultsand children, patrons and clients, Romans and aliens, official religions and other religions.

(a) Sources for studyNote: all these texts are read in English translation; in the examination, all passages

for comment will be set in English, or in Latin/English or Greek/English parallel text. Except where otherwise specified, the translations are to be found in the Loeb ClassicalLibrary series.

a) Slave-owners and SlavesT. Wiedemann, Greek and Roman Slavery (1981): Texts no. 1, 20, 69–71, 84, 94, 122–3, 178–9,

180, 187, 189, 190–2, 197–198, 201–4, 209, 226, 235, 238–9 (55pp.)P. Garnsey, Ideas of Slavery from Aristotle to Augustine (1996): Texts no. A3–5, A7, A10, B2–4,

7–11, D12, D14–15, D20–21, E4–7, F8–12, PH1–15, P1–15, AUG4–5, 10–14 (45pp.)

72

b) Rich and PoorPlautus, Trinummus 33–43; Cic., de off. 2.52–65 (tr. Griffin and Atkins); Seneca the Elder,

Controversiae 10.1; 10.4; Seneca the Younger, De vita beata 23.5–24.1; Martial, Epigrams10.5, 11.32; Artemidorus, Interpretation of Dreams 3.53; Lucian, Saturnalia 25–39, Lewisand Reinhold, Roman Civilization: Selected Readings, vol. 2 nos. 89–90 (58pp.)

Mark: 10: 17–31; 2 Corinthians 9: 7–14; I Timothy 6: 17–19 (2pp.)Clement of Alexandria, The Rich Man’s Salvation (50pp.) Cyprian, On Works and Alins (Ante-Nicene Chr. Libr. vol 2) (21pp.)

c) Men and WomenN. Lewis and M. Reinhold, Roman Civilisation: Selected readings vol.2, ed.3 (1990) Texts

no.91–103. (33pp.)J. Rowlandson, ed., Women and Society in Greek and Roman Egypt (1998). Texts no. 75, 91, 129,

131, 134. (8pp.)M.R. Lefkowitz and M.B. Fant, ed., Women’s Life in Greece and Rome (2nd ed. 1992) Texts no.

43, 123–6, 196, 242, 258, 261, 353, 381, 441–5, 449 (34pp.)Galen, On the Usefulness of the Parts (tr. M. T. May) 11.14; 14.6–12 (12pp.)Soranus, Gynecology (tr.Temkin) 1.30–2.8; 3.1–5, 27–29 (46pp.)

d) Adults and ChildrenPlutarch, De amore prolis (Loeb vol.6) (13pp.)Soranus, Gynecology (tr.Temkin) 2.9–57 (40pp.)Seneca the Elder, Controv 1.1 (16pp.)Seneca the Younger, De Beneficiis 3.29. 2–38 (11p.)Clement of Alexandria, Paidagogus 5.12–24 (Sources Chrétiennes 70) (11pp.)Augustine, Confessions Bks 1–2 (41pp.)

e) Patrons and ClientsTwelve Tables VIII.21; Dionysius of Halicarnassus 2.10–11; Plutaarch, Life of Marius 5.4–5;

Gellius, Attic Nights 5.13; Cicero, De Officiis 2.69–70; Horace, Epistles 1.7.46–82; Seneca,De Beneficiis 2.23; Juvenal, Satires 5; Fronto, Ad Verum 2.7 (Loeb 2, p.150); Tacitus, Histories1.4, 12, 81; 3.66, 73, 86; Annals 2.55; 3.9, 11; 4.2, 34, 68; 16.22, 32; Scriptores HistoriaeAugustae, Life of Pertinax 1–2; Libanius, Orations 47 (55pp.)

B. Levick, The Government of the Roman Empire (1985), Text no. 129–51 (15pp.)T. Wiedemann, Greek and Roman Slavery (1981): Texts no. 34–45 (30pp.)

f) Citizens and aliensB. Levick, The Government of the Roman Empire (1985) Texts no. 46, 75–6, 83–84, 135, 136,

147–165 (27pp.)Herodiam 1.10; Cassius Dio 77.10; Ammianus 14.2 (12pp.)

g) Official religions and other religionsM. Beard, J. North and S. Price, Religions of Rome vol. 2 (1998), Texts no. 2.1, 2.2c, 2.3a; 2.4,

2.7a, 2.8, 2.10; 6.1; 6.2; 6.7a; 6.8; 7.6b; 7.8; 8.2–4; 8.10; 9.2; 9.3; 9.4; 9.5d; 9.6; 10.6; 11.2;11.7; 11.8; 11.9–14; 12.6; 12.7; 13.2a–3, 6, 9 (120pp.)

Livy 22.1.5–11; Herodian 4.2; Minucius Felix, Octavius 6 & 25; Lactantius, Divine Institutes5.19–20 (tr.Bowen and Garnsey); Levick, Government, no. 128; Origen, c.Celsum 3:55–8;5.25–33; 8.65–69, 73–75 (29pp.)

(Total 784pp.)

Secondary ReadingGeneral, Introductory:

M. Foucault, Power/Knowledge: selected interviews and other writings 1972–1977 ed. C. Gordon(1980)

S. Lukes ed., Power (1986)M. Mann, The sources of social power, vol. 1 (1986)G. Alföldy, The Social History of Rome (tr., rev. ed., 1988)M. Crawford and M. Beard, Rome in the Late Republic (1985)

73

F. Jacques and J. Scheid, Rome et l’intégration de l’Empire, vol. 1 (1990)J. Patterson, Political Life in the City of Rome (2000)P. Garnsey and R. Saller, The Roman Empire: Economy, Society and Culture (1987)A. Giardina, ed., The Romans (tr.1993)P. Veyne, “The Roman Empire” in Ariès and Duby ed., A History of Private Life, vol.1: From

Pagan Rome to Byzantium, ed. P. Veyne (1987), 5–287

Further Reading:Theories of Power

S. Andreski, ed., Max Weber on Capitalism, Bureaucracy and Religion: A Selection of Texts (1983)M. Foucault, History of Sexuality, vol.1, Pt. 4, ch. 2 (1978); vols. 2–3 (ref.)M. Cousins and A. Hussain, Michel Foucault (1984), 225–51H. L. Dreyfus and P. Rabinow, Michel Foucault: Beyond Structuralism and Hermeneutics, 2nd

ed. 1983, ch. 9 and AfterwordD, C. Hoy, ed., Foucault: A Critical Reader (1986)A. Giddens, Central Problems in Social theory (1979), ch. 2A. Giddens, The Nation-State and Violence (1986), 7–17S. Lukes, Essays in Social Theory (1977), ch. 1

Slaveowners and SlavesJ.-J. Aubert, Business Managers in Ancient Rome: a social and economic study of institores 200

BC–AD 250 (1994)K. R. Bradley, Slaves and Masters in the Roman Empire: A Study in Social Control (1984)K.R. Bradley, Slavery and Society at Rome (1994)W. W. Buckland, The Roman Law of Slavery (1908; ref.)M. I. Finley, Ancient Slavery and Modern Ideology (1980)M. I. Finley, The Ancient Economy (2nd ed. 1985), ch. 3P. Garnsey, Ideas of Slavery from Aristotle to Augustine (1996)K. Hopkins, Conquerors and Slaves (1978)K. Hopkins, ‘Novel evidence for Roman slavery’, Past and Present 138 (1993), 3–237D. Johnston, Roman Law in Context (1999)W. Scheidel, ‘Quantifying the Source of Slaves in the Early Roman Empire’, JRS 87 (1997),

156–69; with reply by W. Harris, JRS 89 (1999)Y. Thébert. ‘The Slave’, in A. Giardina, ed., The Romans (1993)A. Watson, Roman Slave Law (1987)

Rich and PoorP. A. Brunt, ‘The Roman Mob’, Past and Present 35 (1966), 3–27D. Cherry, ‘Hunger at Rome in the late Republic’, EMC37 (1993), 433–50P. Garnsey, Cities, Peasants and Food (1998), ch. 14P. Garnsey, Food and Society in Classical Antiquity (1999), chs. 3, 4, 9G. Hamel, Poverty and Charity in Roman Palestine (1990)A.R. Hands, Charities and Social Aid in Greece and Rome (1968)V. Neri, I Marginali nell’Occidente Tardoantico (1998), chs. 1, 2.E. Patlagean, Pauvrété économique et pauvrété sociale à Byzance (1977)R. J. Rowland, ‘The very poor and the grain dole at Rome and Oxyrhynchos’, ZPE 21 (1976),

69–72A. Scobie, “Slums, sanitation and mortality in the Roman world”, Klio 68 (1986), 399–443C.R. Whittaker, ‘The Poor’, in A. Giardina, ed., The Romans (1993)G. Woolf, ‘Food, poverty and patronage. The significance of the epigraphy of the Roman alimen-

tary schemes in early imperial Italy’, Pap. Brit. Sch. Rome 58 (1990), 197–228LC. Countryman, The Rich Christian in the Church of the Early Empire (1980)R. Garrison, Redemptive Almsgiving in early Christianity (1993)R. M. Grant, Early Christianity and Society (1977), ch. 6J. –U.Krause, ‘La prise en charge des veuves par l’église dans l’antiquité tardive’, in C. Lepelley,

ed., La fin de la cité antique et le début de cité médiévale (1996), 115–126J. J. Meggitt, Paul, Poverty and Survival (1998)

Men and WomenL. Archer, et al, ed., Women in Ancient Societies (1994; Fischler; Cameron)K. R. Bradley, Discovering the Roman Family (1991)

74

P. Brown, The Body and Society. Men, Women and Sexual Renunciation in the early Church (1988)E. Clark, Women in the early Church (1983)E. Clark, ‘Ideology, history and the construction of “women” in late ancient Christianit’, Jl. Early

Chr. Stud. 2.2 (1994) 155–84.G. Clark, Women in Antiquity. Greece and Rome (with addenda, 1993)G. Clark, Women in Late Antiquity: Pagan and Christian Lifestyles (1993)G. Clark, Introduction, to I. mcAuslan and P. Walcot, ed., Women in Antiquity (1996)K. Cooper, The Virgin and the Bride (1996)S. Dixon, The Roman Mother (1988)E. Fantham et al. Women in the Classical World (1994)R. Flemming, Medicine and the Making of Roman Women: Gender, Nature and Authority from

Celsus to Galen (2001)L. Foxhall and J. Salmon, ed., Thinking Men: Masculinity and its Self-Representation in the

Classical Tradition (1999) (Harlow, Clark)J. Gardner, Women in Roman law and society (1986)M. Gleason, Making Men… (1995)D. Gourevitch, Le mal d’être femme: la femme et la médicine à Rome (1984)J. Hallett, Fathers and Daughters in Roman Society (1994)A. E. Hanson, ‘The medical writer’s woman’, in D. Halperin, J. Winkler, F. Zeitlin, ed., Before

Sexuality (1990), 309–337M. Hawley and B. Levick, ed., Women in Antiquity (1995)S. Pomeroy, ed., Women’s History and Ancient History (1991)B. Rawson, ed., The Family in Ancient Rome (1986)B. Rawson, ed., Marriage, Divorce and Children in Ancient Rome (1991)B. Rawson and P. Weaver, ed.,The Roman Family in Italy (1997)A. Rousselle, Porneia (1988)R. Saller, Patriarchy, Property and Death in the Roman Family (1994)P. Schmitt–Pantel, ed., A History of women (1992)S. Ttreggiari , Roman Marriage (1991) (ref.)

Adults and Children(see items above. on Family)

J. Andreau and H. Bruhns, ed., Parenté et stratégies familiales dans l’antiquité romaine (1990)J. Boswell, The Kindness of Strangers: The Abandonment of Children in Western Europe (1988)G. Clark, ‘The fathers and the Children’, in D. Wood, ed., Studies in Church History 21: The

Church and Childhood (1994): 1–27M. Corbier, ‘La petite enfance à Rome: lois, normes, pratiques individuelles et collectives’,

Annales ESC 1999, 1257–1290S. Currie, ‘Childhood and Christianity from Paul to the Council of Chalcedon’, unpub. Cambri.

PhD (1993)S. Currie, ‘The empire of adults: the representation of children on Trajan’s arch at Beneventum’,

in J. Elsner ed., Art and Text in Roman Culture (1996), 153–81P. Garnsey, ‘Childrearing in ancient Italy’, in D. Kertzer and R. Saller, The Family in Italy (1991),

48–65J. Huskinson, Roman Children’s Sarcophagi: their decoration and social significance (1996)N. B. Kampen, ‘Biographical narration and Roman funerary art’, AJA 85 (1981), 47–58D. E. E. Kleiner, ‘Great friezes of the Ara Pacis Augustae…’, MEFR 90 (1978), 753–85D. E. E. Kleiner, ‘Women and Family life on Romany imperial funerary altars’, Latomus 46

(1987), 545–54J.-P. Neraudau, Etre enfant à Rome (1984)B. Rawson, ‘Representations of Roman children and childhood’, Antichthon 31 (1997), 74–95T. Wiedemann, Adults and Children in the Roman Empire (1989)

Patrons and ClientsJ. Andreau, “The Freedman”, in A. Giardini ed., The Romans (1993)P. A. Brunt, The Fall of the Roman Republic and Related Essays (1988) ch. 7–8E. Gellner and J. Waterbury ed., Patrons and Clients in Mediterranean Societies (1977) (Gellner,

Silverman, Waterbury)S. L. Mohler, “The Cliens in the time of Martial”, in G.D. Hadzsits, ed., Classical Studies in

Honor of John C. Rolfe (1931)

75

R. P. Saller, Personal Patronage under the early Empire (1982)R. P. Saller, ‘Status and Patronage’, CAH XI rev. ed. 2000A. Wallace-Hadrill ed., Patronage in Ancient Society (1989), chs. 2, 3, 7A. Wallace-Hadrill, ‘Patronage, Power and Government’, in CAH X rev. ed. (1996)

Citizens and AliensJ.E. Gardner, Being a Roman Citizen (1993)P. Garnsey, Social Status and Legal Privilege in the Roman Empire (1970)H. Houritsen, Italian Unification: A Study in Ancient and Modern Historiography (1998)Cl. Nicolet, The World of the Citizen in Republican Rome (1980)Cl. Nicolet, “The Citizen: The Political Man”, in A. Giardina ed., The Romans (1993)B. Shaw, ‘Eaters of Flesh, Drinkers of Milk’: The Ancient Mediterranean Ideology of the Pastoral

Nomad’, Ancient Society 13/14 (1982–3): 5–31B. Shaw, ‘The Bandit’, in A. Giardina, ed., The Romans (1991)B. Shaw, ‘Rebels and Outsiders’, in CAH XI, rev. ed. (2000)A.N. Sherwin-White, The Roman Citizenship (2nd ed., 1973)G. Woolf, Becoming Roman: The Origins of Provincial Civilization in Gaul (1998), ch. 1

Official Religion and Other ReligionsP. Athanassiadi and M. Frede, ed., Pagan Monotheism in Late Antiquity (1999)M. Beard and J. North, ed. Pagan Priests: Religion and Power in the Ancient World (1990) (espec.

Chapters 7–9 by R. Gordon)M. Beard, J. North and S. Price, Roman Religions (1998) vol. 1P. A. Brunt, ‘Laus Imperii’, in Garnsey and Whittaker, Imperialism in the Ancient World (1978),

159–92P. Garnsey, “Religious Toleration in Classical Antiquity”, in W.J. Sheils, ed., Persecution and

Toleration (1984)K. Hopkins, A World full of Gods (1999)J. Lieu, J. North and T. Rajak, ed., The Jews among Pagans and Christians in the Roman Empire

(1993)R. Macmullen, Paganism in the Roman Empire (1981)A. Momigliano, ‘Some preliminary remarks on the “Religious opposition” to the Roman empire’,

On Pagans, Jews and Christians (1987), 120–41J. A. North, ‘Religious toleration in Republican Rome’, Proc. Cambr, Phil. Assoc. 25 (1979),

85–103J. M. Reynolds and R. Tannenbaum, Jews and Godfearers at Aphrodisias, Cambr. Phil. Soc.,

Suppl. 12 (1987)J. Rives, ‘The decree of Decius and the religion of Rome’, JRS 89 (1999), 135–54E. Schürer, The History of the Jewish People in the Age of Jesus Christ, rev. edn. by G. Vermes,

F. Millar and M. Goodman, 3 vols. (1973–87)G. E. M. de Ste Croix, “Why were the early Christians persecuted?” in M. I. Finley, ed., Studies

in ancient Society (1974), 210–49

B. THE NORMAN CONQUEST OF BRITAIN

This paper will examine the Norman penetration of Britain in the eleventh century and the first halfof the twelfth: from the early development of diplomatic relations between Normandy and England inthe two generations before the Norman conquest of England (1066), through Anglo-Norman history tothe death of William the Bastard Conqueror in 1087, to the varied Norman interactions with Wales andScotland as far as the severe reverses suffered by Anglo-Norman power there in the reign of KingStephen (1135–54). Attention will be given to basic issues of conquest and colonialism, from the polit-ical background through to the processes of settlement and assimilation: violence and racism, traditionand modernisation are themes which run through the subject. The concept of Britain as an entitly, bordersand jurisdictions, terminology of authority and legitimacy of rule in both Church and lay society, govern-ment and the privatisation of conquest will all be important issues. There is a rich body of written source-material (representing diverse standpoints) available in translation, while art-historical, archaeologicaland numismatic evidence is also important. No knowledge of mediaeval languages will be required.

To be studied in relation to the following primary sources (in English translation):

76

The Norman Conquest of Britain

Chronicles and historiesD. Whitelock, transl., The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle (1961, rev. 1965), pp. 66–72, 85–6, 97,

102–203 [112pp.]F. Barlow, ed. & transl., The Carmen de Hastingae Proelio of Guy, Bishop of Amiens, Oxford

Medieval Texts [hereafter OMT] (1999), pp. 3–49 [24pp.]E.M.C. van Houts, ed. & transl., The Gesta Normannorum Ducum of William of Jumièges, Orderic

Vitalis, and Robert of Torigni, OMT, 2 vols. (1992–5), I, pp. 5–135, and II, pp. 5–195 [160pp.]R.H.C. Davis and M. Chibnall, ed. & transl., The Gesta Guillelmi of William of Poitiers, OMT

(1998), pp. 3–187 [92pp.]G. Bosanquet, transl., Eadmer’s History of Recent Events in England (1964), pp. 3–26 [23pp.]R.A.B. Mynors et al., ed. & transl., William of Malmesbury: Gesta Regum Anglorum/The History

of the English Kings I, OMT (1998), pp. 417–539 [61pp.]M. Chibnall, ed. & transl., The Ecclesiastical History of Orderic Vitalis, 6 vols., OMT (1968–80),

II, pp. 135–361, and IV, pp. 79–103 [125pp.]R.R. Darlington and P. McGurk, ed. & transl., The Chronicle of John of Worcester II, OMT

(1995), pp. 533–607 [37pp.]P. McGurk, ed. & transl., The Chronicle of John of Worcester III, OMT (1998), pp. 5–49 [22pp.]D. Greenway, ed. & transl., Henry, Archdeacon of Huntingdon: Historia Anglorum/The History

of the English People, OMT (1996), pp. 339–411 [36pp.]L. Watkiss and M. Chibnall, ed. & transl., The Waltham Chronicle: an Account of the Discovery of

Our Holy Cross at Montacute and its Conveyance to Waltham, OMT (1994), pp. 25–57 [16pp.]D.M. Wilson, The Bayeux Tapestry (1985) [20pp.], also available online at www.english.fsu.edu/

bayeux/Brenhinedd y Saesson, ed. & transl. T. Jones (1971), pp. 58–157 [50pp.]Brut y Tywysogyon (P- and R-texts), ed. & transl. T. Jones (3 vols. 1940–55) [pages to be

announced]Geoffrey of Monmouth, History of the Kings of Britain, transl. L. Thorpe (1966), pp. 51–284 [234pp.]

Biography, hagiography, and encomiumEncomium Emmae Reginae, ed. & transl. A. Campbell, Camden 3rd ser. 72 (1949), rptd with

supplementary introduction by S. Keynes, Camden Classic Reprints 4 (1998), pp. 5–53 [24pp.]The Life of King Edward the Confessor who rests at Westminster, ed. & transl. F. Barlow (1962),

2nd ed., OMT (1992), pp. 3–127 [62pp.]T.H. Ohlgren, Medieval Outlaws: Ten Tales in Modern English (1998), pp. 18–60 [Gesta

Herewardi] [42pp.]M. Swanton (transl.), Three Lives of the Last Englishmen (1984), pp. 3–40 [‘Life of Harold’]

[37pp.]J.H.F. Peile (transl.), William of Malmesbury’s Life of St Wulstan, Bishop of Worcester (1934),

pp. 33–9, 51–2 [7pp.]Historia Gruffud vab Kenan, ed. & transl. D.S. Evans, A Mediaeval Prince of Wales (1990), pp.

53–83 [31pp.]Liber Landauensis, ed. & transl. W.J. Rees (1840) [pages to be announced]Rhygyfarch, Vita Sancti Dauidis, ed. & transl. J.W. James (1967), pp. 29–49; transl. A.W. Wade-

Evans, Life of St. David (1923) and in Y Cymmrodor 24 (1913) 1–73 [66pp.]T., Life of St Margaret, Queen of Scots, transl. A.O. Anderson, Early Sources of Scottish History

(1922), II.59–86 [28pp.]Vitae Sanctorum Britanniae et Genealogiae, ed. & transl. A.W. Wade-Evans (1944), pp. 2–15,

24–149, 172–309 [139pp.]Welsh Latin poetry of Sulien’s family, ed. & transl. M. Lapidge, Studia Celtica 8/9 (1973/4)

68–106 [39pp.]

Collections of translated sourcesD. Whitelock, ed., English Historical Documents c. 500–1042, 2nd ed. (1979), no. 230 [1p.]D.C. Douglas and G.W. Greenaway, ed., English Historical Documents 1042–1189, 2nd ed.

(1981), nos. 6, 18, 35–40, 50, 61, 77–81, 87, 198–202, 207–9, 213, 218, 235–40, 269 [30pp.]R.A. Brown, The Norman Conquest (1984), nos. 157–8, 163, 164–73, 187 [15pp.]A.O. Anderson, Scottish Annals from English Chroniclers (1908; 2nd edn, 1990) [pages to be

announced]

77

A.O. Anderson, Early Sources of Scottish History, A.D. 500 to 1286 (2 vols., 1922; 2nd edn, 1990)[pages to be announced]

M. Salmon, A Source-book of Welsh History (1927) [pages to be announced]D. Wilkinson & J. Cantrell, The Normans in Britain (1987) [pages to be announced]

Documentary sourcesS. Keynes, ed., The Liber Vitae of the New Minster and Hyde Abbey, Winchester, Early English

Manuscripts in Facsimile 26 (Copenhagen, 1996), plates VIII–IX [2pp.]A.J. Robertson, ed. & transl., The Laws of the Kings of England from Edmund to Henry I (1925),

p. 233 [1p.]R.C. van Caenegem, ed., English Lawsuits from William I to Richard I, I: William I to Stephen,

Selden Society 106 (1990), nos. 5, 15, 18 [20pp.]H. Clover and M. Gibson, ed. & transl., The Letters of Lanfranc, Archbishop of Canterbury, OMT

(1979), pp. 31–179 [74pp.]Cyfraith Hywel: Welsh mediaeval law – Ancient Laws and Institutes of Wales, ed. & transl. A.

Owen (2 vols., 1841). Individual texts: Llyfr Iorwerth, transl. D. Jenkins (1986); LlyfrCyfnerth, ed. & transl. A.W. Wade-Evans (1909); Llyfr Blegywryd, transl. M. Richards (1954);Latin Text A, transl. I.F. Fletcher (1986) [pages to be announced]

Leges inter Brettos et Scottos, edited with full commentary by F. Seebohm, Tribal Custom inAnglo-Saxon Law, 2nd ed. (1911), pp. 307–18 [12pp.]

J.C. Davies, Episcopal Acts and Cognate Documents relating to Welsh Dioceses, 1066–1272 (2vols., 1946–8) [pages to be announced]

Liber Landauensis, ed. & transl. W.J. Rees (1840) [pages to be announced]V.E. Nash-Williams, The Early Christian Monuments of Wales (1950) [pages to be announced]K.H. Jackson, ed. & transl., The Gaelic Notes in the Book of Deer (1972), pp. 33–6 [4pp.]Council of Winchester, Easter 1072, in The Palaeographical Society: Facsimiles of Manuscripts

and Inscriptions, ed. E.A. Bond and E.M. Thompson (1873–83) III, pl. 170, from Canterbury,D&C, Cart. Ant. A. 2 [1 p.]

Coinage of Edward the Confessor, Harold II, and William I, in J.J. North, English HammeredCoinage, I: Early Anglo-Saxon to Henry III c. 600–1272, 3rd ed. (1994), nos. 812–50, withpls. XI-XIII

Total sources – approx. 1600 pages

For reference (Normandy and England)F. Barlow, The English Church, 1066–1154 (1979)D. Bates, Normandy before 1066 (1982)D. Bates, William the Conqueror (1989)D. Bates, ed., Regesta Regum Anglo-Normannorum: the Acta of William I (1998), esp. nos. 138,

180, 181, 254, 286R.A. Brown, The Normans and the Norman Conquest (1969), 2nd ed. (1985)M. Chibnall, Anglo-Norman England 1066–1166 (1986)M. Chibnall, The Debate on the Norman Conquest (1999)E. Christiansen, transl., Dudo of St Quentin: ‘History of the Normans’ (1998)D.C. Douglas, William the Conqueror (1964), new ed. (1999)M. Fauroux, ed. Recueil des actes des ducs de Normandie (911–1066), Mémoires de la Société

des Antiquaires de Normandie 36 (1961), nos. 69–70, 73, 76, 85, 111E. Fernie, The Architecture of Norman England (2000)R. Fleming, Kings and Lords in Conquest England (1991)R. Fleming, Domesday Book and the Law: Society and Legal Custom in Early Medieval England

(1998)E.A. Freeman, The History of the Norman Conquest of England, its Causes and its Results, 6 vols.

(1867–79); vols. 1–4, 2nd ed. (1870–6); vols. 1–2, 3rd ed. (1877)R. Gameson, ed., The Study of the Bayeux Tapestry (1997)M. Gibson, Lanfranc of Bec (1978)J.A. Green, The Aristocracy of Norman England (1997)J.C. Holt, ed., Domesday Studies (1987)E. van Houts, Memory and Gender in Medieval Europe, 900–1200 (1999), pp. 123–42G. Garnett, ‘Conquered England, 1066–1215’, The Oxford Illustrated History of Medieval

England, ed. N. Saul (1997), pp. 61–101N.J. Higham, The Norman Conquest (1998)

78

W.E. Kapelle, The Norman Conquest of the North: the Region and its Transformation, 1000–1135(1979)

N.R. Ker, English Manuscripts in the Century after the Norman Conquest (1960)S. Lewis, The Rhetoric of Power in the Bayeux Tapestry (1999)S. Morillo, ed., The Battle of Hastings: Sources and Interpretations (1996)A. Williams and G. H. Martin, Domesday Book: a Complete Translation (2002)C. Potts, Monastic Revival and Regional Identity in Early Normandy (1997)S. Reynolds, Fiefs and Vassals: the Medieval Evidence Reinterpreted (1994)P.H. Sawyer, ed., Domesday Book: a Reassessment (1986)E. Searle, Predatory Kinship and the Creation of Norman Power, 840–1066 (1988)F.M. Stenton, Anglo-Saxon England, 3rd ed. (1971), pp. 581–687D. Whitelock et al., ed., Councils & Synods with other Documents relating to the English Church,

I: A.D. 871–1204, part II: 1066–1204 (1981), nos. 85–98A. Williams, The English and the Norman Conquest (1995)

For reference (the ‘British-history’ approach)G.W.S. Barrow, Feudal Britain: the Completion of the Medieval Kingdoms, 1066–1314 (1956)R.R. Davies, Domination and Conquest: the Experience of Ireland, Scotland and Wales,

1100–1300 (1990)B. Golding, Conquest and Colonisation: the Normans in Britain, 1066–1100 (1994)D. Walker, The Normans in Britain (1995)R. R. Davies, The First English Empire (2000)

John Gillingham, The English in the Twelfth Century (2000)

For reference (Scotland)A.A.M. Duncan, Scotland: the Making of the Kingdom (1975)G.W.S. Barrow, Kingship and Unity: Scotland, 1000–1306 (1981)R.A. McDonald, The Kingdom of the Isles: Scotland’s Western Seaboard, c.1100–c.1336 (1997)B. Webster, Medieval Scotland: the Making of an Identity (1997)B. Webster, Scotland from the Eleventh Century to 1603 (1975)G.W.S. Barrow, The Kingdom of the Scots (1973)G.W.S. Barrow, The Anglo-Norman Era in Scottish History (1980)G.W.S. Barrow, Scotland and its Neighbours in the Middle Ages (1992)G.W.S. Barrow et al., Regesta Regum Scottorum (1960– )R. Somerville, Scotia Pontificia: Papal Letters to Scotland before the Pontificate of Innocent III

(1982)

For reference (Wales)A.D. Carr, Medieval Wales (1995)R.R. Davies, Conquest, Coexistence and Change: Wales, 1063–1415 (1987), paperback reprint

1991 as The Age of ConquestL.H. Nelson, The Normans in South Wales, 1070–1171 (1966)D. Walker, The Norman Conquerors (1977)D. Walker, Medieval Wales (1990)R.I. Jack, Medieval Wales (1972)T.M. Charles-Edwards, The Welsh Laws (1989)K.L. Maund (ed.), Gruffudd ap Cynan: a Collaborative Biography (1996)K.L. Maund, Ireland, Wales, and England in the Eleventh Century (1991)K. Stokes, The Myth of Wales: Constructions of Ethnicity, 1100–1300 (1999)C.N.L. Brooke, The Church and the Welsh Border in the Central Middle Ages (1986)F.G. Cowley, The Monastic Order in South Wales, 1066–1349 (1977)H. Pryce, Native Law and the Church in Medieval Wales (1993)T.J. Pierce, Medieval Welsh Society (1972)T.M. Charles-Edwards, Early Irish and Welsh Kinship (1993)

For reference (atlases)D. Hill, An Atlas of Anglo-Saxon England (1981)P.G.B. McNeill & H.L. MacQueen, ed., Atlas of Scottish History to 1707 (1996)W. Rees, An Historical Atlas of Wales from Early to Modern Times, 2nd ed. (1959)M. Richards, Welsh Administrative and Territorial Units, Ancient and Modern (1969)

79

C. ATLANTIC ENCOUNTERS IN THE AGE OF COLUMBUS

The subject of this paper is the first series of encounters between western Europeans and the previ-ously unknown or little known peoples who inhabited the shores of the Atlantic Ocean, from West Africa and the Canaries to the Caribbean, Brazil and Florida; and in particular the paper deals with thequestion how western Europeans made sense of the existence of these peoples.

Traditionally any discussion of these encounters is dominated by the four expeditions of ChristopherColumbus to the Caribbean from 1492 onwards. Yet the aim of this paper is to place those expeditionsin a wider setting, comparing the penetration of western Europeans (primarily Castilians and Portuguese)into the Canary Islands, and into the kingdoms of western Africa, with the opening of the Caribbean byColumbus and his successors. Indeed, for the early explorers, the West Indies were not merely the outeredge of India but also ‘the New Canaries’; at the same time, the lure of gold or spices and the hope ofconverting heathen peoples were major motives for exploration of the Ocean Sea. Another feature oftraditional approaches is the emphasis on the discovery of land rather than peoples, and on the naviga-tional techniques that made this possible. Here the emphasis will shift to the attempts by Spaniards andPortuguese to understand peoples who had never known the name of Christ, who were not Muslims orJews, like most other infidels they knew, and who in many cases were ignorant of several features ofcultural life which late medieval Christians considered basic to civilised existence. At the same time west-ern writers were fascinated by the political institutions they believed they could observe at work in thesesocieties, by the social bonds that tied these communities together, and by practices (such as cannibal-ism among the Caribs of the West Indies and the Tupinambà of Brazil) of which they received elaboratereports, now easily accessible in English translation. The nakedness of the newly discovered peoples wasanother feature that caused much comment, in the context of longstanding debates about ‘natural man’:was nudity a sign that he (or she) was innocent or bestial? A particular feature of the paper is the atten-tion that is paid to the native societies of the eastern and western Atlantic, using archaeological evidenceas well as the descriptions left by western visitors (which must be handled with some care). By lookingclosely at the native populations we will be able to develop a much finer understanding of the impact ofthe western conquests than is generally available. The problem of enslavement or of other ways of tryingto utilise the labour of the conquered populations will need to be addressed, for instance by looking atthe highly charged defence of native Indian interests by Fray Bartolomé de las Casas.

In addition, by concentrating on the late fifteenth century and the beginning of the sixteenth centurywe can see how the expeditions were related to the wider policies of Ferdinand and Isabella in Aragonand Castile, and of their Portuguese neighbours. Some attention will be paid to the economic motivesbehind Atlantic exploration, and to the search for gold in Africa and the Caribbean, which affectedColumbus’ use, or misuse, of native labour. The question of the transfer of colonial techniques fromthe Mediterranean to the Atlantic deserves attention, for example the spread of sugar cultivation fromSicily and Granada into the Atlantic; and here there will be an opportunity to look not just at popu-lated lands that were being discovered, but at the contrasting experience of settlers in previously unpop-ulated territories: Madeira, the Azores, the Cape Verde Islands, and so on. The topic will be placedfirmly within its medieval setting, by emphasizing the debt of Columbus in particular to medievalassumptions about the political, human and physical geography of the Far East, and by consideringmedieval legends about an earthly paradise in the Far West. However, the decision to deal with bothsides of the Atlantic, and not to be sucked into often inconsequential debates about ‘who discoveredAmerica?’ will reveal a common dilemma among those active in the Caribbean and in the easternAtlantic about the treatment that should be meted out to the native population.

In order to make sense of the outlook of Columbus and his contemporaries, and their reaction to newlydiscovered peoples, it will be necessary to see how the projects of Henry the Navigator and hisPortuguese partners opened up Atlantic waters in the early and mid-fifteenth century, keeping an eyeon encounters in Africa but concentrating on the settlement and conquest of the eastern Atlantic islands.The principal areas of the American mainland to be studied will be Brazil and Florida, with only briefreference to Labot’s voyages to Newfoundland. All primary sources will be studied in English trans-lation. There is also an extensive secondary literature in English, including many works published tomark the Columbus quincentenary in 1992, and other anniversaries. Those wishing to introduce them-selves to the broad outlines of the topic are recommended to read Carl Sauer’s classic The Early SpanishMain, or W.D. and C.R. Phillips’ The Worlds of Christopher Columbus. Those wishing to sample thesources might also look at Ramón Pané’s brief An account of the antiquities of the Indians, and at thetranslation of the letter by Pedro Vaz de Caminha concerning the discovery of Brazil in 1500 in C.D.Ley’s Portuguese Voyages. All these works have appeared in paperback.

80

Reading ListThe reading list consists almost entirely of works in English, to which a few books in French have

been added. Those primary sources from which extracts will be selected for the gobbets paper aremarked with an asterisk and are listed under the heading ‘for study’. Certain items are alternativeeditions and translations which convey valuable information and interpretations, but will not be usedin the setting of a gobbets paper. These are marked with a dagger, and are listed under the heading‘for reference’. The sign § has been attached to those primary sources and secondary works that containillustrations which will be studied, and which may be set as gobbets. The other unmarked sources,some of which concern later periods, are also recommended for reference.

Primary Sources1. Portuguese sources in translation

a. For study*Axelson, E., Vasco da Gama. The diary of his travels through African waters, 1497–1499 1999,

pp. 21–53*Blake, J.W., ed., Europeans in West Africa (1450–1560). Documents to illustrate the nature and

scope of Portuguese enterprise in West Africa, 2 vols. (Hakluyt Society), 1942, vol. 1, pp.64–125, docs. 1–37; vol. 1, pp. 200–46, docs. 74–104

*Cà da Mosto. Alvise da, The voyages of Cadamosto and other documents on Western Africa inth e second half of the fifteenth century (Hakluyt Society), 1937, pp. 1–84 [Alvise da Cà daMosto]; 91–102 [Diogo Gomes]; 103–47 [João de Barros].

*Hair, P.E.H., The founding of the Castelo de São Jorge de Mina (University of Wisconsin AfricanStudies Program) 1994, pp. 11–12, 16–39, 109–25

*Ley, C.D., ed., Portuguese Voyages, 1498–1663, 3rd ed., 2000, pp. 41–53 [letter of Pedro Vazde Caminha]

b. For referenceCamões, Luis de, The Lusiads, transl. L. White, 1997 †Greenlee, W.B., Cabral’s voyage to Brazil and India (Hakluyt Society), 1938Zurara [Azurara], Gomes Eanes de, The Chronicle of the discovery and conquest of Guinea

(Hakluyt Society), 2 vols., 1896–9, vol. 2, pp. 173–83, 206–13, 225–89

2. Spanish sources in translation

a. For study*Abreu Galindo, J., The history of the discovery and conquest of the Canary Islands, transl.

Captain G. Glas, 1764, pp. 62–82, 146–53 [also 2nd ed., 2 vols., 1767]*Carrillo, J., Oviedo on Columbus (Repertorium Columbianum, vol. 9), 2000, pp. 39–99*Espinosa, Alonso de, The Guanches of Tenerife (Hakluyt Society) 1907, pp. 19–131*Fuson, R.H., Juan Ponce de León and the Spanish discovery of Puerto Rico and Florida 2000,

pp. 92–5, 103–14, 129–31, 134–6 [account by Herrera and royal privileges] *Griffin, N., ed., Las Casas on Columbus: background and the second and fourth voyages

(Repertorium Columbianum, vol. 7), 1999, pp. 63–250*Ife, R.W., Letters from America. Columbus’s first accounts of the 1492 voyages (King’s College

London School of Humanities) 1992, pp. 25–43*Jane., C., ed. The Four Voyages of Columbus, 2 vols. (Hakluyt Society; and later one vol. edition;

English translation on even pages), 1929–32, vol. 1, pp. 2–18 [letter of Columbus]; 20–73 [letterof Dr Chanca]; 114–66 [Bernáldez]; vol. 2, 2–70 and 72–111 [letters of Columbus]

*Keen, B., ed., The Life of the Admiral Christopher Columbus by his son Ferdinand 1959, 1992,pp. 3–153, 169–285

*Lardicci, F., ed., A synoptic edition of the Log of Columbus’ First Voyage (RepertoriumColumbianum, vol. 6), 1999, pp. 37–136 [text ‘DB’]

*Las Casas, Bartolomé de, A short account of the destruction of the Indies ed. A. Pagden and N.Griffin, 1992, pp. 3–30 [chapters on Hispaniola and Cuba]

*Nader, H., and Formisano, L., eds., The Book of Privileges issued to Christopher Columbus byKing Fernando and Queen Isabel (Repertorium Columbianum, vol. 2), 1996, pp. 63–117

*Pané, Ramón, An account of the antiquities of the Indians, ed. Arrom, J.J., transl. Griswold, S.C.,1999, pp. 3–38, and 55–67 [Las Casas]

81

*Phillips, W.D., Testimonies from the Columbian Lawsuits (Repertorium Columbianum, vol. 8),2000, pp. 49–67, 132–46

*Symcox, G., and Carrillo, J., eds., Las Casas on Columbus: the third voyage (RepertoriumColumbianum, vol. 11), 2001, pp. 21–146

*West, D.C., and Kling, A., The libro de las profecías of Christopher Columbus 1991, pp. 135–41[Rabbi Samuel of Fez]; 141–53 [Augustine]; 157–9 [Pierre d’Ailly]; 225–7 [Seneca, etc.];231–3 [Augustine, etc.]; 239–41 [the Last Days] [odd pages only]

b. For referenceCabeza de Vaca, Alvar Nuñez, Castaways. The narrative of Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca, ed. E.

Pupo-Walker, transl. F.M. López-Morillas, 1993†Cohen, J.M., The four voyages of Columbus 1969, 1988†Cummins, J., ed., The voyage of Christopher Columbus 1992†Fernández-Armesto, F., Columbus on himself 1992Hulme, P., and Whitehead, N., Wild Majesty. Encounters with Caribs from Columbus to the

present day 1992Las Casas, Bartolomé de, In defense of the Indians, ed. S. Poole and M.E. Marty, n.d.†Tyler, S.L., ed., Two Worlds. The Indian Encounter with the European, 1492–1509 1988Woolf, L., ed., Jews in the Canary Islands 1926 [selected documents from the collection of

Inquisition records of the Marquess of Bute, Museo Canario, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria]

3. Italian, Latin and other sources in translation

a. For study*Eatough, G., ed., Selections from Peter Martyr (Repertorium Columbianum, vol. 5), 1998, pp.

43–125*Formisano, L., ed., Letters from a New World. Amerigo Vespucci’s dicovery of America

1992Gonneville, Paulmier de, ‘Voyage au Brésil’, ed. C. A. Sulier, in: Tomlinson, R. J., The Struggle

for Brazil 1970, pp. 89–114 [translation to be circulated]*Symcox, G., ed., Italian Reports on America 1493–1522. Letters, dispatches, and Papal Bulls

(Repertorium Columbianum, vol. 10), 2001, pp. 27–74*Symcox, G. and Formisano, L., Italian Reports on America 1493–1522. Accounts by contem-

porary observers (Repertorium Columbianum, vol. 12), 2002, pp. 27–151

b. For referenceCioranescu, A., ed., Thomas Nichols, Mercader de Azúcar, Hispanista y Hereje 1963 [for the text

of Nichols’ A pleasant description of the fortunate Ilandes, called the Ilands of Canaria, 1583]Davies, M., ed., Columbus in Italy. An Italian versification of the Letter on the Discovery of the

New World 1991Dotson, J., and Agosto, A., eds., Christopher Columbus and his family (Repertorium

Columbianum, vol. 4), 1998Léry, Jean de, History of a voyage to the land of Brazil, ed. J. Whatley 1990Montaigne, Michel de, Essais: ‘Des Cannibales’, various editions and translations, e.g. M.A.

Screech, 1991†Peter Martyr, ‘The eight decades’, in E. Dahlberg, ed., The Gold of Ophir 1972, pp. 31–113Torriani, L. Descrição e História do Reino das Ilhas Canarias antes ditas Afortunadas, com o

paracer das suas fortificações, ed. J.M. Azevedo e Silva, 1999, [illustrations portrayingnatives of the Canary Islands]

Williamson, J.A., The Cabot Voyages and Bristol discovery under Henry VIII (Hakluyt Society),1962, pp. 183–6, 207–14, 230–4

4. Visual images: [these heavily illustrated books will be used, in conjunction with other illustrationsin works mentioned as primary and secondary sources for the study of the culture of the peoples encoun-tered by European explorers c.1500. Not more than two gobbets may be set consisting of black-and-white illustrations of artefacts or maps studied during the course from works marked §

a. native artefacts §Dacal Moure, R. and Rivero De La Calle, M., Art and archaeology of pre-Columbian Cuba 1996Metropolitan Museum of Art, Circa 1492. Art in the age of exploration 1992

82

Musée du Petit Palais, Paris, L’Art Taïno, ed. J. Kerchache, 1994§Museo de los Barrios, New York, Taino. Pre-Columbian art and culture from the Caribbean 1997

b. European maps and printsBucher, B. Icon and Conquest 1981Skelton, R.A., Marston, T.E., Painter, G., The Vinland Map and the Tartar Relation, 2nd ed., 1995Whitehead, P., New Found Lands. Maps in the history of exploration 1998 [also publ. as: Mapping

the World 2000]Wolff, H., America. Early maps of the New World 1992

Secondary Literature

The background in Spain and PortugalAbulafia, D., Spain and 1492. Unity and uniformity under Ferdinand and Isabella 1992Diffie, B.W., Prelude to Empire. Portugal overseas before Henry the Navigator 1960Edwards, J., The Spain of the Catholic Monarchs, 1474–1520 2000Elliott, J.H. Imperial Spain, 1469–1716 1963Highfield, R., ed., Spain in the fifteenth century 1369–1516 1972Hillgarth, J., The Spanish Kingdoms, vol. 2, Castilian Hegemony, 1410–1516 1978Kamen, H., Spains Road to Empire 2002Liss, P., Isabel the Queen 1992Ramsey, J.F., Spain: the rise of the first world power 1973

Early European expansionBirmingham, D., Trade and Empire in the Atlantic, 1400–1600 2000Butel, P., The Atlantic 1999Chaunu, P., European expansion in the later Middle Ages 1979Chaunu, P., Séville et l’Amérique, XVIe-XVII siècle 1977Clough, C.H. and Hair, P.E.H., eds., The European Outthrust and Encounter. The first phase

c.1400–c.1700 1994Crosby, A., Ecological imperialism. The biological expansion of Europe, 900–1900 1986Fernández-Armesto, F., Before Columbus. Exploration and colonisation from the Mediterranean

to the Atlantic, 1229–1492 1987Fernández-Armesto, F., ed., The European opportunity 1995Fritze, R. H. New Worlds. The great voyages of discovery 1400–1600 2002Hale, J.H., Renaissance Exploration 1968Hattendorf, J.B., and King, E.J., Maritime History, vol. 1, The Age of Discovery 1996McCrank, L., ed., Discovery in the archives of Spain and Portugal. Quincentenary essays

1993Morison, S.E., Portuguese voyages to America in the fifteenth century 1940Muldoon, J., Canon law, the Expansion of Europe and World Order 1998Parry, J.H., The Age of Reconnaissance. Discovery, exploration and settlement 1450–1650 1963Parry, J.H., Discovery of the Sea 1974, 1981Phillips, J.R.S., The medieval expansion of Europe, 2nd ed., 1998Scammell, G., The World Encompassed 1981Smith, R., Vanguard of Empire: ships of exploration in the age of Columbus 1993

Mental horizonsBenton, L.A., Law and colonial cultures 2002Bitterli, U., Cultures in conflict 1989Brotton, J., Trading Territories. Mapping the early modern world 1997Campbell, M.R., The witness to the other world. Exotic European travel writing, 400–1600 1988Elliott, J.H., The Old World and the New, 1492–1650 1970Grafton, A., New Worlds, Ancient Texts. The power of tradition and the shock of discovery 1992Greenblatt, S., Marvelous possessions. The wonder of the New World 1991Hanke, L., The Spanish struggle for justice in the conquest of America, new ed. 2002Mignolo, W.D., The Darker Side of the Renaissance 1995Moffitt, J.F., and Sebastian, S., O Brave New People. The European invention of the American

Indian 1996Pagden, A., European encounters with the New World 1993

83

Pagden, A., The fall of natural man. The American Indian and the origins of comparative ethnog-raphy, 2nd ed., 1986

Rubiés, J.-P., Travel and Ethnology in the Renaissance 2000Schwartz, S.B., ed., Implicit Understandings. Observing, reporting and reflecting on the encoun-

ters between Europeans and other Peoples in the early modern period 1994Tierney, B., The idea of natural rights 1997Todorov, Tz., The conquest of America 1984Zerubavel, E., Terra cognita. The mental discovery of America 1992

Portugal and AfricaAxelson, E., Congo to Cape. Early Portuguese explorers 1973 Birmingham, D., Central Africa to 1800 1981Blake, J.W., West Africa. Quest for God and Gold, 1454–1578 1977 [previous ed.: European

beginnings in West Africa 1937]Boucher, G., Vasco de Gama 1997Boxer, C.R., The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415–1825 1969Davidson, B, West Africa before the Colonial Era 1998Disney, A. and Booth, E., eds., Vasco de Gama and the linking of Europe and Asia, 2000Francis, A.F., Voyage of Re-discovery. The veneration of Saint Vincent 1979Oliver, R., The Middle Age of African History 1967Oliver R. and Atmore, A., Medieval Africa 1250–1800 2001Pearson, M.N., Port Cities and Intruders 1998Russell, P.E., Portugal, Spain and the African Atlantic, 1343–1490 1995 [collected essays]Russell, P.E., Prince Henry ‘the Navigator’. A Life 2000Russell-Wood, A.J.R., The Portuguese Empire, 1415–1808. A world on the move 1992Ryder, A., Benin and the Europeans, 1485–1897 1969Saunders, A., Black slaves and freedmen in Portugal, 1441–1555 1982Subrahmanyam, S., The career and legend of Vasco da Gama 1997Thornton. J., Africa and Africans in the making of the Atlantic world 1400–1680 1992Vogt, J., Portuguese rule on the Gold Coast 1469–1692 1979

The Canaries and the eastern Atlantic islandsAbulafia, D., and Berend, N., eds., Medieval Frontiers 2002 [article by Abulafia on Canaries, pp.

255–78]Cachey, T.J, Le Isole Fortunate 1995 [or the original articles in English by this author]Concepción, J.L., The Guanches: survivors and their descendants 1984Crosby, A., Ecological Imperialism 1986 [see above; relevant chapter]Eddy, M., Crafts and traditions of the Canary islands, 1989Fernández-Armesto, F., The Canary islands after the conquest 1982Fuson, R., Legendary islands of the Ocean Sea 1985Goodman, J, Chivalry and Exploration 1298–1630 1998 [relevant chapter]Johnson, D., Phantom islands of the Atlantic 1984Mercer, J., The Canary islanders, 1980Mercer, J., Canary Islands: Fuerteventura 1973Merediz, E., Refracted Images. The Canary Islands through a New World lens 2002Muldoon, J., Popes, lawyers and infidels. The Church and the non-Christian world, 1250–1500

1979Schwartz, S.B., ed., Implicit Understandings [see above; chapters by Aznar and Hulme] 1994Verlinden, Ch., The beginnings of modern colonization 1970

ColumbusBedini, S., ed., Columbus Encyclopædia, 2 vols. 1991 [repr. in one vol. paperback ed. as: Bedini,

S., Christopher Columbus and the age of exploration]Catz, R., Christopher Columbus and the Portuguese, 1476–1498 1993Davidson, M., Columbus then and now 1997Fernández-Armesto, F., Columbus 1991Fernández-Armesto, F., Columbus and the conquest of the impossible 2nd ed., 2000Flint, V., The imaginative landscape of Christopher Columbus 1992Henige, D., In search of Columbus 1991Kadir, D., Columbus and the ends of the Earth 1992

84

Morison, S.E., Admiral of the Ocean Sea 1940, 1992Phillips., W.D., Before 1492. Christopher Columbus’ formative years (American Historical

Association, Essays on the Columbian Encounter), 1992Phillips, W.D. and C.R., The Worlds of Christopher Columbus 1992Rivière, P., Christopher Columbus 1998Schwartz, S.B., The Iberian Mediterranean and Atlantic traditions in the formation of Columbus

as a colonizer 1986Sola-Solé, J., ed., The Catalan contexts of Columbus 1994Taviani, E., Christopher Columbus 1985

The Caribbean in 1492Dacal Moure, R. and Rivero De La Calle, M., Art and archaeology of pre-Columbian Cuba 1996Drewett, P., et al., Prehistoric Barbados 1991Josephy, A.M. ed., America in 1492 1991Keegan, W., The people who discovered Columbus 1992Montbrun, C., Les Petites Antilles avant Christophe Colomb 1984Nicholson, D.V, The story of the Arawaks in Antigua and Barbuda 1983Olsen, F., Indian Creek. Arawak site on Antigua, West Indies 1974Olsen, F., On the Trail of the Arawaks 1974Rouse, I., The Tainos 1992Sauer, C.W., The Early Spanish Main, 4th ed., with intro. by A. Pagden, 1992Stevens-Arroyo, A.M., The Cave of the Jagua. The mythological world of the Taínos 1988Whelan, R., Wild in Woods. The myth of the noble eco-savage (IEA Studies on the Environment)

1999Whitehead, N., ed., Wolves from the Sea. Readings in the anthropology of the native Caribbean 1995Wilson, S., ed., The indigenous people of the Caribbean 1997Yacou, A., and Adelaïde-Merlande, J., La découverte et la conquête de Guadeloupe 1993

The Caribbean after 1492Boucher, P., Cannibal encounters. Europeans and Island Caribs, 1492–1763 1993Cook, N.D., Born to Die. Disease and New World conquest, 1492–1650 1998Curtin, P.D., The rise and fall of the plantation complex 1990Deagan, K., and Cruxent, J.M., Archaeology at La Isabela. America’s first European town 2002Deagan, K., and Cruxent, J.M., Columbus’s outpost among the Taínos. Spain and America at La

Isabela, 1493–1498 2002Deagan, K., ed., Puerto Real. The archaeology of a sixteenth-century Spanish town in Hispaniola 1995Emmer, P.C., ed., New societies: the Caribbean in the long sixteenth century, UNESCO General

History of the Caribbean, vol. 2, 1999Floyd, T.S., The Columbus Dynasty in the Caribbean 1492–1526 1973Hulme, P., Colonial encounters: Europe and the native Caribbean, 1492–1797Moreau, J.-P., Les Petites Antilles de Christophe Colomb à Richelieu 1992Paiewonsky, M., Conquest of Eden, 1493–1515 1991Seed, P., Ceremonies of possession in Europe’s conquest of the New World, 1492–1640 1995Shepherd, V., and Beckles, H. McD., eds., Caribbean slavery in the Atlantic world 2000Walker, D., Columbus and the Golden World of the island Arawaks 1991Wilson, S., Hispaniola 1990

Brazil and South America in 1500Abreu, J. Capistrano de, Chapters of Brazil’s Colonial History, 1500–1800 1997Arciniegas, G., Amerigo and the New World. The Life and Times of Amerigo Vespucci 1955Bucher, B., Icon and Conquest 1981Hemming, J., Red Gold. The conquest of the Brazilian Indians 1978Lestringant, F., Cannibals 1994MacDonald, N.P., The making of Brazil 1996Tomlinson, R.S., The struggle for Brazil 1970Vigneras, L.A., The discovery of South America and the Andalusian voyages 1976

85

Florida and the south-east of North AmericaDevereux, A.Ce., Juan Ponce de León, King Ferdinand and the Fountain of Youth 1993Fuson, R.H., Juan Ponce de León and the Spanish discovery of Puerto Rico and Florida 2000Gilliband, M.S., The material culture of Key Marco Florida, 2nd ed., 1989Milanich, J.T., Archaeology of pre-Columbian Florida 1994Milanich, J.T., Florida Indians and the invasion from Europe 1995Milanich, J.T., Florida’s Indians from ancient times to the present 1998Milanich, J.T., The Timucua 1996Milanich, J.T., and Milbrath, S., eds., First Encounters. Spanish exploration in the Caribbean

and the United States, 1492–1570 1989Peck, D.T., Ponce de León and the discovery of Florida 1995Shaffer, L.N., Native Americans before 1492. The Moundbuilding Centers of the eastern

Woodlands 1992Thomas, D.H., ed., Columbian consequences, vol. 2, Archaeological and historical perspectives

on the Spanish Borderlands East 1990

Cabot and North AmericaCarus-Wilson, E., Medieval Merchant Venturers 1954Firstbrook, P., The voyage of the Matthew. John Cabot and the discovery of North America 1997Marcus, G.J., The conquest of the North Atlantic 1980Palmer, S.H., and Reinhartz, D., Essays on the history of North American discovery and explo-

ration 1988 [essay by D. Quinn on Cabot]Pope, P., The many landfalls of John Cabot 1997Seaver, K., The Frozen Echo. Greenland and the exploration of North America, ca. AD

1000–1500 1996

E. OLIVER CROMWELL AND HIS CRITICS 1599–1698

This special subject seeks to explore the career of Oliver Cromwell through an intensive study of hisown words and the accounts of him and of his actions recorded by his contemporaries.

Cromwell himself will be studied from the published versions of his unscripted speeches, from hisprivate and public letters and from his words and actions as recorded by his contemporaries. Some addi-tional apocrypha will also be examined. Each presents formidable problems of source evaluation andcriticism which will be featured in a series of work-shop classes. Cromwell’s contemporaries Will berepresented by those who wrote at the time, those who wrote with the wisdom of hindsight, those whowrote to inform their masters and those who wrote with an eye to the public. There will be poetry andprose, material intended to be published and material intended for the authors eye only. There will beambassadorial reports from French, Spanish, Italian, German and Swedish envoys; and material froma wide range of Royalist, Parliamentarian, clerical-puritan, sectarian and republican sources. These toowill be separately treated in workshop classes.

[A] Works by and ascribed to Oliver Cromwell

ed. W. Notestein, Journal of Sir Simonds D’Ewes [1640–1] (New Haven, 1923), pp. 19, 188n,196–7, 339–41

ed. W. H. Coates, Journal of Sir Simonds D’Ewes [1641–2] (New Haven, 1940), pp. 40, 80, 97–8(i) eds. W. H. Coates et al. Private Journals of the Long Parliament (3 vols., New Haven, 1982–94),

I: 66–7, 253–5, 264, 302–3

ed. I Roots, The speeches of Oliver Cromwell• speech 1 [pp. 3–8] to the General Council 23.3.49• speech 2 [pp. 9–27] to the Nominated Assembly 4.7.53• Speech 3 [pp. 28–40] to Parliament 4.9.54• speech 4 [pp. 41–56] to Parliament 12.9.54• speech 5 [pp. 57–76] to Parliament 22.1.55• speech 7 [pp, 79–105] to Parliament 17.9.56• speech 10 [pp. 110–1] to the Army Officers 28.2.57• speech 11 [pp. 112–4] to the Parliament 31.3.57

86

• speeches 12–17 [pp. 115–162] to the parliamentary commissioners 3.4.57–21.4.57• speech 18–19 [pp. 163–8] to the Parliament 8 and 25 May 1657• speeches 21–4 [pp. 169–193] to the Parliament 25.1.58–4.2.58

Reported conversations recorded in the memoirs of others [pp. 199–230]T. Carlyle (rev. S. C. Lomas [1904]) The Letters and Speeches of Oliver CromwellVolume 1

• no. 1 (p. 79) to Mr Storie 11. 1.36• no. 2 (pp. 89–90) to Mrs St John 13.10.38• no. 6 (p. 127) to the Mayor of Colchester 23.3.43• no. 12 (pp. 140–3) to the Suffolk Committee 31.7.43• no. 13 (p. 146) to an unknown person 2.8.43• no. 16 (pp. 154–5) to the Suffolk Committee 9.43• no. 17 (pp. 155–6) to Oliver St John 11.9.43• no. 18 (pp. 158–62) to Wm Spring 28.9.43• no. 18 (pp. 159–61) to the Suffolk Committee 28.9.43• no. 21 (pp. 176–7) to Col Walton 5.7.44• no. 23 (pp. 181–2) to Col Walton 6.9.44• no. 26 to the Governor of Farringdon 29.4.45• no. 27 to the Governor of Farringdon 29.4.45• free fragments of speeches on the Self-Denying Ordinance (pp. 184–8)• no. 29 (pp. 204–5) to Speaker Lenthall 14.6.45• no. 31 (pp. 212–8) to Speaker Lenthall 14.9.45• no. 33 (pp. 223–5) to Speaker Lenthall. 14.10.45• no. 48 (pp. 280–1) to General Fairfax 22.10.47• no. 49 (pp. 283–4) to Speaker Lenthall 11.11.47• no. 61 (pp. 319–22) to General Fairfax 28.6.48• no. 62 (p. 324) to Speaker Lenthall 11.7.48• no. 64 (pp. 336–346) to Speaker Lenthall 20.8.48• no. 67 (pp. 350–1) to Oliver St John 1.9.48• no. 68 (p. 353–4) to Lord Wharton 2.9.48• no. 85 (pp. 393–9) to Robert Hammond 25.11.48• no. 104 (p. 464–5) to President Bradshaw 16.9.49• no. 105 (pp. 467–71) to Speaker Lenthall 17.9.49• no. 107 (pp. 476–88) to Speaker Lenthall 14.10.49• no. 118 (pp. 521–3) to Lord Wharton 1.1.50

Volume 2• (pp. 6–23) Declaration for the undeceiving of the deluded people 1.50• no. 136 (pp. 78–79) to the Scots committee of Estates 3.8.50• no. 137 (pp. 83–5) to General Lesley 14.8.50• no. 140 (pp. 102–9) to Speaker Lenthall 4.9.50• no. 150 (pp. 140–1) to the Scots commissioners 9.10.50• no. 183 (pp. 224–6) to Speaker Lenthall 4.9.51• no. 184 (pp. 240–1) to Rev John Cotton 2.10.51

Volume 3• appendix 1 (pp. 221) Letter to Henry Downhall 14.10.26• appendix 17 (pp. 266–8) Arrangements for Justice in Ireland 1650• supplement 6 (pp. 318–20) letter to the committee of Cambridge 1644• supplement 3 5 (pp. 389–91) letter to Robert Hammond 6.11.48

ed. W. C. Abbott, The Writings and Speeches of Oliver Cromwell vol. 1 (1937, 1988), pp 515–51(Cromwell’s contribution to the Putney Debates)

B. L. Thomason Tract E561 (10) A most learned, conscientious and devout exercise

eds. J. Bruce and D. Masson, Documents relating to the Quarrel between the Earl of Manchesterand Oliver Cromwell (Camden Society. 1875), pp. 59–99

ed. S. R. Gardiner, Constitutional Documents of the Puritan Revolution (3rd edn, 1906, 1980),docs. 58, 71, 74, 81, 82, 84, 94, 96, 97, 98, 101, 102, 103

87

[B] Cromwell’s ContemporariesEarly Biographies

L. S. The Perfect Politician (1660), ‘Letter to the Reader’ + pp. 212–72, 346–79Richard Flecknoe, The idea of his Highness, Late Lord Protector (1659)S Carrington, The history of the life and death of his most serene Highness, Oliver (1659), pp. 241–72

Royalist CriticsEdward Hyde, Earl of Clarendon, History of the Great Rebellion (ed. W. D. Macray, 1887), vol.

1, pp. 418–20; vol. 5. pp. 291–4, 308–9, vol. 6 pp. 20–33. 91–7Sir John Berkeley, Memoirs (1705)Sir Thomas Herbert, Memoirs of the Last Two Years of the Reign of Charles I… (1702)ed. H. B. Wheatley, The Diary of John Evelyn (4 vols. 1906),II 76, 90,104–5

Diarists & MemorialistsB. Whitlocke, Diary , ed. R. Spalding (1990) pp. 160–1, 281–2, 285–7, 394–6, 399–409, 445–9,

460–7, 470–2, 485, 495–6The autobiography of Richard Baxter ed. N. Keeble (1974), pp. 45–55, 60–72, 85–9E. Ludlow, Memoirs ed. C. H. Firth (2 vols., 1900) I: 144–86, 207–22, 318–20, 347–79, 398411,

432–5; II: pp. 10–15, 20–9The Memoirs of Colonel Hutchinson… written by his Widow Lucy (Everyman Edition), pp. 104–9,

207–8, 214, 222–7, 232–41, 248–61Slingsby Bethel, The world’s mistake in Oliver Cromwell (1668)Earl of Leicester, Diary of in ed. S. Blencowe, The Sidney Papers (1825), pp. 75–7, 82–105,

139–41,144–53

PamphletsW. Sedgwick, Animadversions upon a letter (1654), (examination knowledge required only of

pp. 1–8,18–26)[Robert Ward et. al] The Hunting of the Foxes by the five small beagles (1649)[John Lilburne] An Impeachment of High Treason against Oliver Cromwell (1649), pp. 1–5, 30–7Sundry Reasons inducing Major Robert Huntingdon to lay down his commission (1648) [Sundry

Reasons is an appendix in An Impeachment, pp. 53–61]J. Spittlehouse, A warning piece discharged (1654)[J Spittlehouse] The picture of a new courtier drawn in a conference between Mr Timeserver and

Mr Plainheart (1656)M. Nedham, The true state of the case of the Commonwealth (1654)anon. A Copy of a Letter from an officer of the Army in Ireland (1654), pp. 1–5, 11–16

Funeral SermonsT. Cartwright, God’s Arraignment of Adam (1658)T. Harrison, Threni Hybernici (1658)G. Lawrence, Peplum Olivarii (1659).

Foreign AmbassadorsVenetian ambassadors, Calendar of State Papers Venetian vols. 38–40 [photocopy in Seeley is

from a modern selection: The English Civil War: A Contemporary Account (5 vols. 1996), IV:37–42, 123–45, 163–9, 340–51. V: 1–17, 28–441

ed. M. Roberts, Swedish Diplomats at Cromwell’s Court (Camden Society, 4th ser. Vol. 36, 1988),pp. 63–79,153–6

John Milton and the Oldenburg Safeguard (ed. Leo Miller (New York, 1985), pp. 39–49

Other SourcesA. Marvell, ‘A horation ode upon Cromwell’s return from Ireland ‘, as printed in ed. K. Sharpe

and S. Zwicker, The Politics of Discourse (1987), pp. 147–50John Milton, Sonnet: ‘To the Lord General Cromwell’ (any edition of his Poems)John Milton, Defensio Secundo in The Complete Prose Works of John Milton (Yale Edition of

Milton Prose Works, 8 vols., 1952–83),

88

Modern AuthoritiesIt is hoped that candidates will read three or more of the followingP. Gaunt, Oliver Cromwell (1996)B. Coward, Oliver Cromwell (1991)J. C. Davis, Cromwell: a profile in power (2001)J. Morrill, Oliver Cromwell and the English Revolution (1990)C. Hill God’s Englishman (1970)R. Paul, The Lord Protector (1958)C. H. Firth, Oliver Cromwell and the rule of the puritans (1909)S. R. Gardiner, Oliver Cromwell (1901)S. R. Gardiner, Cromwell’s Place in History (1897)

Important EssaysB. Coward, The Cromwellian Protectorate (2002)I. Roots, Cromwell–a Profile (1973)David L. Smith (ed), Cromwell and the Interregnum (Blackwell, 2003)B. Worden, ‘Toleration and the Cromwellian Protectorate’ in ed. W. Sheils, Persecution and

Toleration (Oxford, 1984)B. Worden, ‘The Politics of Marvell’s Cromwellian Ode’, Historical Journal 27 (1984)B. Worden, ‘Oliver Cromwell and the Sin of Achan’ in eds. D. Beales and G. Best, History, Society

and the Churches (Cambridge, 1985)B. Worden, ‘Providence and politics in Cromwellian England’ in Past and Present 109 (1985)B. Worden, ‘Milton and Cromwell’, in eds. J. Morrill et al, Soldiers, Writers and Statesmen of the

English Revolution (Cambridge, 1998)A. Woolrych, ‘The Cromwellian Protectorate: a Military Dictatorship?’ History 75 (1990)C. H. Firth, ‘Cromwell and the Crown’ Eng. Hist. Rvw 17&18 (1902–3)J Morrill, ‘Textualising and Contextualising Cromwell’ Historical Journal 33 (1990)

Monographs – consult for special topicsA. Woolrych, Battles of the English Civil War(1955, 1995)I. Gentles, The New Model Army (1992)A. Woolrych, Soldiers and Statesmen (1987)B. Worden, The Rump Parliament (1974)D. Underdown Pride’s Purge (1971)R. Sherwood, The Court of Oliver Cromwell (1977)G. E. Aylmer, The State’s Servants (1975)ed. R. C. Richardson, Images of Oliver Cromwell (1994)A. Woolrych, Commonwealth to Protectorate (1983)J. Morrill, Revolution and Restoration: Britain in the 1650s (1992)

For ReferenceS. R. Gardiner, History of the Great Civil War (4 vols., 1893)S. R. Gardiner, History of the Commonwealth and Protectorate (4 vols. 1903)C H. Firth, The last years of the Protectorate (2 vols., 1909)W. C. Abbott, The writings and speechs of Oliver Cromwell (4 vols, 1934–45)

G. WOODROW WILSON AND THE FIRST WORLD WAR, 1914–1920

This examination of America’s first substantial involvement in international affairs has three princi-pal themes – the causes and purposes of that involvement; the extent and nature of America’s influenceon world politics; and the part played by an individual leader in shaping the course of events. The ques-tions to be addressed will include the following: Why did the United States depart from its hallowedpolicy of non-engagement in European affairs, first by undertaking to participate in a postwar league ofnations, and then by entering the war as a belligerent? To what extent was such a course dictated by thenation’s economic or security interests? Why did Wilson attach so much importance to the nature of thepeace? Indeed, were his peace aims constant, or did they change according to the circumstances? Whatshaped America’s responses to the Russian Revolutions? How effective was American diplomacyduring the war and at the Paris peace conference? Why did Wilson attain such an extraordinary stature

89

on the world stage? How far did he shape the peace settlement, and what were his priorities? Why didthe U.S. Senate fail to approve the peace treaty and thus keep America out of the League of Nations?How far are the answers to such questions to be found in Wilson’s personal ideals, qualities, and weak-nesses? What explains his successes and his failures? Why did (and does) he arouse such strong – andopposing – feelings? The focus is on Wilson’s actions and decisions, but probing the reasons for thesenecessarily involves considering not only the role of his advisers but also the domestic and internationalpressures to which he was subject.

For StudyThe Papers of Woodrow Wilson, edited by Arthur S. Link, et al. (Princeton, 1966–1994)Volume 30, pp. 323–5, 327, 331–2, 393–4, 461–3Volume 31, pp. 13–14, 56–7, 91–5, 103–5, 184–6, 242–3, 265–6, 274, 421–4, 458–9, 468–72,

518–20, 525–30Volume 32, pp. 24–5, 194–6, 208–10, 249–51, 260–2, 264–5, 404–8, 424–5, 428–9, 432–3,

449–50Volume 33, pp. 37–41, 134–8, 147–50, 153–59, 165–8, 173–87, 191–4, 214–16, 222–4, 237–9,

253–4, 292, 309–13, 318–28, 342–3, 349, 355–60, 375–8, 409, 494–5, 499–500, 505–8, 511,535, 545–8

Volume 34, pp. 3–5, 259–61, 271–2, 274–9, 288, 290, 298–9, 302, 305–6, 309–11, 318–19,339–41, 350–3, 370–2, 418–9, 421–3, 436, 438, 440–1, 449–51, 454–5, 461–3, 468–9, 493,506–8, 534–6

Volume 35, pp. 13, 25–7, 43–4, 59–60, 71–2, 80–2, 91–2, 158–9, 167–73, 186–7, 218–21, 233–4,260, 310–11, 356–7, 387–8, 420–2, 424, 448–9, 465–6, 522–3, 528–9, 531–3

Volume 36, pp. 41–8, 63–7, 72–3, 92–5, 174, 180, 182–4, 209–14, 228–9, 238–9, 266, 294, 346,371–3, 388, 402, 405, 421–2, 443–4, 446–7, 491–6, 526–7, 620–7, 650–3

Volume 37, pp. 3, 6–7, 13–14, 21, 48, 57–8, 61–2, 68–9, 88–91, 100, 113–16, 131–2, 194–6, 200,213–17, 223, 280–1, 287–8, 311–12, 345, 383–7, 397, 412–13, 425–6, 466–7

Volume 38, pp. 84–5, 89–92, 184–5, 285–6, 313–14, 345–9, 364–5, 391–2, 436–7, 452–3, 494–6,526–31, 537–42, 580–2, 607–8, 617–8, 646–7, 656–60

Volume 40, pp. 67–74, 77–8, 84–5, 94–5, 131–2, 136–7, 160–1, 190–1, 209, 238–9, 273–6,304–11, 316, 324–5, 364–5, 406–9, 435–6, 439–42, 445–8, 493–7, 505–6, 508, 516–17,524–9, 533–9

Volume 41, pp. 3–4, 17, 51–2, 61–3, 71–82, 86–92, 95–100, 108–12, 118–25, 136, 158–9, 164–7,204–5, 211–14, 231, 233, 280–7, 297–8, 302–5, 313, 318–27, 332–7, 360–1, 368–70, 398–9,421–2, 425–7, 430–2, 436–45, 462–4, 519–27, 542–5, 553–4

Volume 42, pp. 24–5, 65–6, 120–1, 140–1, 155–7, 274, 282, 323–4, 327–8, 365–7, 370–1, 385,425, 433, 456, 498–504

Volume 43, pp. 34, 44, 237–8, 471–3, 482–9, 508–9, 521–5, 532–4Volume 44, pp. 33, 40–1, 57–9, 120–1, 125–30, 141, 153, 195–8, 280–4, 309, 369–70, 378–80,

455–7, 484–5, 490, 557–8Volume 45, pp. 11–17, 194–200, 223–4, 256–7, 272–3, 384–6, 411–14, 459–68, 476–85, 534–9,

550–8Volume 46, pp. 180, 213–14, 231, 318–24, 360–1Volume 47, pp. 3, 105, 181–6, 200–2, 264, 267–70, 284–9, 297–9, 338–41, 589–91Volume 48, pp. 162–5, 182, 288, 315, 347–9, 419–21, 435–7, 470, 476–7, 496–501, 514–17,

523–4, 640–3Volume 49, pp. 97–8, 170–2, 265–7, 273–6, 300–1, 345, 365, 428–9, 439, 447, 548–9Volume 51, pp. 23, 117, 127–33, 253–7, 265–9, 276–9, 288–9, 313, 325–6, 333–4, 338–42,

381–2, 413–19, 473, 495–505, 511–17, 533, 541, 575, 580–2, 590–1, 594, 616, 625–7Volume 53, pp. 41–3, 61–2, 94–7, 101, 108–9, 239, 314–15, 336–40, 350–7, 366–7, 384–5,

441–2, 453–4, 515–19, 523, 625–6, 678–86, 694Volume 54, pp. 23, 50–1, 60–3, 102–3, 121–2, 152, 181–4, 235–7, 265–8, 276–7, 324–6, 359–64,

407, 431, 514Volume 55, pp. 88–9, 118–19, 155–6, 173–8, 193, 229–30, 340, 386, 392, 413–21, 456–7Volume 56, pp. 82–3, 206–7, 249–50, 297, 312–13, 349–54, 360–71, 487–90, 498–501, 540–1,

607–9Volume 57, pp. 37, 62–5, 68–71, 142, 177, 188–9, 271–4, 295–8, 334–5, 352–3, 416–17, 432–3,

610–14Volume 58, pp. 91–4, 105, 142–4, 181–2, 185, 188–98, 270–1, 274–5, 287–8, 418–19, 443,

446–8, 482–3, 514–17, 523–5, 545–6

90

Volume 59, pp. 74–5, 94–102, 149–50, 187–8, 227, 232–3, 316, 360–2, 397, 413–19, 447, 470–1,503–9, 606–10, 628–30

Volume 60, pp. 41–3, 45, 67–71, 112–13, 145–7, 202–3, 316–20, 376–8, 495–7, 539–42, 622–3Volume 61, pp. 63–4, 104, 112–16, 215–16, 290–3, 307, 311–13, 336–7, 370–1, 421–36, 515–17,

641–3Volume 62, pp. 27–9, 66–9, 112–14, 170, 187–9, 208–9, 219, 235, 258–9, 285, 310–12, 339–411,

428–9, 507–8, 565–6, 621Volume 63, pp. 7–18, 43–51, 102–5, 113, 156–61, 174–7, 219–22, 228–9, 243–6, 289–92,

337–40, 363, 392, 424, 447–8, 451–7, 468–9, 482–3, 494–5, 515–17, 534, 542Volume 64, pp. 28–30, 37–41, 58, 96, 238, 244, 257–9Volume 65, pp. 67–71, 109–10, 328–9

Congressional Record64th Congress, 2nd Session, pp. 892–6, 2364–7065th Congress, 2nd Session, pp. 11156–63, 11166–7, 11170–7266th Congress, 1st Session, pp. 5112–14, 8207–18, 8767–8666th Congress, 2nd Session, pp. 2335–7, 4599–4604

Foreign Relations of the United States: The Lansing Papers 1914–1920 (Washington, D.C., 1939), Volume I, pp. 365–80, 385–92

Foreign Relations of the United States. 1916. Supplement The World War (Washington, D.C.,1929), pp. 421–2

Official German Documents Relating to the World War (New York, 1923), pp. 1017, 1130–39,1214–70

The Deliberations of the Council of Four (March 24 – June 28, 1919) Notes of the OfficialInterpreter, Paul Mantoux Translated and Edited by Arthur S. Link (Princeton, 1992),Volume I, pp. 276–97, 329–36, 342–5

Burton J. Hendrick, The Life and Letters of Walter H. Page (London, 1929), Volume II, pp.217–21

Selections from the Correspondence of Theodore Roosevelt and Henry Cabot Lodge (New Yorkand London, 1925), Volume II, pp. 461–3, 494–6, 499–500

The Letters of Theodore Roosevelt edited by E.E. Morison et al. (Cambridge, Mass., 1951–54),Volume 8, pp. 821–2, 927, 1161–4, 1224–6, 1216–17, 1380–1, 1396–8

For referenceIntroductory and General:

Ambrosius, Lloyd E., Wilsonian Statecraft: Theory and Practice of Liberal Internationalismduring World War I (Wilmington, Delaware, 1991)

Esposito, David M., The Legacy of Woodrow Wilson: American War Aims in World War I(Westport, Connecticut, 1996)

Kennedy, Ross A., “Woodrow Wilson, World War I and American National Security”,Diplomatic History, Winter 2001

Link, Arthur S., Woodrow Wilson: Revolution, War, and Peace (Arlington Heights, Illinois, 1979)Osgood, Robert E., Ideals and Self-Interest in America’s Foreign Relations: The Great

Transformation of the Twentieth Century, (Chicago, 1953)Thompson, John A., Woodrow Wilson: A Profile in Power (Longman, 2002)

Wilson: Biography and Background:Clements, Kendrick A., Woodrow Wilson: World Statesman (Boston, 1987)Cooper, John Milton, Jr., The Warrior and the Priest: Woodrow Wilson and Theodore Roosevelt

(Cambridge, Mass and London, 1983)Cooper, John Milton, Jr., and Neu, Charles E. (eds), The Wilson Era (Arlington Heights, IL, 1991)George, Juliette L, Marmor, Michael F. and George, Alexander L. “Issues in Wilson Scholarship:

References to Early ‘Strokes’ in The Papers of Woodrow Wilson”, and subsequent commu-nications, Journal of American History, 70 (March 1984), 845–53, 945–56, and 71 (June1984), 198–212

Heckscher, August, Woodrow Wilson (New York, 1991)Mulder, John M., Woodrow Wilson: The Years of Preparation (Princeton, N.J., 1978)Park, Bert E., Ailing, Aging, Addicted: Studies of Compromised Leadership (University Press of

Kentucky, 1993)

91

Ross, Dorothy, “Woodrow Wilson and the Case for Psychohistory”, Journal of American History,69, 3 (Dec. 1982), 659–68

Thorsen, Niels Aage, The Political Thought of Woodrow Wilson 1875–1910 (Princeton, NewJersey, 1988)

Weinstein, Edwin A., Woodrow Wilson: A Medical and Psychological Biography (Princeton,New Jersey, 1981)

Neutrality and Intervention, 1914–17:Buehrig, Edward H., Woodrow Wilson and the Balance of Power (Bloomington, Indiana, 1955)Cohen, Warren I., The American Revisionists: The Lessons of Intervention in World War I

(Chicago and London, 1967)Coogan, John W., The End of Neutrality: The United States, Britain, and Maritime Rights

1899–1915 (Ithaca and London, 1981)Cooper, John M., Jr., The Vanity of Power: American Isolationism and World War I, 1914–1917

(Westport, CT, 1969)Cooper, John M., Jr., “The British Response to the House-Grey Memorandum: New Evidence

and New Questions”, Journal of American History, 59 (March 1973), 958–71Cooper, John M., Jr, “The Command of Gold Reversed: American Loans to Britain, 1915–1917”,

Pacific Historical Review, 45 (May 1976), 209–30Devlin, Patrick, Too Proud to Fight: Woodrow Wilson’s Neutrality (London and New York, 1974)Doerries, Reinhard R., Imperial Challenge: Ambassador Count Bernstorff and German-American

Relations, 1908–1917 (Translated) (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1989)Link, Arthur S., Wilson: The Struggle for Neutrality 1914–1915 (Princeton, New Jersey, 1960)Link, Arthur S., Wilson: Confusions and Crises 1915–1916 (Princeton, New Jersey, 1964)Link, Arthur S., Wilson: Campaigns for Progressivism and Peace 1916–1917 (Princeton, New

Jersey, 1965)May, Ernest R., The World War and American Isolation 1914–1917 (Cambridge, Massachusetts,

1959. Chicago: Quadrangle Books, 1966)Thompson, J.A., “An Imperialist and the First World War: The Case of Albert J. Beveridge”,

Journal of American Studies, 5 (August 1971), 133–50

Belligerency and Peacemaking, 1917–1919:Ferrell, Robert H., Woodrow Wilson and World War I, 1917–1921 (New York, 1985)Floto, Inga, Colonel House in Paris: A Study of American Policy at the Paris Peace Conference

1919 (Copenhagen: Universitetsforlaget I Aarhus, 1973. Princeton, New Jersey, 1980)Fowler, W.B., British-American Relations, 1917–1918: The Role of Sir William Wiseman

(Princeton, N.J., 1969)Gelfand, Lawrence E., The Inquiry: American Preparations for Peace, 1917–1919 (New Haven,

CT and London, 1963)Kennedy, David, Over Here: The First World War and American Society (New York, 1980)Kernek, Sterling J., “Woodrow Wilson and National Self-determination along Italy’s Frontier: A

Study of the Manipulation of Principles in the Pursuit of Political Interests”, Proceedings ofthe American Philosophical Society 126 (August 1982), 243–300

Keynes, John Maynard, The Economic Consequences of the Peace (London, 1919)Lentin, A., Lloyd George, Woodrow Wilson and the Guilt of Germany (Leicester, 1984), re-

published as Guilt at Versailles: Lloyd George and the pre-history of Appeasement (London:Methuen, 1985)

Levin, N. Gordon Jr, Woodrow Wilson and World Politics: America’s Response to War andRevolution (New York, 1968)

Mametey, Victor S., The United States and East Central Europe 1914–1918: A Study in WilsonianDiplomacy and Propaganda (Princeton, N.J., 1957)

Mayer, Arno J., Political Origins of the New Diplomacy, 1917–1918 (New Haven, CT, 1959)Mayer, Arno J., Politics and Diplomacy of Peacemaking: Containment and Counterrevolution

at Versailles, 1918–1919 (New York, 1967).Nicolson, Harold, Peacemaking 1919: Being Reminiscences of the Paris Peace Conference

(London, 1933)Park, Bert E. et al., “Wilson’s Neurological Illness at Paris”, Wilson Papers, 58, AppendixPark, Bert E., “Wilson’s Neurological Illness during the Summer of 1919”, Wilson Papers, 62,

AppendixPark, Bert E., “Woodrow Wilson’s Stroke of October 2, 1919”, Wilson Papers, 63, Appendix II

92

Park, Bert E. “The Aftermath of Wilson’s Stroke”, Wilson Papers, 64, AppendixSchwabe, Klaus, Woodrow Wilson, Revolutionary Germany, and Peacemaking, 1918–1919:

Missionary Diplomacy and the Realities of Power (Translated) (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1985)Unterberger, Betty Miller, “Woodrow Wilson and the Bolsheviks: The ‘Acid Test’ of Soviet-

American Relations”, Diplomatic History, 11 (Spring 1987)Walworth, Arthur, America’s Moment: American Diplomacy at the End of World War I (New

York, 1977)Walworth, Arthur, Wilson and his Peacemakers: American Diplomacy at the Paris Peace

Conference, 1919 (New York and London, 1986)Woodward, David R., Trial By Friendship: Anglo-American Relations, 1917–1918 (University

of Kentucky Press, 1993)

The League of Nations:Ambrosius, Lloyd E., Woodrow Wilson and the American Diplomatic Tradition: the treaty fight

in perspective (Cambridge, 1987)Cooper, John Milton, Jr, Breaking the Heart of the World: Woodrow Wilson and the Fight for the

League of Nations (Cambridge, 2001)Kuehl, Warren F., Seeking World Order: The United States and International Organization to

1920 (Nashville, Tennessee, 1969)Knock, Thomas J., To End All Wars: Woodrow Wilson and the Quest for a New World Order

(Princeton, 1992)Stromberg, Roland N., “Uncertainties and Obscurities about the League of Nations”, Journal of

the History of Ideas, 33 (Jan-March 1972)Widenor, William C., Henry Cabot Lodge and the Search for an American Foreign Policy

(Berkeley, CA, 1980)

Other Themes:Burk, Kathleen, Britain, America and the Sinews of War, 1914–1918 (Boston, 1985)Calhoun, Frederick S., Power and Principle: Armed Intervention in Wilsonian Foreign Policy

(Kent, Ohio, 1986)Gardner, Lloyd C., Safe for Democracy: The Anglo-American Response to Revolution,

1913–1923 (New York, 1984)Thompson, John A., Reformers and War: American Progressive Publicists and the First World

War (Cambridge, 1987)

H: CULTURE WARS IN MID-VICTORIAN ENGLAND 1848–1859

This course examines some of the most significant cultural movements in England in the decade after1848. In the 1840s most Britons had felt that their country was in a state of crisis, politically, sociallyand morally. Yet by the end of the 1850s the nation appeared to be socially harmonious, self-confident,prosperous, progressive and outward-looking. This was what one historian famously called ‘the age ofequipoise’. The process by which the dominant cultural values of the mid-Victorian period emergedwas dramatic. Material, technological and intellectual progress created the sense of living in a periodof rapid change, and challenged many social and religious conventions.

The course seeks to understand, contextualise and, where possible, connect up the major culturaldevelopments of the 1850s: the acceptance of the idea of biological evolution by the time Darwinpublished the Origin of Species in 1859; the excitement at the progress of technology manifest in thepopularity of the Great Exhibition of 1851; the debates about history and society, stimulated by theworks of Macaulay, Buckle and Herbert Spencer; the emergence of Christian Socialism and the cultsof ‘self-help’, ‘manliness’ and mountaineering; the admiration for nature and for sincerity, expressedin Ruskin’s artistic writings and in pre-Raphaelite painting; the reform movement in university educa-tion; the growing awareness of the social and moral claims of women, challenging conventional notionsof patriarchy; and the reformulation of ideas about Britain’s civilising mission in dealing with nativepeoples in her empire, particularly as a result of the Indian Mutiny of 1857. The main sources will becontemporary works of literature, art and social commentary.

93

PRIMARY SOURCES

Science and evolution[Robert Chambers], The Vestiges of the Natural History of Creation (1844; edited by James. A

Secord, 1994), pp.324—90 [Adam Sedgwick], ‘Natural history of creation’, Edinburgh Review, 82 (1845), 1–26, 58–67,

72–85. Charles Darwin, The Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection (1859; Penguin edition by

J.W. Burrow, 1968), pp.130–72, 317–43, 435–60J.D. Forbes, The tour of Mont Blanc and of Monte Rosa (1855), pp. xxxix-xl

The Great ExhibitionPunch on the opening of the Great Exhibition, May 1851, pp 190–5Henry Mayhew, 1851, excerpt reprinted in Politics and empire in Victorian Britain, ed. A. Burton

(2000), pp. 85–9Samuel Phillips, Guide to the Crystal Palace and Park (1854), pp. 7–21

History and progressGH Lewes, ‘Macaulay’s History of England’, British Quarterly Review 9 (Feb 1849), 1–8, 25–8James Moncrieff, ‘Macaulay’s History of England’, Edinburgh Review 90 (July 1849), 256–71H.T. Buckle, The history of civilization (1857), ch 5 (pp. 130–62 in 1904 edn)Mark Pattison, ‘History of civilization in England’, Westminster Review 68/12 (1857), 375–99Herbert Spencer, ‘Progress: its law and cause’, Westminster Review 11 (April 1857), 445–85

Belief and incarnationalism F.D. Maurice, The Word ‘Eternal’ and the Punishment of the Wicked. A Letter to Dr Jelf (1853)

30pp.J.A. Froude, The Nemesis of Faith (1849), pp. 9–19, 132–63. Alfred Tennyson, In Memoriam (1850) 36pp. Robert Browning, Christmas-Eve and Easter-Day (1850) 63pp.James Martineau, ‘The ethics of Christendom’ (1852), reprinted in Studies of Christianity (1858),

pp. 330–55 Charlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre (1847) extracts from Vol. 3, Chs. 4.9.12 (pp. 349–54, 416–19, 448–52

in Oxford World’s Classics edn, 2000, with introduction by Sally Shuttleworth)

Manliness and character[Thomas Hughes], Tom Brown’s Schooldays (1857). (Part I Chapter 1 on the Brown family, 18pp;

Part I Chapter 5 on Rugby and football, 23pp; Part II Chapter 1 on how the tide turned, 27pp;Part II Chapters 8 and 9 on Tom Brown’s last match and finis, 34pp.)

Samuel Smiles, Self-Help, with illustrations of conduct and perseverance, ed Asa Briggs(1859/1958), pp. 35–59, 228–46, 290–301, 360–80

Martha Jones, ‘French, German and English’, British Quarterly Review 13 (1851), 331–7, 347–57J.D. Forbes, ‘Pedestrianism in Switzerland’, Quarterly Review 101 (April 1857), 285–91, 320–3

Ethics and politics; Christian SocialismHenry Rogers, ‘Revolution and reform’, Edinburgh Review 88 (Oct 1848), 390–403 Thomas Arnold, Introductory lectures as Professor of Modern History (1842), ‘Appendix’ to

Inaugural Lecture, pp 45–77Thomas Carlyle, Past and present (1843), bk III, chs 5 (the English), 9 (working aristocracy), 13

(Democracy), bk IV ch 3 (The one institution – parliament) (c 35pp)[Charles Kingsley, J.M. Ludlow et al] Politics for the people (1848), pp. 97–100, 178–83, 248–54Charles Kingsley, Alton Locke (1850), chs 37–41 (pp.353–90 in 1983 Oxford World’s Classics

edn)F.D. Maurice, The Reformation of Society (1851), pp.3–39T. Hughes, ‘The Volunteer’s Catechism’, Macmillan’s Magazine 2 (1860), 191–3

Art and nature; Ruskin; the Pre-RaphaelitesJ.D. Rosenberg (ed), The genius of John Ruskin (1963), pp. 83–120, 170–96 [selections from The

Stones of Venice and Modern Painters]

94

Coventry Patmore, ‘Sources of expression in architecture’, Edinburgh Review, 94 (1851), 365–403*Robert Hewison Ruskin, Turner and the pre-Raphaelites (2000 Tate Gallery catalogue) ch 7, pp

203–29 (paintings, mostly pre-Raphaelite, some of mountains)

Englishness and ProtestantismLord John Russell’s letter to the bishop of Durham, November 1850, in S. Walpole, Life of Lord

John Russell (1889), II, 120–1.James Martineau, ‘The battle of the Churches’, Westminster Review 54 (Jan 1851), 459–69,

483–90J.H. Newman, The present position of Catholics in England (1851), pp 41–78

The purpose of universitiesWilliam Empson and F.W. Newman, ‘Academical test articles’, Edinburgh Review 88 (July

1848), 163–86Alexander Bain, ‘English university education’, Westminster Review 49 (1848), 441–63Mark Pattison, Memoirs (1885), 235–57 (reform in Oxford)

Women and the training of childrenMary Carpenter, Reformatory Schools for the Children of the Perishing and Dangerous Classes

and for Juvenile Offenders (1851; 1968 reprint), pp.58–109Harriet Martineau, Household Education (1849), pp.30–45, 275–326Sarah Stickney Ellis, The Education of Character: with Hints on Moral Training (1856),

pp.66–89, 90–124, 284–96.

The role and rights of womenCharlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre (1847) extract from Vol. 1, Ch. 12 (pp. 108–9 in Oxford World’s

Classics edn, 2000, with introduction by Sally Shuttleworth)Cornelia Cornwallis, ‘Capabilities and disabilities of women’, Westminster Review 67 (Jan 1857),

42–72W.E. Gladstone, ‘The bill for divorce’, Quarterly Review 102 (July 1857), 285–8Harriet Devine Jump, Women’s writing of the Victorian period 1837–1901: an anthology (1999),

pp. 51–95.

The image of the queen and the Royal FamilyIllustrated London News, 10 March 1855, pp. 237–8 (on the queen’s inspection of wounded

soldiers); 4 July 1857, pp. 7, 20–2 (on the opening of the Manchester Art Treasures Exhibitionand on the award ceremony for the Victoria Cross); 23 and 30 January 1858, 73–4, 97–8, 100,118–19, 122–3 (on the wedding of Princess Victoria)

T. Martin, Life of the Prince Consort (1875), vol. IV, 34–40, 156–66*Juliet Gardiner, Queen Victoria (1997), illustrations on pp. 6, 74, 95, 96

Empire, race and the English missionG. Bennett (ed), The concept of empire: Burke to Attlee (1947), pp. 146–57, 172–6, 184–92T. Carlyle and J.S. Mill on the ‘Negro Question’, 1849 and 1850, reprinted in Politics and empire

in Victorian Britain, ed. A. Burton (2000), pp. 110–19W.R. Greg, ‘Shall we retain our colonies?’, Edinburgh Review, 93 (Apr 1851), 475–98Charles Kingsley, Alexandria and her schools (1854), pp. x-xxivA.H. Layard, ‘The influence of education upon character’ (1855), in Rectorial addresses deliv-

ered in the universities of Aberdeen, ed. P.J. Anderson (1902), pp. 77–91

The Indian MutinyA.H. Layard, ‘British India’, Quarterly Review 104 (July 1858), 224–46, 274–76J.M. Ludlow, British India: its races and its history (1858), II, 239–45, 347–73J.C. Marshman, Memoirs of Major-General Sir Henry Havelock (1860), pp. 446–62F.D. Maurice, The Indian crisis (1857), pp. 1–18Lewis Pelly, ‘The English in India’, Westminster Review 69/13 (Jan. 1858), 197–207Benjamin Disraeli, Speech in House of Commons, 27 July 1857, Hansard’s Parliamentary

Debates, Vol. 147, cols. 440–81.

* picture sources

95

Secondary works

Political and General Works

W.L. Burn The Age of Equipoise: A Study of the Mid-Victorian Generation (1964)Lawrence Goldman Science, Reform, and Politics in Victorian Britain (2002)Margaret Homans Royal representations: Queen Victoria and British culture, 1837–1876

(1998)K.T. Hoppen The Mid-Victorian Generation 1846–86 (1998)Michael Maclagan ‘Clemency’ Canning: Charles John, 1st Earl Canning (1962)T.R. Metcalf Aftermath of Revolt (1965)J.P. Parry ‘The impact of Napoleon III on British politics, 1851–1880’, TRHS (2001)Harold Perkin The Origins of Modern English Society, 1780–1880 (1969)John Plunkett Queen Victoria: First Media Monarch (2003)Bernard Porter The Refugee Question in Mid-Victorian Politics (1980)Bernard Porter ‘Bureau and barrack: early Victorian attitudes towards the continent’,

Victorian Studies (1984)Frank Prochaska Royal Bounty: The Making of a Welfare Monarchy (1995)Sheldon Rothblatt Tradition and Change in English Education (1976)Peter Searby A History of the University of Cambridge: III: 1750–1870 (1997)Stanley Stembridge Parliament, the Press and the Colonies, 1846–1880 (1982)W.R. Ward Victorian Oxford (1965)Richard Williams The Contentious Crown: Public Discussion of the British Monarchy in the

Reign of Victoria (1997)D.A. Winstanley Early Victorian Cambridge (1965)G.M. Young Portrait of an Age: Victorian England (2nd edn., 1953)

Ideas and Culture, Race and Empire

Jeffrey A. Auerbach The Great Exhibition of 1851: A Nation on Display (1999)J.W. Burrow A Liberal Descent: Victorian Historians and the English Past (1981)J.W. Burrow Evolution and Society: A Study in Victorian Social Theory (1966)Alice Chandler A Dream of Order; Medievalism in Nineteenth-Century English Literature

(1970)R.W. Clark The Victorian Mountaineers (1953)S. Collini, D. Winch That Noble Science of Politics (1983)& J. Burrow

Graham Dawson Soldier Heroes: British Adventure, Empire and the Imagining ofMasculinities (1994)

Duncan Forbes The Liberal Anglican Idea of History (1952)Simon Gunn The Public Culture of the Victorian Middle Classes: Ritual and Authority in

the Industrial City 1840–1914 (2000)Catherine Hall Civilising Subjects: Metropole and Colony in the English Imagination

1830–1867 (2002)Catherine Hall White, Male and Middle Class: Explorations in Feminism and History

(1988)T.W. Heyck The Transformation of Intellectual Life in Victorian England (1982)Ben Knights The Idea of the Clerisy in the Nineteenth Century (1978)Douglas Lorimer Colour, Class and the Victorians (1978)John Stuart Mill On Liberty (1859)Philip Mirowski More Heat than Light: Economics as Social Physics: Physics as Nature’s

Economics (1989)J.D.Y. Peel Herbert Spencer: The Evolution of a Sociologist (1971)Thomas Richards The Commodity Culture of Victorian England (1990)John Sparrow Mark Pattison and the Idea of a University (1967)George W. Stocking Victorian Anthropology (1987)Frank M. Turner Contesting Cultural Authority: Essays in Victorian Intellectual Life (1993)J. Wolff and John Seed The Culture of Capital: Art, Power and the Nineteenth Century Middle Class

(1988)

96

Science

Gillian Beer Darwin’s Plots: Evolutionary Narrative in Darwin, George Eliot andNineteenth-Century Fiction (1983)

Gillian Beer Open Fields: Science in Cultural Encounter (1996)Janet Browne Charles Darwin. Volume I: Voyaging (1995)Tess Cosslett (ed.) Science and Religion in the Nineteenth Century (1984) Adrian Desmond and Darwin (1991)James Moore

R.J. Helmstadter Victorian Faith in Crisis: Essays on Continuity and Change in Nineteenth-& B Lightman (eds.) Century Religious Belief (1990)

George Levine Darwin and the Novelists: Patterns of Science in Victorian Fiction (1988)J. Paradis & T Postlewait Victorian Science and Victorian Values: Literary Perspectives (1981)

(eds.) James A. Secord Victorian Sensation: The Extraordinary Publication, Reception, and Secret

Authorship of Vestiges of the Natural History of Creation (2000)Crosbie Smith The Science of Energy: A Cultural History of Energy Physics in Victorian

Britain (1998)Alison Winter Mesmerized: Powers of Mind in Victorian Britain (1998)

Religion

Owen Chadwick The Spirit of the Oxford Movement (1992)A.H.Clough The Bothie of Toper-na-Fuosich (1848)Maurice Cowling Religion and Public Doctrine in Modern England, Vol II Part I (1985)M.A. Crowther Church Embattled: Religious Controversy in Mid-Victorian England (1970)Boyd Hilton The Age of Atonement: The Influence of Evangelicalism on Social and

Economic Thought ca.1785–1865 (1988)George Landow Victorian Types, Victorian Shadows: Biblical Typology in Victorian

Literature, Art and Thought (1980) E.R. Norman The Victorian Christian Socialists (1987)Geoffrey Rowell Hell and the Victorians (1974) Brian Stanley ‘Christian responses to the Indian mutiny’, Studies in Church History, vol.

20John Tulloch Movements of Religious Thought (1971 edn)Norman Vance The Sinews of the Spirit: The Ideal of Christian Manliness in Victorian

Religion and Religious Thought (1985)Robert Lee Wolff Gains and Losses: Novels of Faith and Doubt in Victorian England (1977) David Young F.D. Maurice and Unitarianism (1992)

Gender

E. Helsinger, R.L. Sheets The Woman Question: Society and Literature in Britain and America (3 and W. Veeder vols., 1983)

Pam Hirsch Barbara Leigh Smith Bodichon, 1827–1891; Feminist, Artist and Rebel(1998)

Boyd Hilton ‘Manliness, masculinity, and the Mid-Victorian Temperament’ in LawrenceGoldman (ed.), The Blind Victorian: Henry Fawcett and BritishLiberalism(1989)

Ruth Jenkins Reclaiming Myths of Power: Women Writers and the Victorian SpiritualCrisis (1995)

Elizabeth Langland Nobody’s Angels: Middle-Class Women and Domestic Ideology in VictorianCulture (1995)

Jill L. Matus Unstable Bodies: Victorian Representations of Sexuality and Maternity(1995)

Mary Poovey Uneven Developments: The Ideological Work of Gender in Mid-VictorianEngland (1988)

F.K. Prochaska Women and Philanthropy in Nineteenth-Century England (1980)Jane Rendall The Origins of Modern Feminism: Women in Britain, France and the United

States 1700–1860 (1985)

97

Mary Shanley Feminism, Marriage and the Law in Victorian England (1989)F.B. Smith Florence Nightingale: Reputation and Power (1982)Dorothy Thompson Queen Victoria: Gender and Power (1990)John Tosh A Man’s Place: Masculinity and the Middle-Class Home in Victorian

England (1999)Martha Vicinus (ed.) Suffer and Be Still: Women in the Victorian Age (1972)Martha Vicinus A Widening Sphere: Changing Roles of Victorian Women (1977)

Art

Winslow Ames Prince Albert and Victorian Taste (1967)Anne Clark Amor William Holman Hunt: the True Pre-Raphaelite (1989)Rosemary Cooper ‘The popularisation of Renaissance art in Victorian England’, Art History

(1978)J.R. Hale England and the Italian Renaissance (1954)John Hayman John Ruskin and Switzerland (1990)Tim Hilton The Pre-Raphaelites (1970)W. Holman Hunt Pre-Raphaelitism and the Pre-Raphaelite Brotherhood (2 vols, 1905)George Landow Ruskin (1985)D.S. Macleod Art and the Victorian Middle Class: Money and the Making of Cultural

Identity (1996)Debra Mancoff The Arthurian Revival in Victorian Art (1990)Jonah Siegel Desire and Excess: The Nineteenth-Century Culture of Art (2000)John Steegman Victorian Taste 1830–1870 (1970)Leslie Stephen ‘Ruskin’, in Studies of a Biographer (1902)

Literature

M. Allott (ed.) The Brontës: The Critical Heritage (1974)Richard Altick The English Common Reader: A Social History of the Mass Reading Public,

1800–1900 (1957)Richard Altick Victorian People and Ideas (1974) Louis Cazamian The Social Novel in England 1830–1850: Dickens, Disraeli, Mrs Gaskell,

Kingsley (1973)Philip Davis The Oxford English Literary History volume 8: The Victorians 1830–80

(2003)George Eliot Middlemarch (1871–2)Catherine Gallagher The Industrial Reformation of English Fiction: Social Discourse and

Narrative Form 1832–1867 (1985)Shirley Robin Letwin The Gentleman in Trollope: Individuality and Moral Conduct (1982)

K. RICHARD WAGNER AND GERMAN HISTORY

This paper will examine the life and works of Richard Wagner in historical context. Three kinds ofsources will be examined: i. four of his major works – Lohengrin, The Mastersingers of Nuremberg,The Ring of the Nibelung and Parsifal; ii. his theoretical and political writings and iii. his private opin-ions on politics, culture and society as recorded in his voluminous correspondence and in the daily jour-nal kept by his second wife, Cosima, from 1869 until his death. Special attention will be paid to Germanyunder the Restoration, the revolutions of 1848–9, the unification of Germany, the changing role of theartist and high culture in German society, the problems of the German Empire, the rise of anti-semitismand the reception of Wagner’s works by posterity. The four works are necessarily set simply as textsbut in the classes and lectures they will be illustrated through audio- and video-recordings. Neither tech-nical knowledge of music nor knowledge of the German language will be required.

Numbers will be restricted to 25 students, chosen by ballot.

98

SourcesRichard Wagner,

Lohengrin (English National Opera Guide, no. 47, London, 1993)The Mastersingers of Nuremberg (English National Opera Guide, no. 19, London, 1983)The Ring of the Nibelung, translated by Stewart Spencer (London, 1993)Parsifal (English National Opera Guide, no. 34, London, 1986)

Albert Goldman and Evert Sprinchorn (eds.), Wagner on music and drama (New York, 1964;reprinted New York, 1988), pp.37–51, 59–74, 239–98, 353–69, 399–443

Richard Wagner, ‘Judaism in music’ and ‘What is German?’ in Charles Osborne (ed.), RichardWagner: stories and essays (London, 1973)

Richard Wagner, My Life (Cambridge, 1983), pp.28–41, 59–63, 88–91, 163–216, 219–431,467–8, 475–8, 498–9, 516–26

Richard Wagner, The diary of Richard Wagner: the brown book 1865–1882, ed. Joachim Bergfeld(London, 1980)

Herbert Barth (ed.), Wagner. A documentary Study (London, 1975), pp. 11–16, 147–246Stewart Spencer and Barry Millington (eds.), Selected letters of Richard Wagner (London, 1987)

selected passages [nos. 9, 11, 14, 15, 22–4, 28–9, 31, 35, 41, 44–45, 49, 51, 53–6, 64, 68–9, 71,75–6, 79, 85–96, 99–100, 106, 117–18, 120, 122–4, 129–131, 133, 135–6, 139, 146, 149–50,153, 158, 161, 167–8, 170–1, 179, 182–3, 186–9, 193, 205, 214, 227, 232, 234, 241–2, 246,255–7, 259–60, 262, 289, 291, 298, 314, 327, 333, 345, 348, 352, 372, 374, 377–8, 388, 399,401, 407, 409, 412–13, 419, 421, 428–9, 435–6, 453, 457, 461, 471, 475, 480, 483, 489, 491]

Martin Gregor-Dellin and Dieter Mack (eds.), Cosima Wagner’s Diaries, 2 vols (London,1978–80) selected passages. [entries for: 1869 20 April; 17 May; 16, 25, 27 June; 6, 24 July;13 August; 25 October. 1870 20–21 February; 5, 14 March; 17–19, 24–26 July, 4–6, 18–19August, 13, 16, 27 September; 14, 18, 24 October; 20 November; 8–9 December. 1871 11,22 January; 12 February, 3 May, 22 June; 12, 21 July; 22–23 October, 14 November. 187218 August; 6 December. 1873 3, 25, 27 February; 27 March; 7, 19 April; 11 May; 3, 18–19June; 2 July; 2, 10, 15, 26, September; 18 October; 27 December. 1874 13, 18, 20 January; 3,23 March; 2 April, 2; 11 May; 11, 13 June; 8 July; 6 August; 3 September; 3, 7, 22 December.1875 14 January; 13 February; 1 March; 22 April; 2 November; 30 December. 1876 12, 14January. 1877 26 January; 25 May; 23 June; 21, 25 September. 1878 30 January; 26 February;2, 27 March; 31 May; 2 June; 6 July; 18, 23 September; 17, 20–21 October; 10, 13, 22, 25,27 November; 1, 16, 27 December. 1879 24 January; 12 March; 2, 17 June; 11–13, 29 July;11 October; 13 November; 12, 18–19 December. 1880 18, 21, 31 January; 1–2, 10 February;2 May; 11, 21 July; 13 August; 12, 15 September; 29–30 December. 1881 1, 13, January; 10,15 February; 21, 24 March; 4, 12 April; 2, 11, 14 August; 16, 21 October; 10 November; 16,18 December. 1882 17 February; 27 March; 26 April;16–17 October.

Stewart Spencer (ed.), Wagner remembered (London, 2000), pp. 44–53, 61–5, 114–43, 149–62.188–93, 197–205, 238–52, 259–63, 275–6

Friedrich Nietzsche, ‘Richard Wagner in Bayreuth’, in Unfashionable Observations, TheComplete Works of Friedrich Nietzsche, vol. 2 (Stanford, 1995), pp. 259–331

Friedrich Nietzsche, ‘The case of Wagner’ in The birth of tragedy and The case of Wagner, trans.W. Kaufmann (reprinted New Work, 1967)

Wagner, Hitler and National Socialism, an anthology of translated excerpts from various sources.

For referenceMary Fulbrook (ed.), German history since 1800 (London, 1997)John Deathridge and Carl Dahlhaus, The New Grove Wagner (London, 1984)John Deathridge, Ulrich Müller and Peter Wapnewski (eds.), The Wagner handbook (Cambridge,

Mass. and London, 1992)Barry Millington, Wagner (London, 1981)Michael Tanner, Wagner (London, 1996)Carl Dahlhaus, Richard Wagner’s Music Dramas (Cambridge, 1978)Bryan Magee, Aspects of Wagner, 2nd edition (London, 1988)Bryan Magee, Wagner and philosophy (London, 2000)George Bernard Shaw, The Perfect Wagnerite: A Commentary on the Nibelung’s Ring (London,

1898)Deryck Cooke, I Saw the World End: a study of Wagner’s Ring (London, 1979)

99

Jacob Katz, The Darker Side of Genius. Richard Wagner’s Anti-Semitism (Hanover N. H. andLondon, 1986)

Paul Lawrence Rose, Wagner: race and revolution (London, 1992)Marfc A. Weiner, Richard Wagner and the anti-Semitic imagination (Lincoln, Nebraska, and

London, 1995)Joachim Köhler, Wagner’s Hitler. The Prophet and his Disciple (Cambridge, 2000)Dieter Borchmeyer, Richard Wagner: theory and theatre (Oxford, 1991)D. C. Large and W. Weber, Wagnerism in European culture and politics (Ithaca, 1984)R. Hollinrake, Nietzsche, Wagner and the philosophy of pessimism (London, 1982)Peter Viereck, Metapolitics: from the romantics to Hitler (New York, 1941)Thomas Mann, Pro and contra Wagner (London, 1985)Frederic Spotts, Bayreuth. A history of the Wagner festival (New Haven, 1994)

L. CHURCHILL, ROOSEVELT, STALIN AND THE ‘GRAND ALLIANCE’, 1940–5

This paper examines the conduct of the Allied war effort from a series of perspectives:

– biographical: the characters of the three leaders and their personal relations, approaching thesethemes principally via the major wartime conferences.

– political: the contrasts in political/bureaucratic systems and in styles of policymaking.– strategic: the tensions between Anglo-American global warfare against Germany, Italy and

Japan and the Soviet land conflict against a single enemy, paying particular attention to the‘Second Front’ debates in 1942–4.

– diplomatic: the war aims and peace aims of the three powers. Central themes will be the futureof the British empire, the Soviet position in Eastern Europe and the American role in the post-war order.

– socio-economic: contrasts in wartime mobilization of resources, material and human. Casestudies will include nationalism in the Soviet Union, strains within the British coalitiongovernment, and US policy on the mobilization of African-Americans. Consideration willalso be given to the use of womanpower in all three countries.

– historiographical: all these issues will be addressed historiographically, in the context of theevolving Cold War and the gradual opening of archives. The impact of Churchill’s warmemoirs in shaping interpretations of what he called ‘The Grand Alliance’ will receivesustained attention.

Teaching will include group work in Churchill College Archives and team presentations ofsessions from the wartime conferences. Numbers will therefore be restricted to 25 students,chosen by ballot.

Sources(Place of publication is London unless otherwise stated.)Adamovich, Ales, and Daniel Granin, A Book of the Blockade (Moscow, 1983), pp. 11–14, 34–57,

163–71, 204–14 – on the siege of Leningrad (48 pages)Alanbrooke, War Diaries 1939–1945, eds Alex Danchev and Daniel Todman (2001), pp. xi-xxvi,

xxxi-xxxiv, 246–9, 281–5, 299–307, 344–8, 358–65, 401–11, 481–8, 535, 566–7, 575, 590–3,649–50. (78 pages)

Alexiyevich, S., War’s Unwomanly Face (Moscow, 1985), 6–21, 61–75 – on women combatsoldiers in USSR (31 pages)

Boshyk, Yury, ed., Ukraine during World War II: History and its Aftermath (1986), docs 4–12 (26 pages)

Chuev, Felix, Molotov Remembers: Inside Kremlin Politics, ed. Albert Resis (Chicago, 1993),pp. 44–52 (8 pages)

Churchill, Winston S., The Second World War (6 vols, 1948–54)vol. I, pp. vii-viii;vol. II, pp. 4–8, 15–22;vol. III, pp. 315–6, 337–40, 350–2, 537–40, 608–9, 615–6, 705–7;vol. IV, pp. 288–91, 293, 304–5, 428–51, 581–91, 612–8, 678–81, 781–4, 861–2;vol. V, pp. ix-x, 140, 225–7, 302–60, 514;vol. VI, pp. 50–62, 181–2, 197–212, 302–45, 350–2, 367–71, 399–400, 440–6, 496–9.

(236 pages)

100

Colville, Sir John, The Fringes of Power: Downing Street Diaries, 1939–1955 (1985), pp. 554–5,562–6, 595 (7 pages)

Corley, Felix, ed., Religion in the Soviet Union: An Archival Reader (1996), pp. 130–55 (26 pages)Erickson, John, and David Dilks, eds, Barbarossa (1994), pp. 123–33 (11 pages)Harrison, Mark, ed, The Economics of World War II: Six Great Powers in International

Comparison (1998) Tables 1.3, 1.5, 1.8 Tables 2.2, 2.6, 2.10, 2.12, 2.13Tables 3.10, 3.11, 3.13, 3.15Tables 7.3, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 7.11 (6 pages)

Jefferys, Keith, ed., War and Reform: British Politics during the Second World War (Manchester,1994), pp. 69–105. (37 pages)

Kimball, Warren F., ed., Churchill and Roosevelt: Their Complete Correspondence (3 vols,Princeton, 1984),vol. I, pp. 208, 214–5, 221–2, 238–9, 245–6, 249–50, 283–6, 294–308, 314–23, 379–84,

389–94, 400–4, 420–2, 441, 458–9, 465–6, 471–5, 481–3, 502–4, 515, 520–1, 541–3,544–6, 560–2, 564–72, 574–6, 579–81, 602–4, 616–7, 621–2, 648–51;

vol. II, pp. 11–15, 38–42, 43–52, 54–5, 63, 66–7, 73–4, 80–1, 93–6, 126–35, 153–4, 166–71,183–5, 203–5, 221–7, 244–7, 259–61, 278–9, 283–90, 348–51, 360–2, 498–509, 516–7,541, 543–4, 555–7, 565, 568, 597–8, 600–1, 645–6, 652, 704–9, 762–5;

vol. III, pp. 15–16, 38–40, 53–4, 71–4, 139–41, 153–4, 177–80, 197–9, 201–3, 213–29, 232,339–51, 358–60, 363–5, 377–8, 389–92, 434–6, 446–9, 469, 496, 501–3, 539, 547–51,560–6, 568–9, 571–2, 574, 587–90, 593–4, 598, 603–5, 613, 617, 622, 630. (282 pages)

Moran, Lord, Winston Churchill: The Struggle for Survival, 1940–1965 (1966), chs 7, 10–11,16–18, 22, 24 (104 pages)

Nalty, Bernard C., and Morris J. MacGregor, eds, Blacks in the Military: Essential Documents(Wilmington, Delaware, 1981), pp. 103–32 (30 pages)

Richardson, Charles, From Churchill’s Secret Circle to the BBC: The Biography of Lt. Gen. SirIan Jacob (1991), pp. 88–91, 95–7, 132–46 (21 pages)

Ross, Graham, ed., The Foreign Office and the Kremlin, 1941–1945: British Documents on Anglo-Soviet Relations, 1941–45 (Cambridge, 1984), pp. 82–107, 121–30, 133–5, 157–63, 166–71,175–83, 193–204, 208–14 (77 pages)

Rzheshevsky, Oleg A., ed., War and Diplomacy: The Making of the Grand Alliance. Documentsfrom Stalin’s Archives (1996), pp. 106–23, 133–4, 138–41, 159–61, 173–89, 192–3, 201–6,210–11, 221–4, 267–74, 281–4, 298–9 (64 pages)

Siracusa, Joseph M., ‘The Meaning of TOLSTOY: Churchill, Stalin, and the Balkans, Moscow,October 1944’, Diplomatic History, 3 (1979), pp. 443–63 – documents. (21 pages)

Soviet Union, Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Stalin’s Correspondence with Churchill, Attlee,Roosevelt and Truman, 1941–45 (1958)vol. I (with WSC), docs 3, 4, 10, 12, 20, 21, 47, 56–8, 60, 65–6, 93–4, 104, 107, 109, 111,

112, 114, 123, 129, 150–1, 154, 170, 173, 175, 210, 235–6, 249, 250, 256–8, 294, 297,322–3, 325–6, 328, 336, 357, 365, 370, 406, 416–8, 430, 439, 450–1.

vol. II (with FDR), docs 55–8, 81–3, 88, 90, 92, 101, 109, 111, 114–7, 127, 130, 132–4, 137,140, 146, 159–60, 211, 213, 231, 241–6, 248, 254–6, 280–90 (137 pages)

United States, Department of State, Foreign Relations of the United States: The Conferences atCairo and Tehran, 1943, (Washington, 1961), pp. 150–5, 203–13, 248–61, 477–604. (157 pages)

United States, Department of State, Foreign Relations of the United States: The Conferences atMalta and Yalta, 1945, (Washington, D.C., 1955), pp. 564–80, 589–91, 611–34, 655–81,699–728, 734–45, 766–91, 797–9, 802–14, 825–31, 841–57, 866–85, 894–919, 921–9 (241 pages)

Volkogonov, Dmitri, Stalin: Triumph and Tragedy (1991), pp. 427, 459–60 – Orders. (2 pages)

TOTAL PRINTED = 1,642 pages

Photocopied materials from the Public Record Office, London, and Churchill College ArchivesCentre, Cambridge. Selected documents to be announced

101

For ReferenceAHR = American Historical Review DH = Diplomatic HistoryIHR = International History ReviewJAH = Journal of American History,JCH = Journal of Contemporary HistoryJSMS = Journal of Slavic Military Studies.

* Indicates introductory reading.Sections are not self-contained, so cross-reference between them.

a) Overviews of World War TwoDear, I.C.B., ed., The Oxford Companion to the Second World War (Oxford, 1995) – reference

essays, arranged alphabetically.* Overy, Richard, Why the Allies Won (1995) – interpretation. * Parker, R.A.C., Struggle for Survival: The History of the Second World War (Oxford, 1989)

– impressively short.Weinberg, Gerhard, A World at Arms: A Global History of World War II (1994) – impressively

long. Good for reference.

b) Historiography* ‘The Future of World War Two Studies: A Roundtable’, DH, 25/3 (2001), esp. essays by

Kimball, Lee (home fronts), Weiner (USSR), Reynolds. Harris, Jose, ‘Britain: The People’s War?’, in Reynolds, et. al., eds, Allies at War, pp. 233–59

– cited in section (c).Marwick, Arthur, War and Social Change in the Twentieth Century: A Comparative Study of

Britain, France, Germany, Russia and the United States (1974), esp. chs 1, 4, 5 and 7Stoler, Mark A., ‘World War II Diplomacy in Historical Writing: Prelude to Cold War’, in Gerald

K. Haines and J. Samuel Walker, eds, American Foreign Relations: A HistoriographicalReview (1981), pp. 187–206.

Stoler, Mark A., ‘A Half-Century of Conflict: Interpretations of U.S. World War II Diplomacy’,DH, 18 (1994), pp. 375–403 – continues the story from his 1981 essay.

Tumarkin, Nina, The Living and the Dead: The Rise and Fall of the Cult of World War Two inRussia (New York, 1994) – important study

‘World War II and National Cinemas’. Forum of articles on Britain, America and Russia in AHR,106 (2001), pp. 804–64.

c) The ‘Big Three’ and the Wartime AllianceBrower, Charles F., ed., World War II in Europe: The Final Year (1998), esp. chs 2–4 on US and

British strategy. Edmonds, Robin, The Big Three: Churchill, Roosevelt and Stalin (1991)* Kimball, Warren F., Forged in War: Roosevelt, Churchill, and the Second World War (1997)

– essential text* Harrison, Mark, ed., The Economics of World War Two: Six Great Powers in International

Comparison (Cambridge, 1998), ch. 1 (overview), 2 (UK), 3 (USA) and 7 (USSR) – excel-lent overviews of the war economies.

Lane, Ann, and Howard Temperley, eds, The Rise and Fall of the Grand Alliance, 1941–45(1995), chs 2 (SU war aims), 5 (Charmley on WSC), 6 (Intelligence), 7 (Soviet strategy)

Louis, Wm. Roger, and Hedley Bull, eds, The Special Relationship: Anglo-American Relationssince 1945 (1986), esp. ch. 2 on the wartime alliance.

* Reynolds, David, Warren F. Kimball, and A.O. Chubarian, eds, Allies at War: The Soviet,American and British Experience, 1939–45 (1994) – interpretative essays on diplomacy, strat-egy, economy, and society for all three countries.

Sainsbury, Keith, Churchill and Roosevelt at War: The War They Fought and the Peace TheyHoped To Make (1994) – interpretation by a British scholar

Thorne, Christopher, Allies of a Kind: The United States, Britain, and the War against Japan,1941–1945 (1977), chs 4, 10, 17, 24 on the phases of the war.

Sokolov, Boris V., ‘The Role of Lend-Lease in Soviet Military Efforts, 1941–1945’, JSMS 7(1994), pp. 567–86

102

d) Wartime Conferences and Other MeetingsBrinkley, Douglas, and David R. Facey-Crowther, eds, The Atlantic Charter (1994), esp. chs 1,

3–4, 6.Buhite, Russell D., Decisions at Yalta: An Appraisal of Summit Diplomacy (Wilmington,

Delaware, 1986)Clemens, Diane, Yalta (New York, 1970).Danchev, Alex, Very Special Relationship: Field Marshal Sir John Dill and the Anglo-American

Alliance, 1941–1944 (1986)MacLean, Elizabeth Kimball, ‘Joseph E. Davies and Soviet-American Relations, 1941–1943’,

DH, 4 (1980), pp. 73–93.Miner, Steven M., Between Churchill and Stalin: The Soviet Union, Great Britain, and the Origins

of the Grand Alliance (1988) – important on 1942.Resis, Albert, ‘The Churchill-Stalin Secret “Percentages” Agreement on the Balkans, Moscow,

October 1944’, AHR, 83 (1978), pp. 368–87.Sainsbury, Keith, The Turning Point: Roosevelt, Stalin, Churchill, and Chiang-Kai-shek, 1943.

The Moscow, Cairo, and Teheran Conferences (1985) – essential.

e) The British War EffortBarker, Elisabeth, Churchill and Eden at War (1978) – still useful. Bell, P.M.H., John Bull and the Bear: British Public Opinion, Foreign Policy and the Soviet

Union, 1941–1945 (1990)Ben-Moshe, Tuvia, Churchill: Strategy and History (1992) – powerful interpretation.Blake, Robert, and Wm. Roger Louis, eds, Churchill (Oxford, 1993), esp. chs 17–23Carlton, David, Churchill and the Soviet Union (2000), esp. intro, concl, and chs 4–5Charmley, John, Churchill: The End of Glory (1993) – provocative interpretation. Dockrill, Michael, and Brian McKercher, eds, Diplomacy and World Power: Studies in British

Foreign Policy, 1890–1950 (Cambridge, 1996), chs 9–10Eley, Geoff, ‘Finding the People’s War: Film, British Collective Memory, and World War II’,

AHR, 106/3 (2001), 818–38.Folly, Martin H., Churchill, Whitehall and the Soviet Union, 1940–45 (2000) – important analy-

sis of underlying assumptions. Gilbert, Martin, Winston S. Churchill, vols 6 and 7 (1983, 1986) – useful reference. Gowing, Margaret, ‘The Organisation of Manpower in Britain during the Second World War’,

JCH 7 (1972), pp. 147–67* Harris, Jose, ‘Britain: The People’s War?’, in Reynolds, et. al., eds, Allies at War, pp. 233–59

– cited in section (c).Holdich, P.G.H, ‘A Policy of Percentages: British Policy and the Balkans after the Moscow

Conference of October 1944’, IHR, 9 (1987), 28–47. Jefferys, Kevin, The Churchill Coalition and Wartime Politics, 1940–1945 (Manchester, 1993)

– important re-interpretation, esp. chs 3–5 on 1941–2.Keegan, John, ed., Churchill’s Generals (1991), esp. intro. and essays on Alanbrooke and

Montgomery. * Pelling, Henry, Britain and the Second World War (1970)Ramsden, John, Man of the Century: Winston Churchill and His Legend since 1945 (2002), esp.

chs 2 & 4. Reynolds, David, Rich Relations: The American Occupation of Britain, 1942–1945 (1995), esp.

parts 3 and 4. Smith, Harold L., ed., War and Social Change: British Society in the Second World War (1986),

esp. pp. 208–63 (essays on women and welfare)

f) The American War EffortAnderson, Karen, Wartime Women: Sex Roles, Family Relations, and the Status of Women during

World War II (Westport, CT, 1981)Bennett, Todd, ‘Culture, Power, and Mission to Moscow: Film and Soviet-American Relations

during World War II’, JAH, 88/2 (2001), pp. 489–518.Bodnar, John, ‘Saving Private Ryan and Postwar Memory in America’, AHR, 106/3 (2001), 805–17.Campbell, D’Ann, ‘Servicewomen of World War II’, Armed Forces and Society, 16 (1990), pp.

251–70Ferrell, Robert H., The Dying President: Franklin D. Roosevelt, 1944–1945 (1998) – controver-

sial interpretation of health and decisionmaking. Goodwin, Doris Kearns, No Ordinary Time – Franklin and Eleanor Roosevelt: The Home Front

in World War II (1994) – a readable background account of the White House at war.

103

Harriman, W. Averell, and Elie Abel, Special Envoy to Churchill and Stalin, 1941–1946 (1975),esp. chs 7–8, 12, 15, 17 on the major conferences.

* Jeffries, John W., Wartime America: The World War Two Home Front (Chicago, 1996)Kimball, Warren F., The Juggler: Franklin Roosevelt as Wartime Statesman (Princeton, 1991),

chs 1, 4, 5, 8. Koppes, Clayton R., and Gregory D. Black, Hollywood Goes to War: How Politics, Profits and

Propaganda Shaped World War II (New York, 1987), esp. pp. 142–234, on portrayals of thehome front, USSR and UK.

Larrabee, Eric, Commander in Chief: Franklin Delano Roosevelt, His Lieutenants, and Their War(1987), esp. prologue and essays on FDR and Marshall

Leighton, Richard M., ‘OVERLORD Revisited: An Interpretation of American Strategy in theEuropean War, 1942–1944’, AHR, 68 (1963), pp. 919–37.

MacGregor, Morris J., Jr., Integration of the Armed Forces, 1940–1965 (Washington, D.C.,1981), chs 1–2

Mark, Eduard, ‘October or Thermidor? Interpretations of Stalinism and the Perceptions of SovietForeign Policy in the United States, 1927–1947’, AHR, 94 (1989), pp. 937–62.

Steele, Richard W., ‘American Popular Opinion and the War against Germany: The Issue of aNegotiated Peace, 1942’, JAH, 65 (1978), pp. 704–23

Stoler, Mark A., Allies and Adversaries: The Joint Chiefs of Staff, the Grand Alliance, and U.S.Strategy in World War II (2000), esp. chs 4–7, 9, 11. See also Stoler’s historiographical arti-cles in section (b).

Wynn, Neil, ‘The Impact of the Second World War on the American Negro’, JCH, 6 (1971), pp.42–53

* Wynn, Neil, ‘The “Good War”: The Second World War and Postwar American Society’, JCH,31 (1996), pp. 463–82

g) The Soviet War Effort* Barber, John, and Mark Harrison, The Soviet Home Front, 1941–1945 (1991) – essential. Beevor, Anthony, Stalingrad (1998) – vivid account of the battle. Beria, Sergio, Beria, My Father: Inside Stalin’s Kremlin (London, 2001) esp chs 3–7.Boshyk, Yury, ed., Ukraine during World War II: History and its Aftermath (1986), esp. pp. 3–37,

61–6, 89–104. See also documents listed under ‘Sources’. Garrard, John, and Carol Garrard, eds, World War 2 and the Soviet People (1993), esp. chs 1

(historiography), 3 (image of Stalin), 9 (ethnic deportations). Glantz, David M., and Jonathan M. House, When Titans Clashed: How the Red Army Stopped

Hitler (Lawrence, KS, 1995) – best one-volume military overview. Gorodetsky, Gabriel, Grand Delusion: Stalin and the German Invasion of Russia (1999) – chs

11 to conclsn. Useful background on Stalin’s suspicions. Kagan, Frederick, ‘The Evacuation of Soviet Industry in the Wake of “Barbarossa”: A Key to

Soviet Victory’, JSMS, 8 (1995), pp. 387–414Korol, V.E., ‘The Price of Victory: Myths and Realities’, JSMS, 9 (1996), pp. 417–24.Mastny, Vojtech, Russia’s Road to the Cold War: Diplomacy, Warfare, and the Politics of

Communism, 1941–1945 (1979) – study of Stalin’s diplomacy, based on Western materials. Merridale, Catherine, Night of Stone: Death and Memory in Russia (2000), esp. chs 8–9. See also

Tumarkin in section (b). * Overy, Richard, Russia’s War (1998) – useful overview.Pechatnov, Vladimir O., ‘The Big Three After World War II: New Documents on Soviet Thinking

about Post War Relations with the United States and Great Britain’, Cold War InternationalHistory Project, Working Paper, no. 13 (July 1995).

Pennington, Reina, ‘“Do Not Speak of the Services You Have Rendered: Women Veterans ofAviation in the Soviet Union’, JSMS, 9 (1996), pp. 120–51.

Pospielovsky, Dmitiri, The Russian Church under the Soviet Regime (1984), chs 6–7. Shukman, Harold, ed., Stalin’s Generals (1993), esp. intro. and chs on Antonov, Chuikov, Konev,

Novikov, Vasilevsky, Vlasov and Zhukov. Sokolov, B.V., ‘The Cost of War: Human Losses of the USSR and Germany, 1939–1945’, JSMS,

9 (1996), pp. 156–71.Volkogonov, Dmitri, Stalin: Triumph and Tragedy (1991) – standard biography. Youngblood, Denise J., ‘A War Remembered: Soviet Films of the Great Patriotic War’ AHR,

106/3 (2001), pp. 839–56.

Selective use will also be made of videos from three TV series: The World At War, An OceanApart and Russia’s War.

104

M: T.E LAWRENCE AND GERTRUDE BELL: BRITAIN AND THE ARABS, 1914–22

Professor C.A. Bayly & Dr T.N. Harper

This wide-ranging new option examines the rise of Arab nationalism and the emergence of a newpolitical order in the Middle East during and after the First World War. It will chart the collapse of theOttoman empire, the course of the Arab Revolt and the revival of European power in the region.

A primary focus will be on the rise of new states – Syria, Iraq, Jordan and Saudi Arabia – and theemergence of the Palestine question. The paper will examine the controversies surrounding the Hussein-McMahon correspondence, the Balfour Declaration and the post-war Anglo-French partition of theMiddle East. It will embrace key episodes such as the capture of Jerusalem, the creation of the ‘firstArab state’ in Damascus and the revolt in Iraq in 1920. It will, through Arab sources in translation, tracethe social bases and ideology of nationalism in this period. The paper will examine the contention ofelite and new popular forces and explore the varied Arabist and Islamicist elements of Arab thought. Amajor focus of study will be the ways in which Arab elites were incorporated into new structures ofEuropean indirect rule after 1919 and the conflicts to which this gave rise.

A second theme will be Britain’s encounter with the Arab world. This will be studied through a seriesof extraordinary figures, in particular T.E. Lawrence and Gertrude Bell – but also Allenby, St JohnPhilby, Parker Pasha and other luminaries of the Arab Bureau – who exercised a tremendous sway overMiddle Eastern affairs in this period. The sources will show the various ways in which British under-standings of Arab society, and the revival of the ‘crusading idea’ during the Palestine campaign, shapedpolitical events. At the heart of this will be the relationship between Orientalist scholarship, archaeol-ogy and imperial power. The paper will also have much to offer students of the history of espionage.

This is not merely a paper about politics, but also about the generation of historical myth. It will exam-ine how these key episodes such as the Arab Revolt have been remembered and interpreted within theMiddle East, and ways in which this historical memory has resurfaced in later periods. Of particularconcern will be the ‘garland of legends’ that surround T.E. Lawrence, the conflicting western and Arabinterpretations of his role, the later biographical controversies and the iconography of his portrayal inDavid Lean’s 1961 epic, ‘Lawrence of Arabia’. The paper will chart Lawrence’s journey from imperialhero to gay icon and his place in recent debates on ‘imperial masculinities’. In a similar vein the paperwill re-examine Gertrude Bell’s remarkable career as Oriental Secretary in Iraq and the complexities ofher relationships with Arab notables and imperial proconsuls. Bell had arguably a greater impact onpost-war Middle Eastern history than Lawrence, and the paper will examine her place in the growingliterature on gender and imperialism.

The sources for study are diverse: memoir and raw intelligence; literature and polemic; film and theinternet. The paper will employ a variety of historical perspectives – political, social and cultural – tore-examine the multi-layered dynamics of imperialism and nationalism at a defining moment in MiddleEastern history.

For Study

British policy:

Arab Bureau Summary of Historical Documents from the outbreak of war betweenGreat Britain and Turkey 1914 to theoutbreak of the revolt of the Sherifof Mecca in June 1916 (1916)

British Government Correspondence between Sir Henry McMahon and the Sherif Husseinof Mecca, Parliamentary Papers – Cmd. 5957(1939).

British Government Report of a Committee on Correspondence between Sir Henry McMahonand the Sherif of Mecca, Parliamentary Papers – Cmd. 5974 (1939)

K. Bourne & D.C. Watt, eds. British documents on foreign affairs: Part 2: From the First to theSecond World War, Series B: Turkey, Iran, and the Middle East,1918–1939 (1985–1997):1. The end of the war, 1918–1920. Doc nos. 1, 5, 10, 11, 28, 28A, 29, 33,33A-C, 35, 45, 51, 55, 56, 58, 59, 60, 72, 82, 85, 87, 88, 98, 127, 128,132, 133, 134, 156, 173, 174, 175, 177, 187, 189, 190, 191, 192, 205.v. 2. The Allies take control, 1920–1921, Doc nos. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,26, 27, 28, 35, 44, 45, 53, 54, 171, 199, 203, 209, 213, 214. 215, 216,217, 218.v.3. The Turkish revival, 1921–1923, Doc nos. 152, 153, 154, 155, 156.

105

Sir Edmund H. H. Allenby A brief record of the advance of the Egyptian Expeditionary Force:under the command of General Sir Edmund H. H. Allenby, July 1917to October 1918 (1919)

Vivian Gilbert The romance of the Last Crusade – with Allenby to Jerusalem (1923),pp. 67–235.

Richard Meinertzhagen Middle East Diary, 1917–1956 (1959), pp. 4–128.Army Diary, 1899–1926 (1960), pp. 212–27.

Sir Ronald Storrs Orientations (2nd ed., 1945), pp. 149–305, 317–462.

Arab nationalism:

King ‘Abdullah of Jordan My memoirs completed, ‘al-Takmilah’; translated from the Arabic byHarold W. Glidden; with a foreword by His Majesty King Hussein ibnTalal of Jordan (1978), pp. 103- 211

Sylvia G. Haim, ed. Arab nationalism: an anthology (1962), pp. 83–96.Robin Bidwell, ed. The Arab bulletin: bulletin of the Arab Bureau in Cairo, 1916–1919,

Vols.1 – 4 (1984), selections to be announced.

Late Ottoman Palestine:

Djemal Pasha Memories of a Turkish statesman, 1913–19 (1922), pp. 137–237.

Alexander Aaronson With the Turks in Palestine (1917), pp. 7–79.

T.E. Lawrence and his mythology:

David Garnett (ed.), The essential T. E. Lawrence (1992), pp. 31–70, 104–9, 182–5, 221–7.David Garnett (ed.), Letters of T. E. Lawrence (1939), pp. 40–137.

The Seven Pillars of Wisdom, a triumph (1935), pp. 27–60, 93–108,326–35, 450–56, 515–23.Oriental assembly (1939), pp., 25–39, 103–46.

Malcolm Brown (ed.), Secret despatches from Arabia and other writings (1991), pp. 61–73,101–9, 140–60, 172–4, 186–95, 226–60.

Lowell Thomas With Lawrence in Arabia (6th ed., 1925) pp. 15–36, 82–97, 152–64,287–317.

A. W. Lawrence (ed.) T. E. Lawrence by his Friends (1937), pp. 145–54, 177- 8, 193–202,219–37.

Richard Aldington Lawrence of Arabia: a biographical inquiry; introduction byChristopher Sykes (2nd ed., 1971), pp. 2–10, 84–105, 194–207,247–95.

Robert Graves Lawrence and the Arabs (Repr. 1991), pp. 44–58, 156–62, 406–18Suleiman Mousa T.E. Lawrence: an Arab view (1966), pp. 1–63, 93–120, 223–51,

257–87.A. Kelly, et al, eds. Filming T.E. Lawrence: Korda’s lost epics (1996), pp. 1–27, 48–56,

119–29.David Lean, director ‘Lawrence of Arabia’ (1962), selected stills in Seeley library.

Gertrude Bell and Iraq:

Gertrude Bell The letters of Gertrude Bell, selected and edited by Lady Bell (1987),pp. 300–626.

Gertrude Bell ‘Diary for 1919’, in the University of Newcastle upon Tyne Library.Available at: http://www.gerty.ncl.ac.uk/diaries/Dy1919.html, in full.

Sir Aylmer Haldane The insurrection in Mesopotamia, 1920 (1922), pp. 8–44, 64–90,256–76.

E.S. Stevens By Tigris and Euphrates (1923), pp. 17–43, 59–73, 273–322.A.T. Wilson Loyalties: Mesopotamia, 1914–17 (1930), prologue, pp. 1–20, 64–78,

143–69, 254–66, 279–313.

106

For Reference

Introductory:

Albert Hourani A History of the Arab peoples (1991)M. E Yapp The Near East since the First World War (1991)Elizabeth Monroe Britain’s moment in the Middle East, 1914–1971 (1981)Efrain and Inari Karsh Empires of the sand: the struggle for mastery in the Middle East,

1789–1923 (2002)

British strategy in the Middle East:

Elie Kedourie In the Anglo-Arab Labyrinth: the McMahon-Hussein correspondenceand its interpretations, 1914–1939 (1976)

Elie Kedourie England and the Middle East: the destruction of the Ottoman Empire,1914–1921 (1987 edn.)

John Fisher Lord Curzon and British policy in the Middle East (1999)Matthew Hughes Allenby and British Strategy in the Middle East, 1917–1919 (1999)Anthony Bruce The last crusade: the Palestine campaign in the First World War (2002)Roger Adelson London and the invention of the Middle East: money, power and war,

1902–1922 (1995)J. Kent, ed. Egypt and the defence of the Middle East (1998), Vol 1John Darwin ‘An undeclared empire: the British in the Middle East, 1918–39’, JICH,

27, 2 (1999)John Darwin Britain, Egypt and the Middle East, 1918–1922 (1981)C.M. Andrew & France overseas: The Great War and the climax of French imperial

A.S. Kanya-Forstner expansion (1981)Yigal Shelty British military intelligence in the Palestine campaign, 1914–18 (

1998)David French ‘The Dardanelles, Mecca and Kut: Prestige as a Factor in British

Eastern Strategy, 1914–16’, War and Society, 5, 1 (1987), pp. 45–61Lawrence James Imperial Warrior: the life and times of Field Marshall, Viscount

Allenby, 1861–1936 (1993)Lord Wavell Allenby; a study in greatness: the biography of Field–Marshal

Viscount Allenby of Megiddo and Felixstowe (1940)Bruce Westrate The Arab Bureau: British policy in the Middle East, 1916–20 (1992)

The late Ottoman Empire:

A.L. Macfie The end of the Ottoman Empire, 1908–1923 (1998)Albert Hourani ‘Ottoman reform and the politics of the notables’, in W.R. Polk and

R.L. Chambers, eds., Beginnings of modernization in the Middle East(1968)

Marion Kent, ed. The Great powers and the end of the Ottoman Empire (1984)Ahmad Emin Turkey in the World War (1930)Jacob M. Landau The politics of Pan-Islam: ideology and organization (1994)Azmi Özcan Pan-Islamism: Indian Muslims, the Ottomans and Britain (1877–

1924) (1997)Hasan Kayali Arabs and Young Turks: Ottomanism, Arabism and Islamism in the

Ottoman Empire 1908–18 (1996)

The origins of Arab nationalism:

George Antonius The Arab awakening: the story of the Arab National Movement (1938)Ernest Dawn From Ottomanism to Arabism: essays on the origins of Arab national-

ism (1973)Rashid Khalidi, et al, eds., The origins of Arab nationalism (1991)Israel Gershoni, Egypt, Islam, and the Arabs: the search for Egyptian nationhood,

James P. Jankowski 1900–1930 (1987)Eliezer Tauber The emergence of the Arab movements (1993)

107

Eliezer Tauber The Arab movements in World War I (1993)Mousa Suleiman ‘A matter of principle: King Hussein of the Hijaz and the Arabs in

Palestine’, Int. J. of ME St., 9 (1978)M. Haddad ‘The Rise of Arab Nationalism Reconsidered’, Int. J. M Et St., Vol. 26,

No. 2. (May, 1994)Y. Porah The origins of the Palestinian-Arab nationalist movement, 1918–29

(1972)Muhammad Y. Muslih The origins of Palestinian nationalism (1988)

Egypt:

Afaf al Sayyid-Marsot ‘The British Occupation of Egypt from 1882’, in Oxford History of theBritish Empire, III (1999)

P.J. Vatikiotis Modern History of Egypt (2nd edn 1980)M.W. Daly, ed., Cambridge History of Egypt (1998) Vol. 2Jacques Berque Egypt: imperialism & revolution (1972)Ellis Goldberg ‘Peasants in Revolt – Egypt 1919’, Int. J. ME St., 24, 2 (1992)

Palestine:

David Kushner, ed. Palestine in the late Ottoman period: political, social, and economictransformation (1987)

Roger Owen, ed. Studies in the economic and social history of Palestine in the nineteenthand twentieth centuries (1982)

M. Vereté ‘The Balfour Declaration and its makers’, Middle Eastern Studies, 6(1970)

Doreen Ingrams Palestine papers, 1917–1922: seeds of conflict (1972)Isaiah Friedman The question of Palestine, 1914–18: British-Jewish-Arab relations

(London, 1973)Naomi Shepherd Ploughing sand: British rule in Palestine, 1917–1948 (1999)Tom Segev One Palestine Complete: Jews and Arabs under the British Mandate

(2000)

Syria and Jordan:

A.H. Hourani Syria and Lebanon (1946)Philip S. Khoury Urban notables and Arab nationalism: the politics of Damascus

1860–1920 (1983)Philip S. Khoury Syria and the French mandate: the politics of Arab nationalism,

1920–1945 (1987)Malcolm B. Russell The first modern Arab state: Syria under Faysal, 1918–1920 (1985)Eliezer Tauber The formation of modern Syria and Iraq (1995)Toby Dodge An Arabian prince, English gentlemen and the tribes east of the River

Jordan: Abdullah and the creation an consolidation of the Trans-Jordanian state (1994)

Mary C. Wilson King Abdullah, Britain and the making of Jordan (1987)

Iraq:

Charles Tripp A History of Iraq (2002)D.K. Fieldhouse Kurds, Arabs and Britons. The diaries of Wallace Lyon in Iraq 1918–44

(2002)S.H. Longrigg Iraq, 1900–1950 (1953)P. Sluggett Britain in Iraq, 1914–32 (1976)Ghassan R. Atiya Iraq, 1908–21: a socio-political study (1973)L. Lukitz Iraq: the search for national identity (1995)Y.Nakash The Shi`is of Iraq (1995)

108

Saudi Arabia

Madawi al-Rasheed A History of Saudi Arabia (2002)Haifa Alangari The struggle for power in Arabia: Ibn Saud, Hussein and Great Britain,

1914–1924 (1998)

T.E. Lawrence and his biographers:

J.M. Wilson Lawrence of Arabia: the authorized biography of T.E. Lawrence(1990)

Brian Holden Reid ‘T.E. Lawrence and his biographers’, in Brian Bond, ed., The FirstWorld War and British Military History (1991), pp. 227–59

Victoria Ocampo 338171 T.E., Lawrence of Arabia (translated by David Garnett, 1963)

Suleiman Mousa ‘T.E. Lawrence and his Arab contemporaries’, Arabian Studies, VII(1985)

Michael Yardley Backing into the limelight: a biography of T.E. Lawrence (1985)Jeffrey Meyers, ed. T.E. Lawrence: soldier, writer, legend: new essays (1989)M.D. Allen The medievalism of Lawrence of Arabia (1991)John E. Mack A prince of our disorder: the life of T.E. Lawrence (1998 edn.)Sidney Sugarman A garland of legends: ‘Lawrence of Arabia’ and ‘The Arab Revolt’

(1992)Lawrence James The golden warrior: the life and legend of Lawrence of Arabia (Rev.

ed, 1995)Michael Asher Lawrence: the uncrowned king of Arabia (1999)

Lawrence on film:

Adrian Turner The making of David Lean’s Lawrence of Arabia (1994)Steven C. Caton Lawrence of Arabia: A Film’s Anthropology (1999)B. Babbington & P. Evans Biblical epics: sacred narratives in Hollywood cinema (1993)Kevin Brownlow David Lean : a biography (1996), pp.402–91The South Bank Show ‘Lean and Bolt’, 1990

T.E. Lawrence Studies Website: http://www.telstudies.orgAn appreciation of T. E. Lawrence http://www.ouphrontis.co.uk

Gertrude Bell:

Janet Wallach Desert queen: the extraordinary life of Gertrude Bell, adventurer,adviser to kings, ally of Lawrence of Arabia (1997)

Margaret E. Tabor Pioneer women: Mrs. Sherwood, Isabella Bird, Mary Knight, GertrudeBell (1930)

H.V.F. Winstone Gertrude Bell (Rev. ed., 1993)P.P. Graves The life of Sir Percy Cox (1941)M. Strobel & N Chaudhuri, eds. Western women and imperialism: complicity and resistance (1992)James Buzard ‘Victorian women and the implications of empire’, Victorian St. (1993)Antoinette Burton Burdens of history: British feminists, Indian women, and imperial

culture, 1865–1915 (1994)Indira Ghose Women travellers in colonial India: the power of the female gaze (1998)

Views of the Arab World:

Edward Said Orientalism (1978)Maxime Rodinson Europe and the mystique of Islam (1988)Nicholas Thomas Colonialism’s Culture (1994)John MacKenzie Orientalism: history, theory and the arts (1995)James G. Carrier Occidentalism: images of the West (1995)F. Robinson ‘The British empire and the Muslim World’, in Judith Brown and W.R.

Louis, eds., The Oxford History of the British Empire, IV (1999)

109

Michael Heffernan ‘Geography, cartography and military intelligence: the RoyalGeographical Society and the First World War’, Transactions, Instituteof British Geographers, 21, 3 (1996), pp. 504–533

Naomi Shepherd The zealous intruders: western discovery of Palestine (1987)Elizabeth Siberry ‘Images of the crusades in the 19th and 20th centuries’, in Jonathan

Riley-Smith, ed., The Oxford Illustrated History of the Crusades(1995), pp. 365–91

Graham Dawson ‘The blond Bedouin’, in Michael Roper & John Tosh, eds., Manfulassertions: masculinities in Britain since 1800 (1991), pp. 113–44

H.V.F. Winstone, ed. The diaries of Parker Pasha: war in the desert 1914–18 told from thesecret diaries of Colonel Alfred Chevallier Parker, nephew of LordKitchener, Governor of Sinai, and military intelligence chief in theArab revolt (1983)

Elizabeth Monroe Philby of Arabia (1973)Roger Adelson Mark Sykes: portrait of an amateur (1975)John Buchan Greenmantle (Repr. 1993)M. Fitzherbert The man who was Greenmantle: a biography of Aubrey Herbert (1983)Alois Musil In the Arabian desert (1931) E. Gombár ‘Alois Musil – Initiator of Political and Commercial Activities towards

the Middle East’, Archiv orientální, 63 (1995), pp. 426–430T. Procházka ‘Alois Musil vs. T. E. Lawrence?’ Archiv orientální, 63 (1995), pp.

435–439Ernest Gellner ‘Lawrence of Moravia’, Times Literary Supplement (19 August, 1994)Roy Del Ruth, director ‘The Desert Song’ (1929)Robert Florey, director ‘The Desert Song’ (1944)

N: ‘UHURU NA KENYATTA: MAU MAU AND INDEPENDENCE IN KENYA, 1942–1966’

The central issue of the paper is how and why the British salvaged the chaotic politics of decoloni-sation by transferring power to Jomo Kenyatta, the man they most hated and feared; and how he in turnbuilt one of independent Africa’s most stable regimes by ignoring those to whom he seemed most indebt. The core of the subject lies in the years 1952 to 1966 – from the ‘Mau Mau’ emergency toKenyatta’s isolation of his radical opposition; but it is important to study the previous decade in orderto understand both Mau Mau and why decolonisation was so difficult.

The narrative line is furnished by the struggle for mastery before, during, and after the transfer ofpower. Kenya was the first British African colony with important white and Asian minorities to reachindependence; it was strategically important to the Cold War; for four years it was convulsed in costlyrebellion; its African politics continued to be divided by ethnicity, ideology, and the scramble for land.There are six organising themes, which govern the choice of sources, and of topics for class discussionand formal examination. These themes are: the imperial, and local, politics of race and ethnicity; the Kenyatta enigma; Mau Mau’s place in Kenya’s nationalism; gender, property, work, and citizen-ship ‘after the tribe’; counter-insurgency and the re-making of the state; and ‘the debates’ on memory,authority, and neo-colonialism.

BibliographyFor StudyAbbreviations:

Cab CabinetCO Colonial OfficeCPC (British government’s) Colonial Policy CommitteeCPK Colony and Protectorate of KenyaFO Foreign OfficeGB, PP Great Britain, Parliamentary PapersRoK Republic of KenyaWO War Office

110

1. Imperial policy and British opinionS.R Ashton & S.E. Stockwell (eds.), Imperial Policy and Colonial Practice 1925–1945 Part I

(BDEEP Series A, Vol.1, 1996)NOTE: these and all other BDEEP sources are identified by their document number.65: July 1942, Dawe, memo: ‘Federal solution for East Africa’ pp. 322–37;66: July 1942, Macmillan note, Seel min. re above pp. 337–43;76: 7 Dec. 1944, Stanley to Mitchell: aide-memoire re above pp. 379–82;

Ronald Hyam (ed.) The Labour government and the end of empire 1945–1951 Four parts (BDEEPSeries A, Vol. 2, 1992)

Part I, High policy & administration:43: 1 Nov. 1946, Pedler minute: African administration policy pp. 117–19;44: 25 Feb. 1947, Creech Jones, Local government, paras 1–4 pp. 119–22;45: 30 May 1947, Mitchell to Creech Jones, reply to 44 Annex pp. 136–41;66: 12 Nov. 1947, Cripps, speech on economic development pp. 298–302;67: Nov. 1947, draft minute ‘Constitutional development’ pp. 303–06;

Part II: Economics and international relations92: 30 Sept. 1948, Lord Listowel: ‘colonial economic policy’ pp. 100–06;106: 6 Jan. 1948, Creech-Jones: comment on Montgomery pp. 196–204;119: 22 Feb. 1947, CO circular: agricultural productivity in Africa pp. 252–5;121: 14 Jan. 1948, Sir Norman Brook: African economic policy p. 257.

Part III: Strategy, politics and constitutional change201: 18 Mar. 1947, Cohen: reservation of White Highlands pp. 14–15209: 8 Dec. 1950, Griffiths, Cabinet note on East Africa pp. 33–4;325: 11 Apr. 1947, Overseas Defence Committee memo, annex 1 pp. 351–53;

Part IV: Race relations and the Commonwealth344: (Oct. 1945), CO note: East Africa, immigration, paras 1–7 pp. 1–3;356 17 July ’50, Griffiths, native officials, paras 1–4, 13–14 pp. 35–6, 38;358: 24, 26 Oct. 1950, CO minutes on Africanisation in Kenya pp. 41–2;365: 10 Nov. 1948, Creech Jones; mass education, paras 1–6 pp. 60–1;368: 9 Sept. 1950, CO circular: educational policy in Africa pp. 75–7;369: 26 July 1951, CO circular: ‘Problems of trade unionism’ pp. 77–82.

David Goldsworthy (ed.) The Conservative government and the end of Empire 1951–1957 Three Parts(BDEEP Series A, vol. 2, 1994)

Part I: International relations4: 21 June ’52, Strang (FO) to CO: problem of nationalism pp. 13–19;6: 9 Sept. 1952, Lloyd (CO) to Strang: reply to above pp. 22–4;18: 29 Dec. ’54, Macmillan, Cab memo: colonial internal security. p. 58;70: 29 July 1954, Alport to Churchill: defence of East Africa pp. 202–3;75: Sept. 1954, CO & WO joint memo: defence of East Africa pp. 207–8.

Part II: Politics and administration204: 16 Dec. 1955, Jeffries, minute: concept of ‘statehood’ pp. 68–9;281: 3 Dec. 1951, Rogers, minute: Closer association in East Africa, paras 1–8, 17–18, 21–22 pp.

216–9, 221, 222–3;284: 16 May ’52, Lyttelton, Cab memo: E Afr Royal Commission pp. 232–3;286: 13 Oct. 1952, Lyttelton memo, Baring’s telegrams: ‘Situation in Kenya’ pp. 234–8;287: 14 Oct. 1952: Cabinet conclusions on declaration of emergency p. 239;292: 29 Oct. ’53, Baring to Lyttelton: constitution pp. 247–50;296: 15 Oct. 1953, Gorrell Barnes, draft: franchise in East Africa pp. 257–60.

Part III: Economic and social policies398: Dec. 1951, CO brief for Churchill: ‘Colonial development’ pp. 157–60;501: 20 June 1953, Baring to Lyttelton & CO minute: ICFTU and trade unionism pp. 364–6;

111

503: 9 Nov ’53, Watson, memo: ‘Communism in colonial…TUs pp. 368–70;504: 19 July 1954, note of discussion: colonial industrial relations pp. 371–4;513: 9 Feb. 1953, Jeffries to Archbishop of Canterbury: race relations p. 385;515: 15 June 1954, Bishop, minute: significance of ‘Oversea service’ p. 388.

Ronald Hyam & Wm Roger Louis (eds.), The Conservative Government and the End of Empire1957–1964 (BDEEP Series, A, vol. 4, 2000)

Part 1: High Policy, Political and Constitutional Change1: 28 Jan 1957, Macmillan, Salisbury & Lennox-Boyd, minutes:

‘Future Constitutional Development in the Colonies’ pp.1–3;2: May 1957, Officials’ report, ‘Future constitutional development’, paras 91, 94–5, 104, 117–21,

123–4 pp.12–13, 15–17;13: 6 Oct 1959, FO note: ‘Anglo-American relations’, para 11 p.74;20: June 1959, FO print: ‘Africa, the next 10 years’, paras 65–96 pp.199–29;29: 25 May 1959, Macleod to Macmillan re Stirling memo pp.160–1;31: 29 Dec 1959, Macleod, minute to Macmillan, para (d) pp. 165–6;37: 6 Jan 1961, Cab CPC: ‘Colonial problems’, para on E Africa pp. 185–6;116: 10 April 1959, Lennox-Boyd, ‘Future policy in East Africa’, paras 6–10, 12 pp.373–7,

378–9;123: 12 Jan 1961, Macleod, minute to Watkinson (Defence) pp.401–2 (only);124: 5 Jan 1961, E African Governors’ conference, extracts: Renison’s remarks and Annex, para

2 pp.403–4, 405–6;139: 4 Feb 1964, Sir B. Trend, note for Cabinet Defence & Oversea Policy Committee, ‘Policy

implications…’, paras 1–10 pp.447–9;159: 11 June 1959, Cab conclusions on Hola Detention Camp pp.508–10;161: 17 Feb 1960, Macleod to Macmillan, brief for NKP meeting pp.511–12;162: 15 Dec 1960, Cab conclusions on Kenya land policy pp.512–13;163: 11 Jan 1961, Kilmuir, ‘The East African problem’ pp.513–15;164: 13–14 April 1961, Perth and Macleod, minutes on Kenyatta pp.515–17165: 26 April 1961, Macleod to Renison, ‘Our next moves’ (no annex) pp.517–18;167: 14 July 1961, Macleod to Renison, Constitutional timetable pp. 520–2;168: 9 Nov 1961, Cab conclusions on Kenyatta pp.520–2;169: 15 Nov 1961, Cab CPC: ‘The future of Kenya’ pp.523–6;170: 16 Nov 1961, Cab conclusions: Proposed constitutional conference pp. 526–7;171: 19 Dec 1961, Cab conclusions: Preparation of Conference pp. 528173: 6 Feb 1962, Maudling, Cabinet memorandum pp. 530–2;174: 8 Feb 1962, Cab conclusions: Timing of Kenya’s independence pp. 533–5;175: 20 Mar 1962, Cab conclusions: Compromise proposals pp. 535–7;176: 5 July 1962, Cab conclusions: Land settlement scheme pp. 537–8;178: 24 June 1963, Cab conclusions: Independence arrangements pp. 540–2;179: 22 Oct 1963, Cab conclusions: Independence settlement pp. 542–3;180: 21 Nov 1963, Cab conclusions: Land settlement pp. 543–5.

BDEEP total = 190 pages

Africa Bureau The future of East Africa: summary of the Report of the Royal Commission(London, 1955)

Fenner Brockway Outside the Right (London, 1963), pp. 46–62, 100–13.CPK Views of the Secretary of State…on Kenya’s Future (22 April 1959)Oliver Lyttelton The memoirs of Lord Chandos (London, 1962), pp. 393–407.Margery Perham Colonial sequence 1949–1969 (London, 1970):

Foreign Affairs 1951: ‘The British problem in Africa’ pp. 26–39;Times 28 Oct. 1952: ‘A Changing Continent’ pp.67–72;Times 31 Dec. 1954: Britain’s handling of Mau Mau pp. 100–01;Times 22, 23 April 1953: Struggle against Mau Mau pp. 108–15;New Commonwealth 5 Sept. 1955: Economics vs race pp. 122–8;Times 18 Mar 1957: Kenya after Mau Mau pp. 146–9;Listener 12 May 1960: Kenya: the decisive years pp. 200–06;Times 15 Mar 1961: White minorities in Africa pp. 222–3;Times 20 Feb. 1963: What place now for Kenya settlers? pp. 243–6;

112

Listener 21 Mar 1963: Kenya in travail pp. 247–53;[n.d.] 1964: Africa – continent of disillusion? pp. 260–2BBC 3rd programme, 14 Aug. 1969: Kenya revisited pp. 356–63.

J. M. Kariuki Mau Mau Detainee (London, 1963) Perham’s foreword pp. xi–xxi.

2. Colonial government policyCPK A plan to intensify African agriculture in Kenya (Nairobi, 1954) pp. 1–19.CPK J.C. Carothers The psychology of Mau Mau (Nairobi, 1954)CPK Report of the committee on African wages (Nairobi, 1954) pp. 137–53.CPK African land development in Kenya 1946–62 (Nairobi 1962) pp. 5–15.CPK Report of the commissioner appointed to investigate methods of selection of African

members of Legislative Council (Nairobi, 1956) pp. 1–28.GP, PP Record of proceedings and evidence in the Inquiry into the deaths of eleven Mau

Mau detainees at Hola camp in Kenya Cmnd. 795 (1959), pp. 83–101, 129–32, 197–200, 204–11.GB, PP Historical survey of the origins and growth of Mau Mau Cmnd. 1030 (May 1960), pp.

7–29, 262–76, 283–5, 301–8.CPK Report of a survey of child welfare problems in Kenya (1961), pp. 1–37.Tom Askwith From Mau Mau to Harambee (Cambridge 1995),

‘Some observations on the growth of unrest’ 24 Oct 1952, pp. 65–80;Address to European electors, September 1953, pp. 100–09.

Terence Gavaghan Of lions & dungbeetles (Ilfracombe 1999), pp. 140–65, 211–74

3. African politics in colonial KenyaD.L. Barnett and Karari Njama Mau Mau from within: autobiography and analysis of Kenya’s

peasant revolt (London, 1966), pp. 227–68, 333–60, 396–402, 406–07, 432–54, 456–76.CPK (restricted: unpublished) Kenya Regional Boundaries Commission 1962: Record of the Oral

Presentation, pp. 26–42, 56–68.Bildad Kaggia Roots of freedom: autobiography 1921–1963 (Nairobi, 1975), pp. 87–115, 160–96.J.M. Kariuki Mau Mau detainee (London, 1963), pp. 126–82.Maina wa Kinyatti (ed.) Thunder from the mountains: Mau Mau patriotic songs (London, 1980),

pp. 43–7, 81.Maina wa Kinyatti Kenya’s freedom struggle: the Dedan Kimathi papers (London, 1987), pp.

32–53.L.S.B. Leakey Mau Mau and the Kikuyu (London, 1952), pp. 86–104.L.S.B. Leakey Defeating Mau Mau (London, 1954), pp. 41–76.Tom Mboya The challenge of nationhood: a collection of speeches and writings (London, 1970),

pp. 24–33, 41–7.Henry Muoria Kenyatta ni muigwithania witu (Nairobi, 1947: typescript, in translation)Henry Muoria I, the Gikuyu and the white fury (Nairobi, 1994), pp. 85–123.Oginga Odinga Not yet uhuru (London, 1967), pp. 193–315.Christiana Pugliese Author, publisher and Gikuyu nationalist: the life and writings of Gakaara

wa Wanjau (Bayreuth and Nairobi, 1995), appendices:1) Interview with Gakaara wa Wanjau, 27 July 1990 pp. 135–49;2) ‘I want you to kill me’ ([1946] 1951) pp. 150–62.Montagu Slater The trial of Jomo Kenyatta (London, 1956) pp. 147–76, 205–44.Dorothy W. Smoker (ed.) Ambushed by love: God’s triumph in Kenya’s terror (Alresford, 1994),

pp. 128–31, 161–71, 175–7.Harry Thuku An autobiography (Nairobi, 1970), pp. 73–7.Gakaara wa Wanjau Mau Mau author in detention (Nairobi, 1988) 21 Oct. 1952–8 Feb. 1953; 5

April 1956–19 May 1960; Appendix 4, ‘The spirit of manhood…’ (1952), pp. 1–17, 175–212,227–43).

4. Immigrant politics in colonial KenyaDavid Goldsworthy (ed.) The Conservative government and the end of Empire 1951–1957 Part

I (BDEEP Series A, vol. 2, 1994)131: 17 Apr ’53, Lloyd to Liesching (DO): Nehru on Kenya pp. 329–30;133: 11 June 1953, Lyttelton, note: ‘Interview with Mr Nehru’ pp. 330–2;137: 20 Jan. 1955, Lennox-Boyd, Cab memo: Indians in colonies pp. 338–42.Michael Blundell So rough a wind (London, 1964), pp. 72–318.Elspeth Huxley Nellie: letters from Africa (London, 1980), 9 Oct 1952–7 June 1953: 18 Oct

1959–1 July 1965; pp. 178–91, 231–76.

113

5. Independent Kenya government policyRoK African socialism and its application to planning in Kenya (Nairobi, 1965).RoK Report of the mission on land consolidation and registration in Kenya 1965–66 (Nairobi,

1966), pp. 1–2, 5–26, 78–82.

6. Politics in independent KenyaC. Gertzel, M. Goldschmidt & D. Rothchild (eds.) Government and politics in Kenya (Nairobi, 1969)16 Aug. 1996 Voice of Kenya attacks Asian community p.25;6 July 1967 Moi (Vice President) charges European with racialism pp.26–27;7 July 1967 National Assembly: Africanization not Kenyanization pp. 29–31;9 Nov. 1966 Fitz de Sousa: ‘Asian leader looks at prejudice’ pp. 32–5;5 Oct. 1966 Speaker rules MPs must be free to air tribal grievances pp. 37–8;5 April 1967 Parliamentary debate on tribal clashes and stock theft pp. 38–41;14 Oct. 1966 Parliamentary debate on tribalism in employment pp. 41–51;6 Nov. 1966 J.M. Kariuki: From freedom fighter to businessman pp. 78, 82–3;17 Dec. 1967 Masinde Muliro: An African large scale farmer pp. 83–4;10 Oct. 1967 Dr Kiano warns against class war p. 85;(1963) Election manifesto: ‘What a KANU govt offers you’ pp. 127–9;26 Feb. 1965 Bildad Kaggia: Land and the dispossessed pp. 129–32;26 Mar. 1965 Parliamentary debate on land-ownership ceiling pp. 132–37;15 April 1966 Oginga Odinga: resignation statement pp. 143–46;15 April 1966 The governments rejects Odinga’s criticisms pp. 146–48;(1966) Kenya People’s Union Manifesto pp. 149–55;10 June 1966 KANU’s answer to KPU pp. 155–58.Jomo Kenyatta Suffering without bitterness: the founding of the Kenya nation (Nairobi, 1968)12 Dec. 1963 Independence day speech pp. 213–17;13 Aug. 1964 A one-party system pp. 226–31;11 Sept. 1964 Back to the land pp. 232–4;20 Oct 1964 Kenyatta day speech, 1964 pp. 240–5;Dec. 1964 Radio broadcast and inaugural speech pp. 251–9;1 June 1965 Madaraka day speech pp. 274–7;12 Dec. 1965 Jamhuri day speech pp. 294–7;26 April 1966 Radio broadcast: ‘speech on dissident activity’ pp. 302–07;20 Oct. 1967 Kenyatta day speech, 1967 pp. 340–8.Tom Mboya The challenge of nationhood (London, 1970), pp. 48–59, 68–103.Malcolm Macdonald Titans and others (London, 1972), pp. 239–80.

7 MiscellaneousUp to 100 pages of photo-copied documents held by Dr Lonsdale

For reference1. Decolonisation and general

*Judith M. Brown & Wm. Roger Louis (eds.) The twentieth century: Oxford history of the BritishEmpire Vol. IV (Oxford, 1999), chs. 7, 11, 14, 16, 23.

P.J. Cain & A.G. Hopkins British imperialism: crisis and deconstruction 1914–1990 (London,1993), Parts One and Four; ch. 9.

*John Darwin Britain and decolonisation: the retreat from empire in the post-war world (London,1988)

Frank Furedi The new ideology of imperialism (London, 1994)John Gallagher The decline, revival and fall of the British empire (Cambridge, 1982), pp. 141–53.David Goldsworthy Colonial issues in British politics 1945–1961: from ‘colonial development’

to ‘wind of change’ (Oxford, 1971).*J.D. Hargreaves Decolonization in Africa (London, 1988).W. D. McIntyre British decolonization 1946–1997 (London, 1998).

2. Colonial Kenya, political and generalGeorge Bennett and Carl Rosberg The Kenyatta election: Kenya 1960–1961 (Oxford, 1961)*George Bennett Kenya, a political history (London, 1963)Bruce Berman Control and crisis in colonial Kenya (London, 1990)N.S. Carey-Jones The anatomy of Uhuru (Manchester, 1996)Charles Chenevix Trench Men who ruled Kenya (London, 1993)

114

Anthony Clayton & Donald C. Savage Government and labour in Kenya 1895–1963 (London, 1974)Marion Forrester Kenya today: social prerequisites for economic development (The Hague,

1962)Elspeth Huxley & Margery Perham Race and politics in Kenya (London, 2nd edn., 1956)*Keith Kyle The Politics of the Independence of Kenya (Basingstoke, 1999)D.A. Low & Alison Smith (eds.) History of East Africa vol. III (London, 1976).Susanne D. Mueller ‘Political parties in Kenya: patterns of opposition and dissent 1919–1969’

(Princeton PhD., 1972)*B.A. Ogot & W.R. Ochieng’ (eds.) Decolonization and independence in Kenya 1940–1993

(London, 1995).K. Robinson & F. Madden (eds.) Essays in imperial government, presented to Margery Perham

(Oxford, 1963), chapter by McWilliamMakhan Singh History of Kenya’s Trade Union movement, to 1952 (Nairobi, 1969)Makham Singh 1952–56, crucial years of Kenya’s Trade Unions (Nairobi, 1980)Alison Smith and Mary Bull (eds.) Margery Perham and British rule in Africa (London, 1991),

pp. 159–84: ‘Dear Mr Mboya’David Throup Economic and social origins of Mau Mau (London, 1987)

3. Memoir and biography*Guy Arnold Kenyatta and the politics of Kenya (London, 1974)William Attwood The reds and the blacks (London, 1967)Peter Coss (ed.) The moral world of the law (Cambridge, 2000) ch. by LonsdaleGeorge Delf Jomo Kenyatta: towards truth about ‘the light of Kenya’ (London, 1961)Charles Douglas-Home Evelyn Baring: the last proconsul (London, 1978)Terence Gavaghan Of lions and dungbeetles: a ‘man in the middle’ of colonial administration in

Kenya (Ilfracombe, 1999)David Goldsworthy Tom Mboya: the man Kenya wanted to forget (London, 1982)Waruhiu Itote ‘Mau Mau’ general (Nairobi, 1967)Philip Murphy Alan Lennox-Boyd: a biography (London, 1999)Harold Macmillan Memoirs, iv: Riding the storm, 1956–59; v: Pointing the way, 1959–61; vi: At

the end of the day, 1961–63 (London, 1971, 1972, 1973)Reginald Maudling Memoirs (London, 1978)Tom Mboya Freedom and after (London, 1963)*Jeremy Murray-Brown Kenyatta (London, 1972)Cristiana Pugliese Author, publisher and Gikuyu nationalist: the life and writings of Gakaara wa

Wanjau (Bayreuth and Nairobi, 1995)Clyde Sanger Malcolm Macdonald: bringing an end to empire (Liverpool, 1995)Robert Shepherd Iain Macleod, a biography (London, 1994)Mary Turnbull Empire to commonwealth: Malcolm Macdonald 1901–1981 (London, 1995)

4. Insurgency and counter-insurgencyBruce Berman & John Lonsdale Unhappy Valley, Book Two (London, 1992)Susan Carruthers Winning hearts and minds: British government, the mass media and colonial

counter-insurgency 1944–60 (London, 1995)*Anthony Clayton Counter-insurgency in Kenya 1952–1960 (Nairobi, 1976)Robert B. Edgerton Mau Mau: an African crucible (London, 1989)Frank Furedi The Mau Mau war in perspective (London, 1989)Frank Furedi Colonial wars and the politics of Third World nationalism (London, 1994)Tabitha Kanogo Squatters and the roots of Mau Mau 1905–63 (London, 1987)Greet Kershaw Mau Mau from below (London, 1997)*Wunyabari O. Maloba Mau Mau and Kenya: an analysis of a peasant revolt (Bloomington and

Indianaopolis, 1993).Thomas R. Mockaitis British counterinsurgency 1919–1960 (London, 1990)B.A. Ogot (ed.), Politics and nationalism in Kenya (Nairobi, 1972), chs. 6 (Furley), 7 (Ogot), 12

(Kipkorir).D.H. Rawcliffe The struggle for Kenya (London, 1954)*Carl G. Rosberg & John Nottingham The myth of ‘Mau Mau’: nationalism in Kenya (New York,

1966)Mary Shannon ‘Rehabilitating the Kikuyu’, African Affairs 54 (1955)Mary Shannon ‘Rebuilding the social life of the Kikuyu”, African Affairs 56 (1957), pp. 272–84M.P.K. Sorrenson Land reform in the Kikuyu country (Nairobi, 1967).

115

5. Colonial and (in)dependent Kenya: the ‘Kenya debate’Alice Amsden International firms & labour in Kenya 1945–70 (London, 1971)Robert Bates Beyond the miracle of the market: the political economy of agrarian development

in Kenya (Cambridge, 1989)M.P. Cowen & R.W. Shenton Doctrines of development (London, 1996), ch. 6.D.K. Fieldhouse Black Africa 1945–1980: economic decolonization and arrested development

(London, 1986), Parts I & II, ch. 9 and pp. 163–73Andrew Hake African metropolis: Nairobi’s self-help city (London, 1977)Judith Heyer et al., Agricultural development in Kenya: an economic assessment (Nairobi, 1976),

ch. by SmithDavid Himbara Kenyan capitalists, the state & development (London, 1994)Gavin Kitching Class & economic change in Kenya (London, 1980), Part IIIChristopher Leo Land and class in Kenya (Toronto, 1984)*Colin Leys Underdevelopment in Kenya (London, 1975)Peter Marris & Anthony Somerset The African businessman: a study of entrepreneurship and

development in Kenya (London, 1971)Richard S. Odingo The Kenya highlands: land use and agricultural development (Nairobi,

1971)Hans Ruthenberg African agricultural production: development policy in Kenya 1952–1965

(Berlin & New York, 1966)Richard Sandbrook Proletarians and African capitalism: the Kenya case 1960–1972 (London, 1975)*Richard Sandbrook The politics of Africa’s economic stagnation (Cambridge, 1985)Sharon Stichter Migrant labour in Kenya: capitalism and the African response 1895–1975

(London, 1982)Robert Tignor Capitalism and nationalism at the end of Empire: state and business in decolo-

nizing Egypt, Nigeria and Kenya 1945–1963 (Princeton and Chichester, 1998)

6. Politics and society in independent KenyaJoel Barkan (ed.) Politics and public policy in Kenya and Tanzania (rev. ed., New York, 1984)Henry Bienen Kenya: the politics of participation and control (Princeton, 1974)John Carlsen Economic and social transformation in rural Kenya (Uppsala, 1980)*Cherry Gertzel The politics of independent Kenya 1963–68 (London, 1970)John Harbeson Nation building in Kenya (Evanston, 1973)Angélique Haugerud The culture of politics in modern Kenya (Cambridge, 1995)Arthur Hazelwood The economy of Kenya: the Kenyatta era (London, 1979)Geoff Lamb Peasant politics: conflict and development in Murang’a (Lewes, 1974)*David K. Leonard African successes: four public managers of Kenyan rural development

(Oxford, 1991), chs. 2–4M.G. Schatzberg (ed.) The political economy of Kenya (New York, 1987)David Throup & Charles Hornsby Multi-party politics in Kenya (Oxford, 1998)

7. Political minorities: ethnicity and raceGeorge Delf Asians in East Africa (London, 1963)*Richard Frost Race against time: human relations and politics in Kenya before independence

(London, 1978)Dharam P. Ghai (ed.) Portrait of a minority: Asians in East Africa (Nairobi & London, 1965)Robert G. Gregory South Asians in East Africa: an economic and social history 1890–1980

(Boulder & Oxford, 1993)*Paul Gurnham Quest for equality: Asian politics in East Africa 1900–1967 (New Delhi, 1993)

‘Religious communalism and Asian politics in Kenya’ (typescript 2001)J.F. Lipscomb White Africans (London, 1955)J.F. Lipscomb We built a country (London, 1956)Madatally Manji Memoirs of a biscuit baron (Nairobi, 1995)*Robert Miles Racism (London, 1989)David Parkin The cultural definition of political response: lineal destiny among the Luo (London,

1978)Paul B. Rich Race and empire in British politics (Cambridge, 1986)Donald Rothchild Racial bargaining in independent Kenya (London, 1973)Tom Spear & Richard Waller (eds.) Being Maasai (London, 1993)I. R. G. Spencer British immigration policy since 1939: the making of multi-racial Britain

(London, 1997)

116

Gary Wasserman Politics of decolonization: Kenya Europeans and the land issue 1960–1965(Cambridge, 1976)

8. Memory, myth and politicsRobert Buijtenhuijs Mau Mau twenty years after, the myth and the survivors (The Hague, 1973)*Marshall Clough Mau Mau memoirs: history, memory and politics(London, 1998)J. Robert Kurtz The Kenyan novel: urban obsessions, urban fears? (Oxford, 1998)David Maughan-Brown Land, freedom and fiction: ideology in Kenya (London, 1985)Ali A. Mazrui On heroes and uhuru-worship: essays on independent Africa (London, 1967)

ch. 2Ali A. Mazrui Violence and thought (London, 1969), chs. 5, 6, 10 and 13Ngugi wa Thiong’o Homecoming: essays on African and Caribbean literature, culture and poli-

tics (London, 1972)Ngugi wa Thiong’o Barrel of a pen: resistance to represssion in neo-colonial Kenya (London,

1983)Ngugi wa Thiong’o Decolonising the mind: the politics of language in African literature (London,

1986)Ngugi wa Thiong’o Moving the centre: the struggle for cultural freedom (London, 1993)Richard Werbner (ed.) Memory and the postcolony (London, 1998)

9. Gender, religion, and authorityInge Brinkman Kikuyu gender norms and narratives (Leiden, 1996)Edward Fasholé-Luke et al (eds.,) Christianity in independent Africa (London, 1978), ch. by

Lonsdale et alAdrian Hastings A history of African Christianity 1950–1975 (Cambridge, 1979)Joanna Lewis, Empire state-building: war & welfare in Kenya 1935–52 (Oxford, 2000)David Maxwell, with Ingrid Lawrie Christianity and the African Imagination (Leiden, 2002), ch.

by LonsdaleWambui Waiyaki Otieno Mau Mau’s daughter (London, 1998)Claire Robertson Trouble showed the way: women, men and trade in the Nairobi area 1890–1990

(Bloomington, 1997)Luise White The comforts of home: prostitution in colonial Nairobi (Chicago and London, 1990),

chs. 8 & 9

10. JournalismNegley Farson Last chance in Africa (London, 1949)Elspeth Huxley The sorcerer’s apprentice (London, 1948)Elspeth Huxley A new earth: an experiment in colonialism (London, 1960)Elspeth Huxley Forks and hope (London, 1964)

O. THE POLITICAL ECONOMY OF THATCHERISM, 1974–90

This is an exercise in very recent history, based on sources which are already in the public domain.It draws on contemporary tracts, pamphlets, periodical literature and reports of speeches to reconstitutea running debate about the macro-economic role of the state. This debate arguably began with MiltonFriedman’s influential restatement of ‘monetarism’ in 1967, but its real salience in British politics datesfrom 1974, when Sir Keith Joseph first challenged the ‘post-war consensus’. The election of MargaretThatcher as leader of the Conservative Party in 1975 made these free-market doctrines influential – andultimately eponymous. What did ‘Thatcherism’ really amount to? The crisis in Keynesian economicsis the other side of this picture. Had the Labour Government already abandoned Keynesian policies infavour of a monetarist approach after 1976? Thatcher’s own role in setting a new political agenda canbe traced at a policy-making level through memoirs and published diaries of the period; so can thepersonal tensions within her Government. Her broader success in locating a constituency for‘Thatcherism’ can be examined through electoral statistics and survey evidence. Here is the basis foran historical account of the record of her Government in implementing its economic strategy, notablythrough macro-economic management, fiscal changes, trade-union reform, privatization, the commu-nity charge and relations with the European Community.

Numbers will be restricted to 25 students chosen by ballot.

117

SourcesBBC1, Thatcher: the Downing Street Years, video (1993). [4 hours = 100]Tony Benn, Against the Tide: diaries, 1973–6 (1989), pp. 556–7, 575–6, 519–7, 611, 615–19,

661–79; Conflicts of Interest: diaries, 1977–80 (1990), pp. 196, 446–51; The End of an Era:diaries, 1980–90 (1993) pp. 34–5, 65–6, 69–70, 93–5, 115–18, 153–5, 166–9, 194, 242, 247,271–5. [65]

J. M. Buchanan, R. E. Wagner and John Burton, The Consequences of Mr Keynes, Institute ofEconomic Affairs (1978), pp. 13–27, 31–47, 79–86. [39]

David Butler & Dennis Kavanagh, The British General Election of 1979 (1980), pp. 24–5, 29,386–9, 395, 400–1, 430. [12]

David Butler & Dennis Kavanagh, The British General Election of 1983 (1984), pp. 15, 20–1, 296,301–2, 330–2, 339, 359, 364. [12]

David Butler & Dennis Kavanagh, The British General Election of 1987 (1988), pp. 6, 18–19, 247,283–4, 312–13, 319–23, 330, 355. [15]

David Butler & Dennis Kavanagh, The British General Election of 1992 (1992), pp. 2–3, 318–21.[4]

James Callaghan, Time and Chance (1987) pp. 413–28, 433–42, 462–5, 477, 511–28. [47]Alan Clark, Diaries (1993) pp. 22–3, 28–32, 57–9, 63–70, 131–6, 158–61, 167–70, 210–16, 220–7,

280–1, 285–90, 294–6, 342–69. [67]Tim Congdon, Reflections on Monetarism, Institute of Economic Affairs (1992), pp. 1–9, 14–21,

107–14, 118–25, 130–53, 155–66, 197–234. [115]Maurice Cowling (ed.), Conservative Essays (1978), pp. 1–24. [24]Walter Eltis and Peter Sinclair (eds.), Keynes and Economic Policy. The relevance of the General

Theory after fifty years (1988) pp. xv–xviii (N. Lawson), 428–47 (T. Burns). [69]Employment Gazette, HMSO, February 1991, pp. S2–6, S48, S57, S66. [8]Financial Times, 23 November 1987, p. 19, interview with the Prime Minister. [1]Milton Friedman, ‘The role of monetary policy’, American Economic Review, lviii (1968, 1–17;

also in The Optimum Quantity of Money (1969), pp. 95–110. [16]Ian Gilmour, Dancing with Dogma (1992), pp. 1–92. [92]Denis Healey, The Time of My Life (1989) pp. 372–84, 392–405, 428–35, 443, 467–73. [43]House of Commons, Debates, 5th series, vol. 968 (1979–80), cols. 235–63 (Budget statement by

Sir G. Howe, 12 June 1979);vol. 1000 (1980–1) cols. 757–83, 784–92 (Budget statement by Sir G. Howe, replies by M.Foot, J. Grimond, 10 Mar. 1981);6th series, vol. 129 (1987–8), cols. 993–1013 (Budget statement by N. Lawson, 15 Mar. 1988),cols. 1116–38 (speeches by J. Smith and J. Major);vol. 133 (1987–8), cols. 455–7, 463–5 (questions to the Chancellor and Prime Minister, 12 May1988);vol. 181 (1990–1), cols. 445–53 (speech by M. Thatcher, 22 Nov. 1990). [121]

House of Lords, Select Committee on Overseas Trade, Report, July 1985 (1984–5, 238–1), pp.7–21, 36–48. [28]

Geoffrey Howe, Conflict of Loyalty (1994), pp. 98–113, 126–32, 140–9, 155–64, 166–70, 181–92,199–209, 213–17, 230–4, 247–51, 253–7, 273–6, 448–58, 468–75, 535–41, 573–92, 603–5,641–51, 661–4, 697–703. [155]

T. W. Hutchison, Keynes versus the ‘Keynesians’, with commentaries by Lord Kahn and Sir AustinRobinson, Institute of Economic Affairs (1977), pp. 4–9, 21–37, 52–7. [28]

Roy Jenkins, European Diary, 1977–81 (1989), pp. 215, 355, 506, 518, 526–32, 540, 551, 553,581, 592–3, 606–7, 608–10, 625–6, 635, 650. [26]

Roy Jenkins, ‘Home thoughts from abroad’, the 1979 Dimbeleby Lecture, in Wayland Kennet(ed.), The Rebirth of Britain (1982) pp. 9–29. [21]

Roy Jenkins, A Life at the Centre (1991), pp. 367, 388–9, 425–6, 495–6, 521–2, 548–9, 564. [12]Christopher Johnson, The Economy under Mrs Thatcher, 1979–90 (1991), Appendix of statistical

tables, pp. 265–318. [54]Keith Joseph, Stranded on the Middle Ground: collected speeches, Centre for Policy Studies

(1976), pp. 9–18, 37–47, 57–80. [45]Nigel Lawson, The New Conservatism, Centre for Political Studies (1980), pp. 1–18. [18]Nigel Lawson, The View from No. 11 (1992), pp. 3–9, 13–19, 20–7, 33–8, 44–7, 55–7, 63–73,

76–85, 95–9, 101–2, 111–13, 127–9, 137–9, 195–6, 197–208, 250–3, 271–4, 279–82, 334–6,339–45, 365, 389–90, 413–22, 434–5, 448–57, 467–70, 478–80, 484–9, 497–508, 561–2,570–85, 628–35, 643–6, 660–8, 707–10, 731–3, 735–9, 783–6, 794–813, 830–8, 854–7,898–900, 907–10, 917–18, 928–36, 955–65, 975–94. [301]

118

The Reform of Personal Taxation, Cmnd 9756 (1986), foreword by the Chancellor of theExchequer + pp. 1–40, 75–7. [45]

Margaret Thatcher, The Downing Street Years (1993), pp. 5–15, 50–6, 92–108, 122–39, 147–53,264–7, 270–2, 281–5, 308–9, 536–7, 555–7, 560–6, 569–73, 625–7, 642–67, 672–6, 676–87,688–90, 691–705, 709–13, 715–18, 721–4, 727–8, 742–6, 846–58. [184]

Margaret Thatcher, The Path to Power (1995), pp. 141–2, 148–9, 152–4, 195–6, 221, 256–7,297–301, 413–17, 420–3, 565–7. [27]

The Times, 6 September 1974, pp. 14, 16, speech by Sir Keith Joseph at Preston; 30 March 1981,pp. 1, 15, letter by 364 economists. [4]

Treasury and Civil Service Committee, Monetary Policy, vol. i, Report, (HC 1980–1, 163–1), pp.xi–xxviii, xxx–xliii, cx–cxv. [37]

Alan Walters, Britain’s Economic Renaissance (1986), pp. 17–32, 35–44, 74–100, 118–19,125–52, 171–85. [94]

Hugo Young & Anne Sloman, The Thatcher Phenomenon (1986), pp. 9–11, 24–32, 40–51, 58–82,65–72, 132–42. [48]

[total pages 1950]

For referenceBBC 1, The Wilderness Years video (1995)K. Burk & A. Cairncross, Goodbye, Great Britain: the 1976 IMF Crisis (1991)D. Butler & D. Kavanagh, The British General Elections of 1979/1983/1987/1992 (1980–92)David Butler, Andrew Adonis and Tony Travers, Failure in British Government: the politics of

the poll tax (1994)John Campbell, Margaret Thatcher, vol 1: the grocer’s daughter (2001)David Coates, Labour in power? A study of the Labour governments, 1974–9 (1980)Richard Cockett, Thinking the Unthinkable: think-tanks and the economic counter-revolution,

1931–83 (1994)Christopher Collins (ed.), Margaret Thatcher: complete public statements, 1945–90 on CD-Rom

(2000)Ivor Crewe and Anthony King, SDP: the birth, life and death of the Social Democratic Party (1995)Edmund Dell, A Hard Pounding: politics and economic crisis, 1974–6 (1991)Andrew Denham and Mark Garnett, British Think-tanks and the Climate of Opinion (1998)Andrew Denham and Mark Garnett, Keith Joseph (2001)Bernard Donoughue, Prime Minister: the conduct of policy under Wilson and Callaghan (1987)Walter Eltis and Peter Sinclair (eds.), Keynes and Economic Policy. The relevance of the General

Theory after fifty years (1988)Andrew Gamble, The Free Economy and the Strong State (1988)Peter Hall, Governing the Economy (1986)Philip Gould, The Unfinished Revolution: how the Modernisers Saved the Labour Party (1998)Stuart Hall, The Hard Road to Renewal (1988)Christopher Harvie, Fool’s Gold: the story of North Sea Oil (1994)Hugh Heclo & Aaron Wildavsky, The Private Government of Public Money 2nd edn (1981)Peter Hennessy, Whitehall (1989)Peter Jenkins, Mrs Thatcher’s Revolution (1987)Christopher Johnson, The Economy under Mrs Thatcher, 1979–90 (1991)Dennis Kavanagh, Thatcherism and British Politics (1987)Denis Kavanagh, The Reordering of British Politics: politics after Thatcher (1997)D. Kavanagh & A. Seldon (eds.), The Thatcher Effect (1989)William Keegan, Mrs Thatcher’s Economic Experiment (1984)William Keegan, Mr Lawson’s Gamble (1989)Shirley Letwin, An Anatomy of Thatcherism (1992)John Major, The Autobiography (1999)David Marquand, The Unprincipled Society (1988)Jonathan Michie (ed.), The Economic Legacy, 1979–92 (1992)Lewis Minkin, The Contentious Alliance: trade unions and the Labour Party (1991)Jeremy Paxman, Friends in High Places: who runs Britain? (1990)James Prior, A Balance of Power (1986)P. Riddell, The Thatcher Era and its Legacy (2nd edn 1991)Anthony Seldon, John Major: a political life (1997)Anthony Seldon and Stuart Ball (eds.), Conservative Century: the Conservative Party since 1900

(1994)

119

Robert Skidelsky (ed) Thatcherism (1988)Philip Stephens, Politics and the Pound: the Conservatives’ struggle with sterling (1996)Colin Thain and Maurice Wright, The Treasury and Whitehall (1995)David Smith, From Boom to Bust: trial and error in British economic policy (1993)Hugo Young, One of Us: a biography of Margaret Thatcher (1989)Hugo Young, This Blessed Plot: Britain and Europe from Churchill to Blair (1998)

P: ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL HISTORY OF THE THIRD REICH

IntroductionThis Special Subject provides intensive coverage of the economic and social history of Nazi Germany.

The course aims to provide an introduction to some of the problems of studying the subject and to famil-iarize students with the development and current state of historical research. The bibliographies concen-trate on those books and articles which have proved important and influential in the changing histori-ography of the Third Reich and Germany’s economy and society.

The course is based on the study of original documents in translation. Historians have to learn toassess the reliability of documents by examining their internal consistency, checking them againstothers, and setting them in their historical context. They have to weigh up the relative merits of sourceswritten at the time and accounts, such as memoirs or interviews or court testimony, which rely onmemory. They have to consider when a document was written, by whom, and with what purpose, sinceall of these factors can affect the value and interpretation that can be placed on them. They have tobeware of forgeries and falsifications, manipulations and other distortions of the record. These tech-niques will be tested by requiring students to comment on extracts from the documents.

The Michaelmas Term will consist of a series of lectures followed by discussion. Teaching in theLent Term will be in classes, which will focus on student presentations based on the prescribed texts.There will be two sessions a week in each term. Each session will be timetabled to last for two hours.

Libraries and BooksThe main collection of documents used for the course, Jeremy Noakes and Geoffrey Pridham, Nazism

1919–1945 (4 vols.), is available as a a relatively inexpensive set of paperbacks from Exeter UniversityPress. The diaries of Victor Klemperer, from which a number of set documents are also drawn, are avail-able in two paperback volumes under the titles I Shall Bear Witness and To the Bitter End, publishedby Weidenfeld and Nicolson. Some of the other documentary collections used are out of print and willhave to be consulted in the University Library, your College library, the History Faculty Library, theSquire Law Library and the Marshall Library of Economics. There are two specialized libraries inLondon with very large collections of material on the Third Reich in English and German: the GermanHistorical Institute Library, at 17, Bloomsbury Square, and the Wiener Library, at 4, Devonshire Street.

LECTURES AND CLASSES

Michaelmas TermThere will be sixteen lectures in the Michaelmas Term. The lecturer’s initials are given in brackets aftereach topic.

1. German Society and the Seizure of Power (RJE)2. Germany’s Economic Crisis (AT)3. Law, Police and Terror (RJE)4. The Nazi Economic Recovery – Work Creation and Rearmament (AT)5. Propaganda and Culture (RJE)6. The Four Year Plan (AT)7. The Working Class (RJE)8. The Problems of Agriculture (AT)9. Women and the Family (RJE)

10. From Peace to War – The Riddle of the German War Economy 1939–1941 (AT)11. Antisemitism and the ‘Final Solution’ (RJE)12. Empire and Economic Exploitation (AT)13. The Diaries of Victor Klemperer (RJE)14. Big Business and the Third Reich – the Case of I. G. Farben (AT)15. German Society in Wartime (RJE)16. Albert Speer and the Nazi War Effort (AT)

120

Lent TermClasses will be based on student presentations and take place at 10 a.m on Tueedays and Thursdays,

starting on 17 January. The following subjects will be covered. The class leader is given in each casein brackets at the end.1. German Society and the Seizure of Power (RJE)2. Germany’s Economic Crisis (AT)3. Law, Police and Terror (RJE)4. The Nazi Economic Recovery – Work Creation and Rearmament (AT)5. Propaganda and Culture (RJE)6. The Four-Year Plan (AT)7. The Working Class (RJE)8. The Problems of Agriculture (AT)9. Women and the Family (RJE)

10. From Peace to War – The Riddle of the German War Economy 1939–1941 (AT)11. Antisemitism and the ‘Final Solution’ (RJE)12. Empire and Economic Exploitation (AT)13. The Diaries of Victor Klemperer (RJE)14. Big Business and the Third Reich – the Case of I. G. Farben (AT)15. German Society in Wartime (RJE)16. Albert Speer and the Nazi War Effort (AT)

BIBLIOGRAPHY

This reading list is organized around the same topics as in the lectures and classes. A full list of theprescribed documents for each topic is followed by a selective secondary bibliography that is notintended to be exhaustive, even as far as the English-language literature is concerned. It will be supple-mented by additional suggested reading at a later date.

General and Background ReadingPaul Madden, Adolf Hitler and the Nazi Epoch: An Annotated Bibliography of English-Language

Works on the Origins, Nature, and Structure of the Nazi State (1998) Ian Kershaw, Hitler 1889–1936: Hubris (1998) and Hitler 1936–1945: Nemesis (2000). Norbert Frei, National Socialist Rule in Germany. The Führer State 1933–1945 (1993)Detlev J. K. Peukert, Inside Nazi Germany: Conformity, Opposition and Racism in Everyday Life

(1989) Karl Dietrich Bracher, The German Dictatorship. The Origins, Structure and Consequences of

National Socialism (1971).Ian Kershaw, The Nazi Dictatorship: Problems and Perspectives of Interpretation (4th edition,

2000) Tim Kirk, The Longman Companion to Nazi Germany (1995) Richard Overy, The Penguin Historical Atlas of the Third Reich (1996) Michael Freeman, Atlas of Nazi Germany: A Political, Economic and Social Anatomy of theThird

Reich (1995)Fritz Fischer, From Kaiserreich to Third Reich: Elements of Continuity in Germany History

(1986). David Blackbourn and Geoff Eley, The Peculiarities of German History (1984), Richard J. Evans, Rethinking German History (1987), 93–124. Geoff Eley, From Unification to Nazism (1986), 254–82Jürgen Kocka, ‘German History before Hitler: the Debate about the German Sonderweg’, Journal

of Contemporary History 23 (1988), 3–16. Robert Moeller, ‘The Kaiserreich Recast? Continuity and Change in Modern German

Historiography’, Journal of Social History 17 (1984), 655–83.Richard J. Evans, Rereading German History (1997), 12–23. Jill Stephenson, ‘The rise of the Nazis: Sonderweg or spanner in the works?’, in Mary Fulbrook

(ed.), 20th-century Germany: Politics, Culture and Society 1918–1990 (2001), 77–98

121

1. German Society and the ‘Seizure of Power’

Set documentsJeremy Noakes and Geoffrey Pridham (eds.), Nazism 1919–1945, Vol. I: The Rise to Power,

1919–1934 (1998 edn.), docs. 3 (pp. 14–16), 32 (p. 50), 42–43 (pp. 59–61), 46 (pp. 66–67),52–53 (pp. 75–76), 66 (pp. 94–95), 76–79 (pp. 106–109), 82 (pp. 115–116), 99–102 (pp.148–154), 111 (pp. 163–164), 118 (p. 172), 136 (p. 187); Jeremy Noakes and GeoffreyPridham (eds.), Nazism 1919–1945, Vol. II: State, Economy and Society 1933–1939 (2000edn.), doc. 152–155 (pp. 31–38).

Secondary readingAnthony. Nicholls, Weimar and the Rise of Hitler (4th edn,., 2000)Jane Caplan, ‘The Rise of National Socialism 1919–1933’, in Gordon Martel (ed.), Modern

Germany Reconsidered (1992), 117–139Richard Bessel, ‘Why did the Weimar Republic Collapse?’, in Ian Kershaw (ed.), Weimar: Why

did German Democracy Fail? (1990), 120–152Hans Mommsen, The Rise and Fall of Weimar Democracy (1996)Peter Stachura (ed.), The Nazi Machtergreifung (1983) William S. Allen, The Nazi Seizure of Power (2nd edn., 1984)Anthony McElligott, Contested City: Municipal Politics and the Rise of Nazism in Altona

1917–1937 (1998)Claus-Christian W. Szejnmann, Nazism in Central Germany: The Brownshirts in “Red” Saxony

(1999) Thomas Childers, The Nazi Voter (1983) Michael Kater, The Nazi Party (1983) Detlev Mühlberger, Hitler’s Followers (1991) Thomas Childers (ed.), The Formation of the Nazi Constituency (1986)Peter H. Merkl, Political Violence under the Swastika (1975) Peter H. Merkl, The Making of a Stormtrooper (1980)

2. Germany’s Economic Crisis

Set documents The Economist July 18 1931 pp. 103–5, 119–120; July 25 1931, pp. 171–172, 177–178; Sep 26 1931,

pp. 547–8, pp. 562–3; Oct 3 1931, pp. 613–4; Oct 31 1931, pp. 806–7; “Report of the SpecialAdvisory Committee of the B.I.S. December 1931” pp. 226–234 in S.B. Clough, T. Moodie andC. Moodie eds. Economic History of Europe: Twentieth Century (London, 1969); The Economist,Dec 12 1931, p. 1115, 1122–1123; Dec 26 1931, pp. 1230–1231; Jan 23 1932, pp. 173–174; Feb27 1932, pp. 452–453; Mar 12 1932, pp. 574–575; Apr 23 1932, pp. 900–901; Jun 4 1932, p.1223–1225, 1237–8; “German Unemployment and the Dole” pp. 247–249 in S.B. Clough, T.Moodie and C. Moodie eds. Economic History of Europe: Twentieth Century (London, 1969);The Economist Sep 17 1932, p. 493; Oct 15 1932, p. 688; Dec 24 1932, p. 1185–1186; J. Noakesand G. Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945 (NP), I, Doc 26, 42, 43; NP II, Doc 176–178; InternationalMilitary Tribunal, Nuremberg, 1946: Nazi Conspiracy and Aggression Vol. VII p. 513–4Translation of Document EC 457 Schacht to Hitler 29th August 1932.; NP I, Doc, 65, Doc 66,Doc 82, Doc. Trials of War Criminals Before the Nuernberg Military Tribunals Under ControlCouncil Law No. 10 Vol. VII, pp. 536–540, pp. 544–546, pp. 555–556, pp. 565–568.

Secondary readingD. Abraham, The Collapse of the Weimar Republic (1981) and the debate in Central European

History 17 (1984)T. Balderston, “The beginning of the depression in Germany: investment and the capital market”

Economic History Review (1983)T. Balderston, Economics and Politics in the Weimar Republic (2002)K. Borchardt, Perspectives on Modern German Economic History (1991)Kruedener, J. Freiherr von (ed.), Economic Crisis and Political Collapse: The Weimar Republic

1924–1933 (1990)R.J. Evans and D. Geary (eds.), The German Unemployed (1987)N. Ferguson, “The German interwar economy” in M. Fulbrook ed. German History since 1800 (1997)G. Garvy, “Keynes and the Economic Activists of pre-Hitler Germany”, Journal of Political

Economy 83 (1975), 391–405

122

D. Geary, “The Indusrial Elite and the Nazis in the Weimar Republic” in P. Stachura (ed.), TheNazi Machtergreifung (1983), 85–100.

H. James, The German Slump. Politics and Economics 1924–1936 (1986)I. Kershaw ed., Weimar: Why did German Democracy Fail? (1990)D.P. Silverman, Hitler’s Economy. Nazi Work Creation Programs, 1933–1936 (Cambridge,

Mass. 1998)P. Stachura, ed., Unemployment and the Great Depression in Weimar Germany (1987)H.A. Turner, German Big Business and the rise of Hitler (1985)

2. Law, Police and Terror

Set documentsNoakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, documents 343–90 (Vol. II, 277–326), 444–459 (Vol.

II, pp. 384–99); document 1168 (Vol. IV, pp. 391–2)

Secondary readingHelmut Krausnick et al., Anatomy of the SS State (1968)Ernst Kohn Bramsted, Dictatorship and Political Police (1945, reprinted 1976).Heinz Höhne, The Order of the Death’s Head (1972) Gerald Reitlinger, The SS: Alibi of a Nation 1922–1945 (2nd edn., 1981)Robert L. Koehl, The Black Corps: The Structure and Power Struggles of the Nazi SS (1983). George C. Browder, Foundations of the Nazi Police State (1990)George C. Browder, Hitler’s Enforcers: The Gestapo and the SS Security Service in the Nazi

Revolution (1996). Friedrich Zipfel, ‘Gestapo and SD: A Sociographic Profile of the Organisers of the Terror’, in S.

Larsen (ed.), Who were the Fascists? (1980)Michael T. Allen, ‘The Banality of Evil Reconsidered: SS Mid-Level Managers of Extermination

through Work’, Central European History 30 (1997), 253–94Gunnar C. Böhnert, ‘An Analysis of the Age and Education of the SS Führerkorps, 1925–1939’,

Historical Social Research 12 (1979), 4–17Lawrence Stokes, ‘Otto Ohlendorf, the Sicherheitsdienst and Public Opinion in Nazi Germany’,

in George L. Mosse (ed.), Police Forces in History (1975), 211–30. Robert Gellately, The Gestapo and German Society: Enforcing Racial Policy 1933–1945 (1990) Robert Gellately, Backing Hitler. Consent and Coercion in Nazi Germany (2001). Eric A. Johnson, Nazi Terror: The Gestapo, Jews, and Ordinary Germans (2000) Klaus-Michael Mallmann and Gerhard Paul, ‘Omniscient, Omnipotent, Omnipresent? Gestapo,

Society and Resistance’, in David F. Crew (ed.), Nazism and German Society 1933–1945(1994), 166–96.

Ingo Müller, Hitler’s Justice (1991). Richard J. Evans, Rituals of Retribution: Capital Punishment in Germany 1600–1987 (1996),

Chapters 14–16William Sweet, ‘The Volksgerichtshof 1934–45’, Central European History 46 (1974), 215–39Michael Stolleis, The Law under the Swastika (1998) Richard F. Wetzell, Inventing the Criminal. A History of German Criminology, 1880–1945

(2000), esp. chapters 6 and 7Nikolaus Wachsmann, ‘”Annihilation through Labor”: The Killing of State Prisoners in the Third

Reich’, Journal of Modern History September 1999Nikolaus Wachsmann, ‘From Indefinite Confinement to Extermination: “Habitual Criminals” in

the Third Reich’, in Robert Gellately and Nathan Stoltzfus (ed.), Social Outsiders in NaziGermany (2001), 165–90.

E. G. Reiche, ‘From “Spontaneous” to “Legal” Terror: SA, police and the judiciary inNuremberg’, European Studies Review 9 (1979), 237–64.

David Hackett (ed.), The Buchenwald Report (1996) Gordon J. Horwitz, In the Shadow of Death. Living Outside the Gates of Mauthausen (1991) Rudolf Hoess, Commandant of Auschwitz (1959)James J. Weingartner, ‘Law and Justice in the Nazi SS: The Case of Konrad Morgen’, Central

European History 16 (1983), 276–95Michael Burleigh and Wolfgang Wippermann, The Racial State. Germany 1933–1945 (1991)Robert Gellately and Nathan Stoltzfus (eds.), Social Outsiders in Nazi Germany (2001)Michael Berenbaum (ed.), A Mosaic of Victims: Non-Jews Persecuted and Murdered by the Nazis

(1990)

123

Michael Burleigh (ed.), Confronting the Nazi Past (1996) Raymond Plant, The Pink Triangle: The Nazi War Against Homosexuals (1986)Rüdiger Lautmann, The Persecution of Homosexuals in Nazi Germany: Sexual Politics in a

Fascist State (1990)George L. Mosse, Nationalism and Sexuality. Respectability and Abnormal Sexuality in Modern

Europe (1985). Geoffrey J. Giles, ‘“The Most Unkindest Cut of All”: Castration, Homosexuality, and Nazi

Justice’, Journal of Contemporary History 27 (1992), 41–62Rüdiger Lautmann, ‘The Pink Triangle: The Persecution of Homosexual Males in Concentration

Camps in Nazi Germany’, Journal of Homosexuality 6 (1980–81), 141–60. Wolfgang Ayass, ‘Vagrants and Beggars in Hitler’s Reich’, in Richard J. Evans (ed.), The German

Underworld: Deviants and Outcasts in German History (1988), 210–37. Jeremy Noakes, ‘Social Outcasts in the Third Reich’, in Richard Bessel (ed.), Life in the Third

Reich (1987), 83–96. Reiner Pommerin, ‘The Fate of Mixed-Blood Children in Germany’, German Studies Review 5

(1982), 315–23. Charlotte Beradt, The Third Reich of Dreams (1985)

4. The Nazi Economic Recovery:Work-Creation and Rearmament

Set documentsNoakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, I, doc. 87; Noakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945,

II, doc. 244–248; Weekly report of the IfK Vol. 7 (1934): pp. 45–47; pp. 53–56; Supplementto April 18 1934 pp. 1–4; pp. 77–82; Supplement to May 16 1934 pp. 1–4; The EconomistAugust 10 1935, pp. 271–272; Aug. 17 1935, pp. 316–317; August 31 1935, p. 421; IfK Weeklyreport 1935 vol. 8: pp. 45–47; pp. 65–67; Supplement August 22 1935 pp. 1–4; SupplementSep 4 1935 pp. 1–4; IfK Weekly report vol. 9 (1936): Supplement to April 22 (1936) pp. 1–4;IfK Weekly report vol. 10 (1937): Supplement to Feb 24 1937 pp. 1–6; pp. 75; N&P, II, Doc190–191; Weekly report of the IfK Vol. 7 (1934): Supplement to April 11 1934 pp. 1–4; pp.73–74; pp. 99–101; Supplement to Oct 24 1934 pp. 1–4; Supplement to Oct 31 1934 pp. 1–4;Weekly report of the IfK Vol. 8 (1935): Supplement August 7 1935, pp. 1–4; pp. 77–79; N&P,II, Doc, 194; The Economist May 12 1934, p. 1025; June 23 1934, p. 1374, pp. 1378–9; Aug11 1934, pp. 264–5; Sep 15 1934, pp. 484–5; N&P, II, Doc 177, Doc 179–181, Doc 192–193;N&P, III, Doc. 470–477; Nazi Conspiracy and Aggression Vol. III, p. 827–830; TheEconomist August 10 1935 pp. 280–281.

Secondary readingW. Abelshauser, “Germany: guns, butter and economic miracles” in M. Harrison, The Economics

of World War II (1998)F. Baerwald, “How Germany reduced unemployment” American Economic Review (1934)A. Barkai, Nazi Economics: Ideology, Theory and Policy (1990)C. Bresciani Turroni, ‘The Multiplier in Practice some Results of Recent German Experience’

Review of Economic Statistics (1938)C. Buchheim, “The Upswing of German Industry in the Thirties” in C. Buchheim and R. Garside

(eds.), After the Slump. Industry and Politics in 1930s Britain and Germany (2000)B.A. Carroll, Design for Total War: Arms and Economcis in the Third Reich (1968)R. Cohn, “Fiscal Policy in Germany during the Great Depression” Explorations in Economic

History 29 (1992), 318–342J.A. Garraty “The New Deal, National Socialism and the Great Depression” American Historical

Review 78 (1973)L. Grebler “Work-Creation Policy in Germany 1932–5” Part I and II International Labour Review

35 (1937)C.W. Guillebaud, The Economic Recovery in Germany (London, 1939)E.L. Homze, Arming the Luftwaffe (1976)H. James “Innovation and conservatism in economic recovery: the alleged Nazi recovery of the

1930s” in T. Childers and J. Caplan, Reevaluating the Third Reich (New York, 1993), pp.114–138

C. Lurie, Private Investment in a Controlled Economy. Germany 1933–1939 (1947)K. Mandelbaum, “An Experiment in Full Employment: Controls in the German Economy

1933–1938” in Oxford University institute of Statistics, The Economcis of Full Employment(London, 1944)

124

R.J. Overy, The Nazi Economic Recovery (Cambridge, 1996)D.P. Silverman, Hitler’s Economy. Nazi Work Creation Programs, 1933–1936 (Cambridge,

Mass. 1998)R.J. Overy, War and Economy in the Third Reich (Oxford, 1994), Chapters 1 and 2 A. Ritschl, “Deficit Spending in the Nazi Recovery, 1933–1938: A Critical Reassessment”

(Working paper available at the author’s web-site)H. Schacht, Accounts Settled (London, 1949)G. Stolper, The German Economy. 1870 to the Present (1940)G. Spencely “R.J. Overy and the Motorisierung: a comment” Economic History Review 32 (1979)

and reply by OveryM.Y. Sweezy, The Structure of the Nazi Economy (1941)H.E. Volkmann “The National Socialist Economy in Preparation for War” in W. Deist et al

Germany and the Second World War Vol. 1 (1990)

5. Propaganda and Culture

Set documentsThe set documents are: Noakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, documents 266–295 (Vol. 2,

181–221), 435–443 (Vol. II, pp. 374–80), 460–466 (Vol. II, pp. 399–404).

Secondary readingDavid Welch, The Third Reich: Politics and Propaganda (1993)A. Steinweis, Art, Ideology and Economics in Nazi Germany: The Reich Chambers of Music,

Theatre and Visual Arts (1993).Z. A. B. Zeman, Nazi Propaganda (1960). Ernst Kohn Bramstedt, Goebbels and National Socialist Propaganda (1965) Reuben Herzstein, The War that Hitler Won (1979) J. W. Baird, The Mythical World of Nazi Propaganda (1974). David Welch (ed.), Nazi Propaganda: The Power and the Limitations (1983 Brandon Taylor and Wilfried van der Will (eds.), The Nazification of Art: Art, Design, Music,

Architecture and Film in the Third Reich (1990)Ian Kershaw, The ‘Hitler Myth’. Image and Reality in the Third Reich (1987). Louis Lochner, The Goebbels Diaries (1948)Helmut Heiber, The Early Goebbels Diaries (1962)Hugh Trevor-Roper, The Goebbels Diaries: The Last Days (1978) Fred Taylor, The Goebbels Diaries 1939–1941 (1982)Siegfried Kracauer, From Caligari to Hitler (1947). David Welch, Propaganda and the German Cinema 1933–1945 (1983) Marcus Phillips, ‘The Nazi Control of the German Film Industry’, Journal of European Studies

1961, 37–68, Marcus Phillips, ‘The German Film Industry and the New Order’, in Peter Stachura (ed.), The

Shaping of the Nazi State (1978), 257–81. D. Weinberg, ‘Approaches to the Study of Film in the Third Reich: A Critical Appraisal’, Journal

of Contemporary History 19 (1984), 105–26. Peter Adam, The Arts of the Third Reich (1992) Berthold Hinz, Art in the Third Reich (1979). Jonathan Petropoulos, Art as Politics in the Third Reich (1996) David Brett (ed.), Art and Power: Europe under the Dictators (1995)Hildegard Brenner, ‘Art in the Political Power Struggle of 1933 and 1934’, in Hajo Holborn (ed.),

Republic to Reich. The Making of the Nazi Revolution (1972), 395–434Glenn R. Cuomo (ed.), National Socialist Cultural Policy (1995) Stephanie Barron (ed.), Degenerate Art: The Fate of the Avant-Garde in Nazi Germany (1991) Alan E. Steinweis, ‘The Nazi Purge of German Artistic and Cultural Life’, in Robert Gellately

and Nathan Stoltzfus (eds.) Social Outsiders in Nazi Germany (2001), 99–116Barbara McCloskey, George Grosz and the Communist Party: Art and Radicalism in Crisis,

1918 to 1936 (1997) Lynn Nicholas, The Rape of Europa (1994) Jonathan Petropoulos, The Faustian Bargain: The Art World in Nazi Germany (2000) R. Taylor, The Word in Stone: The Role of Architecture in National Socialist Ideology (1974) Jochen Thies, ‘Nazi Architecture’ in Welch (ed.), Nazi Propaganda, 45–64

125

Albert Speer, Inside the Third Reich (1971).Gitta Sereny, Albert Speer: His Battle with Truth (1995). Elaine Hochman, Architects of Fortune: Mies van der Rohe and the Third Reich (1989).Barbara Miller Lane, Architecture and Politics in Germany, 1919–1945 (1968) Michael Kater, The Twisted Muse. Musicians and their Music in the Third Reich (Oxford, 1997) Erik Levi, Music in the Third Reich (1994)Michael Kater, Different Drummers: Jazz in the Culture of Nazi Germany (1992) J. M. Ritchie, German Literature under National Socialism (1983)

6. The Four Year Plan

Set documentsThe Economist, August 24 1935, pp. 366, p. 373; Sept. 14 1935, p. 506, p. 514; IMT, Nazi

Conspiracy and Aggression Vol. VII pp. 391–394 Letter from Schacht to War Minister 24.December 1935; IMT Nazi Conspiracy and Aggression Vol. III, 1301 PS excerpts: pp.871–873 , pp. 878–884; IMT Nazi Conspiracy and Aggression Vol. III 1301 Ps excerpt pp.892–895; NP, II, Doc. 185, 186; Trials of War Criminals Before the Nuernberg MilitaryTribunals Under Control Council Law No. 10 Vol. VII, NI–051 pp. 814–817; IMT, NaziConspiracy and Aggression Vol. VII L–111 pp. 881–883; Trials of War Criminals Before theNuernberg Military Tribunals Under Control Council Law No. 10 Vol XII , pp. 474–479;ibid., Pleiger testimony, pp. 630–648; IMT, Nazi Conspiracy and Aggression Vol. VII, pp.567–575; ibid., pp. 552–564; ibid., pp. 589–602; IMT, Nazi Conspiracy and Aggression Vol.VIII pp. 221–236; Trials of War Criminals Before the Nuernberg Military Tribunals UnderControl Council Law No. 10 Vol VII, pp.874–877, pp. 890–893, pp. 902–908

Secondary readingW. Deist, The Wehrmacht and German Rearmament (Toronto, 1981), Chapters 3–5P. Hayes, Industry and Ideology (1987)T.W. Mason, “The Primacy of Politics – politics and Economics in National Socialist Germany”

in S. Woolf ed. The Nature of Fascism (1968)F. Neumann, Behemoth. The structure and practice of national socialism 1933–1944 (1941)RJ . Overy, Goering. The “iron man” (1984)R. Overy, War and Economy in the Third Reich (1994), Chapters 3 & 4A.Schweitzer, Big Business in the Third Reich (1964)A.E. Simpson, “The Struggle for Control of the German Economy 1936–7” Journal of Modern

History (1959)Alfred. Sohn-Rethel Economy and Class Structure of German Fascism (1978)

7. The Working Class

Set documentsNoakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, documents 219–228, 233–243, 245–247, 249–255,

257–263 (Vol. 2, 133–180)

Secondary readingDavid Schoenbaum, Hitler’s Social Revolution (1966)Ian Kershaw, Popular Opinion and Political Dissent in the Third Reich (1983) Detlev J. K. Peukert, Inside Nazi Germany (1987)Richard Bessel, ‘Living with the Nazis: Some Recent Writing on the Social History of the Third

Reich’, European History Quarterly 14 (1984), 211–20James J. Sheehan, ‘National Socialism and German Society: Reflections on Recent Research’,

Theory and Society 13 (1984), 851–67Jeremy Noakes, ‘Nazism and revolution’, in N. O’Sullivan (ed.), Revolutionary Theory and

Political Reality (1983), 73–100. Hartmut Berghoff, ‘Did Hitler create a new society? Continuity and change in German social

history before and after 1933’, in Panikos Panayi (ed.), Weimar and Nazi Germany:Continuities and Discontinuities (2000), 74–104.

Gunnar C. Boehnert, ‘The Third Reich and the Problem of the Social Revolution’, in Volker R.Berghahn and Martin Kitchen (eds.), Germany in the Age of Total War (1981)

Richard Bessel (ed.), Life in the Third Reich (1987)

126

Conan Fischer, Stormtroopers: A Social, Economic and Ideological Analysis 1919–1935 (1983)Richard Bessel, Political Violence and the Rise of Nazism (1984) Conan Fischer, ‘Class Enemies or Class Brothers? Communist-Nazi Relations in Germany

1929–1933’, European History Quarterly 15 (1985), 259–80,Detlev Mühlberger, Hitler’s Followers (1991)Conan Fischer, The German Communists and the Rise of Nazism (1991). Conan Fischer (ed.), The Rise of National Socialism and the Working Classes in Weimar Germany

(1996).Donna Harsch, German Social Democracy and the Rise of Nazism (1993)Ben Fowkes, Communism in Germany under the Weimar Republic (1984)Eric D. Weitz, Creating German Communism, 1890–1990: From Popular Protests to Socialist

State (1997)Eve Rosenhaft, Beating the Fascists? The German Communists and Political Violence

1929–1933 (1983). F.L.Carsten, The German Workers and the Nazis (Aldershot, 1995),Tim Mason Nazism, Fascism and the Working Class. Essays by Tim Mason (ed. Jane Caplan,

1995)Tim Mason, Social Policy in the Third Reich: The Working Class and the “National

Community”(Ed. Jane Caplan, 1993). Alf Lüdtke, ‘The “Honor of Labor”: Industrial Workers and the Power of Symbols under National

Socialism’, in David Crew (ed.), Nazism and German Society 1933–1945 (1994), 67–140 Tilla Siegel, ‘Wage Policy in Nazi Germany’, Politics and Society 14 (1985), 1–51Tilla Siegel, ‘Rationalizing Industrial Relations: A Debate on the Control of Labor in German

Shipyards in 1941’, in Thomas Childers and Jane Caplan (eds.), Reevaluating the Third Reich(1993), 139–60.

Bernard Bellon, Mercedes in Peace and War. German Automobile Workers 1903–1945 (1990) Ulrich Herbert, ‘”The Real Mystery in Germany”: The German Working Class during the Nazi

Dictatorship’, in Michael Burleigh (ed.), Confronting the Nazi Past: New Debates on ModernGerman History (1996), 23–36

Detlev J. K Peukert, ‘Working-Class Resistance: Problems and Options’, in David Clay Large(ed.), Contending With Hitler. Varieties of German Resistance in the Third Reich (1991),35–48.

Alf Lüdtke, ‘The Appeal of Exterminating “Others”: German Workers and the Limits ofResistance’, in Michael Geyer and John W. Boyer (eds.), Resistance against the Third Reich1933–1990 (1994), 53–74

Alan Merson, Communist Resistance in Nazi Germany (1985)William Sheridan Allen, ‘Social Democratic Resistance Against Hitler and the European

Tradition of Underground Movements’, in Francis R. Nicosia and Lawrence D. Stokes (eds.),Germans Against Nazism: Nonconformity, Opposition and Resistance in the Third Reich(1990), 191–204

Stefan Berger, ‘The SPD’, in Panikos Panayi (ed.), Weimar and Nazi Germany: Continuities andDiscontinuities (2000), 273–992’

Erich Matthias, ‘The Downfall of the Old Social Democratic Party in 1933’, in Hajo Holborn(ed.), Republic to Reich: The Making of the Nazi Revolution (1973), 51–108.

8. The Problems of Agriculture

Set documents Noakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, II, docs 208–218.; Gustavo Corni and Horst Gies, Blut

und Boden. Rassenideologie und Agrarpolitik im Staat Hitlers (1994), pp. 111–112, pp.116–117, p. 142, pp. 162–4, pp. 169–170, pp. 175–185. (Translations to be provided by DrTooze); IfK Weekly Report vol. 7 (1934): Supplement April 25 1934 pp. 1–4; pp. 93–94;Supplement Nov 7 1934; IfK Weekly Report vol. 8 (1935): Supplement June 26 1935; pp.75–6l; IfK Weekly Report vol. 9 (1936): pp. 34–36, pp. 55–56, pp. 101–3; IfK Weekly Reportvol. 10 (1937): Supplement Feb 10 1937 pp. 1–4; Supplement Aug 25 1937 pp. 1–4; IfKWeekly Report vol. 11 (1938): pp. 83–84; pp. 89–90; IfK Weekly Report vol. 12 (1939): pp.51–53; Economist June 26 1939 pp. 710–711

127

Secondary readingG. Corni, Hitler and the Peasants: Agrarian Policy in the Third Reich (1990)J.E. Farquharson, The Plough and the Swastika (1976)I. Kershaw, Popular Opinion and Political Dissent in the Third Reich. Bavaria 1933–1945

(1983),Chapters 1 and &C. Lovin, “Farm Women in the Third Reich” Agricultural History (1986)W. Rinderle and B. Norling, The Nazi Impact on a German village (1993)David Schoenbaum, Hitler’s Social Revolution (1966) T. Tilton, Nazism, neo-Nazism and the Peasantry (1975)

9. Women and the Family

Set documentsNoakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, documents 296–300, 302–328, 330–342 326–342 (Vol.

2, 222–276), 716–61, 764–9 (Vol. 3, pp. 389–440).

Secondary readingUte Frevert, Women in German History (1988)Jill Stephenson, Women in Nazi Society (1975). David Schoenbaum, Hitler’s Social Revolution (1966) Tim Mason, ‘Women in Nazi Germany’, in his essay collection Nazism, Fascism and the Working

Class. Leila Rupp, ‘Mothers of the Volk: The Image of Women in Nazi ideology’, Signs 3 (1977) 362–79Leila Rupp,‘”I Don’t Call That Volksgemeinschaft” :Women, Class and War in Nazi Germany’,

in C. Berkin and C. Lovett (eds.), Women, War and Revolution (1980), 37–53Carola Sachsse, ‘A Flow of People and a Flow of Goods: Factory Family Policy at Siemens,

1918–1945’, International Journal of Political Economy 18 (1988), 65–81Claudia Koonz, Mothers in the Fatherland (1987) Gisela Bock, review of Koonz, in Bulletin of the German Historical Institute London XI (1989),

16–24. Gisela Bock, ‘Racism and sexism in Nazi Germany; motherhood, compulsory sterilization and

the state’, Signs, 8 (1983), 400–421, reprinted in Renate Bridenthal, Atina Grossmann andMarion Kaplan (eds.), When Biology Became Destiny: Women in Weimar and Nazi Germany(1984), 271–96

Gisela Bock,‘Antinatalism, maternity and paternity in National Socialist racism’, in Gisela Bockand Pat Thane (eds.), Maternity and Gender Policies: Women and the Rise of the EuropeanWelfare States, 1880s–1950s (1991), 233–55.

Atina Grossmann, ‘Feminist debates about women and National Socialism’, Gender and History3 (1991), 350–58.

Alison Owings, Frauen. German Women Recall the Third Reich (1993) Lisa Pine, Nazi Family Policy 1933–1945 (1997)Gabrielle Czarnowski, ‘”The Value of Marriage for the Volksgemeinschaft”: Policies towards

Women and Marriage under National Socialism’, in Richard Bessel (ed.), Fascist Italy andNazi Germany: Comparisons and Contrasts (1996), 94–112,

Jill Stephenson, ‘Women, Motherhood and the Family in the Third Reich’, in Michael Burleigh(ed.), Confronting the Nazi Past (196), 167–83

F. Kudlien, ‘The German Response to the Birth Rate Problem during the Third Reich’, Continuityand Change 5 (1990), 225–47

Jill Stephenson, ‘Reichsbund der Kinderreichen: The League of Large Families in the PopulationPolicy of Nazi Germany’, European Studies Review 9 (1979), 350–75.

C. Clay and M. Leapman, Master Race: The Lebensborn Experiment in nazi Germany (1996). Atina Grossmann, Reforming sex: the German movement for birth control and abortion reform,

1920–1950 (1995). H. David et al., ‘Abortion and Eugenics in Nazi Germany’, Population and Development Review

14 (1988), 81–112. Gerhard Wilke and Kurt Wagner, ‘Family and Household: Social Structures in a German Village

between the Two World Wars’, in Richard J. Evans and W. R. Lee (eds.), The German Family:Essays on the Social History of the Family in Nineteenth- and Twentieth-Century Germany(1981), 120–47

128

Kate Lacey, Feminine Frequencies. Gender, German radio and the public sphere, 1923–1945(1998)

Richard J. Evans, The Feminist Movement in Germany 1894–1933 (1976) Nancy R. Reagin, A German Women’s Movement: Class and Gender in Hanover, 1880–1933

(1995)Michael Phayer, Protestant and Catholic Women in Nazi Germany (1990)Jill Stephenson, The Nazi Organisation of Women (1981) Detlev J. K. Peukert, ‘Youth in the Third Reich’, in Richard Bessel (ed.), Life in the Third Reich

(1987)Elizabeth Harvey, Youth and the Welfare State in Weimar Germany (1993)Detlev Peukert, ‘The Lost Generation: Youth Unemployment at the End of the Weimar Republic’,

in Richard J. Evans and Dick Geary (eds.), The German Unemployed: Experiences andConsequences of Mass Unemployment from the Weimar Republic to the Third Reich (London,1987), 172–93

Larry Eugene Jones, ‘Generational Conflict and the Problem of Political Mobilization in theWeimar Republic’, in Larry Eugene Jones and James Retallack (eds.), Elections, Mass Politicsand Social Change in Modern Germany: New Perspectives (1992) 347–369

Larry Eugene Jones, ‘German Liberalism and the Alienation of the Younger Generation in theWeimar Republic’, in Konrad H. Jarausch and Larry Eugene Jones (eds.), In Search of aLiberal Germany: Studies in the History of German Liberalism from 1789 to the Present(1990), 287–321.

Eve Rosenhaft, ‘Organizing the “Lumpenproletariat”: Cliques and Communists in Berlin duringthe Weimar Republic’, in Richard J. Evans (ed.), The German Working Class 1888–1933:The Politics of Everyday Life (1982), 174–219

Daniel Horn, ‘Youth Resistance in the Third Reich: A Social Portrait’, Journal of Social History7 (1973).

Walter Laqueur, Young Germany. A History of the German Youth Movement (1962) Peter Stachura, The German Youth Movement 1900–1945: An Interpretative ad Documnetary

History (1981)L. Walker, Hitler Youth and Catholic Youth (1970)G. Rempel, Hitler’s Children. The Hitler Youth and the SS (1989) Gilmer W. Blackburn, Education in the Third Reich. Race and History in Nazi Textbooks (1985) Daniel Horn, ‘The Hitler Youth and Educational Decline in the Third Reich’, History of Education

Quarterly 16 (1976), 649–67Lisa Pine, ‘The Dissemination of Nazi ideology and family values through school textbooks’,

History of Education 25 (1996), 91–110.M. S. Steinberg, Sabers and Brown Shirts: The German Students’ Path to National Socialism

1918–1935 (1977) Geoffrey Giles, Students and National Socialism in Germany (1985) R. G. S. Weber, The German Student Corps in the Third Reich (1986) Daniel Horn, ‘The National Socialist Schülerbund and the Hitler Youth 1929–1933’, Central

European History 11 (1978), 355–75 Jeremy Noakes, ‘Nazism and Eugenics. The Background to the Nazi Sterilization Law of 14 July

1933’, in Roger Bullen et al. (eds.), Ideas into Politics (1984)Sheila Weiss, ‘The Race Hygiene Movement in Germany 1904–1945’, in M. Adams (ed.), The

Wellborn Science. Eugenics in Germany, France, Brazil and Russia (1990), 8–68Michael Burleigh, Death and Deliverance: ‘Euthanasia’ in Germany (1994)Henry Friedlander, The Origins of Nazi Genocide. From Euthanasia to the Final Solution (1995). Robert Proctor, Racial Hygiene. Medicine under the Nazis (1988) Michael H. Kater, Doctors under Hitler (1989) Benno Müller-Hill, Murderous Science. Elimination by Scientific Selection of Jews, Gypsies, and

Others, Germany 1933–1945 (1988) Robert Jay Lifton, The Nazi Doctors (1986) Michael Kater, ‘Professionalization and Socialization of Pysicians in Wilhelmine and Weimar

Germany’, Journal of Contemporary History 20 (185), 677–701. Michael Kater, ‘Doctor Leonardo Conti and his Nemesis: The Failure of Centralized Medicine in the Third

Reich’, Central European History 18 (185), 209–235. Ute Deichmann, Biologists under Hitler (1996)

129

10. From Peace to War – The Riddle of the German War Economy 1938–1941

Set documentsIfK Weekly Report vol. 11 (1938): Supplement Jan 12 1938 pp. 1–4; Supplement January 26 1938

pp. 1–4; The Economist December 10 1938, pp. 534–5; January 14 1939, pp. 70–72; Jan 281939, pp. 165–6, pp. 177–178, pp. 180–181l Feb 4 1939, pp. 245–6; March 25 1939, pp.614–615; April 1 1939, pp. 4–5, 14–15, 136; April 15 1939, p. 136; June 3 1939, p. 544; 81939, p. 67; 2 1939, pp. 447–8; IMT Nazi conspiracy and aggression Vol. VII, pp. 474–478,Vol. III, pp. 901–908, Vol. VI, 267–270, Vol. VII, pp. 426–432; Trials of War CriminalsBefore the Nuernberg Military Tribunals Under Control Council Law No. 10, Vol XII, pp.592–596, p. 617; IfK Weekly report vol 12 (1939): Supplement April 20 1939 1–4; pp. 61–66;pp. 67–70; pp. 71–73; pp. 1–4; N&P, IV, Doc. 1034–1055; United States Strategic BombingSurvey, The Effects of Strategic Bombing on the German War Economy (1945), Table 5 p.27.

Secondary ReadingT. Balogh, ‘The National Economy of Germany’, Economic Journal (1938)B. Klein, Germany’s Economic Preparations for War (1959)J. Gillingham, Industry and Politics in the Third Reich. Ruhr Coal, Hitler and Europe (1985)Germany and the Second World War V/I (2000), Articles by R.D. Mueller, and B.R. KroenerP. Hayes, “Polycracy and Policy in the Third Reich: The Case of the Economy” in T. Childers

and J Caplan eds Reevaluating the Third Reich (London, 1993)T. Mason, “Some Origins of the Second World War” Past and Present 29 (1964)T. Mason, Social Policy in the Third Reich (Oxford, 1992)R.J. Overy, “Germany, “Domestic Crisis” and War in 1939”, Past and Present 116 (1987), pp.

138–168 and responses by Mason and Kaiser as well as a rejoinder by Overy in Past andPresent 122 (1989), pp. 200–240.

T. Mason, ‘The Domestic Dynamics of Nazi Conquest’, in T. Childers and J. Caplan, eds.,Reevaluating the Third Reich (1993).

R. Overy, War, Economy and Society in the Third Reich (Oxford, 1994), Chapters 6–8A.S. Milward, The German Economy at War (London, 1965)

11. Antisemitism and the ‘Final Solution’

Set documentsNoakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, documents 393–419, 421–434 (Vol. II, pp. 327–73),

770–87, 789–832, 834–853, 857, 860, 862,870, 882–3, 889, 909a, 910, 910a, 910b, 913 (Vol.III, pp. 441–629), 1250 (Vol. IV, p. 497).

Secondary readingSaul Friedländer, Nazi Germany and the Jews: The Years of Persecution 1933–39 (1997). Karl A. Schleunes, The Twisted Road to Auschwitz. Nazi Policy toward German Jews 1933–1939

(1970). François Furet (ed.), Unanswered Questions: Nazi Germany and the Genocide of the Jews (1989) Lucy Dawidowicz, The War Against the Jews 1933–1945 (1975)Daniel Jonah Goldhagen, Hitler’s Willing Executioners. Ordinary Germans and the Holocaust

(1996). Ian Kershaw, Popular Opinion and Political Dissent in the Third Reich (1983)Ian Kershaw, ‘The Persecution of the Jews and German Popular Opinion in the Third Reich’, Leo

Baeck Institute Yearbook 26 (1981), 261–89.Sarah Gordon, Hitler, Germany and the “Jewish Question” (1984) David Bankier, The Germans and the Final Solution. Public Opinion under Nazism (1992) Michael Kater, ‘Everyday Anti-Semitism in Prewar Nazi Germany: The Popular Bases’, Yad

Vashem Studies 16 (1988), 129–59.David Bankier (ed.), Probing the Depths of German Antisemitism. German Society and the

Persecution of the Jews, 1933–1941 (2000) Avraham Barkai, From Boycott to Annihilation: The Economic Struggle of German Jews,

1933–1943 (1990).

130

Walter H. Pehle (ed.), November 1938. From “Kristallnacht” to Genocide (1991). Wolfgang Benz, The Holocaust. A Short History (2000). Leni Yahil, The Holocaust: The Fate of European Jewry 1921–1945 (1990) Omer Bartov (ed.), The Holocaust: Origins, Implementation, Aftermath (2000) Raul Hilberg, The Destruction of the European Jews (1961 and subsequent editions) Hans Mommsen, ‘The Realization of the Unthinkable: the “Final Solution of the Jewish Question”

in the Third Reich’, in Gerhard Hirschfeld (ed.), The Policies of Genocide (1988), 9–144; Martin Broszat ,’Hitler and the Genesis of the Final Solution: An Assessment of David Irving’s

Theses’, in H. W. Koch (ed.),Aspects of the Third Reich (1985), 390–429 Richard J. Evans, Telling Lies About Hitler: History, Holocaust, and the David Irving Trial

(2002).Christopher Browning, Fateful Months. Essays on the Emergence of the Final Solution, 1941–42

(1985) Christopher Browning, The Path to Genocide (1992). Ian Kershaw, ‘”Imperial Genocide”? The Emergence of the “Final Solution” in the “Warthegau”’,

Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 6th series, 2 (1992), 51–78. Philippe Burrin, Hitler and the Jews (1993) Christian Gerlach, ‘The Wannsee Conference, the Fate of German Jews, and Hitler’s Decision in

Principle to Exterminate All European Jews’, Journal of Modern History 12 (198), 759–812.Götz Aly, “Final Solution”. Nazi Population Policy and the Murder of the European Jews (1999) Robert L. Koehl, RKFDV: German Resettlement and Population Policy 1939–1945 (1957).Christopher Browning, Nazi Policy, Jewish Workers, German Killers (2000) Martin Gilbert, The Holocaust. The Jewish Tragedy (1986) Wieslaw Kielar, Anus Mundi: Five Years in Auschwitz (1980)Richard Glazar, Trap with a Green Fence: Survival in Treblinka (1995)Primo Levi, Is this a Man? (1959)Miklos Nyiszli, Auschwitz: A Doctor’s Eyewitness Account (1960, first published 1946). Josef Marszalek, Majdanek. The Concentration Camp in Lublin (1986) Emanuel Ringelblum, Notes from the Warsaw Ghetto (1974). The Warsaw Diary of Adam Czerniakow: Prelude to Doom (ed. Raul Hilberg et al., 1979)Hermann Langbein, Against All Hope: Resistance in the Nazi Concentration Camps 1938–1945

(1983) Isaiah Trunk,Judenrat: The Jewish Councils in Eastern Europe under Nazi Occupation (1972). Margot Levy (ed.), Remembering for the Future: The Holocaust in an Age of Genocide (Editors

in Chief: John K. Roth and Elixabeth Maxwell, 2001), Volume I: History

12. Empire and Economic Exploitation

Set documentsCorni & Giess, Blut und Boden und Rassenideologie und Agrarpolitik im Staat Hitlers (1994)

p. 127, p. 204–5; Noakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, III, doc. 621–639, 670, 671,676–679, 697–714; Trials of War Criminals Before the Nuernberg Military Tribunals UnderControl Council Law No.. 10, Vol XIII, pp. 767–789, pp. 839–840, pp. 855–863, pp. 913–925,pp. 1040–1043

Secondary readingL. Buchardt, “The Impact of the War Economy on the Civilian population of Germany” in W.

Deist ed. The German Military in the Age of Total WarR.E. Chesnoff, Pack of Thieves: How Hitler and Europe Plundered the Jews (1999)Chapters 5–7, in J.R. Gillingham, Industry and Politics in the Third Reich (London, 1985) U. Herbert, Hitler’s Foreign Workers (Cambridge, 1997)R.E. Herzstein, When Nazi Dreams Come True. The Horrifying Story of the Nazi Blueprint for

Europe (1982)E.L. Homze, Foreign Labor in Nazi Germany (Princeton, 1967)H. James, The Deutsche Bank and the Nazi Economic War Against the Jews (2001)A.S. Milward, The New Order and the French Economy (Oxford, 1970)A.S. Milward, The Fascist Economy in Norway (Oxford, 1972)

131

A.S. Milward “Could Sweden have stopped the Second World War” Scandinavian EconomicHistory Review 15 (1967)

Chapter 5 in R. Overy, Goering. The Iron ManChapters 5 & 10 in R. Overy War, Economy and Society in the Third Reich (Oxford, 1994) R.J. Overy, “The Lufwaffe and the European Economy” Militaergeschichte Mitteilungen 21

(1979)J. Steinberg, The Deutsche Bank and its Gold Transaction during the Second World War (1999)K. Tribe, “The New Economic Order and European economic integration”, in Strategies of

Economic Order (1995)

13. The Diaries of Victor Klemperer

Set documentsVictor Klemperer, I Shall Bear Witness. The Diaries of Victor Klemperer 1933–1941 (1998), 30

March–7 April 1933 (9–12), 30 April–3 May 1935 (114–16), 7 November 1938 (263–5), 15Dec. 1938 (268–71), 18–20 Sept. 1941 (414–6), 1 Nov. 1941 (423); *Victor Klemperer, Tothe Bitter End. The Diaries of Victor Klemperer 1942–1945 (1999), 13 Jan. 1942 (5), 15 Feb.1942 (13–15), 16 March 1942 (25–28), 19 April 1942 (38–40), 8 May 1942 (46–7), 23 May1942 (54–56), 2 June 1942 (61–63), 11 June 1942 (69–72), 2 July 1942 (86–7), 24 August1942 (125–6), 11 September 1942 (136–8), 4 November 1942 (155), 24–26 November 1942(161–2), 28 December 1942 (170–2), 5 February 1943 (188–9), 27–28 February 1943 (194–6),16 April 1943 (203–4), 14 December 1943 (266–7), 12–24 February 1945 (377–98), 15 April1945 (423–38).

Susanne Heim, ‘The German-Jewish Relationship in the Diaries of Victor Klemperer’, in DavidBankier (ed.), Probing the Depths of German Antisemitism (2000), 312–25

Nathan Stoltzfus, ‘Witness in Spite of Himself: Victor Klemperer’s Diaries of 20th-centuryGermanies’, in Margot Levy (ed.), Remembering for the Future: The Holocaust in an Age ofGenocide (Editors-in-Chief John K. Roth and Elisabeth Maxwell, 2001), Vol. I, History, 543–51

Nathan Stoltzfus,, Resistance of the Heart: Intermarriage and the Rosenstrasse Protest in NaziGermany (1996).

Beate Meyer ‘The Mixed Marriage: A Guarantee of Survival or a Reflection of German Societyduring the Nazi Regime?’. In David Bankier (ed.), Probing the Depths of GermanAntisemitism. German Society and the Persecution of the Jews, 1933–1941 (2000), 54–77

Jeremy Noakes, ‘The Development of Nazi Policy towards the German-Jewish “Mischlinge”,1933–1945’, Leo Baeck Institute Year Book XXXIV (1989), 291–354

Brian Rigg, Hitler’s Jewish Soldiers (2002).

14. Big Business and the Third Reich – the Case of I. G. Farben

Set documentsTrials of War Criminals Before the Nuernberg Military Tribunals Under Control Council Law

No. 10 (IG Farben Case) Vol. VII, pp. 571–573, pp. 607–613, pp. 750–754, pp. 778–784, pp.824–827; IG Farben Case Vol. VII, pp. 944–956; IG Farben Case Vol. VII, pp. 1397–1398,pp. 1401–1403, pp. 1417–1419, pp. 1430, pp. 1439–1440, pp.1446–1458, pp. 1538–1541; IGFarben Case, Vol. VIII: pp. 334–338; pp. 354–357; pp. 373–376; p. 386; p. 389; pp. 392–393;pp. 401–402; pp. 426–427; pp. 438–439; pp. 446–448; pp. 460–461; pp. 490–491; pp.491–492; pp. 575–578; p. 592; pp. 1322–1323; IG Farben Case Vol. VII, pp. 1502–1517

Secondary readingJ. Borkin and C.A. Welsh, Germany’s Master Plan. The Story of Industrial Offensive (1943)J.E. Dubois, Generals in Grey Suits (1953)J. Borkin, The Crime and Punishment of IG Farben (1978)V. Fefebure, The Riddle of the Rhine. Chemical Strategy in Peace and War (1921)W. Feldenkirchen, Siemens 1918–1945 (1999)N. Gregor, Daimler-Benz in the Third Reich (New Haven, 1998)P. Hayes, Industry and Ideology (1987)R.J. Van Pelt & D. Dwork, Auschwitz, 1270 to the present (1996)

132

15. German Society in Wartime

Set documentsNoakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, Vol. IV: The German Home Front in World War II

(1998), docs. 983–6 (pp. 115–119), 992–1003 (pp. 120–136), 1016–1021 (pp. 150–161),1023–4 (pp. 168–170), 1075–1078 (pp. 264–270), 1096 (pp. 292–3), 1108 (pp. 311–2),1115–1132 (pp. 317–35), 1153 (pp. 360–65), 1157 (p. 372), 1167 (pp. 385–90), 1172 (pp.397–99), 1186 (pp. 418–21), 1216 (pp. 450–455), 1220 (p. 460), 1239 (p. 481), 1247 (pp.490–494), 1279–1281 (pp. 528–31), 1286 (pp. 533–534), 1296 (p. 542), 1299 (pp. 545–6),1305–7 (pp. 549–511), 1311 (pp 557–8), 1320 (pp. 566–7), 1325 (p. 572), 1330–1332 (pp.577–8), 1365), (pp. 630- 2), 1395 (pp. 664–6).

Secondary readingJay W. Baird, The Mythical World of Nazi Propaganda, 1939–1945 1974)E. R. Beck, Under the Bombs: The German Home Front, 1942–1945 (1986)L. Burchardt, ‘The Impact of the War Economy on the Civilian Population of Germany during

the First and Second World Wars’, in W. Deist (ed.), The German Military in the Age of TotalWar (1985), pp. 40–70.

T. Charman, The German Home Front, 1939–1945 (1989)David F. Crew (ed.), Nazism and German Society, 1933–1945 (1994)Joachim C. Fest, Plotting Hitler’s Death: The Story of the German Resistance (1996)Michael Geyer and John W. Boyer (eds.), Resistance against the Third Reich 1933–1990 (1992)E. Hancock, National Socialist Leadership and Total War 1941–1945 (1991)Ulrich Herbert, A History of Foreign Labor in Germany 1880–1980 (1990)Gerald Kirwin, ‘Allied Bombing and Nazi Domestic Propaganda’, European History Quarterly

15 (1985), pp. 341–62.Martin Kitchen, Nazi Germany at War (1995)Martin Middlebrook, The Battle of Hamburg (1965)Mark Roseman, ‘World War II and Social Change in Germany’, in Clive Emsley et al. (eds.),

War, Peace and Social Change in 20th-century Europe (1989)Jill Stephenson, ‘Nazism, Modern War and Rural Society in Württemberg 1939–1945’, Journal

of Contemoprary History Vol. 32 (1997), No. 3. M. G. Steinert, Hitler’s War and the Germans (1977)Fred Taylor (ed.), The Berlin Diaries of Marie “Missie” Vassilitchikov, 1940–1945 (1985)Mathilde Wolff-Mönckeberg, On the Other Side (1979)Antony Beevor, Berlin: The Downfall 1945 (2002)

16. Albert Speer and the Nazi War Effort

Set documentsNoakes and Pridham, Nazism 1919–1945, IV, doc 1056–1074; Trials of War Criminals Before

the Nuernberg Military Tribunals Under Control Council Law No. 10, Vol XIII, pp. 987–999;United States Strategic Bombing Survey (1945), pp. 6–11

Secondary readingW. Abelshauser, “Germany: guns, butter and economic miracles” in M. Harrison, The Economics

of World War II (Cambridge, 1998)J. Fest, Speer: the Final Verdict (2001)J.K. Galbraith, “Germany was Badly Run” Fortune (December 1945)J.K. Galbraith, A Life in Our Times (1981)N. Gregor, Daimler-Benz in the Third Reich (New Haven, 1998)M. Harrison, “Resource Mobilization for World War II: the USA, UK, USSR, and Germany,

1938–1945” Economic History Review (1988), 171–192U. Herbert, Hitler’s Foreign Workers (Cambridge, 1997)E.L. Homze, Foreign Labor in Nazi Germany (Princeton, 1967)N. Kaldor, “The German War Economy” Manchester School 14 (1946)B. Klein, Germany’s Economic Preparations for War (Cambridge Mass, 1959)

133

D. MacIsaac, The United States Strategic Bombing Survey (1976)A.S. Milward, The German Economy at War (London, 1965)Germany and the Second World War V/II (2002), chapters by R.D. Mueller, and B.R. Kroener R.J. Overy, War and Economy in the Third Reich (1994), Introduction, Chapters 8, 9 and 11G. Sereny, Albert Speer: His Battle with the Truth (1995)M. Schmidt, Albert Speer: The End of a Myth (London, 1984)A. Speer, Inside the Third Reich (1970)J.A. Tooze, Statistics and the German State (2001)USSBS, Overall Report (European War) (1945)USSBS, The Effects of Strategic Bombing on the German War Economy (1945)

134